Construction Competition Specification

CONFORMED COPY
OF THE PRINCIPAL CONTRACT DATED 31ST MARCH 2003

AND THE AMENDMENTS TO THE PRINCIPAL CONTRACT
PURSUANT TO THE DEED OF AMENDMENT DATED 28TH MAY 2003
SCHEDULE 43
CONSTRUCTION COMPETITION SPECIFICATION
Energy from Waste Technical Specification
Part 1
Specification Electricity and Heat Recovery Facility
This specification covers the main design requirements for the Energy from Waste Plant
principally relating to the systems and facilities.
The main contents are:
Performance and Operation Requirements

Architectural Concept and Drawings
Combustion Process, Boiler and HP Pipework
Steam Turbine, Generator and Associated Steam Systems
Flue Gas Treatment Equipment, Ash and Metal Separation
Electrical Systems
Instrumentation and Control
Distributed Control System
Other Facilities
Civil Engineering and Building
Detailed Civil Engineering Specification
Construction Requirements
Part 2
Specification Civil Engineering and Building Specification

This part of the specification covers the building works, fabric of the building and services. It
details the minimum acceptable standards and includes principally the following:
Mechanical Services
Electrical Services
Excavations
Structural Steelwork
Fixtures and Fittings
Civil and Building Works
Schedule 43
Page 1 of 1
Purchaser
EFW Contract
SPECIFICATION:
ELECTRICITY and HEAT RECOVERY FACILITY
EAST SUSSEX AND BRIGHTON & HOVE CITY COUNCIL
ESCC/B&HRev1
Specification
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Contents
Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
General
Design Philosophy
Scope of Work and Services supplied by the Contractor
Performance Requirements
Operational Requirements
2.
Detailed Technical Requirements
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
Architectural Concept and Drawings

Access, Tipping and Waste Handling Facilities
Combustion Process, Boiler and HP Pipework
Steam Turbine, Generator and Associated Steam Systems
Flue Gas Treatment Equipment, Ash and Metal Separation
Electrical Systems
Instrumentation and Control
Other Facilities
Civil Engineering and Building
3.
Construction Requirements
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Design and Construction

The Site
Regulatory Requirements
Health and Safety
Project Documentation
Spares and Warranties
Appendix A Weighbridge SpecificationAppendix B

Balance, Energy Balance,
Service Life Schedule,
and Data Sheets
Appendix C Architectural Concept Drawings
Glossary of Terms
ESCCBH_EFWSpec_Rev1.doc
Mass
Specification
Purchaser
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
EFW Contract
The Intent and spirit of the Contract is to provide for the Works herein specified within the
Contract dates and Contract Price, in every detail for the purpose designed and it is hereby
understood that the Contractor, in accepting the Contract, agrees to furnish everything
necessary for such purpose notwithstanding any omission in the drawings or specifications.
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Project Quality Plan, which shall be subject to approval
by the Purchaser. The Project Quality Plan shall detail, but not be limited to, the following: the
design, construction, manufacture, welding, inspection, testing, installation and commissioning
of all items within the Works.
The Contractor shall comply with all elements of this Specification and deviations or variations
from this Specification shall only be permitted with the written approval of the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall comply with the conditions of the Site Lease, the Environmental Protection
Act 1990, the Waste Incineration Directive and all other Statutory Legislation.
Onyx intends to build a new Energy from Waste Plant at the following preferred site subject to
granting of planning permission and at the following base capacity:
Newhaven, North Quay 1 x 28 tonnes per hour
The Plant will form part of an integrated waste management scheme.

The Plant shall be designed to burn municipal solid waste. The plant shall be designed to
maximise the quantity of electricity generated, and subject to confirmation by the Purchaser, a
quantity of heat exported to a District Heating Network yet to be identified.
The plant design shall allow the possibility to install, in the future, a second incineration line in
a parallel configuration. The Contractor shall take special care on this point and shall not install
heavy equipment on this provisional additional plant location without the approval of the
Purchaser.
This Specification covers the main design requirements for the Energy from Waste Plant.
Specification
Purchaser
1.2
EFW Contract
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
The Plant shall be designed for a service life of at least 25 years from Takeover.
The Contractor shall organise the following meetings with attendance by representatives from
the Purchaser and the Project Manager:
HAZOP Reviews
Main Purchase Order Meetings
Design Reviews
The Plant shall comply with the standards in the following order of precedence:
1. Standards referenced in this Specification
2. British Standards and British and UK Codes of Practice
3. Alternative Standards proposed by the Contractor which shall be approved in writing
by the Purchaser.
Adherence to the applicable standards shall not be confined to the manufacture of equipment
and civil works but also extend to the regulations governing the construction and
commissioning of the Plant and include, but not be limited to, the following:
Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations

Manual Handling Regulations
Management Regulations
Reporting of Injuries Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations (RIDDOR) 1995
Construction (Design and Management) Regulations (CDM)
The Workplace Health and Safety Welfare
The Workplace Equipment Regulations
Site Noise Requirements
Building Control Requirements
Fire Codes
COSHH Regulations
The Construction (Health and Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1996
All phases of the Works shall comply with the relevant terms of the Planning Permission.
The Contractor shall be appointed as "Principal Contractor" in compliance with the CDM
Regulations.
Specification
Purchaser
1.3
EFW Contract
SCOPE OF WORK AND SERVICES SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the site preparation, the design,
manufacture, supply, works testing, transportation, delivery to site, unloading at site,
construction, painting, commissioning and putting into commercial operation, and testing for
performance and reliability up to and after Takeover of the new Plant comprising, but not limited
to, the following basic elements:
Presentation of a project as defined in this Specification and the Tender requirements.
The complete execution of the works allowing the Acceptance by the Purchaser of a
turnkey type installation in full working condition and including the installation at the
worksite, the supply and transport to the worksite of all necessary materials and equipment,
together with their implementation or assembly, and namely:
The installations for the reception and handling of waste materials: weighbridges, tipping
hall and waste handling area, overhead cranes and grabs.
Incinerator furnace, waste heat boiler, the condensing turbogenerator, and air-cooled
condensers together with all required ancillary equipment.
Installations and equipment for the extraction, evacuation and storage of residues.
Gas treatment and purification systems including coolers, dust extractors, induced
draught fan as well as a chimney for the removal and dispersion of flue gases.
Installations and equipment for the extraction, evacuation, storage and packaging of flue
gas treatment and purification residues
Control System.
Boiler Water Treatment Plant and Laboratory.
Fire Tank and Pumps and associated Fire Systems to NFPA requirements.
Transformer and Switchgear.
LV Transformers and Switchgear.
Standby Electrical Supply.
Plant and Instrument Air.
Export/import Connection to 33kV metering circuit breaker and Onsite Compound.
UPS.
Air conditioning of electrical rooms, control room, management offices and conference
room.
Mechanical Ventilation Systems for technical rooms.
Natural Ventilation system for boiler hall.
Fuel Tanks and Delivery Systems (subject to the re-use provisions in 1.1).
Site Circulation Roadways and Entrance/Exit Roadways and Ramps.
Management Offices, Amenity Facilities, Mess, Washing and Changing Facilities.
The loading diagrams and plans, foundation plans, equipment and civil works and
associated guidelines
The file of works completed, the starting-up of the installation, and the tests carried out
during works and performance tests
The remuneration for the services in particular includes: contract management of a turnkey
type principal installations contract, co-ordination of works with sub-contractors, the start-up,
maintenance and operating costs of all provisional construction works necessary for
completion of the works
All design costs
All ancillary costs arising from materials acceptance testing and inspections and all checks,
including the review of works plans as per Building Regulations and other regulations and
including pressurised appliances, handling equipment, electrical installations, etc
List of spare parts for two years
Specification
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Expenses related to functional tests of equipment (3rd party tests will only be required to the
extent required by law, codes and statutes)
All cost of lighting, signposting and marking for the site, the equipment and materials stores
All patent costs
All costs resulting from the supply and installation of those protective devices required by law
including works legislation
All taxes and duties together with Contractor profits, but excluding value added tax (VAT)
Responsibility for the organisation of traffic, cleanliness of roads, equipment deliveries in
relation to the Contractors activities.
Burdens resulting from the provisions required to observe building site regulations
The works which the Contractor may be required to undertake to ensure that the Works are
completed satisfactorily.
The initial provisions of consumables such as oils, greases, printer paper, listing paper, etc
The implementation of road and utilities connections .
The supply and installation of a worksite notice board giving notice of the nature of the
works, the Purchaser, the Project Engineer, and Control and Monitoring Company(ies), the
Contractor and all Sub-Contractors
The supply in sufficient number of all documents necessary for the Works
The application for and receipt of Building Regulations approval
The construction of the Plant in accordance with the Planning Authority, the Environment
Agency and Statutory and Regulatory Authorities
The installation and withdrawal of equipment from the Site and laydown areas, upon
completion of the Works.
Sound attenuation protection to equipment in all technical rooms and to meet the noise limits
identified in Schedule 7
Contractors personnel during commissioning
Consumables and utilities during commissioning
Connection to the existing water supply
The Plant shall be capable of achieving the requirements, levels and standards of performance
set out in this document. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary operation materials,
lubricants, chemicals, raw materials, consumables and fuel other than municipal waste up to
the time of Takeover.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Purchaser with all special tools required
for maintenance and repair of the Plant, and in particular, but not limited to, a mobile bridge to
access the furnace during maintenance periods,
and provision for a suspended platform for inspection of inconel cladding. In general, provision
shall be made for access where this is required every 6 months or more frequently.
The Plant layout shall be chosen to ensure that waste combustion takes place in the best
possible conditions of hygiene, safety and efficiency. The general layout, the choice of
equipment, centralisation of control and monitoring devices, simple and rational automation
shall all be considered in order to maximise operational efficiency, optimise personnel
requirements and avoid contact with the waste brought to the plant. The plant shall be designed
such that the boiler, FGT residue and bottom ash extraction and loading areas are not recessed
below floor level to enable clear access for forklift and other vehicles from site ingress and
egress levels.
All requirements specified in this document shall be adhered to by the Contractor unless
specifically exempted and agreed in writing by the Purchaser.
The Contract Price shall exclude revenues derived from electricity sales, and waste gate fees
Specification
Purchaser
EFW Contract
derived prior to Takeover.
Specification
Purchaser
1.4
EFW Contract
PLANT PERFORMANCE
The Contractor shall design the plant for a 30 year operating life.
This shall be achieved by use of the appropriate design parameters, codes, standards and
specifications and the selection of suitable equipment, materials and methods of construction.
The Plant shall be designed to process Acceptable Combustible Waste which will comprise, the
following waste types:
Unsorted waste including items up to 900mm by 700mm by 700mm in size and not
exceeding 250kg in weight in the following categories:
-Collected Household Waste and Commercial Waste (excluding loads of Commercial
that is inert in nature)
-Grey Waste and Waste that is of a confidential nature (in either case where suitable for
combustion)
Combustible Waste shall include Collected Waste after the removal of Collected Dry
Recyclables, Biowaste and/or Green Garden Waste.
Solid household waste: such as rubbish and refuse normally collected and disposed of
by residential households and commercial, institutional or industrial establishments
which may comprise: leaves, twigs, glass, metals and other constituents that normally
appear in household refuse and, certain wastes which are difficult to process such as
leather or automotive waste when mixed with other Acceptable Wastes
Solid combustible waste arising from segregated HWRC waste
Solid industrial waste, in so far as it is of similar composition of household waste
Any of the above waste, after storage in bales
All the above waste types may be delivered to Plant. The Plant shall be designed to burn all of
these waste types.
The following waste shall not be considered as Acceptable Waste:
sewage sludge, spoils, screenings, debris from waste water treatment plants
rubble and materials rejected from rubble sorting
waste liquids or bulk liquids from industrial processes or commercial premises
Infectious wastes or human or animal body parts from hospitals or clinics, wastes from
slaughterhouses and special wastes which cannot be treated by the same means as
municipal waste without risks to people or environment because of their flammability,
toxicity, corrosivity or explosiveness.
Specification
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The Plant shall meet the following design conditions:

Site
Design capacity based on 8000 hrs
Plant Design Capacity (MCR)
Design Waste Net Calorific Value
(MCR)
Waste LCV range
Base Stream Arrangement
Newhaven North Quay

220.000 tpa
28 tphr
9.2 MJ/kg
**MJ/kg
single stream 1 x 28 tphr
Export/Import connection and voltage

Water Supply
Cooling Supply
Demolition
11kV Standby Supply
Weighbridge
Crane/Grab
33kV connection provided by Purchaser.

Existing Towns water supply
Air Condenser at 10C reference temperature

Existing amenities and clinical incinerator to be
demolished
Not Used
Automated to allow control from plant control
room and local cabin 1 x entry
1 x exit
2 sets of equipment
The Contractor has been invited to assess the calorific value of the Acceptable Waste and
estimate what parameters should be used.
The Contractor shall identify the effect and bottlenecks of operating the plant at the design
waste throughput but with a waste calorific value of 110% of design. The effects on the each
element of the process: furnace, boiler, steam plant, flue gas treatment equipment shall be
documented.
The steam turbine shall have the provision for a steam takeoff flange that shall be used to
provide steam for the district heating. The Contractor shall ensure that adequate provision and
space is provided in the Plant layout to enable district heating equipment, exchangers and
pipework to be installed. The layout shall be reviewed by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall
provide in the form of a graph, the quantity and temperature of the maximum district heating
load that can be accommodated and the resultant reduction in exported electricity.
Mass Balances, Heat Balances, Service Life Schedule, and Data Sheets are contained in
Appendix B.
Noise level studies shall be carried out on the following elements to ensure adherence to the
guarantee levels detailed in Schedule 7:
-turbogenerator
-bottom ash ferrous metal separator and large item separator
-turbogenerator oil cooling system
-fluestack
-fans
-transformers
Specification
Purchaser
EFW Contract
-boiler water feed and condensate pumps

-overhead cranes
-air compressors
-soundproofing to the turbogenerator room
-soundproofing to technical rooms defined as the following: workshops, laboratory,
stores, water treatment room, pump rooms, compressor rooms, electrical and
instrument rooms
-soundproofing to the offices and control rooms
Specification
10
Purchaser
1.5
EFW Contract
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The Plant shall operate 24 hours per day, 7 days a week all year round except for planned
outages and be designed for the minimum of downtime. The Plants shall be designed to
maximise electricity or heat export at 100% MCR.
The tipping hall and waste handling equipment shall be designed to function as a transfer
station. Therefore the area and equipment shall be designed to enable bunker waste to be
backloaded into articulated vehicles in the event of extended maintenance and.
The Contractor shall design the Plant and associated facilities to take account of the
requirements of the staff levels required for operation and maintenance , weighbridge,
clerical/admin and plant management .
The Plant shall be automated sufficiently to enable a two person operator shift staff to operate
the Plant.
The two waste cranes shall be designed to operate simultaneously.
The Plant shall be designed to operate for extended periods at 100% MCR in island mode with
steam dumped to the condensers with an ambient temperature of up to 30C. Suitable noise
suppression shall be allowed in the design of the Plant to ensure that the noise level at the site
boundary is in accordance with the requirements in Schedule 7.
Load rejection testing shall confirm the turbogenerator operation is stable when going from full
loading to island mode.
The Plant shall also be designed with an emergency generator sufficient to safely shut down
the plant.
All metering, associated equipment and protection systems shall be designed to meet the
requirements of:
G59/1: Recommendations for connection and protection settings for embedded
generating plants <5MW
G75: Recommendations for the connection of embedded generating plant to public
electricity suppliers distribution systems above 20kV or with outputs over 5MW
Code of Practice 2: Code of Practice for the metering of circuits with a rated capacity
not exceeding 100MVA for settlement purposes
Code of Practice 4: Code of Practice for the calibration, testing and commissioning
requirements of metering equipment for settlement purposes
Specification
11
Purchaser
2.
DETAILED TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
ARCHITECTURAL CONCEPT
EFW Contract
The Purchaser includes Architectural Concept Drawings prepared by Purchasers Consultant

which are to be used by the Contractor to develop the detailed design and these are contained
in Appendix C. For the avoidance of doubt, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements
and concepts in the drawings and shall be solely responsible for the detailed design of the Plant
and no deviations or claims or variations will be considered by the Purchaser in this respect.
The Contractor is permitted to propose modifications as agreed in writing with the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of the Plant.
2.2
ACCESS, TIPPING AND WASTE HANDLING FACILITIES
2.2.1
Plant Access
The following vehicular access shall be provided to the Plant:
Tipping hall for waste deliveries
Bottom Ash and FGT Residue collection vehicles
Vehicle access for maintenance purposes
Vehicle access for reagent and consumables deliveries
Vehicle access to staff parking areas
Allocated parking spaces for 2 Articulated Trailers

Acceptable combustible waste shall be delivered to the site by the Purchaser.
The Plant storage areas shall segregate the dirty and dusty bottom ash and ferrous storage
bays. Wheel wash facilities shall be provided for all site vehicles to ensure clean and dirty areas
and bays are contained. In addition a fuelling area shall be provided for off-road and site
vehicles.
The Contractor shall ensure that the layout of the plant and equipment enables forklift access to
all necessary areas.
2.2.2
Weighbridge and weighing software
A computerised weighing facility shall be provided which complies with the requirements of The
Environmental Protection (Duty of Care) Regulations 1996 and Customs and Excise
Requirements. The equipment shall record and issue waste transfer tickets with the following
details: tare weight, gross weight, net weight, waste type, carrier, vehicle registration, vehicle
type, etc and as required by the Principal Contract with East Sussex County Council and
Brighton & Hove City Council.
Two 18 metre weighbridges shall be provided, one on incoming and one on outgoing roadways.
The following equipment shall be provided: barrier induction loops, traffic lights, weighing
terminal including: weatherproof casing, electrical heater, digital display, tag reader, ticket
printer, entrance and exit barriers, two way intercom system. Vehicle identification shall be
achieved using radio frequency/proximity tags. These tags shall have been used in similar
situations.
An automatic weighing system which interfaces with the Sabre 8000 shall be installed
comprise the following: one digital weight indicator, one complete Pentium Windows based
Specification
12
Purchaser
EFW Contract
computer , one printer for summaries/reports, one floppy disc reader/writer for data saving,
hardware, twin weighbridge computer input screens, CCTV of weighbridge. A modem link shall
be installed to enable weighbridge information to be transferred to other Purchaser facilities.
The weighbridges shall be preferably visible from the CCR and CCTV of front and rear of the
weighbridge shall be provided in all cases. Audiovisual communication shall be provided
between the weighbridge and the CCR. Typical weighbridge details are found in Appendix A.
In addition to the weighbridge administration facilities with the CCR, a duplicate automatic
weighbridge system shall be installed at the weighbridge administration/security gatehouse
which is provided with additional weighbridge inputing facilities and site cameras and display
monitors. This weighbridge/security gatehouse shall have the following facilities: an office and a
toilet with washbasin, heating and lighting and 240V mains.
Weighbridge electrical supplies shall be taken from the emergency distribution board.
2.2.3
Tipping Hall
The hall shall be installed with electrically operated incoming and outgoing sliding doors with a
height clearance of 8 metres and capable of being controlled remotely from the CCR and
locally. The Contractor shall provide details of the doors for review by the Purchaser.
Air for combustion shall be drawn through the building to minimise odours. The shutter doors
shall be capable of withstanding air pressure loading when closed.
The tipping hall shall have unloading bays for acceptable combustible waste.
The turning area and unloading bays shall be suitable for the unloading vehicles commonly
used for the transportation of waste such as, but not limited to, the following:
-Conventional Refuse Collection Vehicles (RCV)
-80m articulated vehicles
-Walking floor type transfer station vehicles
-Rolonofs tipping and drag type
-Commercial waste in containers and skips with allowance for hook lift
-Compactor trailers
The Contractor shall provide large enough tipping hall for the waste capacity of the Plant and to
ensure vehicle turnaround is as fast as possible.
Traffic lights shall be provided to control traffic flows and avoid congestion. Particular attention
should be paid to avoidance of queuing on the ramp and associated roadways.
Unloading bays shall be provided with bollards and raised kerbs to enable vehicles to reverse
safely. The raised kerbs shall have a notch to allow waste to be brushed back into the bunker.
Red/green lights shall be installed to indicate which bays are operational and designed to be
clearly seen by reversing vehicles. Any structural steel columns shall be protected from fire and
from damage from refuse vehicles in the tipping hall and from crane/grab movements in the
bunker. The Contractor shall provide Armco or equivalent to all other areas where damage is
expected. Water floor wash facilities shall be provided around the feedchutes.
The tipping area shall have a power floated hardened concrete surface to accommodate front
loading shovel activities at unloading bays.
The tipping hall shall be well lit to enable efficient delivery operations to take place.
Specification
13
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Pushwalls shall be provided as indicated on the pushwall drawings in section 2.11 Detailed Civil
Engineering Specification.
2.2.4
Waste Bunker
The fully enclosed waste bunker shall include a solid concrete wall directly above the raised
curb between the tipping hall and the bunker areas (as constructed at SELCHP) and shall be
designed to provide 3 day storage as a minimum at normal waste discharge level without
stacking. Further capacity shall be accommodated by readily stacking waste above the vehicle
unloading level, without it emerging from the bunker. Waste delivery vehicles shall offload
waste from one side of the bunker. The bunker width shall be at least twice the maximum
diameter of the grab. The bunker shall be designed and constructed as an aqueous liquid
retaining structure to BS 8007.
The bunker and structure directly above shall be designed with no horizontal shelves and
ledges to avoid dusts and refuse collecting.
The Contractor shall provide smoke vents in the bunker area. Roof vents/louvres shall be
designed for a maximum differential temperature of 10C between inside and outside
conditions.
2.2.5
Travelling Crane and Grab
Travelling Crane
Each crane and grab shall be designed to transfer the Plants daily waste capacity into the feed
hopper in a 16-hour period. In addition, the crane and grab shall be capable of further
continuous operation for the remaining 8 hours of the day for lifting, moving, mixing, casting and
stacking waste in the storage bunker. Continuous operation of each crane shall be clearly
demonstrated and tested during the Reliability Testing Period prior to Takeover. Two identical
travelling cranes shall be supplied, designed for heavy duty class incorporating well proven
features developed especially for waste grabbing duty ensuring continuous highly reliable
service and availability in a dusty atmosphere. The capacity of the grab shall be based on a
maximum of 30 grab loadings per hour during the 16-hour period. The crane controls and
relays shall be located in a control panel near the crane laydown area/tipping hall.
The Contractor shall ensure that a suitable crane and grab parking and laydown area is
provided and that either of the cranes can continue to feed the hopper while the other crane is
undergoing maintenance.
The travelling crane and grab shall meet BS 466 and BS 2573 latest editions as a minimum
with the highest classifications:
Crane as a whole
- A8
Class utilisation
Group Class
- U8
- Q4
Mechanism Classification.
Hoist
- M8
Bridge
- M7
Trolley
- M7
State of Loading
- L4
Class of utilisation
- T8
Specification
14
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The travelling crane of a double beam type resting on 4 wheels, two of which are driven. Each
driven wheel is actuated by one geared motor-brake unit. Anti-collision devices shall be
provided for safe operation. A maintenance gantry and access way on both sides shall be
provided on each crane together with anti-personnel limit switches. All crane travel limit
switches and drives shall have visual indication of being tripped out.
The crane shall be capable of manual, semi-automatic and fully automatic operation. The crane
operator shall be able to direct and discharge the grab automatically into predetermined feed
hopper positions once the grab is loaded (semi-automatic function).
The crane shall be complete in all respects including software, instrumentation and mechanical
equipment.
The crane operator station shall allow clear unimpaired vision of the waste bunker and vision
directly below the operator station. The crane operator station shall be incorporated into the
Central Control Room. The crane operator station glass panel shall have 2 hour fire protection
through water spray and/or fireglass. The glass windows shall be designed to enable the
manual cleaning of both sides of the window from within the crane operator station. The feed
hoppers shall be monitored by colour CCTV cameras and displayed in the crane cabin. Each
crane shall be designed to have access to all areas of the waste bunker. Two of the offices
detailed in section 2.10.20 shall be provided adjacent or on the same floor as the CCR..
The crane operators chair shall be ergonomically designed and capable of swivelling to all
orientations necessary. It shall enable the chair to be replaced easily without the removal of the
control harness. Traffic lights and management systems shall be duplicated on each crane
operator control console.
The hoisting ropes shall be specified to be widely spread between the trolley anchorage and
drum mounting position. This is to attain the widest possible rope fleet angle to improve the
crane's resistance to grab spinning. The hoist drum grooving shall be specified to be surface
hardened to 500 Brinnell Hardness and optimised with rope material hardness to produce a
satisfactory life for the drum and so as not to cause excessive rope wear. These features shall
ensure long life and lower stress fatigue induced by arduous continuous grabbing activity.
Special features including limit switches shall also be incorporated to prevent ropes double
winding and fouling on the drum. The grab shall be connected to the crane block with high
tensile bolting.
The Grab
The electrical connection between the crane and the grab shall be hard wired without sockets
and be highly durable and well proven.
The layout of the cranes shall allow for the effective maintenance of each crane grab. As
detailed in figure 1, the maintenance area shall allow for the grab to be lowered to ground level
for transportation to the appropriate laydown area or off-site.
The crane grab shall be capable of simultaneous operation in two directions in the horizontal
plane whilst operation raising and lowering the grab in the vertical plane. Semi-automatic
control of the crane shall be provided which includes combined motions of the crane to
minimise grab swing. The Contractor shall ensure the safe segregation of the two operational
cranes. The grab shall be fitted with visual indication of being tripped out.
A load cell based weighing system for the grab shall be provided to enable the operator to
record the weight of each grab load before discharge into the feed chute. The weighing system
shall have an accuracy better than 2.5% and be displayed in the crane operator station and
Specification
15
Purchaser
EFW Contract
connected to the DCS.

2.2.6
Feed Hopper
The dimensions of the hopper shall be greater than those of the grab when fully open and
sufficient clearance shall be provided around the grab during feeding operations.
The feed hopper shall be designed to avoid jamming. In the event of a jam, there needs to be
easy access to remove the obstruction. Lifting beams and electric winches shall be fitted above
each loading hopper to enable the removal of blockages from the furnace feed mechanism. The
lifting beam shall be rated at SWL 2 tonne minimum.
The feed hopper perimeter shall be surrounded by 1.1m high above floor level solid balustrade
at least 150mm thick on three sides to allow access for manual stroking in the event that the
hopper becomes obstructed by bulky waste. All other edges to the upper feed hopper floor area
shall be fitted with 1.1m high above floor level heavy duty steel railings of 150mm
diameter/concrete balustrades at least 150mm thick to act as physical and safety protection for
personnel as regular access in this area is required.
Sufficient access hatches, fitted with a handling system to enable easy opening and closure
and grab laydown areas shall be provided to enable both grabs to be transported to tipping hall
level. A general arrangement showing the balustrades and the overall arrangement shall be
Hopper
enable
submitted to the Purchaser
fortoapproval.
backloading of waste
to bulker vehicle below
Efficient hoists and lift systems shall be provided for maintenance of the crane and grab
between hopper floor level and tipping hall level.
Access
Maintenance
A back-loading hopper
shalltobe
provided by the Contractor.
Hatch and Grab
Laydown Area
Bunker
Specification
Feed
hopper
SoHeavy
lid
balustrade
duty steel or
15concrete
0mm thick
railings at
least 150mm thick
16
Purchaser
2.3
EFW Contract
COMBUSTION PROCESS, BOILER AND HP STEAM PIPEWORK
The Contractor shall provide a furnace with the ability to combust fuel without leading to
excessive slagging or fouling and with an online cleaning system such as rappers and
sootblowers (either semi or fully retractable type). If sootblowers are fitted, they shall operate
intermittently and be designed not to reduce Plant net electrical output by more than 1.0%.
The Contractor shall design the plant in all respects to operate at 6% O2 and to meet the
performance improvements at 6% O2.
The current guarantees in Schedule 7 paragraph 7.4.2 are based on 7.5% oxygen levels and in
the event of favourable experience gained from operation at lower oxygen set points at other
Plants operated by the Contractor, the Contractor shall link these improvements in the
guarantees of performance, efficiency, plant lifetimes and electricity generated in line with any
reduction in the oxygen set point.
2.3.1
Moving Grate
The moving grate shall be suitable for the combustion of all wastes identified in Section 1. As
with the design of the whole Plant, the grate shall be designed to operate safely and efficiently
over a 30-year design life with minimal maintenance. Residence times shall meet the
requirements specified in section 1.4.
The grate shall consist of reciprocating bars slowly stirring and mixing the waste in order to give
good mixing, combustion and flame position control. The stroke of bars shall be adjustable. The
grate bars shall be designed to be self-cleaning and avoid the build up of clinker residue. The
grate shall give consistently good performance with a wide range of waste types and have a
long trouble-free life. The Contractor shall provide data on the grate life and operating
temperatures and give details and full costs of spares and equipment required over the design
life.
The grate shall be designed to accept possible future water cooling, in case of LCV increase.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing effective combustion and airflows through the
furnace. Combined primary air and secondary air fans shall be direct shaft driven by the motor
and provide combustion air to the furnace. The air fans shall be motor driven and draw air via
the air heater (at low steam pressure) from the waste bunker to ensure that odours and dusts
are drawn into the incineration stream and prevented from escaping directly from the tipping
hall into the environment.
At least, the following furnace parameters shall be controlled from the DCS:
quantity of undergrate air in each zone
speed of grates
speed of feeders
quantity of secondary air
burner operation
Flow measurement of the primary air shall be with equipment designed for a dusty environment
and be self-cleaning.
The Contractor shall present whole life cycle assessment costs in the choice of refractory
material. The tube walls in the flame area are to be covered with high quality refractory retained
Specification
17
Purchaser
EFW Contract
bysuitable anchors. Inconel overlay and wear tubes shall be considered for all the first pass
(roof included) in order to minimise corrosion and improve life.. The Plant design shall take into
account this overlay.
The grate bars shall be manufactured from high-grade chrome cast iron alloy capable of good
longevity, withstanding high temperatures and being easily removed and replaced. The
Contractor shall specify life and replacement profiles. The grate bars shall be powered in such
a manner as to provide variable control of the reciprocating or rotating movement. The
hydraulic mechanism shall be filled with fire resistant oil. Hydraulic equipment shall be to high
quality standards to minimise leaks. The Contractor shall ensure that such fittings can be
purchased locally. Good quality, fine mesh strainers shall be provided in the hydraulic system.
A waste hydraulic oil storage tank shall be provided and suitably piped for draining down the
hydraulic system.
All lubrication for the grate, feeder and discharger shall be centralised for ease of maintenance.
Operation of auxiliary burners shall be protected by the effective and reliable use of flame
protection cells to specifically monitor the burner flame as opposed to the waste combustion.
The grate ash and boiler ash streams shall be collected together to constitute bottom ash.
However the Plant shall possess a flange connection that enables boiler ashes to be collected
separately. The Contractor shall ensure that the boiler design allows the future modifying and
easy separation of the boiler ash from the bottom ash by directing the boiler ash to the FGT
residue using suitably designed conveyors. The Contractor shall submit the conveying
arrangement to the Purchaser for review prior to construction.
The Plant shall possess thermowells positioned on the front and back walls of the furnace to
monitor fire positioning in the combustion chamber. Provision in the furnace shall be made for
the installation of infrared cameras and associated equipment in order to monitor the furnace
fire. The DCS shall be compatible with the future installation of infrared cameras.
In order to meet the NOx emissions limits, the Contractor shall install SNCR. These systems
shall be integrated with the DCS. The Contractor shall provide full details of the proposed
DeNOx processes. Systems shall be of proven design and operational in Europe.
The SNCR system shall at least include: a duty and a standby pump arrangement, filtration,
preparation vessel, instrumentation, injection lances for long life operation in the furnace, quick
connection fittings for ease of maintenance, all necessary strainers, non-return valves, isolating
valves, loading valves, and piping. Automatic changeover to the standby system, should the
duty system fail in service, and shall be provided complete with all necessary controls/electrical
items and alarm indication. The SNCR reagent shall have at least a 3-day storage capacity.
Where the SNCR system is based upon liquid Urea, the SNCR system shall include sufficient
equipment to receive dry Urea prills in bulk and process this to provide liquid urea of the correct
strength and quality. The water volume and quality requirements of this process shall be
included in the plant water treatment systems.
2.3.2
Boiler
Heat recovery shall be achieved by means of an integral water tube boiler.

The boiler shall be designed for a steam outlet temperature of up to 400C. The boiler shall be
designed for 100% MCR and a 250,000 hours operating life in accordance with BS 1113 and
resist erosion and corrosion.
Specification
18
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The boiler shall be designed with a 10% temporary overload above MCR for 1 hour in every 24
hours. The Contractor shall declare the boiler design philosophy including time at temperature,
pressure and temperature cycling and testing. The Contractor shall provide the complete boiler
design file with his O&M manuals. The Contractor shall also provide with the O&M manuals the
overall maintenance requirements.
The boiler shall be of horizontal type with rapping cleaning system.
The boiler shall be designed such that no manual cleaning shall be required before 8000 hours
of continuous operation.
The boiler shall be of regulated temperature type, with automatic regulation of flue gas outlet
temperature according to tubes fouling.
The boiler tube thickness shall include a declared corrosion allowance. The boiler and
associated equipment shall be of the type and quality suitable for municipal waste incineration
plant service and shall be a well proven design. The boiler shall meet the steam requirements
of the turbine generator as well as all other steam requirements of the Plant. Boiler tube
minimum thicknesses are detailed in Appendix B Data Sheets.
All the boiler first pass, including the roof, shall have Inconel overlay. It shall be the Contractor
decision to execute these works either on site or directly in the workshop.
The boiler fabrication shall be maximised at the suppliers works to minimise fabrication and
installation work at site.
The Contractor shall design a boiler, which shall incorporate:
-exit temperatures to avoid excessive fouling in the furnace
-combustion chamber sized for low gas velocity and long residence time
-adequate spacing of tubes in the tube banks to prevent bridging of tubes by fouling and
allow access for repair
-cleaning of boiler pressure parts by methods of well-proven design. If provided,
sootblowers shall be of the semi-retractable type.
-superheaters providing steady steam temperatures matched to turbine operating
conditions
-system to control and maintain a steady boiler outlet flue gas temperature during all
operating periods
All vessels within the steam circuit, including condensate drum and deaerator shall be designed
to BS 5500 Category 2 with NDT reviewed by the Purchaser.
The boiler drum shall have at least two independent water level gauges and comply with
BS1113 section 7.3.1.
The Contractor shall state the full and part load steam conditions, which at least shall be met.
The boiler shall be insulated to ensure that the surface temperature is not higher than 50C.
External cladding shall be minimum 0.75mm aluminium.
The superheater shall be installed with the inlet and outlet headers located outside the flue gas
stream.
Deadends shall be avoided in the design of the boiler.
Access doors and inspection holes shall be provided to enable satisfactory access to the
convective passes and to enable the furnace to be observed. These inspection doors shall be
Specification
19
Purchaser
EFW Contract
suitably large enough to enable on-line cleaning with high-pressure water. Inspection doors
shall be positioned face to face on the same horizontal plane and at waist/shoulder level
relative to the walkways. Walkways shall be suitable for all maintenance, access and cleaning
activities.
2.3.3
Steam and Feedwater Pipework
All equipment and pipework shall be insulated to ensure that the surface temperature is not
higher than 50C. External cladding shall be minimum 0.75mm aluminium.
The high pressure and low pressure, steam and feed water pipework shall be designed and
manufactured in accordance with BS 806. Welding and testing shall comply with the Purchaser
Quality Plan.
All steam and feedwater pipework shall be adequately supported. Wherever possible,
expansion shall be accommodated within the pipework arrangement. The Purchaser shall have
the final opportunity to reject expansion joints.
A cold water fill system shall be provided for leak testing.
All pumps wherever located in the Plant shall be provided with adequate bypasses to avoid
overheating in continuous operation against closed valve.
Motorised vent valves on the boiler drums shall be provided with remote control from the DCS.
Start up vents and safety valves shall be silenced by means of silencers to minimise noise
emissions in the event of the following: start-up, shut-down, air cooled condenser trips, etc.
Vents and drains shall be located to provide easy operational access and allow discharge to
tundishes. Vent drains shall be fed back to the feedwater system via a suitably sized and
located flash drum.
Feedwater heating shall be provided to optimise the thermal cycle.
Valves shall be positioned in vertical steam pipework wherever possible. The steam pipework
shall be tested to ensure the integrity of all valves.
A double isolation valve and drain philosophy shall be applied to the design of the steam
system pipework and equipment to enable online maintenance of all main equipment items.
All safety valves shall meet BS 1113 requirements and shall be to the approval of the
Purchasers statutory boiler insurer. These valves shall be designed to adequately pass the
required flow of steam and water without blowing back.
Specification
20
Purchaser
2.4
STEAM TURBINE, GENERATOR AND ASSOCIATED STEAM SYSTEMS
2.4.1
Steam Turbine
EFW Contract
Steam turbine shall be designed to API 612, NEMA SM 24 for piping forces and moments, and
BS EN 60045. Deviations from these Codes proposed by the turbine manufacturer shall be
subject to approval by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall state the forces and moments on the
turbine in cold and hot conditions and state how the forces and moments due to dead-weight
will be minimised.
The steam turbine shall be designed for 110% MCR steam flow.
A high efficiency turbine shall be specifically provided by the Contractor in order to maximise
the electricity and, if notified by the Purchaser, heat generated by the EfW plant. The design
shall be well proven in small and medium sized power stations worldwide. The turbine
manufacturer shall demonstrate reliable operation of reference machines at the condensing
conditions.
Upon loss of the main 33kV export system whilst the turbogenerator is running, the turbine
output shall automatically reduce in a stable manner to island mode without tripping.
The preferred turbine shall be single or multiple cylinder, multistage, condensing type with a
horizontal split design and axial or vertical flow design. Steam takeoffs shall be provided for
plant use and, unless otherwise agreed with the Purchaser, to provide for the district heating
take off. The Contractor shall advise the number, pressure and maximum flow of the district
heating steam takeoffs.
The turbine rotor shall be machined from a solid steel forged block. The turbine shall be
designed such that the first and second lateral critical speeds are well outside the turbine
running speed. The complete rotor shall be dynamically balanced.
The Contractor shall state the vibration levels of each element of the steam turbine-gearboxgenerator.
All steam turbine inlet and exhaust pipework shall be fitted with an isolation valve and a ring
position to enable an isolation spade to be inserted in order to fully isolate the turbine without
shutting down the process. The valve shall be motor or pneumatically actuated and operate and
seal effectively and the time from fully open to closed sealing position shall be less than 2
hours. The Contractor shall provide the spades and rings for each location. A bleed valve
arrangement shall be provided between the valve and the ring position.
All turbine casing drains shall have double isolation using master/martyr valving principles.
The steam turbine, gearbox if applicable, and generator shall be located in a noise proofed area
and be protected with a fire protection system. This shall also be to the satisfaction of the Local
Fire Officer. If a liquid spray system is installed, the turbogenerator package shall be suitably
designed for liquid deluge conditions such that there are no deleterious effects on the following:
motors, lube oil tank vents, lube oil quality and control systems.
Upstream steam pressure shall be regulated through the turbine by the governor-controlled
steam admission valves. The governor valves shall operate sequentially to provide maximum
efficiency corresponding with the design rating of the boiler at 100% MCR.
The operation of the turbine and auxiliaries shall be interfaced with, controlled from and
displayed on the DCS. The Contractor shall supply and install a full health monitoring system
Specification
21
Purchaser
EFW Contract
which can be externally interrogated via function analysers; recording devices and also by
modem.
A turbine maintenance crane shall be provided suitable for the lifting and removal of the
elements of the turbine-gearbox-generator onto road vehicles. The crane shall be capable of
lifting the heaviest element clear, including turbine rotor withdrawal, without disturbing the
existing ducting, cabling and associated equipment from the rest of the turbine-gearboxgenerator assembly except as agreed by the Purchaser. All special tools and lifting beams for
the maintenance and overhaul of the turbine-gearbox-generator assembly shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Drains from the steam pipework and casing shall be provided to heat the turbine casing from
cold within 2 hours.
All pipework sections between boiler drum and turbine shall be subject to a steamblow
procedure to be agreed between the parties. A calculation shall be presented no later than 12
months after notification to proceed tabulating the steam flows, pressures and disturbance
factors to be achieved at inlet and outlet of each pipework section during the steamblows. In
addition the turbine shall be protected with inlet steam strainers during commissioning and
start-up. All necessary steam blow-down pipework and silencers shall be provided by the
Contractor.
The turbine foundation shall be designed using a three dimensional dynamic calculation to DIN
4024/BS 4675 Part 1 Class IV as well as to the approval of the turbine maker.
Combined stop and emergency valves shall be provided on the inlet and extraction pipework to
prevent turbine overspeed in any circumstances.
Inlet Governing Valves shall provide stable modulating control of the steam pressure at all
loads.
A gland steam exhauster system consisting of a condenser and fan exhauster shall recover
heat and condensate to the feedwater system, while non-condensable gases are exhausted to
atmosphere outside the building.
The turbine oil system shall meet API 614 and shall supply oil for lubricating the turbine and
generator main and subsidiary bearings as well as for hydraulic operation and servo-control of
the governing and emergency valves. Deviations from API 614 proposed by the turbine
manufacturer shall be subject to approval by the Purchaser.
The main oil pump shall be ac electric and supply oil to the complete assembly for both
lubrication and power control purposes. A standby pump shall be provided to start in the event
of failure of the main pump. A dc or ac UPS rundown/cooling pump shall be supplied for safe
stoppage in case of failure of the main pump. A high pressure control oil system shall be
permitted.
Lubrication oil shall be passed through one of two 100% heat exchangers and a duplex filter for
removing particles down to at least 5 microns. A lube oil centrifuge shall be provided for lube oil
conditioning together with fan extraction vented to the outside.
The emergency dc or ac UPS driven pump which operates on low pressure in the event of both
the main pumps being unavailable for maintaining bearing lubrication, and shall maintain
effective cooling for a sufficient length of time, while the unit coasts to a halt and is
mechanically or hand barred.
The turbine shall be protected with a mechanical overspeed trip device and an electronic
Specification
22
Purchaser
EFW Contract
overspeed unit using speed sensors and operating a 2 out of 3 voting system. The subsequent
loss of oil pressure causing the stop valves to rapidly close and the governing valves to close.
The vacuum condensers shall be designed for full vacuum to protect against turbine trip.
The reduction gearbox shall be designed to API 613 with minimum service factor of 1.1.
The steam turbine shall be fitted with motor driven barring gear.
Hand barring facilities shall also be provided independent of the ac motor driven barring gear.
This barring shall be demonstrated to be easy enough for a single employee. Sufficient access
shall be provided to achieve effective handbarring.
2.4.2
Generator
The generator shall consist of a synchronous 2 pole or 4 pole totally enclosed cooling aircooling water (CACW) machine excited by rotating diodes with no brushes or rings. The
generator shall be designed for 110% MCR and a 0.8 power factor. The generator shall be
designed for 120% overspeed with BS 2757 class F insulation. The generator shall comply
generally with BS 5000 Part 2. The generator shall be mounted on a discrete baseplate which
shall also accommodate a shaft mounted fan and which may be common with the turbine and
gearbox baseplate. The exciter shall use a brushless rotating rectifier system and be mounted
on the baseplate. Careful provisions shall be made to avoid any possibility of oil contamination
of the windings from bearing leakage.
The generator shall be supplied with appropriate excitation cabinet containing:
-auto excitation controller for voltage control, power factor
-neutral point cabinet with current transformers, earth resistor with a homopolar
detection core and connection terminals.
-monitoring panel containing the following: line voltage meter, excitation ammeter,
wattmeter, phase meter, frequency meter, duplex voltage meter, duplex frequency
meter, a synchroscope, emergency stop switch, power factor control, voltage and
current excitation control, automatic or manual control, control for turbine speed,
generator voltage, generator power factor
Stator laminations shall be punched from low loss electrical sheet, coated with an insulating
film, to minimise eddy current losses. The stator coil insulation shall be fully rated Class F. A
minimum of six RTD's shall be embedded in the stator winding for sensing temperature.
The synchronous rotor shall be of a solid, single piece construction in which the pole bodies,
pole tips, spider and shaft are machined from a single steel forging. The machine rotor shall
have Class F insulated strip-wound field winding applied to the pole bodies.
After assembly the generator shall be run at rated speed, rated voltage and frequency for a final
check to ensure vibration is within the required limits.
Brushless Excitation System shall consist of a stationary exciter field, the exciter rotating
element generating 3 phase AC power, plus the rotor mounted rectifier system. The field coil
shall be wound Class F insulated, and vacuum pressure processed in epoxy resin. The
armature shall be a laminated core supported by a spider, which has provision for mounting on
the generator shaft and for mounting the converter on the armature. The laminated core shall
be made up of resin enamelled magnetic steel punchings. The 3 phase armature windings are
random wound coils that are coated with epoxy resin under vacuum pressure. The AC-DC
converter shall be made up of solid state rectifiers mounted on revolving case aluminium heat
sinks. The rectifier system shall consist of silicon diodes, thyristors and static switching
devices.
Specification
23
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Terminal box enclosure shall contain three line leads with surge capacitors, current
transformers and lightning arresters.
Also three neutral leads with different current
transformers.
The governor programmable microprocessor control unit shall control the turbine speed and
accept an external control signal generated from boiler outlet steam pressure, and provide all
the control functions required to maintain safe operation of the turbine. The control unit shall be
fully interfaced with the DCS and the boiler control system.
2.4.3
Associated Steam Systems
Condensers and associated pipework

Exhaust steam from the turbine shall be ducted to an air cooled condenser. The unit shall
perform in a vacuum condensing mode under all turbine operating conditions. The design and
provision of auxiliary equipment shall permit the condenser to function as a dump condenser
when all or any proportion of the steam flow bypasses the turbine.
The turbine bypass valve shall be of proven design and be capable of tight shut-off and long
term full flow operation without erosion and comply with leakage rates to Class V ANSI/FCI 702 1991.
Condenser fan motors shall be variable speed type and be protected with vibration monitoring
instrumentation.
Bursting discs shall not be permitted for pressure relief in any part of the steam system. A
combination of bursting disc and relief valve shall be permitted to protect the turbine exhaust
and ACC and sized and positioned to avoid the bursting disc breaking under operational
events, such as ACC fan failure, island mode, turbine bypass.
At the earliest opportunity following erection the Contractor shall vacuum test the condenser
using temporary exhausters, if necessary. Vacuum decay test shall not exceed 50mbar/hour
from 0.07 bara.
The condenser capacity and system absorbed power shall be optimised by producing turbine
power generation versus exhaust pressure curve against the local average temperature data.
These shall be provided by the Contractor for review by the Purchaser.
Condenser power consumption shall be displayed on the DCS and incorporated into the
performance monitoring system.
Condenser performance shall be demonstrated using an agreed standard such as VDEW
Regulation "Acceptance and Operational test of Air Cooled Steam Condensers".
The condenser supporting structure shall allow adequate full air entry and discharge taking
account of all adjacent restrictions. The Contractor shall ensure a suitable condenser design
and orientation, which avoids hot air recirculation through the air condensers.
Condensate systems
The ducts, pipework and valves included in the main steam duct between turbine and steam
condenser, condensate pipework connecting condenser, condensate tank, condensate pumps
and flow control valve shall have the following:
-isolation of the turbine exhaust without interrupting the operation of the boiler.
-vacuum line from the condenser to the ejectors
Specification
24
Purchaser
EFW Contract
-condensate pump isolating valves and non-return valves and all necessary upstream
filters, drain and vent valves.
-pump isolation valves and non-return swing check valves.
-vacuum breakers are not required as system shall be designed for full vacuum.
- bursting discs shall not be permitted for pressure relief in any part of the steam
system.
- the air condensers design shall also meet the 10C ambient air temperature condition.
-the design systems and configuration chosen shall not limit the ability of the
condensers to operate at 100% MCR at less than atmospheric pressure with 30C air
temperature in the dump mode in the event that one condenser fan is non-operational.
The condensate tank shall be sized for at least 5 minutes storage capacity at design throughput
between the upper and lower operating levels. The Contractor shall justify and demonstrate the
adequacy of the design.
Two 100% duty centrifugal condensate pumps shall be provided.
A separate steam hogger ejector shall be provided for start-up.
The condensate tank level shall be monitored with high and low level alarms and shall be
maintained at minimum levels using a bypass from the condensate return line.
The condensate and treated water tank shall be epoxy lined or have other protection against
corrosion. These tanks should be sized to enable prompt boiler start-up and shutdown.
A spray type deaerating heater and feedwater storage tank shall be provided operating at
approximately 130oC. The storage tank below the deaerator shall be designed for 20 minutes
storage capacity at design throughput between the upper and lower operating levels. The
deaerator shall be fitted with an off-gas condenser and shall meet a residual oxygen content
guarantee of less than 0.02 mg/litre. Dearator performance and related reagent consumptions
shall be referenced to the Plant Operation Guarantee Schedule in Schedule 7.
Boiler feed pumps
Electrically or steam driven boiler feed pumps shall be provided with one pump acting as
standby.
Centrifugal boiler feed pumps shall be designed and tested to API 610 or other manufacturer
standard as approved by the Purchaser. The rated capacity shall not exceed the capacity at the
best efficiency point of the pump curve. The impeller diameter shall be not exceed 95% of the
maximum impeller diameter for the pump casing. The pump shall be witness tested for NPSH at
the manufacturers works to meet BS 5316 Class B or other standard as approved by the
Purchaser. Stainless steel strainers shall be fitted in the suction lines to the boiler feed pumps.
The pump discharge pipework shall be fitted with double isolation, which may be achieved
through a lockable non-return valve, and an isolation valve downstream of each boiler feed
pump.
2.4.4
Water Treatment and Makeup Facilities
General
The intent of this section is to define a complete Water Treatment and Makeup Facility capable
of continuous satisfactory operation with the minimum of maintenance. The Contractor shall
propose a water treatment system based on towns water.
Specification
25
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The Facilities shall be designed for the bulk delivery of materials and chemical products with no
manual handling of caustic soda and should be located in a closed room. All materials shall be
suitable for a corrosive environment. The area shall be designed for wash down and all junction
boxes shall be designed to at least IP65.
The Contractor shall provide a suitably sized boiler water connection point for the rapid filling of
the boiler by external means.
Boiler water treatment plant

The equipment shall be located in a bunded area with additional bunds for each tank. Tank
bunds shall be suitably coated for acid or alkali resistance and the floor shall be epoxy coated
and laid to falls. The plant shall treat towns water and have a total capacity allowing a minimum
of 2% of losses peak flow and a minimum storage tank volume of at least 150% of the capacity
of the boiler. The treated water quality shall equal or be better than to BS2486 Table 3 for water
tube boilers up to 60 bara with conductivity less than 5 micro ohms/cm and silica content less
than 0.02 mg/l SiO2
The water treatment plant shall be self contained in terms of control and monitoring equipment
with status monitored via DCS control system. Automatic ion exchange regeneration shall be
initiated by a water flow meter with conductivity cells, pH meter and silica analyser constantly
monitoring the outlet water quality. Resin traps shall be provided downstream of the ion
exchange vessels.
Boiler feedwater dosing package

A boiler feedwater dosing package shall consist of the following major components:
-pH adjustment chemical stock tank and dosing pumps.
-oxygen scavenger stock tanks and dosing pumps.
-additional chemical stock tank and dosing pumps.
-amine inhibitor chemical stock tank and dosing pumps.
The boiler feedwater dosing package shall be self contained in terms of control and monitoring
equipment and shall be fully automatic in normal daily operation. The status of the plant shall
be monitored via control system to the DCS.
Two chemical dosing pumps shall be supplied with each chemical dosing package, one duty
and one standby. The pumps shall be complete with all necessary strainers, non-return valves,
isolating valves, loading valves, piping etc. Automatic changeover to the standby pump, should
a duty item fail in service, and shall be provided complete with all necessary controls/electrical
items and alarm indication.
Chemicals typically for, but not limited to, pH adjustment, phosphate and amine inhibitor shall
be injected directly into the boiler drum. The oxygen scavenger chemical shall be injected in the
deaerator through a stainless steel injection quill. Stainless steel capillary pipework shall be
used for the injection of all chemicals. Provision shall also be made for dosing of amine inhibitor
into the steam main.
Specification
26
Purchaser
2.5
FLUE GAS TREATMENT EQUIPMENT, ASH AND METAL SEPARATION
2.5.1
FLUE GAS TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
EFW Contract
2.5.1.1 General
The Contractor shall install a dry flue gas treatment system, which is designed to be easily
adapted with further equipment to meet more stringent emission regulations.
Particularly, the Plant shall be convertible in a semi-dry system with simple modification of the
economiser and with the addition of a reactor. Place shall be let to allow these modifications.
The Contractor shall consider various emissions scenarios with the Purchaser to identify space
in the FGT layout for future equipment.
A semi-dry option shall be presented, showing specifically the possibility to implement this
modification.
The FGT shall allow place for the addition of, as a minimum, a two fieldselectrostatic
precipitator: this device could be added to do pre-separation of dust and recirculation of
reaction products only.
Flue gas treatment equipment shall be provided consisting of:
a gas scrubber (as an option)

a Fabric filter containing fabric filters
reagent injection system (slaked lime),
activated carbon injection system
system for removal of waste/recycled product from the Fabric filter
quicklime reagent preparation and distribution system (as an option)
activated carbon preparation and distribution system (as an option),
bulk reagent storage facility capable of receiving bulk deliveries of reagent
NOx reduction system

flue gas sampling points
forward feeding HCl monitoring and control system which guarantees spikes not exceeding
the guaranteed emission requirements whilst processing Acceptable Waste.
The flue gas treatment system shall be designed to meet the emission requirements detailed in
Schedule 7.
The Contractor shall as far as possible ensure that the FGT equipment spares such as silo vent
filters, instrumentation, bag filters, motors, etc shall be kept to a minimum by standardising the
equipment.
Convenient openings shall be provided for duct cleaning.
The flue gas treatment system shall be capable of continuously treating the full operating range
of gas flow 60% to 100% MCR and shall also be capable of treating short term peaks in the flue
gas flow within the capacity of the firing diagram, including overload.
The Contractor shall provide adjustable temperature heat tracing to vessels and ductwork
where required to ensure that blockages do not occur. All vessels and ductwork shall be
thermally insulated and clad to prevent heat loss.
Screw conveyors with intermediate bearings shall only be permitted after Purchasers review.
Specification
27
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Pipework shall be designed with drawn or long radius bends to minimise blockages.
Air connections should be provided to unplug blockages.
2.5.1.2 Reagent and Activated Carbon Storage
Reagent shall have at least 5 days storage capacity and make best use of delivery truck
capacities to minimise delivery costs. These vessels and pipework shall be designed for long
corrosion free operation, the effective filling from articulated vehicles containing reagent and for
the blockage-free emptying to the reagent mixing and atomiser/injection equipment.
Option:
A standby lime slurry pump shall be provided per Plant. The pumps shall be complete with all
necessary strainers, non-return valves, isolating valves, loading valves, piping etc. Non
automatic changeover to the standby pump, should a duty item fail in service, and shall be
provided complete with all necessary controls/electrical items and alarm indication.
The Contractor shall ensure that the lime preparation room is provided with a heating system.
The Contractor shall provide a lime slaker grid to ensure that inerts are not introduced into the
slaking process.
The FGT system shall be supplied with a dual feed for towns water and raw water.
2.5.1.3 Scrubber Reactor (as an option)
The reactor vessel and associated mechanical handling equipment shall be designed to allow
rapid changeout of the reagent atomisers or injection devices making use of quick couplings
and connectors. A standby lime turbine shall be provided at the Plant. A spare atomiser/injector
position shall be located on top of thereactor. A cover plate shall be provided on the atomiser
flange to avoid ingress of materials and air during changeout of the atomiser.
The atomisers/lime turbines and shall meet the availability requirements specified in Schedule
7. Chemical storage tanks and pipework shall be designed for blockage-free operation with
110% bunded tanks. The Contractor shall conduct a HAZOP study for this installation and the
design of the cleaning system shall be reviewed and approved by the Purchaser.
The reagent feed control system shall be PLC based and interfaced with the DCS.
Viewports and manholes shall be provided to enable easy and safe inspection of the interior of
the reactor. Support points shall be provided to enable easy scaffold erection, and shall not
affect the flow of dried reacted reagent to the discharge conveying system. Manholes for the
removal of reagent shall be at least 1000mm x 500mm to allow reagent to be dug out and
removed effectively.
Thermal insulation shall be provided to ensure there are no cold spots and no steel is in direct
contact with the atmosphere. Hopper heaters shall be included to keep the walls warm and
prevent condensation. Hammer blocks and chain arch breakers shall also be provided to
counteract any bridging.
The reagent mixing equipment shall be designed to allow the direct feeding of reagent via big
bags or similar into the mixing vessel to enable the flue gas treatment equipment to continue
operation in the event of a blockage in the hoppers.
The Contractor shall install a nozzle on the mixing tank for connection to a future second
preparation tank and allow sufficient space in his layout design for the future installation of a
Specification
28
Purchaser
EFW Contract
second preparation tank.

2.5.1.4 Fabric filter
The Fabric filter shall be consist of filter bags made from Ryton or P84 or coated glassfibre or
Gore-Tex with access platforms, safety locking access doors and bypass ducts. The Fabric
filter shall be a modular design with on-line cleaning and the ability to isolate one compartment
such that performance remains within emission limits.
Fabric filter design velocities shall be limited to 65m/hr.
The Contractor shall provide maintenance procedures, which describe how the maintenance of
filter bags can be achieved safely with a filter compartment isolated.
The Contractor shall provide filter bags with a service life of greater than 4 years.
Stairs shall be provided to access to all platforms. A walking route shall be provided which
directly links the flue gas treatment Fabric filter to adjacent plant equipment at a similar level.
In order to avoid cold spots, the insulation arrangement shall be such that no steel is in direct
contact with the atmosphere.
There shall be sufficient headroom above the Fabric filter to ensure that the complete bag
section can be readily removed and a new bag installed without difficulty.
The cleaning sequence shall be such that it avoids creating preferential paths for the gas
through the Fabric filter. The system shall be normally fully automatic. Manual cleaning of any
row of bags shall be possible direct from thelocal panel. The filter cleaning cycle shall have
adjustable pulse and interval control.
The hoppers of each Fabric filter compartment shall be provided with heaters to maintain metal
surface temperature at an acceptable level and anti-bridging devices. The Contractor shall
ensure that the fluidising system gives smooth flow.
A bypass duct and associated dampers for each Fabric filter shall be provided for start-up with
auxiliary burners and under emergency conditions. The ducting arrangement shall be such that
air can be recirculated through the system and heated on start-up to achieve the required
temperature.
2.5.2
Bottom Ash, FGT Residue and Metals Separation Handling
General
Fork lift access shall be provided to all ash handling areas.
Bottom and ferrous storage bays shall each be designed for at least four days storage and be
designed to avoid the build up of materials into piles. The bays shall be designed for a loading
shovel to load ash or metals directly into bulk vehicles. Each bay layout shall be designed to
accommodate 16.5m long articulated vehicles and the layout must allow at least a 7 metre
headroom directly under the bottom ash and ferrous metal conveyors. These areas shall be
steel floored or have power floated hardened concrete surface suitable for front loading shovel
activities.
The ash areas and metals bays shall be separated by walls to ensure that smell and gases
emanating from these areas do not contaminate the atmosphere of the main Plant. Any liquids
drained from the ash and ferrous shall be contained and reused within the process.
Specification
29
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall have facilities to sample bottom ash and FGT residue from within the
process.
Bottom Ash and Metal Separation

The Contractor shall propose a conveyor arrangement for review by the Purchaser.
A ram bottom ash discharger shall push the residue ash onto a vibrating or slipstick type
internal conveyor via a large item separator and ferrous separator to a bottom ash storage
area. A bottom ash bypass system shall be installed to enable bottom ash to be routed to
containers for collection by forklift truck. The bottom ash discharger tank shall be fitted with
equipment to enable the discharger liquids to be sampled and injected with stabiliser. The
bottom ash shall be loaded onto bulk vehicles using a shovel loader. External belt conveyors
shall be covered and designed such that no ashes are discharged into the open and that
bottom ash does not collect on the floor of the building. The belt conveyors shall possess a
tungsten return blade to clean the belts and belt tightening/self-cleaning devices, which can be
readily accessed from the plant floor. The bottom ash conveyor shall be designed so that the
bottom ash is spread and distributed evenly at the back of the bottom ash storage bay and not
discharged into one pile. The bottom ash conveyor shall also be fitted with rotation detectors.
The ash discharger shall be supplied with a dual feed for towns water and raw water.
For areas where vehicles require access underneath transportation conveyors between
furnace/boiler buildings and the ash storage area, the Contractor shall ensure there is a
clearance of at least 5m to enable obstruction free vehicle movement.
A ferrous metal separator of the drum type shall be provided immediately prior to the discharge
of the residue streams into the ash bay. The position of the ferrous metal separator shall be
adjustable above the horizontal conveyor and achieve at least the guaranteed ferrous metal
recovery rate. A lifting beam shall be provided above the metal separator. Ferrous metals shall
be discharged to a storage area to be loaded by front loading shovel into articulated vehicles.
This floor area shall be designed for front loading shovel activities.
The Contractor shall make provision for the installation and operation of non ferrous separation
facilities located downstream of the ferrous separator.
FGT Residue
FGT residue shall be collected and discharged into fully enclosed silos with at least 4 days
storage.. The system shall be provided for FGT residues recirculation but shall be able to
operate without it. The Contractor shall take into account all the possible problems associated
with this system, particularly residues obstruction (moisture) and pipework erosion. The
configuration, bending radii, design and material specification of the pipework or the means of
conveying, shall take into account the high wear rate due to erosion, the potential for blockage
and any necessary rodding points. All pipework shall be soundly lagged and trace heated.
Pneumatic conveyors shall use heated air or dry air with a dewpoint less than -20C to avoid
blockages.
The FGT residue silo shall be kept at a sufficient temperature using temperature adjustable
external electric or water heating with insulation and cladding on the outside of the silos to
prevent condensation. Manways in the cone shall be provided to enable access to remove
blockages. The silo temperature, level and diverter valve positions shall be monitored. The
Contractor shall make provision for the installation of a big bag position to collect FGT residues
Specification
30
Purchaser
EFW Contract
upstream of the FGT residue silo in the event of a blockage in the silo itself.
FGT residue Silo and Bagging System

The Contractor shall install a dual FGT residue discharging system, one direct into powder
tankers and the other direct into a single line of 2m3 double skinned sealed bags. The FGT
residue silo shall be designed to discharge FGT residue into 20 tonne powder tankers together
with associated control and safety equipment. In addition the silo shall also be designed such
that FGT residue can be routed onto a bagging machine consisting of a single line of 5 bags.
The bagging machine shall allow the empty bag to be inflated with air prior to filling, to prevent
any risk of residue spillage during filling and enable full bags to be handled using a 4 tonne
forklift truck.. The full big bags shall be rolled on one roller conveyor and capable of storing at
least five full bags. The whole system shall be internal to the building and protected from wind
and rain. The Contractor shall ensure forklift truck access to all areas where big bags are
located and require lifting. The discharge equipment shall be specifically designed to avoid
spillage of dust into the environment.
2.5.3
Induced Draught Fan
A variable speed ID fan shall be provided by the Contractor. Greasing of fan bearings shall be
accessible externally to the ductwork and noise attenuation equipment.
2.5.4
Chimney
Where an existing chimney is not re-used, the Chimney shall be self supporting and fully
insulated complete with test ports and access platforms. The chimney shall be designed for all
atmospheric conditions including wind and snow loadings. Vortex shedding studies shall be
conducted by the Contractor to confirm the design and these shall be reviewed by the
Purchaser.. Suitable access ladder fixing points shall be provided on the chimney above the
building to enable inspection to the top. The chimney insulation shall be completely sealed and
shall not allow any water or vapour ingress.. The chimney shall be designed to BS 4076 with a
25 year life. In addition to the British Standard, the chimney shall receive a paint system with a
minimum of 25 year life to first maintenance to BS 5493. The Plant shall be designed to enable
the changing of chimney lamps from the top of the building CEMS platform.
The Contractor shall demonstrate and satisfy to the Purchaser and the Environment Agency
that the chimney height is satisfactory.
Where emissions monitoring equipment is located in the chimney, the emission monitoring
equipment shall be protected from water ingress and all cable entries shall be from below and
equipment and terminal boxes shall be at least IP55. The test ports shall be positioned as
recommended by the MCERTS emissions monitoring equipment supplier and in accordance
with ISO 9096, HMIP Technical Guidance Note M1, Source Testing Association
recommendations and shall enable effective measurement of all gas species. The chimney
shall be provided with permanent access ladders and step off platforms up to the CEMS level
The new plant shall have to re-use the existing stack or at least the existing stack location in
order to avoid Planning permission problems.
The Contractor shall check, and demonstrate to satisfy the Purchaser and the Environment
Agency, that the existing stack is suitable for the operation of the new Plant during all its
Specification
31
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Service Life.
The Contractor shall ensure that the flue gases are above their dewpoints at all times.
Test ports shall be provided in the ductwork leading to the Chimney. The test ports shall be
positioned as recommended by the MCERTS emissions monitoring equipment supplier and in
accordance with ISO 9096, HMIP Technical Guidance Note M1, Source Testing Association
recommendations and shall enable effective measurement of all gas species. The equipment
shall be provided with permanent access ladders and step off platforms up to the CEMS level.
The emission monitoring equipment shall be protected from water ingress and all cable entries
shall be from below and equipment and terminal boxes shall be at least IP55.
Specification
32
Purchaser
2.6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.6.1
Electrical Design
EFW Contract
Electrical equipment and systems shall comply with all relevant Electrical Regulations,
Standards and Codes of Practices including the Distribution Code, Engineering
Recommendations G59, BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations 16th edition. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the satisfactory progress and for the timely liaison with Electricity Distribution
Company (EDC) on matters pertaining to the electrical import/export connection, overall
protection and interlocking arrangements for the electrical connection and metering. The
technical design and progress meetings shall be organised by the Contractor but initiated and
directed by the Purchaser, who shall chair each meeting and monitor the progress of the
detailed design of the electrical connection and metering. Minutes of meeting and other
records shall be written and issued by the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall provide an integrated electrical system for the EfW Plant. It shall provide
for the export of power to the local EDC, import power to run the plant when not generating
and for the distribution of power to the plant auxiliaries. A standby power supply shall be
provided as shown in Figure 2(a). Interlocks shall comply with the requirements of the EDC,
and satisfy the Engineering Recommendations G59 and the NETA Contract requirements.
The electrical design proposed in Figures 2(a) and 2(b) are intended to indicate how the
Generator Supply interfaces with the main switchboard and this philosophy shall be applied by
the Contractor to the Plant. This in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility to design
an effective electrical system which meets both the above operating philosophy and also
normal operating conditions. The Contractor shall design and build the electrical system in
accordance with EDC requirements and particularly in line with the EDC fault levels and
interlock requirements.
The Contractor shall provide a generator with a subtransient fault level infeed including
equipment tolerances, of less than 62MVA. Compliance with this fault level infeed shall be
demonstrated by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the EDC.
Specification
33
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The existing incoming supply for the ERF site to be confirmed but is assumed to be 11KV and
shall be used as a construction supply. A new 33kV standby supply shall be provided by the
Purchaser and the Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment, facilities and ducts for this
supply within the site boundary and for the termination of this standby supply onto his metering
circuit breaker. The Plant shall export and import electricity to and from the local
EDC
distribution system at 33 kV . The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive interlock system to
the satisfaction of the local EDC.
The Contractor shall supply an electrical protection system with an accuracy class of protective
current transformers in accordance with BS 7626: 1993; designated Class X for earth fault
protection and differential protection.
The Purchaser shall supply the export/import 33kV cable connection to the site. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the following: the busbar, metering circuit breaker, the current and
voltage transformers for metering; line protection; the installation and termination of the current
and voltage transformers for the main line protection ; the structures complete with civil works
for all the CTs and VTs; the installation of an earth mat to BS Code of Practice 1013 and
connected to the EDC earth systems; all busbars and cabling; meterhouse complete with
batteries; Code of Practice 2 (CP2) tariff metering earth trunk, protection, relay panels, lighting
and small power; including the LV supply and electric meter, outside lighting, lightning
protection and telephone. The Contractor shall supply the Code of Practice 2 tariff metering
equipment to enable signals to be transmitted to the EDC telecommunications equipment in
the substation and also the EfW Plant DCS. The design of the metering shall meet the
requirements of the Pooling and Settlements Code of Practice 2, 3-Phase 4-Wire for the
metering of supplies above 10 MVA and below 100 MVA. The Contractor shall supply the
metering equipment installed inside a Metering Cubicle and be designed to function with a
minimum of maintenance. The Metering Cubicle shall have installed:
The three meters; Main meter kWh, Check meter kWh and Reactive meter kWhr. Each
meter shall have two relay outputs for each energy measurement (Import and Export MWh
and MVArh) and the first set of relays to impulse to an Outstation. The second set, from the
main meters only, to impulse to isolation relays with four outputs for each quantity. These
isolation relays shall provide impulsing to the EFW Plant Main Control Room DCS and up to
three other locations.
An Outstation. The outstation shall be designed to store half-hourly demands for all meter
outputs; these demands are to be collected by the power purchaser using a modem to call
up the data and by the Purchaser.
The metering system shall have alarms installed for local and remote monitoring via the
DCS.
Outstation modem; for connection to external telephone line, fibre optic lines or other
transmitting medium.
Watchdog circuit, used to monitor the outstation.
Alarm Lamps.
Test terminal blocks.
Voltage failure alarm relay; to be a sensitive phase imbalance relay for detecting faults.
Meter impulsing-interposing unit; to provide a barrier between the impulsing outputs of the
energy meters and the data processing equipment.
Voltage sector relay.
Data collection equipment; an interrogation unit, PC based, shall be supplied for local
analysis of the metering equipment.
The Contractor shall also supply a Castell key system for interlocking the disconnect and line
earth switches with the EDC circuit breakers and the plant 11 kV metering circuit breaker. The
pilot wire shall be terminated by the Contractor at both ends.
The Contractor shall specify a latest date for the installation of the EDC electrical import/export
connection on the Contract..
Specification
34
Purchaser
EFW Contract
All electrical rooms shall have installed heating, ventilation and air extraction systems fitted,
taking into account the heat dissipation of the equipment installed.
System overview
The switchgear fitted on the plant shall be equipped with protection and control facilities. Table
1 summarises the standard level of protections to be installed. The highest possible degree of
protection to persons against access to hazardous parts and interlocks between different
components of switchgear and control gear for rated voltages above 1 kV shall be provided.
The status and control of the 11 kV and 415 V LV board breakers shall be interfaced with the
plant DCS in order to provide control of the various breaker functions. The DCS shall provide
monitoring of the circuit breakers at emergency switchboard (or similar) level.
Interlocking
Electrical interlocks shall be provided between the main and standby supplies in order to
prevent parallel operation. Electrical and mechanical interlocks shall also be provided between
EDC's substation and Purchasers HV switchgear.
Means shall be provided which ensure the correct sequence of operation of the switchgear.
When maintenance is to be carried out on the switchgear the method of interlocking shall result
in the removal or locking on of a unique device, e.g. key, which ensures that the equipment to
be maintained remains safe. All disconnecting and earthing devices within a station shall be
interlocked in a manner that ensures that they always operate safely. The system employed
shall satisfy two distinct categories as follows.
Operational interlocking
Interlocking associated with normal system operation and switching and intended to
ensure that a predetermined switching sequence is satisfied. Such interlocking shall be
achieved by electrical means in a manner that permits the equipment to perform any
safe operation for either local or remote conditions.
Maintenance interlocking
Interlocking associated with a series of switching operations to render the equipment or
sections of the station safe for access and maintenance by personnel. Such
interlocking shall be achieved by mechanical interference type interlocks to BS 7354.
When designing an interlocking scheme, the following assumptions shall be made based on
specific duties for disconnectors :
disconnectors are capable of switching the capacitive current of associated connections

disconnectors have zero load making and breaking capacity
disconnectors are not capable of making or breaking transformer magnetising current
disconnectors are capable of the duty imposed when operated under parallel switching
conditions
it is not possible to close or open any earth switch unless the point of application is
disconnected from all possible sources of supply, and the power operating devices of
associated disconnectors are isolated from their remote control position
it is not possible to operate any disconnectors if an associated earth switch is already
closed
disconnectors concerned with supplies from a remote point cannot be fully interlocked and
shall carry a warning notice to this effect and similar notices shall be applied to earth
switches.
The overall protection and interlocking arrangements for the electrical connection shall be
jointly agreed between EDC and the Contractor.
11 kV systems protection
Specification
35
Purchaser
EFW Contract
The protection systems shall be subdivided into specific unit protection schemes and general
schemes which also act as back-up to certain unit protection relays. In general, the basic
protection shall be incorporated into the Merlin Gerin Sepam 2000 multi-function relays (or
similar approved supplier) in the 11kV switchboard, with specific, single function relays being
selected from the Alstom range (or similar approved supplier), located in the 11kV switchboard
and in the turbo-generator control panel. The G59 protection shall be incorporated in
separate relays, located in the 11kV switchboard.
Generator protection
The operating philosophy of the generator protection shall be submitted by the generator
supplier , via the Contractor for review by the Purchaser.
Cable protection
The 33 kV interconnecting cables to the EDC substation shall be protected from both the
Purchasers and EDCs ends by Alstom MBCI Translay S balanced feeder relays (or similar
approved supplier) incorporated in dedicated panels. The scheme shall also include a pilot wire
protection scheme, which has its active component at the Purchasers end and an injection filter
at EDCs end. Back up protection from the Purchasers end shall be provided by a nondirectional over-current element in the Sepam relay (or similar approved supplier) in the 33 kV
switchboard. From the EDCs end, back up protection shall be provided by EDC.
Neutral earthing resistor
Back-up earth fault relays Alstom MCGG22 (or similar approved supplier) shall be provided in
the neutral earthing resistor panel, purely to protect the resistor against long term earth path
currents.
33 kV switchboard
In order to disconnect the 11 kV switchboard from the incoming supply more quickly in case of
an internal fault, directional over-current and earth fault elements shall be incorporated into the
Sepam 2000 relay (or similar approved supplier). They shall have lower settings than the nondirectional elements, as they only have to cope with the plant parasitic load, not the full export
capacity of the alternator.
11 kV/415 V transformer protection
The 11 kV/415 V transformer unit protection shall be provided by winding temperature alarm
and trip facilities connected through auxiliary units in the 415 V switchboard. Restricted earth
fault protection shall be provided on the 415 V winding using MCAG14 relays (or similar
approved supplier) in the 415 V switchboard. Back-up protection for the 415 V winding shall
comprise over-current and unrestricted earth fault elements of the universal control unit
STR68UT (or similar approved supplier) built into the incoming air circuit breakers of the 415 V
switchboard. For the 11 kV winding, back-up protection shall be provided by unrestricted earth
fault elements of the Sepam relay (or similar approved supplier), mounted in the 11 kV
switchboard.
415 V switchboard
In order to disconnect the 415 V switchboard from the incoming supply more quickly in case of
an internal fault, directional over-current and earth fault elements shall be incorporated into the
universal protection control unit STR68UT (or similar approved supplier).
Protection system panels
In addition to the multifunction relays built into the Merlin Gerin Sepam 2000 (or similar
approved supplier) and the specific single relays located in the 11 kV and 415 V switchboards
and the turbo alternator control panels, dedicated protection panels shall be provided and
installed in the plants 11 kV switch room and in the metering house at EDCs substation. The
primary function of these panels is to provide balanced feeder protection, emergency and intertripping systems between the plant and the EDCs substation. The insulation level of the
Specification
36
Purchaser
EFW Contract
panels shall be 5 kV and the panels shall be designed to withstand the instantaneous power
reversal in the feeder, i.e. from normal operation in export mode from the plant to EDCs
substation to import mode from EDCs substation to the plant on turbine trip.
Protection panel at EDC substation
The Contractor shall provide the protection panel at EDCs substation, which shall be wall,
mounted type and housing the protection, control and inter-tripping relays. The protective
relays shall be of the solid state type with the tripping relays being of the attracted armature
type. Both types shall be from the Alsthom protection relays system (or similar approved
supplier). The MBCI Translay-S relay (high speed biased differential type) shall be used to
provide high stability for through faults and simultaneous tripping at both ends of the cable. The
pilot wire supervision shall be provided by the MRTP type relay (or similar approved supplier).
The MVAA11 and MVA13 relays (or similar approved supplier) shall be used to provide the
control and inter-tripping functions.
Protection panel at EfW plant
The protection panel at the plant shall be similar in design to the one at EDCs substation with
the exception that it shall be of a floor standing type and also provide emergency tripping
functions to the 11 kV and 415 V systems. The MBCI Translay-S and MRTP type relays (or
similar approved supplier) shall be used in the same way as that at EDCs substation. The
MVAA11 and MVAA13 relays shall be used to provide emergency and inter-tripping for the 11
kV and 415 V systems and also controlling the neutral earthing contactor and resistor panel.
Inter-tripping
In order to disconnect the ERF plant from the incoming supply from EDCs substation and
vice versa and various voltage levels within the plant, in case of a fault, inter-tripping between
the various voltage levels shall be provided. The inter-trip signal shall be distinguished into two
types namely, inter-trip fault and inter-trip operational. The system at each end shall be
designed to send and receive the inter-trip signals.
11 kV and the steam turbine generator inter-tripping
The inter-tripping between these two systems shall be achieved by using protection relays
mounted in the steam turbine generator control panels and the auxiliary contacts of the circuit
breaker and input and output channels of the Merlin Gerin Sepam 2000 multi function relays (or
similar approved supplier) mounted in the 11 kV switchboard panel 2.
11 kV and the standby supply inter-tripping
The inter-tripping between these two systems shall be achieved by using the auxiliary contacts
of the EDCs circuit breaker and the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and input and
output channels of the Merlin Gerin Sepam 2000 multi-function relays (or similar approved
supplier) mounted in the 11 kV switchboard panel 4. This shall be designed to receive inter-trip
signals from EDC only. The standby supply shall be designed to close upon loss of both the
EDCs supply and the generator automatically but be tripped manually. Suitable hard wired
interlocks as well as Sepam 2000 interlocks (or similar approved supplier) shall be provided to
prevent closing of the circuit breaker by default.
11 kV and 415 V inter-tripping
The inter-tripping between these two voltage levels shall be achieved by using the auxiliary
contacts and input and output channels of the Merlin Gerin Sepam 2000 multi-function relays
(or similar approved supplier) mounted in the 11 kV switchboard panel 3 and the auxiliary
contacts of the incomer circuit breakers of the 415 V switchboard. In the event of fire in the
switchroom or if the electrical equipment is under distress, the Contractor shall supply electrical
system trip facilities for disconnecting the 11 kV and 415 V systems. The tripping of the
electrical systems shall be accomplished via break glass units installed in the main Plant
Control Room, for all systems; in the 11 kV switchroom (on the Protection Panel) for the 11 kV
systems, and in the 11 kV/415 V Transformer LV Board Switchroom for 415 V systems.
Specification
37
Purchaser
EFW Contract
Specification
38
Purchaser
EFW Contract
TABLE 1 SYSTEM PROTECTION: PROTECTION TYPES FOR ENERGY FROM WASTE PLANT - All circuit breakers shall have short circuit (50) and overload (27) protections
PROTECTION TYPE
Differential protective relay
Apparatus thermal device
Instantaneous overcurrent relay
Instantaneous overcurrent relay
A.C. time overcurrent relay (unrestricted earth fault)
A.C. time overcurrent relay (unrestricted earth fault)
Undervoltage relay
Ground protective relay (earth fault E/F)
Ground protective relay (earth fault E/F)
Overvoltage relay
Liquid or gas pressure or vacuum relay (Buchholz system)
Transformer thermal relay
Carrier or pilot-wire receiver relay (MBCI Translay S)
A.C. directional overcurrent relay
A.C. directional overcurrent relay
Synchronism-check device
Frequency relay (under and over frequency)
Under impedance relay
Checking or interlocking relay
Rate of change of frequency (df/dt) relay
Rotor earth fault
Stator earth fault
Directional power relay (reverse power)
Field failure relay (loss of excitation)
Reverse-phase or phase-balance relay (-ve phase sequence)
Voltage controlled overcurrent relay
Tripping or trip-free relay (pilot link)
Tripping or trip-free relay (pilot link)
Locking-out relay (pilot link)
Rectification failure relay (rotating diode fault detector)
V/Hz protection
Automatic voltage regulator
Overspeed
Starting-to-running transition contactor (start failure)
Emergency stop
Mechanically & electrically interlocked changeover contactors
Mechanically & electrically interlocked circuit breakers
DEVICE
11kV:415V
STANDBY EXPORT/IMPORT
TURBO
NEUTRAL EARTH
No.
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
LINE
GENERATOR
RESISTOR
87
X
26
50
X
X
X
50N
X
X
X
51
X
X
51N
X
X
X
X
X
27
X
X
X
X
64
X
X
64(L)& (H)
59
X
63
49
X
49(O)
49(W)
X
85
X
67
67N
25
X
81
X
21
X
3
X
X
Df/dt
ROT
X
STA
X
32
X
40
X
46
X
50V/51V
X
94X
X
94/86
X
X
X
86
X
X
X
X
58
X
V/Hz
X
AVR
X
12
19
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
39
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The ID fans shall be controlled by variable speed drives.

General Rooms
All electrical, instrumentation and control rooms shall be designed for bottom access to panels
as far as possible.
Plant equipment system and MCCs
The complete LV switchboard assembly and MCCs shall be floor mounting and free standing,
manufactured from sheet steel, with a minimum of IP 31 (for indoor use) and IP 55 (for outdoor
installation) degree of protection and Form 4 Type 3 internal separation as defined in BS EN
60439-1, shall be applied to the Main LV switchboard. Form 3b Type 2 construction to BS EN
60439-1 internal separation shall be acceptable for all other MCCs and single circuit feeds. The
latter shall have supplementary protection, i.e. protective roofing or the like. The motor starters
for the majority of plant and auxiliary equipment shall be housed in the MCCs, whilst the motor
starters for the auxiliary equipment packages shall be housed in either the individual small
MCCs or special starter panels supplied by the equipment package vendor. The motor control
centre shall be designed so that modifications to ratings or functions can be effected quickly
and easily and work shall be carried out on any individual compartment of the motor control
centre in complete safety, without the need to switch off the rest of the board. All panels shall
be designed and installed to allow all normal operational functions (cabling operation and
maintenance functions) to be carried out from the front of the panel. Panels shall be supplied
with a purpose-made separate base plinth 125 mm high of fabricated and corrosion protected
sheet steel or rolled steel channel, which shall be fixed true and level on the structural floor
before the panel itself is mounted and fixed to its top. The plinth shall be inset from the vertical
faces of the panel by 12 mm such that a continuous flat vertical surface faces outwards. Floor
screed and finishes may subsequently be laid to abut the plinth. Each sub-section shall have
an individual front cover, which is hinged to provide access to all equipment inside the cubicle
for maintenance purposes (withdrawable and removable modules type may be acceptable
subject to agreement with the Purchaser). These covers shall be of sheet steel and rigid
construction, complete with jointing material to ensure a seal in accordance with the degree of
protection specified for the control panel and shall be fitted with T-Type handles, only one of
which shall be lockable. Each sub-section, except for the maintenance instructions cubicle,
shall be fitted with an isolator, mechanically interlocked with the sub-section front cover such
that the cover cannot be opened unless the isolator is in its OFF position, and an anticondensation heater and thermostat operating on 110 V. Sub-sections less than 500 mm in
height shall be mounted with their bases not less than 500 mm above finished floor level. Each
MCC shall have one sub-section not less than 400 mm x 400 mm x 400 mm to house
maintenance instructions and diagrams. The inside face of this sub-sections front cover shall
be fitted with spring clips containing 10% of each size of fuse and not less than 3 of each size
and type within the control panel. The LV switchboard shall be designed and certified to
withstand a short circuit fault current of 70 kA rms or lower subject to justification by the
Contractor for 1 second. The MCC busbar systems shall have an ASTA certified short time
withstand current rating of 50 kA rms for 1 second without causing damage. The main circuit
switching mechanisms fitted in the MCCs incoming supply cubicles shall be rated to the full
fault level and have a circuit breaking rating of 50kA rms. One common solid copper earth shall
be installed internally throughout the length of each MCC and shall be extendible at both ends.
It shall be adequately rated for all possible short-time continuous fault currents. Each dual feed
MCC shall be provided with two 415/110 V transformers complete with a change over logic
arranged such that continuity of supply to the control circuits is maintained in the event of failure
of one transformer. Each starter circuit within the MCCs i.e. contactors, fuses and overload
relays shall be designed to achieve type 2 co-ordination as defined in BS EN 60947-4-1 (IEC
9474) and have control circuit suitable for operation from the 110 VAC control circuit supply
system. Each starter shall incorporate a normal/test switch, mounted inside the sub-section.
The test position of this switch shall energise the control circuits only whilst the compartment
door is open. It shall not energise the motor. All electrical connections on this switch shall be
fully shrouded. This switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the door such that the door
40
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
cannot be closed when test is selected and test cannot be selected unless the compartment
door is open (i.e. it shall only be possible to close the cubicle front cover, and the door
interlocked cubicle isolator, when this switch is in its normal position. Refuse crane and local
turbine MCCs and controls shall be located in a dust and wet free technical room. The MCC
shall be as follows:
Internal separation
Prospective earth fault current (fault current)
Type
IP rating
Mounting
Compartment access
Cabling access
Busbars
Compartment door MCCBs interlocked
Supply ammeter
Electricity supply indication
Distribution and incomer RCDs
Rubber mats
Preferred manufacturers
Sockets
Power factor correction
Phase failure and reversal protection
Standby generator inlet
Spare fuses
Spare cubicles
Selector switches to be key lockable
Domestic distribution
Cubicle heaters
Starters
Internal compartment test switches
Form 4 type 3 or Form 3b Type 2 construction

50 kA or lower subject to justification
Multi-cubicle
Minimum of IP 31 if located indoors and IP 55
for outdoor installation
Free standing
Front or rear
Bottom or top (IP rating to be maintained)
Required
All compartments except marshalling. Controls
to include internal MCCB
Yes
Three (RED/YELLOW/BLUE) lamps,
one/phase
30 mA for 240 V sockets, domestic distribution
and internal 13 A socket. 100 mA for incomers
(with adjustable time delay)
Required
Brook Compton, Klockner Moeller, Legrand,
Merlin Gerin, MTE, Telecontrol,
Telemecanique or similar approved supplier
Yes
Controlled from Generator
Incomers (adjustable settings to trip incomer)
Not required
Include 100% spares of each fuse size, rack
mounted in respective compartments
Min. of 20% required. Fitted with 2 of each
size and type of isolator used within the MCC
None
Distribution board mounted on the front of the
distribution compartment.
All compartments except for records
Star Delta, Soft Start or D.O.L. as required
Required, not key switches
Standard motor starter modules shall include provision for control operating devices with their
associated indicators. Equipment shall include an interlocked circuit breaker (including motor
protection) or BS 88 fuses, contactor and overload. Power distribution modules shall be
supplied with an interlocked circuit breaker.
Switchgear battery and battery charger
Switchgear batteries and battery chargers shall be supplied to provide the 110 V DC for the
following functions as a minimum.
Tripping and closing of 11 kV switchgear and protection system
Tripping and closing of 415 V switchgear and standby power supply to other equipment
Protection system at EDC substation.
41
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Each battery shall consist of a group of cells connected in series or parallel to provide the
output voltage and a one hour discharge period. Batteries shall be nickel cadmium alkaline
type. Each battery shall have a storage capacity sufficient to carry out at least 100 consecutive
operations singly and in rapid succession, and supply its standing load for the above-specified
time without the battery terminal voltage falling below 85% of its normal value. Each battery
with the associated battery charger shall be accommodated in fabricated free-standing floormounting steel enclosures. The battery chargers shall be of the automatic constant voltage
current limit type and suitable for one of the following modes of operation:
Trickle charging
Trickle charging with occasional manually controlled boost
Float charging
Float charging with occasional manually controlled boost
Charge/discharge cycle
Each system shall be equipped with a low-voltage disconnect facility in order to protect the
battery from over discharge. The facility shall comprise of a contactor controlled by a voltage
detection module which automatically disconnects the battery from the load should the battery
voltage fall below the preset level. The 110 V DC within the plant shall be distributed to the
user points via distribution boards. Malfunctions and failures of the battery chargers located in
the remote Meter House, in the 11 kV Switchroom and in the UPS room shall be indicated to
the main Plant Control Room via the DCS.
Turbine emergency oil pump supply
In addition to the three switchgear batteries and battery chargers, a further battery and battery
charger system shall be supplied to provide 110 V DC for the turbine emergency oil pump or
other supply as advised by the turbine manufacturer. The battery shall consist of a group of
cells connected in series/parallel to provide the output voltage and sixty minutes discharge
period. The battery shall be of valve regulated gas recombination lead acid type, with the other
features identical to the other three systems described earlier. The starter circuit for the DC
motor driven run-down pump shall be mounted in the turbine auxiliary MCC, whilst the control
logic shall be mounted in the turbine control panel. The function of this pump is to safeguard
the bearings in the event of a power failure.
Personnel Fire Lift Standby Supply
The personnel lift shall be fed from the 415v emergency distribution board.
Rubber mats
Rubber matting complying with BS 921 shall be provided for all electrical equipment, on all floor
areas where maintenance work may be effected. Each mat shall be at least 0.9 m wide and of
sufficient length to extend 50 mm beyond either end of each piece of equipment.
2.6.2
Earthing
The Generator neutral shall be earthed via an NER. The Plant shall be solidly earthed having
an Integrated Earthing System, compatible with the EDC earthing systems. Earthing rods shall
have inspection points. All metalwork, cable tray and equipment shall be equipotentially
bonded. The whole of the earthing installation shall comply with BS 7671: 1992 the IEE Wiring
Regulations 16th Edition and EDCs requirements. The Contractor shall supply the Purchaser
with the site ground conditions report, including all soil resistivity readings taken. The design of
the earthing mat system shall be such as to limit the earth grid potential rise under maximum
42
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
fault conditions to be within CCITT requirements.

The Contractor shall demonstrate to EDC and the Purchaser that the Site and Plant earthing
have been satisfactorily designed, installed and tested prior to any connection.
A TNS earthing system which consists of a system having separate neutral (N) and protective
conductor (PE) shall be provided and shall include a dedicated earthing circuit to which all
electrical equipment shall be connected. The protective conductor (PE) shall be the metallic
covering of the cable supplying the installations or a separate conductor. All exposedconductive-parts of the installation shall be connected to the protective conductor via the main
earthing terminal. This system shall be connected to a main earth system for the Plant.
Installation of the main and supplementary equipotential bonding conductors shall be in
accordance with the requirements of BS 7671. The main earth shall be connected onto a test
bar, which shall be used to carry out periodic tests and also for the connection of miscellaneous
earth circuits. A clean earth (electronic earth) shall be provided to earth independently from the
main earthing system, the sensitive equipment such as electronic devices and control systems.
The clean earth shall be mainly composed of clean earth bars installed in electrical rooms and
connected to earth rods buried as far as possible from the normal earth. The requirement for a
separate clean earth may be waived by the Purchaser if it can be demonstrated by the
Contractor that it is not required.
At all main and sub-main distribution points, a copper strip earth busbar of minimum cross
sectional area of 80 mm2 shall be provided and all equipment including switch and fuseboard
cases, framework and cable armouring shall be bonded to it. The busbar shall be mounted on
suitable insulators and located where the main earth connection enters the site. At all main and
sub-main distribution points; earth bars shall be provided and consist of high conductivity
copper strip mounted on insulated supports on the substation walls and shall have 400 A
isolating links fitted in order that the earth bar can be isolated from the earth mat for test
purposes. The size of each bar shall be determined from the prospective fault current as
follows:
14 kA
30 kA
33 kA
25 mm x 3 mm
37 mm x 6 mm
50 mm x 6 mm
Earth rods shall be of stainless steel and connected by thermal welding systems to the earth
grid to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
Where copper strip is used either for bonding purposes or as an earth continuity conductor, the
following shall apply:
All strips shall be of soft high conductivity copper untinned except where otherwise
specified.
Where fixed to building structure, independent purpose made brass clamps or saddles shall
be used. Fixings requiring the drilling of holes through the strip shall not be used.
Where the strip is run to ground or otherwise liable to corrosion, it shall be wrapped with
PVC tape. Alternatively, PVC sheathed strip shall be used.
Joints shall be exothermic welded.
Fixing of connections to the strip shall be made by high tensile brass or bronze nuts, bolts
and washers and the cross section of bolts connecting equipment to the strip shall be not
less than that of the bonding lead.
All the items of plant, metal equipment on the site e.g. ladders, handrailing, pump guide rails,
cover frames, tanks, machinery casings etc. and glands for PVC/SWA/PVC cables, incoming
gas and water mains or other metallic services where applicable shall be bonded to earth in
43
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
accordance with the IEE Regulations.

The surfaces of all equipment to which earthing bonds are fixed shall be cleaned free from paint
and other non-conducting materials and the surfaces coated with petroleum jelly.
All connections shall be made using bolted, tinned compression type eye cable lugs, Denso
taped on completion to completely seal the lug and any bare copper from the atmosphere.
All metal clad electrical equipment and related plant shall be soundly connected electrically and
mechanically to earth but shall not be used as an earth conductor for other metal work earth
connections.
All electrical systems shall be designed in accordance with IEE Regulations, applicable British
Standards Code of Practice for Earthing BS 7430 (formerly CP 1013).
Neutral earthing resistor and contactor panel
A neutral earthing resistor shall be provided to control the flow of earth currents during plant
operation. Its prime purpose shall be to ensure that only one neutral-earth connection is
present on the 11 kV system at any one time. Normally, the transformer 11 kV neutral shall be
connected to earth. If, however, the transformer circuit breaker is open, the generator neutral
earthing switch shall close, so maintaining the system voltages in balance. The generator
neutral earthing switch shall also close when it is running up. The complete assembly shall be
housed in a floor mounting, free standing, sheet steel enclosure with degree of protection to IP
31. The contactor and resistor shall be suitable for limiting the earth fault current to 1000 A for
ten seconds at the system voltage of 11 kV and a basic impulse level of 75 kV. Each contactor
shall be provided with a three position control switch CLOSE/NEUTRAL/TRIP, and a
LOCAL/REMOTE selector switch. A fully rated isolator shall be provided at each contactor to
enable maintenance procedures to be carried out without interrupting normal operation. While
operating under remote control, the neutral earthing contactors shall be fully automatic, closing
and opening as the changing 11 kV system configurations demand.
2.6.3
Lightning
Lightning protection shall be provided for the chimney and buildings and consist of conductors
bonded to the main earthing points to provide an integrated system of protection. The chimney
stack and all buildings shall be provided with lightning protection in accordance with BS 6651:
1985. The Contractor shall supply the Purchaser with all calculations, analysis and design
details for defining the Zones of protection and method of connecting the protection to the main
plant earth mat. All electronic equipment shall be protected from lightning and transient
overvoltage.
2.6.4
Distribution Design
The distribution design shall be as that indicated in single line diagrams Figures 2(a) and 2(b) of
Clause 2.6.1 above.
Distribution boards network shall be provided and installed in various parts of the plant, giving
the most practical access for the ancillary building services system and ancillary plant
equipment. The final circuits shall be protected by MCBs or MCCBs as necessary.
Transformers and distribution boards shall be designed to accommodate 100% start up load.
The 11 kV/415 V cast resin auxiliary transformers shall be sized for total plant loading plus 20%
continuous overload. The main LV switchboard, MCCs and LV distribution boards shall be
44
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
designed for and include spare feeds of suitable capacity rating. The Contractor shall design
for the automatic changeover and standby feed to the plant as indicated in Fig. 2(a). As
indicated in Figure 2(b), the Contractor shall design for a suitably rated emergency switchboard
supply for : the personnel fire lift, fire pump, weighbridge, CEMS, emergency lighting, UPS, TG
emergency auxiliaries, 110V DC, grate emergency oil pump, Confidential/veterinary/medical
Waste handling and small power requirements. Electrical distribution drawings shall be
reviewed by the Purchaser.
The operation, control and monitoring of all circuit breakers and isolators, down to and including
the main LV switchboard shall be via the DCS. The incomers to the main MCCs and all other
distribution boards shall be monitored by the DCS.
The electrical distribution system and equipment shall be designed to the Codes and Standards
of the following Bodies: Institution of Electrical Engineers, Institution of Mechanical Engineers,
British Standards, British Standard Codes and Practice, Health and Safety Executive, Electricity
at Work Regulations and International Electrotechnical Commission. European Standards may
only be considered where they are specifically compatible with British Standard equivalent
equipment and systems.
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser a full set of electrical load and control schedules,
fault level and fault level contribution calculations and list of protection settings to be applied,
for review.
All electrical switchboards, enclosures, distribution boards and control cabinets that are floor
mounted and completely free standing shall be manufactured from sheet steel, with a minimum
of IP 31 (for indoor use) and IP 55 (for outdoor installation) degree of protection. All wall
mounted electrical and control cabinets shall have IP ratings as above and shall not be flush
mounted on the wall, at least 25mm shall be provided between cabinets and walls.
2.6.5
Cables
Cabling and earthing shall be in accordance with British and IEC Standards BS 7671 IEE
Wiring Regulations 16th edition and BS 7430 Earthing.
All cables run shall be supported on heavy duty galvanised cable rack BS 729 or return flange
tray supported at regular intervals and secured with PVC coated steel ties. Cable trays and
ladders rack shall have 30% spare capacity. Single cables shall be supported on heavy duty
cable tray, manufactured to BS 1449. All cables run below ground, shall be installed inside
cable ducts of 150 mm minimum diameter.
All cabling shall be identified using permanent markers securely attached to the cable ends. All
cores shall be clearly identified at each end using a consistent identification system.
Identification labels of durable material, shall be provided suitable for permanently affixing to
the cable sheath by means of a buckle type straps and shall carry the cable reference in PVC
channel strip. The reference character sizes shall not be less than 4 mm (5/32) high (Critchley
Unilabel or similar). Cable identification labels shall be fitted to each cable end below its
respective cable gland also where the cable passes through ducts or trenches and at each
entry and exit to a room or building.
The Contractor shall supply electrical cables as follows:

-High voltage cables shall be rated at 6350/33000 Volts with XLPE insulated
conductors steel wire armoured (SWA) cables to BS 6622 and IEC 502
-Low voltage cables shall be rated at 600/1000 Volts with XLPE insulated conductors
steel wire armoured (SWA) cables to BS 5467 (with PVC LSF oversheath to BS 6224)
45
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
- All other cables shall be PVC insulated armoured cables to BS 5467

-All fire protection cables to BS 5467
-All control and instrumentation cables shall be PVC insulated SWA cables to BS 5308
part 2, type 2. The cable cores shall consist of individually screened pairs with overall
screen
-All conductors for earthing shall be copper, manufactured to BS 1432, for strip and BS
4109, for cable
All cables shall have stranded copper conductors to comply with BS 6724, amply rated in
accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations taking into account short-circuit and overload
protection, temperature considerations, voltage drop and method of installation. The Purchaser
shall review cable calculations. The voltage drop from any cable shall not exceed that specified
in the current edition of the regulations of the Institution of Electrical Engineers. Cable
schedules shall include such details as: cable number, length in metres, rated current and
voltage, cross sectional area, number of cores, type of cable, cable run from/to as a minimum.
Cables shall be segregated into the following categories: HV AC power cables, LV AC power
cables, DC cables, control cables, instrumentation cables (analogue signals) and
instrumentation cables (digital signals).
All cable entries shall be from the bottom, to distribution boards and local panels that are
located on the plant. However, bottom and/or top entries shall be acceptable inside the
switchroom provided the IP ratings of the panels are maintained. All cables shall be identified
and properly glanded to BS 6121: Part 1 1989 and shall be coiled once prior to glanding into
field instrumentation. All fire protection cables shall comply with BS 6387: 1994 class CWZ.
All multicore cables shall have 10% extra cores.
Cables laid in ground shall not have the same colours to statutory undertakers pipework (i.e.
yellow for gas and blue for water pipework).
2.6.6
Transformers
General
Transformers shall be designed to BS 171 and BS EN 60076. Any oil filled transformers shall
supplied with blind bunds with a capacity of 110% of the capacity of the transformer for
pumping out by others. Oil filled HV transformers shall be either protected with deluge system
or so positioned such that there is no possibility of any consequential loss or damage to either
plant or equipment in the event of a fire. Cast resin insulated, encapsulated transformers
nominal rating shall be achieved using natural air circulation, the 120% rating shall be achieved
using forced air circulation (AN/AF).
Cable boxes shall be provided for the 33kV power cable connections.
2.6.7 Cable Ducting
All underground cables shall be installed in dedicated cable ducts with sufficient air space to
avoid the cables overheating and shall comply with the Electricity Association Technical
Specification 12.24. Cables laid to plant and equipment that are external to buildings,
structures etc. shall be conveyed through or under hard standing surfaces by means of ducts.
Ducts under roads shall be laid such that the cover from the top of the ducts to the final road
surface is not less than 750 mm. Wherever cables, earthing strips and other current carrying
apparatus pass through walls, floors etc; the Contractor shall thoroughly and effectively seal all
voids formed between the cables and the openings against the ingress of moisture and gas
sufficient for the requirements of Fire Protection. The Contractor shall ensure that the materials
used are fire resisting and have no deleterious effect on the cables.
46
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Before drawing any cables in ducts, the Contractor shall ensure that they are clean and free
from obstructions. Adequately spaced temporary supports and cable rollers shall be provided
for the drawing in of cables such that abnormal strains and damage to the cable is prevented;
approved supplier lubricants shall be used as necessary. Cable stockings shall be used for
general drawing work, core pulling eyes being specially fitted for heavy hauls. Stresses shall
not exceed:
10MN/m2 (1,500 lb/sq in) on the load sheath
70MN/m2 (10,000 lb/sq in) on the core
Maximum pulling tension shall be 20 kN (4500 lb)
Duct seals and cable transits
After the cables are drawn in, the Contractor shall seal the ends of all ducts, pipes or trenches
leading into buildings for cabling associated with this Contract, whether occupied or not. The
seals shall be reviewed by the Purchaser for water, gas and fire sealing transit units with
appropriate fillers and insert blocks fitted to suit all cables, conduits or pipes passing through
the walls or floors. All steelwork on such transit assemblies and frames shall be hot dip
galvanised. Alternative materials may be used subject to the Purchaser review.
Protection of exposed cables
Where a cable rises out of a duct or the ground in an exposed situation a galvanised steel pipe
or protective cover fabricated from 3.0 mm (10 SWG) galvanised mild steel (or heavier as
appropriate) shall be provided and fixed to the associated structure for a minimum height of 1.5
metres above the local finished ground level.
2.6.8
Emergency Generator
The Contractor shall install anemergency generator, as indicated in Figure 2(a) of Section
2.6.1. The Contractors equipment shall be designed and rated to ensure that the Plant can be
safely shut down with no electrical grid supply. The system shall be designed to accommodate
EDC fault levels and possess appropriate interlocks and switching and meet the requirements
of the EDC and the requirements of the NETA agreement. Upon loss of the main 33kV
EDCs supply whilst the turbine is not running, the emergency generator shall automatically
operate and shut down the.
2.6.9
Turbine Generator
The turbine generator and all ancillary systems shall be designed for 110% MCR and 0.8
power factor. The Contractor shall supply all electrical protection and metering for the
turbine/generator. In addition to the protection a turbogenerator monitoring system shall be
provided to monitor bearing vibration, turbine axial position, turbine speed and temperatures.
Synchronising facilities shall be provided in the central control room and the turbo generator
local control room to enable the generator to be run in parallel with the local EDC distribution
system.
2.6.10 11 kV AC Switchboard
The Contractor shall supply an 11 kV metal clad type switchboard, utilising drawout circuit
breakers, suitable for operation on an 11 kV 50 Hz three wire supply, with low resistance
earthed neutral. The switchboard shall be extendible at both ends and comprise four SF6 or
vacuum type circuit breakers fully complying with BS 4752 suitably rated for the circuits feeds
as indicated in Clause 2.6.1 of this specification, Single Line Diagram Figure 2(a).
47
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The switchboard shall be floor mounting, free standing, manufactured from fabricated sheet
steel not less than 2 mm thick and have at least IP 31 degree of protection. The switchgear
shall fully comply with BS EN 60298 and BS 5311. The circuit breakers and busbars shall be
suitable for a short circuit fault level of 40 kA for 3 seconds at a system voltage of 11 kV and a
basic impulse level of 95 kV.
Electrical interlocking and Castell key interlocking shall be provided in order that the circuit
breakers, feed cables and circuit feeds can be isolated and operated safely, and in accordance
with the EDCs requirements where applicable.
The protection and metering CTs shall be compatible and matched with the protection CTs
installed in the generator, the EDCs Standby Supply and Auxiliary Transformers. The main
operation, control, monitoring and protection of the switchgear shall be incorporated in a
SEPAM 2000 unit or similar approved supplier.
All Safety labels shall be colour coded in accordance with BS 5378 and Safety Signs
Regulations 1980.
2.6.11 415V AC System

The 415 V LV system shall be as indicated in Clause 2.6.1 Figure 2(b) and Clause 2.6.4 of this
specification.
The Contractor shall supply one 11kV/415V auxiliary transformers to provide supplies for all
AC auxiliaries on the plant, the rating and type as indicated in Clause 2.6.6 of this Specification.
The transformer shall be of cast resin design built to the required BS 171. Suitable ventilation
shall be provided in electrical rooms to avoid overheating of equipment.
The Contractor shall supply 415V LV switchboard suitably rated and fitted with switchgear and
isolators suitable rated to supply all the 415 V feeds as per Figure 2(b) of the specification. In
addition, the Contractor shall supply 415 V motor control centres and distribution boards.
Distribution boards for lighting, heating, socket outlets and small power shall be located at
strategic positions throughout the plant and have an enclosure degree of protection to a
minimum of IP 31 (for indoor use) and IP 55 (for outdoor installation).
The switchboards and MCCs shall be designed and manufactured to BS EN 60439 Part 1 with
an enclosure degree of protection to a minimum of IP 31 (for indoor use) and IP 55 (for outdoor
installation) . The busbars and busbar connections shall comply with BS 159 and BS EN
60439-1 assembly Form 4 Type 3 or any equivalent as agreed by the Purchaser. All motor
starter/controllers shall include as a minimum: disconnect switch, main fuses, visible fault
indication and provision for remote alarm indication, air/vacuum contactor (electrically held
type), ambient compensated thermal overload relay, ammeter, start/stop buttons with coloured
indication
lamps,
local/remote
selector
switch,
provision
for
remote
overload/trips/start/stop/emergency stop buttons and provision for motor anti-condensation
heaters.
2.6.12 Welding and Small Power

The Contractor shall supply switched 415V AC 3 phase welding sockets and 110V AC sockets
for small power each rated at 100A. The welding and small power circuits shall be designed
such that the two adjacent sockets furthest from the distribution board can each draw the full
rated current associated with all the sockets being used concurrently. These sockets shall be
located such that the maximum distance to any socket is 20m. Power supplies for control and
48
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
instrumentation shall be fed from isolating transformers with secondary windings at 110V 1
phase 50 Hz having one pole earthed. Power supplies for all monitoring equipment in direct
contact with water, such as electrodes, float switches, pH cells, etc., shall not exceed 50V,
earthed at one end. Power supplies for portable tools and 110 V 1 phase 50 Hz socket outlets
shall be fed from isolating transformers with secondary winding centre-tapped and connected to
earth. Power supplies for hand lamps shall be 25V 1 phase 50 Hz from isolating transformers
with secondary winding earthed at one end. 50V and 25V systems shall be functional extralow voltage systems as defined in the IEE Wiring Regulations BS 7671. Power supplies for
heating and lighting (other than hand lamps) shall be 240 V 50 Hz single phase and neutral via
distribution boards specified elsewhere.
Socket outlets, within buildings, rated 13 Amp 240 V 1 phase 50 Hz shall comply with BS 1363
and be of the switched socket outlet (SSO) type, coloured white metal clad. All other socket
outlets; plugs; connectors and appliance-inlets rated up to 125 Amp shall comply with BS 4343
(CEE 17) and shall be to watertight classification. They shall be as follows:
25 V 1 phase 50 Hz 110 V 1 phase 50 Hz 230 V 1 phase 50 Hz 415 V 1 phase 50 Hz -
2 pole coloured violet.

3 pole (2P + E) coloured yellow.
3 pole (2P + E) coloured blue.
5 pole (3P + N + E) coloured red.
All BS 4343 socket outlets and appliance-inlets shall be supplied complete with mating plug and
connector. All socket outlets and appliance-inlets shall be mounted so that the centre of the
pins/sockets is not less than 1 m above finished floor level. In addition, angled socket outlets
and appliance-inlets shall be positioned so that there is adequate room and accessibility for
inserting the mating plug/connector with its associated cable. The cables shall not be stressed
beyond their recommended minimum bending radius. All single phase socket outlets rated
above 25 V shall be protected by a residual current device having a rated residual operating
current not exceeding 30 mA and a disconnection time within 0.4 second.
The fuse or MCB ratings and number of ways shall be reviewed by the Purchaser and neutral
bars shall have a separate terminal for each outgoing fuseway. Insulating barriers shall be
fitted between phases on 3-phase and neutral boards. All ways designated spare shall
nevertheless be equipped with fuse carriers and fuses or MCBs. All fuseboards or MCB boards
shall have securely fixed to the inside of the lid, a typewritten circuit chart mounted inside a
transparent non-flammable pocket. Electrical distribution circuits for power and lighting shall
not incorporate ring mains. The height of accessories in millimetres as measured from the
finished floor level to the top of the accessory cover plate shall be as follows:
Distribution boards
Light switches
Socket outlets
Connection units for water heaters
Room thermostats
2.6.13
2000
1400
1200
1400
1600
Lighting
The lighting shall be designed to comply with the CIBSE Code for Interior Lighting and relevant
Lighting Guides including: LG1 The Industrial Environment
LG3 Areas for Visual Display Terminals
LG6 The Outdoor Environment Lighting in Hostile and Hazardous Environments
49
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Internal and external lighting shall be provided and planned throughout the facility to provide
lighting levels in accordance with IEC Codes and illuminate all working levels, rooms,
walkways, access points, special work stations, etc. in order to provide for the safety of the
personnel and of the operation.
The lighting appliances shall be positioned so as to be easily accessible and maintenance shall
be possible without danger using a simple ladder or a slide-out ladder.
Lighting shall be generally by high pressure sodium floodlights and plant wide fluorescent
lamps. High bay fittings to IP 54 with polycarbonate bodies and low bay fittings to IP 65 with
corrosion resistance fitted in ash discharge area, reagent preparation area and bag filter area.
External lighting shall be by high pressure sodium fittings; installed around the boundary of the
site and mounted off buildings or from lamp standards in order that the light levels are
maintained to IEC Codes.
An emergency lighting system shall be provided for all areas including all emergency exits and
exit routes for personnel safety and be installed in accordance with the requirements of BS
5266 and the local fire officer. The Luminaires shall be of self-contained non-maintained type,
connected to local lighting circuits. Emergency light fittings shall be self contained battery
operated units which have the facility to interconnect the lighting circuit with normal mains
lighting double circuit switches such that the emergency lights shall only illuminate in the event
of a main supply failure if the mains lighting is energised in the ON position. This
interconnection shall not, however, prevent the normal charging circuit within the emergency
light fitting from functioning when the mains lighting is in the OFF position. Illuminated exit
signs shall be located over fire exit doors.
Light sources shall be selected from those, which provide maximum conversion efficiency and
optimum longevity. The Contractor shall make due allowance for any deterioration effect in
lighting levels of equipment over time, and ensure the minimum light levels at 1m from the
ground during operations shall be as follows:
Representative activities/interiors
Standard service illuminance

(lux)
General offices, kitchens, laboratories, control room, 500 lux
conference/meeting room
Workshop and electrical rooms, tipping hall
300 lux
Monitoring automatic processes (measurement, command 250 lux
and control areas), turbine hall, local work
Loading bays, stores, toilets, washroom, corridors, 150 lux
walkways inside the buildings
External manoeuvring areas, building exteriors, weighing 50 lux
station, installation road accessways, external walkways,
cable tunnels
Table 2. Activities/interiors for each standard illuminance
The lighting maintenance factor in areas exposed to dust shall be of the order of 1.6. In areas
under positive pressure, it shall be of the order of 1.3 to 1.4.
Lighting and power socket installations in administrative areas shall be supplied from a
separate network, taken from the secondary of the HV/LV isolating transformer in order to
maintain an adequate level of isolation for the whole of the electric power network. The
transformer shall be rated to supply future installation lighting requirements in order to allow for
future expansion. Zones and areas with a large surface area (greater than 200 m2) shall be
supplied from several protection circuits in order to provide a minimum level of lighting in the
50
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
event of one of the circuits tripping.

Technical area lighting shall be controlled locally and centrally using indicator lamps.
Administrative, toilet, cloakroom and social areas, the workshops and stores shall be controlled
locally. Manual outside lighting controls and indicator lamps shall be grouped together on a
console located in the control room and the weighing station. Automatic controls shall employ
light level switches. A three-position switch shall be fitted for each function (Off-ManualAutomatic).
High performance sealed lights units fitted with a self-cleaning dust filter shall be employed in
areas which are prone to dust such as the tipping hall. Low luminance lights shall be installed
in the control room, the offices and the conference/meeting room in order to avoid glare or
fluorescent tube reflection on monitor screens and crane operating position. These shall be a
non-glare type, which reflect external light away from the screen and shall have minimal or no
effect on the screen brightness and clarity. The luminance values in the control room shall be
less than 200 lux at angles of incidence of 45o.
In accordance with legislation, safety lighting shall be provided as luminaires distributed in the
various rooms and halls, along corridors, above command-control points and above exits. The
luminaires shall be sealed industrial type in technical areas with environmental protection rated
in accordance with the nature of the risks involved (minimum IP 667). Protective grills shall be
fitted in areas where there is a risk of mechanical damage (as per IEC 529 or equivalent).
The requirements for external lighting installation works shall be the same as those applicable
to the public (street) lighting network. The installation shall be in accordance to NF C 17.200 or
equivalent. Lamp posts shall be used where aesthetics are important, for access to the plant,
for internal roadways and the parking areas. Wall-mounted appliances shall be used for
approaches to the buildings. Additional lighting shall be provided for external equipment such
as the reagent and residue storage areas, the domestic fuel oil tank, the weighbridge etc. Highpressure sodium vapour lamps shall be used and lamp posts shall be made of galvanised steel
coated in bitumen paint up to 200 mm above the ground.
Exterior lighting switches and those in damp situations shall be metal clad galvanised watertight with rotary switch action, alternatively MK Seal.
2.6.14
Fire Alarm and Evacuation System
A fire alarm and evacuation system shall be installed in accordance with BS 5839, Part 1 1988 and amendments and meet the requirements of the local Fire Officer, the Local Authority
Building Control, the Building Regulations, the NFPA and the Purchasers Insurers.
The Plant shall be segregated into Fire Zones for the whole Plant including the
office/administration building. The activation of the system shall be by manual operation from
the main plant control room and automatic operation via plant wide 'break glass' stations,
smoke detectors, optical sensors, infra red detectors and heat detectors as applicable. The
detection and initiation of the fire system in electrical switchroom, fire pump house and around
the turbine/generator/lubricating oil skid shall be via a double knock system.
The number of detectors fitted in the plant shall be sufficient to cover all areas of risk.
The plant shall have installed sufficient audible units in order that in the event of an evacuation
being required that they can be heard in all access areas, the dB level of the units being set at
least 5dB above the ambient levels.
51
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The complete fire alarm system shall include a fire system control and annunciator panel, which
shall be located in the control room, in accordance with the Fire Officer and reasonable insurers
requirements such as: diesel fire pump, electric fire pump, fire lift, fire detection and protection
system, etc. as a minimum.
2.6.15 Fire Protection and Detection Systems

The Plant shall have installed a comprehensive fire protection and detection system, which
meets the requirements as indicated in Clause 2.6.14 above.
Fire water cannons shall be provided in the waste bunker area. The firewater cannons shall be
capable and demonstrably capable during system testing, of covering the entire area of the
waste bunker, hopper and Confidential/veterinary/medical waste storage areas. The fire water
cannons shall not be installed in any area where they can affect the operation or maintenance
of the refuse cranes. The refuse bunkers shall have installed two independent fire detection
systems, one heat detectors and the other infra red. These cannons shall be capable of remote
operation from the central control room. The Contractor shall provide full details of the cannon
nozzles, pressures, spray patterns etc for review by the Purchaser. The fire equipment shall be
provided by approved specialist fire equipment suppliers and contractors. Firewater cannons
shall be protected by steel frameworks to avoid damage from the waste grabs.
The Plant shall have a reciprocating engine directly driven firepump complying with NFPA 20
1980. In addition, the Plant shall have an electrically operated firepump of the same rating.
Firepumps must be fitted with a flow line and indicator for testing by the insurer. The fire system
pressure shall be maintained with a jockey pump. This jockey pump shall be generously
designed to ensure the firepumps do not operate more frequently than once per week.
Operation of the firepumps shall be indicated at the DCS by an audible alarm. In addition the
status of each of the firepumps, available/running/tripped, shall be indicated on the DCS and on
the Fire System Control and Alarm Annunciator panel installed in the main control room.
The Plant shall have a firewater storage tank and fire pumps in accordance with the
Purchasers insurers reasonable requirements, the Fire Officer and Building Regulations but in
no case shall the firewater tank be capable of storing less than the design firepump capacity for
1 hour. The tank shall be connected to the local water supply and shall be insulated to avoid
freezing. A fire pump performance test line, complete with LPC approved Shunt Orifice
Flowmeter, shall be installed in order that the fire pumps performance can be tested and
demonstrated on a routine basis.
The Plant shall be provided with a dry riser. Fire hydrants and fire fighting connections (dry
risers and others) shall meet the requirements of the Fire Officer .
2 hour fire protection shall be provided to all buildings, rooms and panels around the waste
bunker. This 2 hour protection shall be applied to the glass partition in the Control Room/Crane
Cabin as the fire may be dug out by the crane grab and cooled by the firewater cannons. In the
event of a fire being detected in the waste bunker area, the control room/crane cabin glass
partition shall be cooled by automatically initiated externally fitted fixed water spray nozzles.
The turbine-generator and ancillaries shall be protected by a fire detection and fire protection
system. The area shall be segregated into three fire zones namely: turbine, generator and
lubricating oil skid. The fire detection and protection system shall be installed such that
detectors cover all the areas of risk and the fixed nozzle water sprays installed to BS 5839,
System type P1 and the NFPA. The fire detection shall be installed as a double knock system
using dry glass bulb for 1st knock and dedicated heat detectors as the 2nd knock: break glass
units shall be installed at each entrance to the Turbine Hall. These detection and protection
systems shall be segregated from the main EfW Plant fire detection and protection system.
52
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Locations of pipes and equipment shall be selected to minimise the risk of oil fires spreading.
Passive fire protection to the generator and the air condenser shall be included to meet the
insurer requirements.
Smoke extractors shall be fitted the boiler house, refuse bunker roofs and turbine hall to avoid
the build up of smoke.
All electrical rooms, MCC rooms, DCS rack room, UPS and battery room, crane control room
and instrument rooms shall be fitted with an automatic gas (Inergen or similar approved
supplier) protection system with detection loops all to NFA 2001. The fire detection shall be a
double knock system comprising of heat and smoke detectors. In addition there shall be break
glass units installed at each entrance to the rooms. The detection system shall be so designed
so that the units can be tested to BS 6266 to demonstrate the effectiveness regularly. The
rooms shall be of blockwork construction with suitable air tightness for effective use of the gas
system.
The fuel oil tank shall be bunded to 110% and located away from the main buildings. The tank
area shall be well lit with appropriate fire zoning. The filling position and hoses shall be
designed to efficiently refuel on-site forklift trucks, shovel loaders, articulated tractor units and
other waste vehicles. Suitable metering of the fuel inlet/outlet connection shall be provided. In
Sheffield, the existing tank may be used subject to the conditions set out in 1.1.
If propane gas burners are required, these systems shall be designed in accordance with
pressurised flammable gas regulations and tanks shall be located away from the main building
and fitted with appropriate fire zoning. (Not applicable in Sheffield)
The boiler auxiliary burner shall have installed a wire and fusible link system such that in the
event of an external fire the local fuel supply isolation valve is automatically shut.
Extinguishers of suitable types shall be installed in all parts of the facility to BS 5306 part 3.
All fire products and services including building products shall be supplied from the Loss
Prevention Certification Board's List of Approved Fire and Security Products and Services.
Their design, manufacture and installation shall be carried out by companies having achieved
LPCB's Quality systems certification.
2.6.16
UPS System
The plant shall be provided with an uninterruptible power supply and battery complete with
battery charger for specific essential equipment. The UPS system shall maintain all critical
information and safety conditions including CEMS and weighbridge for at least 30 minutes.
This shall be demonstrated by the Contractor. The UPS system shall supply 240V, 50 Hz,
single phase supplies for instrumentation and other essential controls such as the DCS. The
UPS shall be self-contained and fed from the 415 V Emergency switchboard. The unit shall be
equipped with a static by-pass switch, which provides a no-break changeover to a by-pass
supply. The unit shall be fully rated.
2.6.17 Telephone System and PC Network Infrastructure

The Contractor shall install a comprehensive telephone system around the Plant based on an
ISDX PABX Micro Telephone System being automatic, fully programmable and installed to BS
6450, BS 6305, BS 6789, BS 6328, BS 7378, BS 6833 BS 6317, BS 6320 and BS 7671 the IEE
Wiring Regulations 16th Edition. The telephone system shall be compatible with the Onyx
Environmental Group network and shall be reviewed by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall
install a minimum of three telephone direct lines; to the plant Main Control Room, Switchboard
53
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
and a dedicated fax line in the Managers office. The switchboard shall be designed for a fibre
optic incoming cable. The switchboard shall have a 4 hour UPS backup. The ISDX system
shall have up to 64 extensions, programmed as listed below.. The automatic switchboard and
main marshalling cubicle shall be installed in the Control Equipment Local to the plant Main
Control Room.
The telephone/modem sockets for switchboard extensions and direct lines, location, type of
handset, programme requirements and particular requirements are as follows:
Location
Telephone
Connection
Particular Requirements
Type
Type
Weighbridge
Desk Top
External Line
UK Only
Weighbridge
Desk Top
External Line
UK Only
Weighbridge
Modem
External Line
UK Only
Residue Hall
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Soundproof Booth and Flashing
Beacon
All Electrical Rooms Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Amenity Building
Wall Mounted
Internal Only
Capable of receiving external calls
CEMS Room
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Confidential/veterin Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
ary/medical Waste
Beacon
Store
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Workshops
Wall Mounted
Internal Only
Capable of receiving external calls
Laboratory
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Lift Motor Room
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Fire Lift
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Turbine Hall
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Water Treatment
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Iron and Ash Store
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Fuel and Propane
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Chemical Tanks
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
Recycling Area
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
EDC Meter House Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Via Pilot Cable
Offices x 3
Desk Type
External Line
Incoming/Outgoing World-wide
Offices x 3
Modem
External Line
Conference Room
Desk Type
External Line
Control Room
Desk Type
Direct Line
Control Room
Desk Type
External Line
Incoming/Outgoing World-wide +
Designated In
Control Room
Modem
External Line
Control Equip
Desk Type
External Line
World-wide
Room
Boiler House Levels Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Beacon
FGT residue
Wall Mounted
Direct Dial
Handling
Beacon
There shall be a direct telephone access from outside the plant to the various plant locations
54
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
fitted with external lines.

Telephones located in other noisy areas shall be wall mounted, installed in soundproof booths
with flashing beacon attached. For safety reasons, telephones shall be located in similar
positions on each floor and in particular the Boiler Hall.
The handsets installed in the Control Room shall be colour coded to identify their connections
e.g. Red for Direct Line and Green for External Line designated for receiving all plant Direct
Dials.
The Direct Dial plant wide telephones shall be programmed in order that upon lifting the
handset the telephone direct-dials to the plant Main Control Room designated telephone; but
can receive internal calls.
The telephones designated as External Line shall be programmed to receive any incoming call
but have the dial out capability designated.
The Purchaser shall review the locations and positions of all telephones prior to their
installation.
The telephone board shall have the following facilities as a minimum:
Reception of all the calls at a reception position
Direct routing on arrival of a line to an extension
Transfer of the lines to a night station or answering machine
Voice mail
Option of switching to general ringing, closure, no answering by the reception position and
transfer to a control room
Assignment of an outgoing line to a station
Reservation of a line for reception position
Standby music (customised music)
Centralised charging with printer and monitor screen
Adaptation card for internal cordless telephone and for 10 mobile portables
The mobile telephone installation shall be based on a radio system and shall allow:
Making of calls from these telephones with discrimination options from the exchange board
Execution of transfers
Sending of alarm messages
Cover for all of the site
The communication exchange equipment shall have the following facilities as a minimum:
Management of call routing
Processing and routing of the calls from the declared mobile extensions
Quality control of the connection and the automatic execution of inter-cell transfer when the
users are on the move
Accessibility of the antennae for maintenance
The origin of the installation shall be the cable brought to the telephone board
A telephone exchange shall be installed in the Control Equipment local to the plant Main
Control Room. The capacity of the telephone exchange shall be mixed network lines and
secondary extension lines as shown in the above table. The extension telephones shall be
installed, including all associated work involving sockets, connections, etc. All the distribution
shall be executed for the secondary extensions in PVC conduit. Multiple-pair cable shall link
the zone distribution frames.
55
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
PC Network
The Contractor shall supply and install a PC network infrastructure based on Microsoft
Windows NT and Category 5 Data Network. The network shall consist of plantwide fibre optic
cables connected to a Medium Capacity Server with a 4 hour UPS backup, mounted in a
lockable cabinet, located in the Control Equipment Room. The network shall connect to the
Server fibre transceivers via 4-core fibre optic cable to Category 5 UTP outlets located in the
plant Main Control Room, the Weighbridge, Conference Room and all the offices; two UTP
outlets per location. The Server shall have installed as a minimum 8 GB of hard disc storage
plus tape streamer disc type mass storage and CD ROM drives. The PC Network shall be
compatible with the Onyx Environmental Group network and shall be reviewed by the
Purchaser
2.6.18 Motors - Synchronous and Variable Speed.

Motors shall be single speed, continuous duty, three phase, squirrel-cage, and induction type,
to comply with BS 4999 and BS 5000. Motors shall be designed for full voltage (across the
line) starting. The rating of each motor shall permit the driven equipment to develop its
specified capacity continuously without exceeding the standard motor temperature rise limits
measured by resistance over an ambient air temperature of 40oC. Motors shall be provided to
operate satisfactorily at rated load under short-term voltage dip to 80% rated voltage for 1
minute during start-up of certain other large electric motors connected to the auxiliary power
system. All outdoor motors shall be supplied with electric anti-condensation heaters to maintain
dry windings during periods of plant shutdown. Motors shall have the following voltage ratings:
less than 0.25 kW, 240 V 50 Hz single phase; 0.25 to 150 kW, 415 V 50 Hz 3 phase. Motors
greater than 150kW operating at 415V are acceptable provided suitable soft start or variable
speed drives are used. The motor type and electrical design shall be reviewed by the
Purchaser.
Electric motor variable speed drives shall be of the Pulse-Width-Modulated converter type fitted
with Regenerative Braking.
All motors should have protective enclosures to BS 4999 Part 20 and IP 54 rated generally with
IP55 protection when situated outdoors or exposed to the weather or where hose washdown is
anticipated, including the lime preparation area.
All motors shall be of a totally enclosed fan cooled design, method of cooling IC 0141. The
cooling fans shall be directly driven from the motor shaft.
All variable speed motors operated in noise sensitive technical halls and areas shall have
acoustic hoods fitted to attenuate sound to the required dB limits. In order that routine greasing
of the motor bearings can be carried out, the greasing points shall be extended outside the
enclosures.
2.6.19 Switchgear and Isolators

All LV Switchgear, Isolators and Control Assemblies shall be lockable and comply fully with BSEN 60439-1: 1994 with an assembly of Form 4 Type 3; separation or equivalent as agreed by
the Purchaser such that gases produced by any fault do not impair the operation of functional
units in adjacent cubicle.
All circuit breakers shall be of the horizontal withdrawable four pole type, with automatically
operated shutters covering the main fixed isolating contacts. They shall be provided with
56
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
provision for locking the shutters in the CLOSED position when the breaker has been
withdrawn. The switching mechanism shall be robust and trip free, interlocked to prevent
access under energised conditions and shall incorporate a mechanically driven switch indicator
labelled ON/OFF driven positively in both directions. The circuit breakers shall be equipped
with 240 V 50 Hz motor charged spring wound closing mechanism and 110 V shunt tripping
and closing release. Volt free auxiliary contacts shall be provided with connections to outgoing
terminals to give remote indication of the state of each circuit breaker. All status signals shall
be terminated in a common termination section.
All switchboard outgoing feeders shall include but not limited to the following features: Fuse
Switch/Circuit Breaker (four pole) complete with door interlocked handle and OFF position
padlocking facility, mechanical ON/OFF indicator and correct rated fuse links/trips
Up to 800 A - Fuse Switches or MCCBs which conform with the requirements of BS 4752
800 A and above MCCBs or ACBs
3 current transformers for ammeter on front of each compartment
Flush mounting moving iron meter for indicating voltage
4 position ammeter selector switch to select each phase and OFF, the switch shall be rotary
pattern with a rating of not less than 15 A
LV distribution switchgear isolating switches shall be rated in accordance with BS EN 50947-3:
1992. MCCBs shall conform to the requirements of BS 60947-2: 1992. MCBs shall conform to
the requirements of BS EN 60898: 1991 and BS 5486 Part 12: 1979.
2.6.20 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The Contractor shall ensure that all electrical equipment supplied complies with the EMC
Directive and free from communications interference and protect personnel from environmental
or usage hazards which can be prevented. Equipment shall have an adequate level of immunity
to electromagnetic disturbance and must not itself generate excessive electromagnetic
disturbance.
2.6.21 Export Metering Software

The Contractor shall provide a computer and computer software to enable interrogation of the
export and import meters from a remote location. The Contractor shall supply a modem and
telephone connection as part of the Code of Practice 2 metering for remote monitoring, via the
software of the import/export meters.
57
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
2.7
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
2.7.1
General
The Plant shall be operated by an Integrated Computer Controlled System located in the
control room. Typical control loops are, but not limited to, the following:
Furnace and Grate Control
Flue Gas Treatment System including Fabric filter
Steam Control System
Turbogenerator Control (Remote Control only)
Water Treatment Package (Could be controlled by separate PLC)
Conveyors
District Heating
The Contractor shall offer a consistent control philosophy for the Plant using the same DCS.
The System shall be designed with sufficient redundancy to enable any one controller to fail
with no effect to the rest of the system. All control systems shall be designed to operate within
the manufacturers recommended computer loading limits and in any case no greater than
60%. The computer control system shall have the provision for 20% expansion.
The DCS system shall readily interface and download information to a Windows based portable
computer for manipulation.
2.7.2
Security Systems
The Contractor shall provide a CCTV system using fixed cameras stationed to monitor sensitive
areas such as tipping hall, feed hopper and ash conveyors. These cameras shall be auto-iris,
colour, wide angle and suitable for low ambient lighting levels. All camera housings shall be
IP64. There shall be a minimum of 13 cameras. The system shall include for 4 colour 14-inch
high-resolution monitors located in the control room. The monitors shall be capable of
displaying four pictures simultaneously in quad format or zoom to a single picture according to
setting.
The Contractor shall provide a night security system using appropriate detectors/sensors, high
intensity lights and remotely adjustable cameras arranged around the perimeter of the plant.
Surveillance of all areas of the site is required at all times.
A general evacuation alarm system shall be provided.
2.7.3
Control System
The Contractor shall install a Distributed Control System with the operator interface console
located in the CCR and module cabinets located in a dedicated control room.
The operator interface shall be a comprehensive unitised console comprising of identical
parallel CRT based standard operator interface units plus auxiliary bays housing, closed circuit
TV, emergency shutdown. From this console, the plant operator shall have command over all
control areas and observe the status of the complete Plant.
The basic design philosophy of the DCS shall be to utilise multi-function control modules
58
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
arranged in duty/standby back up pairs for security. The extent and configuration of the control
loops and the instrumentation incorporated shall be based on proven experience with Municipal
Waste Incinerators of similar size and design.
The Contractor shall design, supply, programme, install, commission a monitoring system to
display "on-line" the actual operation of the plant compared to its design performance. The
system shall measure turbine terminal conditions as follows:-Inlet steam pressure, temperature and flow.
-Extraction steam pressure and temperature and flow
-Exhaust steam pressure and temperature.
Flow will be pressure and temperature compensated.
The accuracy of the energy balance will be checked against extraction and exhaust steam
temperature and where an error is detected of more than 1% this will raise an alarm and
indicate on the display that figures are suspect. The system shall be able to calculate Plant
performance and directly prepare monthly management reports.
All VDU screens and targets shall be agreed with the Purchaser prior to installation.
2.7.4
Control Loops
A summary of the major control areas is as follows:

-Waste Input Control
-Combustion Air Control
-Furnace Pressure Control
-Furnace Temperature Control
-Steam Drum Level Control
-Deaerator Controls
-Steam Pressure Control
-Condenser Control
-Flue Gas Scrubbing Control
-Fuel Oil
-Compressed Air
-Turbine Auxiliary Control
-Auxiliary Controls
-Complete control from control room of District Heating network
All vendor packages with individual integrated control systems, shall interface with the DCS.
2.7.5
Safety Measures and Interlocks
All control systems shall be arranged to ensure that adequate safety measures are initiated in
the event of electrical power failure and other emergency conditions.
All plant wide alarm and trip monitoring equipment shall flag the alarms and trips to the DCS
on a first up basis; with time/date tagged to the alarm/trip.
A system of interlocking to be incorporated to ensure correct start-up, trips out, and shut down
of the control systems.
The safety systems shall give protection in accordance with the British Standards of which the
following emergency conditions are examples but not an exhaustive list:
59
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
-Electrical Power Failure

-Instrument Air Failure
-Low Drum Water Level
-High Drum Water Level
-Low Deaerator Water level
-High Flue Gas temperature
-Combustion Air Failure
-Operation of Emergency Stop Buttons
The Contractor shall be consistent with his approach as to the function of Emergency Stops.
Full compliance with BS 7671.53-04-05 is required to ensure that the resetting of the
Emergency Stop buttons will not restart plant and equipment and that all DCS and PLC
equipment start signals are disabled in order that the plant and equipment cannot restart
without operator intervention via the DCS, PLCs or MCCs.
2.7.6
Emissions Monitoring
The monitoring of exit flue gases shall be accomplished by a Continuous Emissions Monitoring
System (CEMS) which shall basically comprise of the following: sample handling system,
analytical device/devices, logging/reporting equipment.
The CEMS shall be provided by an approved supplier as detailed in the Contract Schedules.
The components measured shall be those stipulated by current legislation, EA IPC operating
licence and shall be, as a minimum, Opacity, HCI, S02, CO and 02. The CEMS shall have an
emergency electrical supply connected to emergency board as figure 2 (b) in the event of a
power failure.
The CEMS enclosure shall contain an anti-condensation heater.
2.7.7
Field Instruments
A complete set of field instruments and control items shall be included as necessary for the
safe and efficient monitoring of the plant. These shall be IP 55 minimum level of protection.
The Contractor shall ensure that full access is possible to all electrical, control and
instrumentation items for operational and maintenance activities.
The layout and routing of the computer cabling shall be reviewed by the Purchaser.
2.7.8
Pneumatically actuated control valves
The control valves listed below shall be bypassable and have local upstream and downstream
isolation valves and drain valves in order that they can be isolated without the need to take the
plant out of service.
air heater condensate return level control (100% capacity bypass valve)
feedwater regulator valve drum water level (100% capacity bypass valve)
condensate tank level control (100% capacity bypass valve)
dearator level control (100% capacity bypass valve)
60
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
2.8 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
2.8.1
General overview
This section details the general requirements for the DCS. The Contractor shall present
reasonable assurances to the Purchaser that the chosen system equipment will not be obsolete
in the next 10 years.
In the belief that portions of the system will eventually be withdrawn from sale, the Contractor
shall provide to the Purchaser, a firm commitment by the manufacturer of the DCS that for their
standard products, there will be either repair capability or equivalent parts and/or products
available for a minimum of 10 years from the withdrawal date. Every item detailed in this
specification shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply. The design, construction,
testing, workmanship and materials selection shall be in accordance with the latest industry
standards. The proprietary DCS shall form the plantwide control and monitoring system for the
facility and shall be complete with sufficient hardware and software to automatically control the
main process and auxiliaries. The basic framework of control and monitoring is detailed in the
table below.
Basic Control and Monitoring Schedule
Automatically control
& monitor
Monitor
only
Separate from
DCS
Per Stream:
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Refuse handling (Crane)

Refuse feed
Primary air
Secondary air
Auxiliary burners
Grate action
Combustion process and DeNOx
Flue gas extraction
Flue gas scrubbing
Boiler feedwater
Boiler outlet steam
Ash discharge
Ash conveyors
Surface cleaning
Emission monitoring
Emergency shutdown
9
9
9
61
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Common Services:
9
9
Steam distribution
Condensate & feedwater
Blowdown
Vacuum condensers
Lime preparation (option)
Deaerator
Active carbon
Fuel oil
Air compressor
Water treatment
Turbine generator
Turbine controls
Turbine/generator health monitoring
Residue discharge
Electrical distribution
Chemical dosing
Fire pump
2.8.2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Detailed Requirements
The main purpose of the distributed control system is to maintain and optimise production. The
brief requirement is therefore a fail safe control (redundant) dual-channel (redundant buses)
based open system for both safety and availability with redundant operator stations. The
operator stations shall obtain quick and complete information on the process sequence as well
as having command over all major control areas (ability to directly intervene at various process
points), including turbine generator (selected between pressure and speed control) and steam
valve, synchronisation, water treatment plant, ventilation system, compressors, 11kV and 415V
circuit breakers, utilities systems and equipment, analysers, systems providing regulatory
reports (CEMS), auxiliary burners, grate and every system needed to start-up or restart the
plant, including motor drives, from the central control room. The steam turbine governor
controls of the turbine governor, generator (AVR, Synchronisations etc.) and Water Treatment
Plant may be a stand-alone system (working as part of the plant DCS with interconnection to
the DCS through standardised and reliable data bus connections), handling controls informally,
while providing an information exchange with the overall plant DCS. The DCS shall be capable
of handling and providing the necessary control function for the steam turbine automation
(control and auxiliary devices) i.e. start and stop of auxiliary devices, automatic changeover
between redundant objects, turning gear control, vacuum breaker control, emergency stop
valve control and test, set point adjustment overspeed test, gland steam control etc.
The adopted process control concept shall define three levels of control namely:
Process control by means of a distributed control system (DCS).
Process safeguarding by means of a safety related system (sequential shutdown of plant).
Fire detection and mitigation via an independent fire system.
62
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Key Features
Process control concept:
Yes
Requirements
- Process control by DCS

- Process safeguarding by DCS and safety related system
- Fire & gas detection via independent fire & gas systems
Yes
Yes
Yes
System architecture
DCS type
Distributed and open

The Contractor shall provide a list of selected suppliers to be
approved by Purchaser. Typically ABBs "Advant OCS; Baileys
Freelance 2000; Fisher Rosemount (Integrator); Foxboro;
Honeywells Total Plant Solution; Rockwells Open Network
Architecture; Siemenss SIMATIC PCS 7; Toshibas TOSDICCIE 1200 Integrated Control System; Yokogawa etc.
- Operator & engineering stations

- Process control stations (process controller)
- Programmable controller
Reliability: fail safe control systems (redundancy at all

levels)
- Operator stations (configured redundantly)
- Control networks (configured redundantly)
- Process control station: CPUs, memories & power modules
(redundant)
- Fieldbus network (configured redundantly)
- Power supplies, volt. Regulators, backup batteries & chargers
(redundant)
- I/O boards for regulatory control (configured redundantly)
Yes
Open systems integration
Integration with other computer systems in the

plant
- Operator command over turbine genr control & major ctrl

areas
- Interface with the turbine generator control cubicle
- Interface with other packages: CEMS; water treatment
Yes
Yes
Hot stand by type, with a fully bumpless take-over
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Communications (Transmission Lines)

- Highest level (management information system network)
- Intermediate level (control LAN)
- Lowest level (field bus)
Upward Integration into MIS and sharing

between plant operations and other business
related functions (other departments at
corporate level)
2.8.3
MIS network (Ethernet - TCP/IP) @ 10Mbps

Redundant control LAN: Ethernet TCP/IP @ 10Mbps
Noise-resistant fieldbuses @ 500kbps to 2Mbps
Vertical integration of process, operations and business
management, allowing: data exchange and access to
database/network communications by personnel, examination of
key aspects of plant at any time in real time, looking up the
operations data, examining the cost/revenue accounts etc.
System Architecture
The hierarchical structure shall be divided into three levels as a minimum namely: operator,
process control and direct connection to plant or process and shall be capable of upward
integration into a corporate management information system at a remote location. The system
configuration shall allow direct connection of certain programmable controllers and personal
computers to the control LAN.
Operator Level
The operator level shall include traditional control system functions such as operation and
observation (process supervision and intervention) from the synoptic views, command over all
major control areas, archiving and logs, trends and alarms (event and alarm handling), process
sectioning and operator authority definition, information search capabilities, curve presentation
of historical data and system status monitoring and display, including free format generation of
mandatory/regulatory reports. Supervision shall be carried out on supervisory computers
located in operators console in a central control room. System operators shall be capable of
reaching all parts of the plant from the screens in front of them. The operator stations shall be
redundant and use standard PC hardware, either conventional high-performance PC or
industrial PC, running on Windows NT and other Window based operating systems. The
system software shall be capable of being transferred to any PC. One engineering station and
two operator stations shall be installed at the operator level. The engineering station shall be
used to configure and commission the system. It shall be a standard desktop PC. The
operator level PC shall also be capable of being used for configuration tasks. A separate
63
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
station shall be dedicated to the CEMS. Emissions monitoring data and calculations
concerning emissions, mandatory/regulatory reports and performance of the plant shall be
automatically generated, logged, stored and transmitted to the DCS and MIS. The reports shall
be customised to comply with the following requirements as a minimum: operating licence, the
Environmental Agencys Integrated Pollution Control Guidance Note S2 5.01: Waste
Incineration, all statutory requirements, regulations, related guidance notes and codes of
practice that are in force as agreed with the Purchaser.
Process Level
The process level shall consist of process stations, which consist of several rack-mounted
modules that can be extended with I/O units. The process station shall be configured
redundantly (CPU and power module redundancy). Modular plug-in input/output modules shall
be used in accordance with the type and quantity of process signals. Loop and logic control
functions shall be processed in their own process stations. The processing capacity and speed
of the process station shall be easily adapted to the demands of the automation task in order to
achieve the desired level of performance and allowing for 40% spare capacity and 20% for
future system expansion.
2.8.4
System communication
The operator/engineering and process levels shall communicate with each other via redundant
system buses Ethernet TCP/IP high speed control LAN according to ISO 8802.3 (IEEE
802.3) at 10Mbps and employ a coaxial cable as the transmission media. Connection to a
higher plant management information system level shall be through the standard TCP/IP
protocol. A noise-resistant, high-performing (500Kbps to 2Mbps) redundant fieldbus network,
which complies with control area network (CAN) shall be used for connecting process
controllers to I/O units, various drive units and subsystems, such as weighing systems, PLCs
for electrical control, controller, remote I/O units, fixed and variable speed motor drives, safety
systems as well as emission quality measuring and control etc.
Intelligent I/O Modules
The Intelligent I/O modules shall link the CPU module and the process. They shall receive data
from sensors and contacts, primary detectors, transmitters and other field devices and issue
positioning commands and feedback messages to the process. The I/O modules shall have the
following facilities as a minimum, to be adapted to the manufacturers proposed technology :
Input and conversion of conventional types of process signals and signal levels
Galvanic or optical isolation between process and system
Status LEDS for inputs/outputs
Externally-powered outputs
Automatic fault detection, fault signalling and temperature monitoring
Sensor and line-break monitoring
Short-circuit and overload protected digital outputs
Digital inputs protected against incorrect polarity
Isolated analogue inputs
Replaceable during operation
No switches, jumpers or potentiometers all settings shall be configured by the software
Front panel connection of process signals via screw terminals with keyed blocks codeable
against incorrect connection
2.8.5
Mechanical Design
64
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The construction of the process station, which consists of several rack-mounted modules
including link modules, CPU modules with its input/output modules, communication modules
etc. shall be made of sheet steel material. The front panel connection shall be user friendly and
make wall mounting possible. All modules shall be contained within a metal enclosure, with a
swingout frame, provide exceptional mechanical ruggedness, electromagnetic immunity and be
inserted into racks from the front and secured in position with screws. I/O signals shall be
marshalled in the I/O marshalling terminals of the process station and taken to the modules
using suitable multicore cable enclosed in, and mechanically protected by trunking, so that
external connections go through connection units, (cables terminated on Klippon marshalling
terminals) fitted inside the enclosure. These marshalling terminals shall be connected to the
I/O plant interface modules as agreed with the Purchaser. I/O marshalling terminals shall
include for at least 10% spare signals. The multicore cable connecting the marshalling with the
process control unit shall include sufficient cores to carry all the I/O signals, including the
signals for future use, and shall include sufficient spare cores to carry 10% of the signals. Each
process station shall include a plant schedule securely fixed to the inside of the cubicle door.
The schedule shall include full and complete details of the plant signals. The enclosure shall
be suitable for bottom cable entry and the degree of protection shall be a minimum of IP31 if
located in an air-conditioned room: ventilated, tropical and sealed, with or without heat
exchanger and with sheet steel or glazed door.
The module housing shall completely enclose any printed circuit board and other internal
assemblies. The process stations shall be designed to operate in ambient conditions of 0 to 50
o
C. A temperature sensor shall monitor the temperature of the module and trigger an alarm
when the maximum value permitted is reached.
Manufacturers proposed technology shall be taken into account for application of the above
requirements.
2.8.6
Quality and Electromagnetic Compatibility
The entire DCS shall comply with the European Union EMC standards.
2.8.7
Plant-Specific Displays
Plant specific displays geared to the demands of the plant operator shall be configured to depict
process activities. This shall include emissions and plant performance graphic displays.
Current process data or process states shall be viewed in digital or analogue form (e.g.
bargraphs, dynamic filling and trend windows). Depending on process states, graphic symbols
shall be replaced, flash and change colour and position in the graphic display. Selected
process points shall be viewed either via faceplates in the graphic displays or via the standard
group displays. If display selector fields or buttons have been configured, a specific selection
hierarchy shall be set up within free graphics for operation. A standard selection hierarchy shall
be offered by the display menu. This menu shall appear on the lower part of the screen, and
shall be capable of being cancelled in any situation to show all display types in which the
required process point is displayed. The latest alarm shall be displayed at the top of the
screen, no matter which display is active. The alarm shall also be announced audibly to make
the operator aware of it. From this alarm line, the troubled object shall be capable of being
selected for inspection and control directly. The alarm list shall be capable of being chosen to
examine the previous alarms. Process events and alarms shall be time-tagged in the process
controllers for best possible timing accuracy. Event messages and alarms shall be grouped
and gated in a multitude of ways, ensuring that only relevant and primary events are brought to
the operators attention.
2.8.8
Alarms
65
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The alarm shall also have the following features available:

Be issued over a limit set-up on an analogue value and/or a change in digital level
Be filtered; deletion of alarms in cascade and inhibition of alarms on systems not operating
or stopped
Be split into 3 levels:
Level 1: urgent alarm causing a release
Level 2: urgent alarm without release but requiring a rapid action from the operator
Level 3: information without any urgent aspect
Each level shall be subject to a specific treatment which shall combine:
Alarm appearance on the screen
Addition in the alarms list
Buzzer warning
Activation of the plant warning system
Current stream printer printing
Archiving in a monthly file
2.8.9
Archiving
The DCS shall be capable of calculating hourly average values upon 50 analogue values and
store them for a period of 2 months. These data shall be stored on a monthly data storage unit
(mass storage on a suitable fixed and removable media). The system shall be able to sample
50 analogue values in less than 1 minute and store them in a 10 days storage file. The stored
values shall be capable of being displayed in a graphical format.
2.8.10 Configuration and Commissioning

A standard PC shall serve as an engineering station, while a laptop computer shall be used for
commissioning and service. The operators shall witness the elaboration of the synoptic views.
The functionality of the graphic screen creation shall be tailored to match the requirements of
the operators who shall also be involved with the step-by-step of the screen creation. The
process controllers shall be capable of being configured, debugged and documented either online (while DCS is running) or off-line from the engineering station. For off-line configuration,
the DCS shall not be necessary the application program shall be capable of being transferred
to the system at any time. The software tool for configuration, parameter definition and
commissioning shall offer the following features:
A single software engineering tool for configuration of the automation functions and the
operator interface with displays and logs
Graphic configuration with high performance editors according to IEC 1131-3 standard in
the following programming languages or similar languages reviewed by the Purchaser:
-Function block diagram (FBD) for performing loop and logic control functions, i.e. loop flow
diagram (LFD) and logic sequence diagram (LSD)
-Instruction list (IL)
-Ladder diagram (LD)
-Sequential function chart (SFC) or sequence flow diagram (SFD)
A function block library with more than 170 proven and tested functions, greatly exceeding
the basic ones outlined in IEC 1131-3
Large ( > 200 symbols), extendible and user-definable macro libraries for graphic symbols
Project tree for flexible program generation and transparent program structuring (managing
and commissioning the entire user program)
General checking and plausibility checking of the automation functions via off- and on-line
test functions, including the option to call up the error source directly from the error list
66
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Variables and tags easily found in any editor with the help of convenient cross-reference
functions
ASCII importing and exporting of programs, displays, variables, tags and parts of the project
tree
Password protection to prevent unwanted modification
Systemwide uniform graphic documentation of the entire user program including automatic
system communication and peer-to-peer communications
An integrated on-line Help facility under Windows
Backup of the project file to an operator station (e.g. for reverse documentation)
Manufacturers proposed technology shall be taken into account for application of the above
requirements.
During commissioning, all or some of the user program shall be loaded into the operator and
process stations. It shall then be possible to:
Load modifications
Start and stop process stations
Start and stop reset tasks
Define parameters for function modules, and activate them
Display, set and track process values
Combine any values at any time in a trend window
Perform version and status checks
Perform diagnostics, including network diagnostics
Programme and set up data base of the DCS
Set up automatic report forms
Exchange data with Excel, Word, Access, G2 etc.
Call direct operating views with the same direct access as the operator stations
Optimise control/reconfigure
2.8.11 Sensors and Measuring Equipment

The Contractor shall supply a fully instrumented plant such that all parameters measured on an
individual system will enable the operator to fully understand how the plant is operating and can
diagnose faults from the measurements. The installation shall be fail safe (separate field
measuring instruments shall be employed for control and monitoring/indication purposes
associated with furnace chamber temperature, flue gas temperature outlet scrubber and boiler
drum water level). and fitted with all regulatory control systems to optimise the plant operation
and avoid any hazards to the operator staff and the equipment. The installation associated with
Boiler drum water level measurement shall comply with BS1113 Section 7 and Pressure
Systems and Transportable Gas Regulations 1989 in force. The installation shall also include
all pressure, temperature, and sample points needed for the execution of the performance tests
and current operational control. Each waste incineration line shall include in addition all
measuring points to allow the calculation of the waste LHV, boiler yield (separated losses
method) and steam cycle yield as well as to identify and locate the current maximum
continuous rating conditions (MCR) point within the firing diagram. The Contractor shall provide
a sufficient number of analogue and digital I/O capacity (channels). Analytical instrumentation
taking water samples via coolers (locally mounted) and sample lines from the boiler water,
steam and condensate shall be installed in the plant laboratory. The analytical instrument shall
measure parameters such as conductivity, pH, dissolved oxygen, silica and sodium. All
pressure tappings greater than 10 bars and associated with pressure, level and flow
measurement shall have double isolation valves fitted.
67
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
2.8.12 Performance, Consumables and Energy Production, and Emission Metering

In addition to sensors and actuators necessary to run the plant, the Contractor shall provide
equipment for the technical supervision of the plant and the preparation of regulatory reports in
general and the following in particular:
Reagents consumption measurement
Water consumption measurement
Electricity consumption and production measurement
Steam production measurement as well condensate measurement back to boilers
Emissions and other plant performance measurement
The above measurements necessitate at least the following instrumentation interfaced with the
DCS.
MEASUREMENT RATIO
MSW Refuse Processed (t/h)
Bottom Ash/Refuse Processed

FGT Residues/ Refuse
Processed
Metals/ Refuse Processed
Chemicals/ Refuse Processed
Consumables/ Refuse
Processed
Lime storage
Lime consumption/ Refuse
Processed
Process water consumption/
Refuse Processed
Raw water consumption/ Refuse
Processed
Total condensate returned to
boilers
Steam produced per stream and
total steam produced, steam /
Refuse Processed
Fuel oil storage capacity
Electricity generated
Turbine/generator running hours
and availability
Sewer flow
CEMS Annual releases and
monthly release rates
Export Power/Refuse Processed
Parasitic load/Refuse Processed
INSTRUMENTATION REPORTED TO DCS

MSW weight input via weighbridge software to DCS, refuse
crane grab load interfaced to DCS, number of grabs to
each furnace hopper to be recorded
Bottom ash weight input via weighbridge software to DCS
FGT Residues weight input via weighbridge software to
DCS
Metals weight input via weighbridge software to DCS
Caustic and acid weights input via weighbridge software to
DCS
Urea and activated carbon weight input via weighbridge
software to DCS. The urea and activated carbon injection
equipment shall be designed with a framework to allow load
cells to be readily fitted by others during the performance
test and during operation.
Load cells on silo
Load cells on preparation tank
DCS signal from process water flowmeter
DCS signal from raw water flowmeter
DCS signal from condensate flowmeter
DCS signal from steam flowmeters
DCS signal from level transmitter

DCS signal from turbine generator
DCS signal from turbine health monitoring
DCS signal from sewer outlet as per IPC requirements
DCS to compile monthly and annual IPC requirements and
reports. (temperature at boiler outlet to be monitored at
DCS)
Export meter to DCS
Metering on HV side of 11kV/415V auxiliary transformer
68
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
2.8.13 DCS Requirements

SYSTEM DATA DESCRIPTION
REQUIREMENTS
Operator/Engineering interface
station
CPU
OS
Windows graphical user interface (GUI)

Memory capacity
Chipset
Hard disk drive (HDD) storage capacity
Compact disk ROM drive (CDROM)
Multimedia features
Data storage unit (mass storage on
fixed
and Removable media)
Advance graphics features
Sound
Communications
Exchange of data with other system
and
Applications (software bundle) i.e.
access
of Real-time process database to
resident
software and all surrounding computers
No of tags/station: (points displayed to
operator)
Number of monitoring stations
Number of emissions monitoring station
Number of plant performance

calculation station
Number of engineering station
Laptop computer
Stand alone PC
High resolution video colour projector
set with a large screen (1.5 m x 1.5 m)
Min. of Intel Pentium III or similar

Compatibility with MS-DOS 7, Microsoft
windows NT or other windows based
operating system.
Free format graphic screen creation
Minimum of 256MB high performance (to be
proposed by the manufacturer subject to
Purchaser review.
To be proposed by the manufacturer subject
to Purchaser review.
Minimum of 6.4GB UDMA hard disk
32 speed, only on Engineering Stations
N/A
Min. of 3 magnetic, optical or tape streamer
disk type for long term data storage of:
operator station data, CEMS data & plant
performance calculation data
To be proposed by Manufacturer subject to
Purchaser review.
N/A
56 kbps data/fax/internet/ modem
Exchanges possibilities with such systems
as : Office application (Microsoft office,
Excel etc.), Data base (Excess & oracle), G2
from GENSYM, plant network via Ethernet,
data to Purchasers Management
Information Systems (MIS)
Minimum of 2,048 per station
Minimum of 2
Minimum of 1 (with associated reports
printer & long term storage device) or
provide standalone PC dedicated to CEMS
in the CCR.
Minimum of 1 (with associated reports
printer & data storage device)
Minimum of 1 for configuration
For commissioning and service
For office applications
To be installed in the conference room as a
presentation tool and to incorporate remote
control with a built-in mouse and facilities for
changing and viewing locally, the schematic
view of the entire process and electrical
parts of the plant from the conference room
69
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Viewable image size

Display
Resolution
Lamp type
Lamp life (Hrs)
Input sources
Speakers
Video compatibility
CRT (high resolution computer
monitors)
Screen size/viewable
Resolution and refresh rate
Screen controls
Safety and ergonomics
Others
Printers (No. and type of event/alarm

printers)
Mouse/trackball
Touch panel
Operators keyboard
Uninterruptible power supply for DCS
(redundant)
Display colours
Mimic views
Number of tag characters
Real-time trends
Historical trends
Historical storage points
Graphic screens
Alarm grades (user configured)
Labels (associated with the number of

tags)
Guidance message
EFW
30 to 300
3 panel polysilicon LCD
1,024 x 768
150W DC - 260W DC metal halide
Minimum of 800
3 selectable
2 x 1W
PAL, NTSC, SECAM, S-Video
For high level graphics use. Monitor with
enhanced display to provide a high quality
image
21/20 SVGA
1,280 x 1,024 @ 75Hz or better, noninterlaced display and flicker-free image
Controls shall be easy to use and locate.
Basic, geometry and colour controls are all
needed. Digital controls with on-screen
displays are preferred
Tilt and swivel base, non-glare, MPR-II or
TCO certified
Aperture grille technology, 0.25 aperture
grille pitch or better, plug & play +, colour
management software
Minimum of 5 printers 720 dpi resolution,
comprising 3 for alarms & data logging,
reports printing and a coloured printer for the
operator station data plus 1 each for CEMS
data and plant performance calculation data
Mouse or trackball
Optional
Dedicated to process control giving operator
direct access to normal control functions
Sized for 30 minutes supply with 30%
reserve
Minimum of 256
Optional
Minimum of 16
Minimum 128 points (cycle 1,5,10,30,60
seconds)
Minimum 512 points (cycle 1,2,10,20,30
minutes)
Minimum of 10,000
Minimum of 64
3 types (very serious, serious and minor),
latest alarm displayed at the top of the
screen & announced audibly
Minimum of 2,048
Minimum of 512
70
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Software features
Transparent & rapid operation
Large no. of standard displays
Easy operation using mouse &

keyboard
Direct & rapid selection of
measuring points
Full graphic display
Uniform message concept
Configurable sound for each

message
Messages displayed in different
colours
No. of user groups/access profiles
Specific password for each user
Trend archiving
Logging (signal sequence, plant

and disturbance course logs)
System diagnostics
Easy and secure on-line

maintenance
Self-documenting and periodic

reports for plant management
custom display/report generation
(free format report generation and
documentation of data from plant)
Functions Process visualisation

(Display):
Coloured mapped graphics
Plant-specific free graphic displays:
EFW
Yes
Overview, group, faceplate, SFC, time
scheduler, trend, message & operator hint
list, system etc.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Clearly arranged display of messages &
operator hints
Yes
Yes
Minimum of 16
Access to operator station function shall be
security protected by keylock and password
Yes, locally at plant. In addition, archived
files requested from stations on the Ethernet
To document events, states & sequences
from the process
Minimum of 3 detailed levels (system,
station and module overviews)
System diagnostic utilities, portable
diagnostic computer, system maintenance
alarms, screen error codes and diagnostic
messages pointing to documentation, LED
status indicators
Daily collection/summary of operating data
from the individual plant and supervisory
computers: operation reports, water and
reagents consumption, electricity
consumption and production (revenues),
steam production counting as well as
condensate back to boilers, emissions etc.,
as a minimum
Information on automatic functions
represented by graphic symbols
Single displays of the entire process lines,
including PID and function with mini trend
display including emission and plant
performance, indication lights, analogue
displays, electrical single line diagram,
circuit breakers and disconnecting switches,
synchronisation column, synchro coupler
and associated devices, DCS architecture
etc.
71
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Standard displays: (User

configured)
Advanced graphic features
Display update
Display build up time
Control LAN (System bus)
Bus type
Application
Access method
Transmission speed
Transmission cable
Transmission method or standard
Transmission Distance
Number of connection nodes
Transmission protocol
EMS features
Process controller (Process station)
Link modules
CPU modules (two for CPU
redundancy)
RAM capacity
EEPROM
Task execution
Process interface
EFW
1 overview, 96 group, 42 trend, time

scheduler, SFC, system, faceplates for
process points, 12 signal sequence,
disturbance course and plant logs, 2000
message list and lines, and operator hint list
display, tabulated information on command
etc. as a minimum
Including split vision, windowing and
zooming
Typical of 1 s
Typical of 1 to 2 s
Configured redundantly
Full ethernet or similar
System bus. Connection of operator stations
(for operation and observation), engineering
station and process stations
ISO 8802.3 (IEEE802.3) CSMA/CD or a
suitable deterministic access method
10 MBPS
Coaxial cable or similar
Baseband 10 BASE 5 or similar
> 500 m, extendible to 1555 m through the
use of repeaters
Up to 99 consisting of operator stns, process
controllers, general-use PCs, PLCs etc.
TCP/IP or similar
EMC council directive 89/336/EEC
For logic, sequencing, data and text,
arithmetic, reporting, and regulatory control
(including self-tuning adaptive control and
advanced PID control), digital positioning,
direct electronic weighing and direct control
of variable speed motor drives, calculation
and cumulative functions and
communication with other makes of
programmable controllers, including peer-topeer communications
For connecting the mains supply & for
interconnection of the racks
For processing the application program
including communication: Minimum of 32-bit
processor with high speeds bit processing
Minimum of 16 MB SRAM with battery
backup
For storing station/operating data
Cyclic, cycle times to be proposed by
Manufacturers subject to Purchaser review,
configurable, event-driven, free running
(PLC-mode)
I/O modules for analogue and digital sensors
replaceable during operation
72
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Interfaces
EMC
Ambient temperature
Program languages
Program capacities
General-purpose timers
General-purpose counters
Polynomial lines
Process I/O modules & number of I/O
points
Scan-time (signal update)
Total I/O capacity (I/O channels)

Analogue/pulse input
Analogue/pulse output
Digital input
Digital output
Communication modules (redundant)
Process station functions and function
blocks
Analogue processing
Digital value processing
Loop control
Logic control
Logic functions
Monitoring
EFW
Ethernet connection for system

communication and for linking to a
redundant CPU, field bus, RS 232 for
diagnostics, RS 485 for linking subsystems
e.g. weighing systems & PLCs
Radio interference suppression to EN 55022
& EN 55014, interference immunity to IEC
801, EN 60801, VDE 0843, severity level 3
and NAMUR industrial standard class II
0 to 50 oC
FBD (LFD & LSD); IL; LD; SFC or SFD or
similar reviewed by the Purchaser
Minimum of 96 control loops (including 16
high-speed tasks) & 64 sequences/station
Minimum of 192
Minimum of 96
Minimum of 48
For process connection. Intelligent and
include own processors. Minimum of 1800
points
User configurable, minimum of 5ms for
digital signals and 20 ms for analogue
signals
Minimum of 1800
to match application
For interfacing other systems or devices
Continuous process application
I/p & o/p conversion, linearisation, delay &
dead time filter, averaging/extreme value,
determination in time, set point adjustment,
counter with analogue i/p, time scheduler,
regulatory & motor-drive control with manual
supervision & intervention, self tuning and
adaptive PID control etc.
Digital output, monostable, switch on/switch
off delay, pulse time counter, pushbutton
etc.
Continuous control, step control, on/off
control, three position control, ratio control,
basic functions etc.
Individual drive functions, instrumentation
sequence control, dosing circuits etc.
Logic processing, average/extreme value
determination, comparator, binary switch,
multiplexer, converter (data type and code),
flip-flop, edge detection, string blocks,
summertime switching via clock etc.
Analogue, binary, event, connection
73
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Acquisition
Arithmetic functions
Fieldbus functions
Send/receive
Power supply (configured redundantly)
Field bus (Station bus)

Application
Transmission distance (short to

medium)
Transmission rate
Data throughput update time for signals
Transmission cable
EMC feature
Programmable controllers (PLCs)
Number of I/O points
Program memory
Run speed
Program languages
Programmable external interrupts
I/O modules
Standard type modules to be proposed
by the manufacturer subject to
Purchaser review.
Communication mode
Environmental conditions: Operating
conditions.
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity permitted
EFW
monitoring and audible alarm control.

Disturbance course acquisition, trend
acquisition
Basic arithmetic, numerical, logarithmic,
trigonometric functions and analogue value
& time limitation
Master and slave functions (PLC, weighing
systems)
Send and receive blocks for systemwide
communication
Typically 230 VAC (-15% to +10%); 115
VAC (-15% to +10%); 24 VDC (-20% to
+35%); interruption (< 20 ms without
function disturbance), to be proposed by the
manufacturer subject to Purchaser review
Configured redundantly
Station bus and as connection to additional
I/O units, PLCs, remote I/O, weighing
systems etc.
Minimum of 400 metres
500 KBPS to 2Mbps
Minimum of 5ms (digital) or 20ms (analogue)
Screened, suitable for the operation
environment and signal type to be carried.
Twisted pair/s for noise immunity and
shielded twisted pair/s to reduce further the
effects of extraneous interference signals.
Minimum of 1800
To be proposed by manufacture subject to
Purchaser review.
to be proposed by manufacturer subject to
Purchaser review
Ladder diagram, SFC or similar
8
Power supply to be configured redundantly
With 4 serial interfaces RS232C, RS 485,

RS 422 etc. for field buses
0 to 50oC
[ 75% annual average, no condensation; [
95% for 30 days per year
74
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Equipment implementation and

integration
Arrangement of operators console

The operators console, when fully
assembled to form 1 composite suite of
desk type panel housing all equipment
&
facilities required by the operator for the
day
to day ctrl & monitoring of the plant
Operators console construction
Cable entry
Engineering station
User support
Documentation
Equipment standardisation
Agency approvals
Class/division
Certified for use in hazardous locations
UL, CE
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
feature
Security systems
Type of CCTV camera (coloured)
EFW
The Contractor shall propose a layout of the

central control room, which shall have a
window partition with the engineering
station. The process controller and interface
enclosure shall be located in a safe & clean
room environment, which is air conditioned,
filtered and pressurised to a positive
pressure
An assembly with a horizontal or inclined
control panel or a combination of both, which
incorporates PC hardware, VDU,
Desk type assembly comprising sections for:

2 operator stations each comprising
keyboard, VDU, disk drives & associated
electronics, CEMS, weighbridge control
station, 2 emergency shutdown buttons,
CCTV monitor & camera selector unit,
telephone set, fire fighting system, stand
alone PC, socket outlets, plus separate
alarms events printer and logs reports
printer tables at each end and other utilities
as a minimum
Bottom cable entry
To be located in a separate room within the
vicinity of the central control room &
separated by a transparent window
Planned user support, training,
documentation, human support, change
mechanism, continued user support etc.
As built, programming and setting data and
files of the DCS
Shall be selected from one supplier with
standardised modules used throughout
Fixed, Pan and tilt, Infra red as agreed with

the Purchaser
Number of cameras
Minimum of 13
Process/site surveillance/areas covered Site entrance, weighbridge x 2, tipping hall,
feed hopper, grate, ash conveyor, bottom
ash storage, turbine hall, chimney, others as
reviewed by the Purchaser
IP rating
Minimum of IP 54
75
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Type and number of monitors
EFW
Minimum of 4 high resolution colour

monitors
76
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
Number of pictures displayed on

monitors
Multiplex features
Recording and playback media
Night security
Evacuation alarm
Auxiliary equipment
Installation and cabling
Installation
Cabling
Labelling
Earthing
EFW
Up to 16
Yes, 13 cameras to be fully multiplexed
VCR
Yes
Yes
Yes
To BS 7671 and latest industry standard
To BS 7671 and latest industry standard
To BS 5378 Parts 1, 2 & 3 and BS EN
60439-1
Clean earth in accordance with
Manufacturers standards for the DCS and
other sensitive electronic equipment and
control systems
77
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
2.9
OTHER FACILITIES
2.9.1
Laboratory
EFW
A fully equipped and furnished laboratory shall be provided in line with the technical
requirements of the Plant complete with a manual analyser cubicle, installed conductivity
meters, sodium monitors, dissolved oxygen analysers and pH meters to fully analyse boiler
waters and condensate together with the initial fill of these reagents. The laboratory shall be
located adjacent to the demineralisation plant with sampling facilities capable of being safely
routed directly to the laboratory. The laboratory shall be fitted with laboratory grade facilities:
laboratory work benches, externally vented fume cupboard, a wash basin, hot and cold water,
drying facilities and desk.
2.9.2
Galleries, ladders and access/maintenance areas
Stairway access shall be provided to all items requiring regular/routine operation and
maintenance. Galleries shall be provided to enable access to all equipment that requires
maintenance. The Plant shall be designed to enable the maximum access to equipment for
maintenance purposes. Dead ends shall be avoided.
Permanent safe access shall be provided in accordance with the relevant British Standard
(hoops correctly spaced on the back of vertical ladders, correct handrail heights and
kickboards, correct step width on stairs) to allow normal inspection and routine maintenance on
major items of plant and machinery. Access for entry into pressure vessels boiler drums and
gas passes must be adequate and in line with the most recent Confined Space Regulations.
Platforms, hatches and channel covers shall be galvanised.
2.9.3
Maintenance Hoists and Beams and Working Areas
Items of equipment weighing more than 25kg that require regular removal/replacement during
operation or for routine maintenance at each scheduled maintenance shutdown shall be
provided with a maintenance beam.
Items of equipment weighing more than 25 kg requiring less frequent removal/replacement for
maintenance shall be provided with access for mobile or temporary lifting equipment provided
by the purchaser. If the provision of such access is not possible maintenance beams shall be
provided.
The following shall also be provided with lifting beams:
Primary and secondary air fans
ID fan
Electrical maintenance hoists and lifting beams shall be provided for the following:
Waste feed crane
Waste feed hoppers
Reagent and chemical handling areas as necessary
Residue handling areas as necessary
Steam Turbine hall
Fabric Filter covers
Workshop
78
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The Contractor shall ensure that when lifting items of equipment, the lifting hoists have clear
unobstructed lifts, working areas and the ability to move horizontally.
Sufficient anchorage points shall be provided elsewhere to enable effective maintenance of all
items of equipment.
2.9.4
Mechanical/Electrical/Instrumentation Workshop
A mechanical workshop with a minimum 150m2 floor area shall be provided with access at
ground level for fork lift truck vehicles. An electrical/instrumentation clean workshop shall be
provided with a minimum 50m2 floor area, which can be located at any level and segregated
from the mechanical workshop. The maintenance workshop shall have a entrance door wider
than 3 metres. The workshops shall be fully serviced with instrument air, plant air and electrical
supplies at all voltages.
2.9.5
Stores
A stores area with a minimum of 100m2 floor area shall be provided. Forklift truck access shall
be provided.
2.9.6
Insulation Specification
BS 5322 and BS 5970 for energy efficiency purposes and in areas of personnel access based
on a cold face temperature of 50oC. Removable valve and flange boxes shall be provided and
cladding shall be aluminium of minimum thickness 0.75mm. Trace heating shall be installed in
such a manner that pipe sections and equipment can be removed without the need to interrupt
other sections of trace heating.
2.9.7
Instrument and Plant Air
Instrument and Plant air shall be provided with at least 50% standby compressor capacity and
100% standby drier capacity with a dewpoint of -20 oC. Reciprocating air compressors shall not
be permitted. Forklift truck access shall be provided to the instrument and plant air compressor
room.
2.9.8
Vacuumation System
A centralised vacuumation system shall be provided to enable a high standard of housekeeping

with in the Plant. Layout of connection points to be reviewed by the Purchaser
2.9.9
Pipework
The Contractor shall design the Plant pipework in conformance with British Standards. All
pipework shall be painted or banded, named and identified in accordance with BS 1710 with
the provision of arrows indicating the direction of flow.
All pipework shall be laid to falls to avoid ponding of liquid with the provisions of drains to
completely drain any system. All pipework of 50mm diameter and above shall be office
79
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
designed using isometric drawings and not be site routed.

No drain pipework shall discharge directly onto floors, suitable gullies shall be provided.
2.9.10 Security
The Contractor shall provide site security facilities in the form of a gatehouse with the provision
for weighbridge weighing, monitoring and control activities. These functions shall be duplicated
in the CCR. In Sheffield, the existing gatehouse may be re-used subject to the requirements of
1.1.
2.9.11 Colour coding and identification of systems

Unique permanent tags shall be fitted to all plant and equipment, valves, electrical and
mechanical equipment, cabinets and safety systems detailing identification number and
purpose and reviewed by the Purchaser
2.9.12 Isolation and locking mechanisms

Electrical panels, isolators, pipeline valves and other items where required for safe
maintenance shall be capable of being locked off by means of key, padlock or other approved
method.
The list of applicable items shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
2.9.13 Spares
The Contractor shall supply a complete list of all spares including critical and 6 month O&M
spares for review by the Purchaser.
The Contractor has priced in Schedule 16 for costs of spares. These documents shall be priced
and open for acceptance.
80
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
2.10
EFW
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING
2.10.1 General
The whole civil engineering design shall be carried out by the Contractor and shall be under his
entire responsibility.
The Contractor shall provide all demolition, building and civil engineering works for the
clearance, support and housing of the plant and equipment contained in the Plant together with
all necessary internal and external infrastructure works to enable safe and efficient operation of
the Site and Plant.
Details of the civil works are described in the Detailed Civil Engineering Specification attached
hereto in Part 2 Volume 2 of this Specification.
Principal elements shall include all necessary temporary and permanent works associated with
the construction including, but not limited to: standby substation, main export substation,
weighbridge, fuel tanks, water treatment tanks, interceptors, main plant buildings, foundations,
piling, structures, cladding, electrical and mechanical services, roads, landscaping ..
2.10.2 Design
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design and co-ordination of all elements of
the civil engineering and building works.
All design shall be carried out with due regard to accepted current engineering practice and in
strict accordance with all relevant current Legislation, Regulations, British Standards, Codes of
Practice and, current Building Regulations. Structural elements shall be designed to carry
specific loads imposed by plant and machinery and complimented by design loads taken from
BS 6399, Design Loadings for Buildings. Design wind loads shall be generated using CP3:
Chapter V : Part 2, Wind Loads, and snow loads shall be taken from BS 6399, Design Loadings
for Buildings. On-site access roads shall be designed in accordance with Highways Agency
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges, TRRL Report LR 1132, TRRL Report LR 192 and
associated Council Engineer's Department publications, relevant local Standards and Acts.
The Contractor shall submit the relevant drawings for Building Regulation approval in coordination with and after review by the Purchaser and his Consultant, and the Contractor shall
make such detailed submissions as may be necessary to the Planning Authority pursuant to the
Consents given under the Town and Country Planning Act. The Contractor shall pay all fees
related to these works. The Contractor shall also inform and liaise with Building Control
Inspectorate including the local Fire Officer for the required on site inspections.
Each part of the works shall be designed for a reliable operating life and not less than the
design life stipulated below:ESCCBH_EFWSpec_Rev1.doc
81
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Years
Roads and Fencing:
Roads and Car Parks
Fencing
60 (resurface every 25 years)

20
Buildings:
Brick concrete or stone
Steel and timber
Temporary
Cladding vertical and roofing
60
60
10
20
Drainage:
Other than PVC
PVC including fittings
60
40
The Purchaser shall engage Consultants to evaluate and control the Contractors Works. The
Contractor shall co-operate at all times with the Purchasers Consultants.
2.10.3 Demolition and Site Clearance

The Contractor shall demolish the structures and foundations existing on the new plant location,
reusing certain features or processing recovered materials. The Contractor shall demonstrate
that any recovered parts or items shall meet all appropriate standards and legislation including
any Environment Agency requirements. The Contractor shall also satisfy the Purchaser that all
recovered parts or items satisfy the design life criteria as detailed in 2.10.2 for reliable operation
without incurring annual maintenance and repair costs in excess of new parts or items. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all services and supplies and water courses are not
damaged and the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of their reinstatement.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of all waste disposal tickets for all material sent offsite.
The disposal of crushed concrete shall be reviewed by the Purchaser.
2.10.4 General Earthworks and Grading

All earthworks shall be carried out in accordance with Series 600 of 'The Specification for
Highway Works' published by HMSO and only construction plant suited to the materials to be
handled and traversed shall be employed.
All surplus excavated material shall be removed from site to a licensed tip. The Contractor shall
ensure all disposal costs are included in the Contract Price.
2.10.5 Roads
The Plant shall be furnished with a road system to facilitate safe and efficient traffic circulation
onto and around the site. This shall be achieved with the construction of rigid pavement
designed and constructed in accordance with Highway Agency Design Manual for Roads and
Bridges. The Contractor shall confirm through a traffic study that the site road system is
suitable.
The infrastructure works shall include but not limited to, all necessary hardstandings, kerbing,
82
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
footways, street lighting, road markings, signage and barriers, drainage, hard landscaping and
protective barriers.
2.10.6 Fencing Works and Gates

The site shall be fully enclosed by the Contractor at commencement of the works complete with
suitable gated access constructed. Temporary fencing may be erected and then replaced by a
permanent fence of 2.5m height and to a specification to be approved by the Purchaser. The
security of the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor from commencement on site until
handover to the Purchaser following successful Acceptance Testing.
2.10.7 Landscaping
The Plant shall be provided with landscaping designed and constructed to meet the relevant
planning conditions. The Purchaser shall undertake all necessary discussions with the Local
Authority Planning Department to satisfy Planning Conditions relating to the landscaping of the
site.
2.10.8 Drainage Systems
Details of the existing connection points for water supplies and discharges shall be under
Contractor responsibility. The Contractor shall be responsible for connecting up to these
services at the site boundary or. In the event that the Contractor recovers any of the existing
drainage systems, then a CCTV survey shall be conducted to prove the integrity of the system
and this shall be reviewed by the Purchaser and approved by Local Building Control.
Foul and stormwater drainage systems shall be designed in accordance with Sewers for
Adoption, the Building Regulations 1992, BS 8301, Private Water Utility, EA and County
Council requirements. Contaminated surface water shall be intercepted.
The Contractor shall arrange and pay for the necessary connections to be made to the water
supplies and sewers and pay all associated charges up until Take Over. Upon Take Over, the
Contractor shall provide all necessary information to enable the Purchaser to take over the
water supply and to obtain the necessary discharge consents from the EA. The Contractor shall
comply with all discharge consents during the construction and commissioning of the Plant.
The drainage system shall include all necessary road gullies, manholes, catchpits, interceptors
and ironmongery which shall be tested in accordance with British Standards.
Surface water or storm water run-off shall be discharged to the surface water system according
to the EA Prevention of Pollution Guidelines.
Typical sources of process or contaminated waste waters are: boiler blowdown, water
treatment plant regeneration liquors, drains and overflows. The Plant shall be designed as a
zero discharge plant. Drainage, pipework and tanks receiving liquids from the steam system
shall be designed for a liquid temperature of at least 90C.
The Contractor shall provide a wastewater interceptor pit, suitably lined/painted, capable of
holding high pH liquids with a capacity of 60m3 above low level pump cut off position with pH
metering, and acid tanks to enable these liquids to be treated for discharge into the local utility
system and meet EA limits. A sampling system shall also be supplied.
The Contractor shall provide a specific services supply point (connected to the Plant network)
which shall be connected to a contractors portacabin during future shutdown periods when
83
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
there is a need for extra office accommodation. This supply point shall consist of the following
easily connected services: a switched 415V AC 3 phase welding sockets and 110V AC sockets
for small power each rated at 100A, 1 towns water supply, WC/foul drain connection. The
location of the supply point shall be reviewed by the Purchaser, a typical position is adjacent to
the storage bays or below elevated structures.
2.10.9 Underground Pipework

Excavation, earthwork support, trench bottoming, bedding and surrounding backfilling and
making good activities shall be provided for the safe and efficient installation of process and
mechanical pipework. All chambers, inspection pits and thrust blocks shall also be provided.
Stormwater drainage, chambers, manholes, interceptors etc., shall be inspected designed and
tested in accordance with the Sewers for Adoption, Building Regulations 1992 and BS 8301,
Clause 25 as well as with published EA guidelines. All testing shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Purchaser and the approval of Local Building Control and shall be carried out
at the time of construction and at the end of the commissioning period.
2.10.10 Substructure
The Contractor shall design and construct the foundations of the Plant to BS 8004 and make
due allowance for all existing structures and topographical features.
2.10.11 Superstructure
The main complex shall be either of concrete construction to BS 8110 or steel framed structure
designed and erected to BS 5950 with reinforced concrete slab floors, galvanised steel grating
platforms, catwalks and profiled steel or concrete roofs.
The enclosing envelope shall consist of typical features including: masonry walls to
approximately 2.5m together with plastic coated profiled steel sheeting on galvanised steel
sheeting rails and attached to the building's structural frame. The exterior metal panels shall be
a sandwich, field assembled type and insulated to reduce thermal and noise transmission as
specified elsewhere. The cladding shall incorporate glazing panels and louvres as appropriate.
Further details of the external finishes are identified in the Detailed Civil Engineering
Specification.
All lift shafts shall be enclosed and meet the relevant Fire Officer requirements.
External doors and fire exits shall be provided and agreed with the Fire Officer.
The steel structure shall be in accordance with the National Structural Steelwork Specification
for Building Construction which shall include, but not be limited to: the steel structure shall be
blast cleaned to Swedish Standard SA 2, painted with a primer prior to being brought to site
and then properly stored. Damage to steelwork during erection and from other works shall be
repaired by power tool abrasion and touched up using an appropriate matching paint. This work
and procedure shall be reviewed by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall apply paint coating
systems to all steelwork to ensure a typical time to first maintenance of 10-20 years as per BS
5493. The paint system must contain a site applied top coat with an easily cleanable
aesthetically acceptable finish similar to polyurethane.
As an alternative to a painted structure, the Contractor may propose a galvanised steel
84
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
structure to BS 729.
A common approach must be taken for all steelwork protection and this shall be agreed with the
Purchaser.
All external steelwork such as condenser supports shall be galvanised to BS 729.
2.10.12 Construction
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all setting out and construction in
accordance with BS 5606 Accuracy in Building and the Contract.
The classification of surface regularity of all insitu concrete floors shall conform to Class S.R. 2
given in table 1 of BS 8204.
2.10.13 Turbine Hall

The turbine hall shall be designed to house the turbine-alternator with sufficient laydown area to
allow for the turbine casing, diaphragms and shaft to be easily accommodated. The turbine hall
and crane shall be designed to allow easy removal of any component or equipment for loading
on the equipment removal vehicle for removal from site without removing other equipment
ducting, racking and pipework. Access shall be designed to accommodate 16.5m long low
loading type vehicles. All floor laydown areas shall be designed to withstand the imposed loads.
The turbine foundation design shall be designed using a three dimensional dynamic calculation
to DIN 4024/BS 4675 Part 1 Class IV as well as to the approval of the turbine maker. The
Contractor shall carry out a site analysis and vibration signature to verify the assumptions made
in the design model. The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Purchaser for review
prior to construction. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Purchaser at the design and
construction stages that the steam turbine and the turbine foundations shall not cause vibration
interaction.
2.10.14 Waste Transfer Station Facilities
The bunker shall be designed to transfer waste by out-loading waste from the bunker into bulk
haulage vehicles without interruption to the operation of the ERF. Out-loading capacity shall be
at least 700 tonnes per 10 hour working day.
2.10.15 External Storage Bays

Not used
2.10.16 Ash Conveyors

The Contractor shall design the vibrating ash conveyors such that no vibration shall be
transmitted to other areas of the plant, in particular the Offices and Amenity Buildings. The
vibrating conveyors shall be erected on independent and insulated single large plinths to avoid
vibration transmission and this shall be designed to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
2.10.17 Cladding
85
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
All cladding shall be designed in accordance with BS 5427 for a design life requirement of 20
years to first maintenance. All cladding shall be protected during the erection of all works to
avoid damage from construction traffic including all installation operatives. The Contractor shall
provide in his submission costs and maintenance schedules. Guarantees shall be issued to the
Purchaser on completion, in compliance with the manufacturers requirements and shall not
violate the exclusion list of guarantees of the coating system.
All fasteners for the cladding shall be of a high quality such as stainless steel in accordance
with the design life of the cladding material and in accordance with the written
recommendations of the cladding manufacturer.
The Contractor shall ensure that access is provided to all areas of cladding, glazing and other
exteriors for the safe cleaning of all elevations to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
2.10.18 Building Finishes
All roller shutter doors shall be electrically operated and painted galvanised steel.
All external and fire doors shall be steel fire-resisting, flush, hinged doors and frames with
appropriate door furniture.
Internal plant doors shall be of steel construction with appropriate door furniture. Where steel
doors are likely to be damaged by the environment, the Contractor shall propose alternatives
for review by the Purchaser.
Windows shall be double glazed. Window frames shall be finished in acrylic and shall include
all matching sills, sealants and window boards.
The finish of concrete floors shall be power floated and shall be subject to the application of a
proprietary liquid floor hardener such as Rockbond Ferroplate or similar. All electrical rooms
shall receive an epoxy resin floor coating. The Contractor shall ensure that the floor finishes are
faultless at Takeover and this may necessitate the work being carried out again at the end of
the project.
The Contractor shall supply all external signage for the plant including, but not limited to: door
nameplates, fire exits, emergency signs.
2.10.19 Amenity Facilities

The Amenity Facilities, located in the incinerator itself, shall comprise of the following:
Office for the Plant Manager,
Office for the Operation Manager,
Office for the Maintenance Manager,
Office for secretary,
Meeting Room for 10 people,
Library and archive
The Amenity Facilities, located in the ex-CWI building, shall comprise of the following:
Clean/dirty area male locker rooms, WC/shower rooms
Clean/dirty area female locker rooms, WC/shower rooms
Mess/kitchen room
In the same building, space shall be made available for 30 people for management/
administration with associated meeting and conference room.
86
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The location and construction of the amenity facilities shall be such that noise emanating from
the plant is reduced to the levels detailed in Schedule 7 Guarantee Tests and Procedures.
Locker rooms shall come complete with at least 35 full height lockers (size: 1775 height x 450
width x 550 depth) for each staff member. All changing rooms shall be sized to accommodate
at least 20 personnel simultaneously.
All the Locker Room equipment shall be made available for temporary accommodation at the
Lumley Street Depot.
WC/Showers, wash basins, shower units, urinal and cistern and WC pan and cistern shall be
Armitage Shanks or similar approved supplier. All taps shall be of the mixer type. The whole
area shall designed as a wet area and shall be laid to falls with floor gullies fitted with rodding
eyes.
Suitable heating and ventilation shall be provided, and particular attention shall be paid to the
WC/Showers and mess room where humidity and strong smells are to be expected.
The mess/kitchen room shall be equipped with a single bowl and drainer sink, fridge, cooker,
storage cupboards below and above with a minimum of four double electrical sockets.
Safety flooring shall be provided throughout the Amenity areas.
Shower areas shall be furnished with slip resistant ceramic tiles.
Amenity Facilities shall be suitable for the anticipated staffing levels. All necessary sanitaryware
shall be provided including all water closet units, urinal bowls, drains, taps, paper towel and
toilet paper dispensers, hot air dryers, soap dispensers, mirrors, shower units, basins etc.
Ceramic wall tiling shall be provided to dado height on all walls in kitchen areas. Full height wall
tiling shall be provided to all toilet and shower rooms. All fixtures and fittings shall be submitted
to the Purchaser for review.
Toilet partitioning shall be of melamine faced chipboard with edges faced in PVC and 'H'
section extruded aluminium jointing.
All areas of regular occupation shall be painted and decorated to high standard.
Internal partition walls shall be of dense concrete block or plasterboard on wrought softwood
studding as appropriate for fire resistance and noise considerations. The Amenities Facilities
partitioning shall receive a plaster finish. Painted timber skirtings shall be provided throughout
the facilities except where noted in the Detailed Civil Engineering Specification.
2.10.20 Office Facilities

Internal partition walls shall be of dense concrete block or plasterboard on wrought softwood
studding as appropriate for fire resistance and noise considerations. The Office Facilities
partitioning shall receive a plaster finish.
The Plant shall be designed with offices as dimensioned on the Architectural Concept Drawings
in Appendix C and further detailed in section 2.11 Detailed Civil Engineering Specification. All
offices shall be provided with a high quality finish, solid wood doors, carpet and high quality
lighting.
87
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Separate toilet facilities shall be provided within/adjacent to the office facilities as detailed
below:
Male toilet:
1 x WC, 1 x urinal, 1 x basin, drains, taps, paper towel dispensers, hot air dryers, soap
dispensers, mirror
Female toilet:
2 x WC, 1 x basin, drains, taps, paper towel dispensers, hot air dryers, soap dispensers, mirror
All plumbing and drainage installations shall be in accordance with the Local Water Company
requirements and installed in compliance with the appropriate British Standards to the
satisfaction of the Local Building Control.
The Detailed Civil Engineering Specification details the minimum standards for the room
finishes. The Contractor shall provide greater finishes detail during the contract and these
details shall be reviewed by the Purchaser.
2.10.21 Continuous Emissions Monitoring Equipment Enclosure

A weatherproof, secure enclosure shall be provided to house the emissions monitoring
equipment.
2.10.22 Foundations and Plinths

All necessary purpose designed plinths, thrust blocks and temporary works of a civil
engineering nature shall be provided with a good standard of finish to the satisfaction of the
Purchaser.
2.10.23 Building Services

Lighting shall be designed in accordance with the latest CIBSE Guide to Current Practice
including Parts A, B & C of Guide Code of Interior Lighting and all wiring shall conform with the
16th Edition IEE Wiring Regulations.
All necessary sanitaryware complete with hot and cold water supplies, wastes and soil-vent
pipework shall be provided. The hot water system shall be provided from local electric heating.
Lighting shall be provided to all areas using mainly moisture-proof fluorescent fittings with a
small number of high bay type fittings as appropriate. Lighting levels shall be provided in
accordance with IES Codes.
Emergency lighting and illuminated fire exit signs shall also be provided. The emergency
lighting system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of BS 5226 and the Fire
Officer.
Small power shall be supplied for cleaning and handtools by 13 amp sockets mounted on
columns extending the existing system, suitably protected via ERD's.
2.10.24 Mechanical Services
88
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Clean and odourless air shall be drawn from an external fresh air source and filtered for use in
heating and ventilation systems. Ventilation systems shall be correctly designed to take account
of high humidity and smells, particularly in changing rooms, showers, toilets. Offices, control
rooms, electrical and similar rooms shall be protected against dust and fume ingress. Proper
ventilation shall be provided to all rooms to ensure proper dissipation of heat generated by
equipment at maximum ambient temperature. Rooms shall be designed to a slight overpressure without causing problems with doors closing and opening.
Heating and inlet and extract ventilation shall be provided to all rooms such as: central control
room, stores, offices, amenity facilities, motor control rooms, turbine hall, and all electrical
battery rooms. Air conditioning shall be provided to the Central Control Room, Conference
Room and Offices, as detailed on the Detailed Civil Engineering Specification, which shall be
maintained at a slight over-pressure using a supply of filtered air.
For firefighting purposes hose reels and extinguishers where appropriate shall be provided
within the buildings as recommended by the Fire Officer.
Sufficient pressurised hose reels shall be positioned at appropriate locations within the building
and these shall be agreed by the Purchaser and the Local Fire Officer.
Sufficient pressurised washdown hoses shall be provided by the Contractor.
2.10.25 Lift Installation

The Plant shall be provided with an electrically operated heavy duty goods lift with an operating
capacity of 2000 kg with a single point load of 1000 kg. The lift shall have all entrances on the
same side. The supply, erection, testing and commissioning of the lift shall be in accordance
with BS 5655 all parts and to the requirements of the Fire Officer.
The Plant shall be provided with an electrically operated personnel and disabled access fire lift
with a capacity of 10 persons and 830 kg. The lift shall operate from carpark/ground level to the
offices and visitor routes levels and shall have all entrances on the same side. The supply,
erection, testing and commissioning of the lift shall be in accordance with BS 5655 all parts and
to the requirements of the Fire Officer. The lift will be supplied to a high standard of finish to be
reviewed by the Purchaser.
The visitor route shall be designed for disabled access and the routing of three groups of ten
visitors around in the Plant at the same time.
2.10.26 Services to Ancillary Buildings

Electric Lighting, Small Power and Heating Services shall be provided to all ancillary buildings
as necessary.
2.10.27 Site Signage, Identification and Plant Marking

The Contractor shall supply and install internal and external site signage in line with the
Purchasers Company Policy. These items are required in public areas, offices and visitor
routes and shall consist of the following with graphics, wording and corporate logos:
External Signage:
2 x Entrance panel 2.5m x 1.5m
15 x Activity Area/Direction Totems 2.0m x 1.0m
89
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
2 x Orientation Plans 2.5m x 1.5m

10 x Security/Safety Panels 1.0m x 0.6m
Internal Signage:
3 x Corporate/Information Panels 0.8m x 0.8m
8 x Security/Safety Panels 0.5m x 0.5m
2 x Process Arrangement Panels 1.5m x 1.0m
For each Office plus 5 extra: Door Signage 12mm x 65mm
These exact specification and details of the logos and wording shall be provided by the
Purchaser during the construction.
90
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
3.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
3.1
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall design and construct the Works to comply with all relevant legislation and
good engineering practice.
3.2
THE SITE
3.2.1
Inspection of the Sites
The Contractor is deemed to have visited the Sites and evaluated the nature, extent, character
and difficulties of the Works, local conditions, accessibility of the Works, the supply of and
conditions affecting labour, materials and any other matter which may affect his Tender. No
claim will be considered for want of knowledge in this respect.
3.2.2
Use of the Site
The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose other than execution of the Contract
Works.
The Contractor shall not obstruct any public way, path or otherwise or suffer to be done
anything which may amount to nuisance or annoyance and shall not interfere with any right of
way, access or light to adjoining properties.
The Contractor shall provide for all construction laydown and accommodation areas within the
agreed boundary of the Site to complete the Works.
The Contractor shall not permit cranes or other plant to swing over or otherwise encroach upon
or over any adjoining property owned or operated by a third party or the Purchaser without their
written consent.
3.2.3
Site Access
The Contractor shall not cause any plant or vehicles to obstruct the main entrance or shared
accessway at any time so as to cause disruption to the free flow of vehicles onto and off the
site.
3.2.4
Demolition Works
The following requirements stated in this section 3.2.4 shall only apply ifdemolition works are
required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete decontamination (to the extent required
by the General Conditions of Contract), cleaning and safe, efficient demolition and restoration
of the Amenity block to completely meet the requirements of the Environment Agency, the HSE,
Local Authority and the Approval of the Planning Authority prior to the commencement of the
new EfW Plant construction. The Contractor shall apply for and comply with the Section 81
Notice of Demolition as issued by the Local Building Control, as well as any other notifications
91
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
required in accordance with Regulations including the Asbestos Regulations and the Health
and Safety at Work Act 1974.
Specifically for the demolition works, the Purchaser shall engage the services of a Specialist
Demolition Consulting Engineer to act on his behalf and to perform the role of Planning
Supervisor for the demolition works. In order to comply with the CDM Regulations, the
Contractor shall demonstrate that the proposed demolition subcontractor is competent to carry
out decontamination and demolition works of this nature.The demolition of the existing structure
shall be monitored and controlled by the adoption of method statements to describe each stage
of the demolition. All method statements shall be reviewed by the Purchaser prior to any
demolition activities commencing on site.
All materials, wastes and contaminants (to the extent required by the General Conditions of
Contract) produced by the demolition works shall be recorded and a complete set of records
maintained for review by the Purchaser at any time during the demolition and construction of
the Plant.
On completion of the demolition works, the Contractor will make available a complete set of
records which details the full traceability of all materials, wastes and contaminants (to the extent
required by the General Conditions of Contract) produced by the demolition works as required
by legislation and in particular CDM, Duty of Care, Local Authority section 81 and HSE
requirements.
3.2.5
Existing structures, site services and building on site
The Contractor is responsible for determining all existing structures, buildings, ground
conditions, mains and other services on and adjacent the Site and for arranging with the
appropriate authorities for their protection, re-use, demolition, re-routing as may be necessary.
The existing 11kV supply (to be confirmed) will be available as a construction supply for the
EfW Plants. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to relocate this supply whilst developing
the Site.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage occurring as a result of the Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and installation, and maintenance of
all temporary and permanent water distribution systems up to Takeover, The Contractor shall
satisfy himself that the size and available water pressure for both supplies are acceptable for
the new Plant.. The Contractor shall connect to the supplies and pay all associated costs.
The Contractor shall be responsible for installing and maintaining all other site
temporary/construction supplies and utilities including water, electricity, drainage and
telephones including the cost of metering and consumption from commencement on site up to
Takover.
The Contractor shall be take care not to damage any culverts and foul sewers during
construction. The costs of repairing any damage shall be recovered from the Contractor.
3.2.6
Working Hours
The working hours shall be 8:00am to 6:00pm Monday to Friday. No working on Bank Holidays
shall be permitted. Working outside these hours may be permitted, however in these
circumstances any deviation from these hours, shall require written consent from the Purchaser
prior to the Contractor to preparing an application to and obtain written consent from the
92
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Planning Authority, Landlord and County Council.

All site work shall be carried out without causing disruption to the traffic accessing the existing
incinerator facilities. This may necessitate the Contractor organising major deliveries outside
peak vehicle flows.
3.2.7
Site Security
The Contractor shall be responsible for the erection and maintenance of fences around the
areas handed over to him for the execution of the Works and shall be responsible for site
security in these areas.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorised access to the site
whilst under his possession, and of his employees and subcontractors into adjacent operational
ones until Takeover.
3.2.8
Construction Meetings, Progress and Reporting
The Contractor shall organise weekly site meetings with the Project Managers/Purchasers
personnel. In addition monthly meetings shall be held between the Contractor and the Project
Manager/Purchaser to discuss the overall progress of the project and consequent evaluation of
interim payments.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate all subcontractors and suppliers to ensure that the Works are
progressed in a co-ordinated and efficient manner, information is available to all parties, delays
are addressed promptly and the Takeover date is achieved.
The Contractor shall hold regular management and co-ordination site meetings and report in
writing to the Purchaser each month. Reports shall cover, but not be limited to, the following
issues:
programme review
shortages/delays
progress
completion date
outstanding information
3.2.9
Site Facilities
The Contractor shall provide a new 40 by 12 secure, quality portacabin for use by the
Purchaser as a visitor/conference room, kitchen and office suitably partitioned and complete
with all furnishings, power and water for the duration of the Contract.
3.2.10 Contaminated Materials

The Contractor shall be responsible for the loading, hauling and disposal of contaminated
wastes (to the extent required by the General Conditions of Contract) and materials from the
Site during the construction of the Plant. Landfill sites operated by the Purchaser and its
affiliated companies shall be used in preference to alternative disposal sites.
3.2.11 Contaminated Soil
All soils that have contaminant levels below the Threshold Trigger Levels as defined by the
93
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
Interdepartmental Committee for the Redevelopment of Contaminated Land (ICRCL) 59/83 List
shall be considered as uncontaminated. In the absence of any ICRCL limit, then either The
New Dutch list or The Kelly Indices shall be utilised. These materials shall be utilised by the
Contractor on Site, as appropriate.
All soils that have contaminant levels ranging between the Threshold Trigger Levels and the
Action Trigger Level as defined by the ICRCL 59/83 List shall be re-used on the Site by the
Contractor as an element of the site levelling exercise. In the absence of any ICRCL limit then
either The New Dutch list or The Kelly Indices shall be utilised. If no clear guideline for the
Action Trigger Level then exists, the established principle of using ten times the ICRCL
Threshold Trigger Level shall be used.
All soils that have contaminant levels above the Action Trigger Level as defined by the ICRCL
59/83 List shall be considered as contaminated and shall be removed from Site by the
Contractor (to the extent required by the General Conditions of Contract) to an appropriately
licensed site. In the absence of any ICRCL limit, then either The New Dutch list or The Kelly
Indices shall be utilised. If no clear guideline for the Action Trigger Level exists, then the
established principle of using ten times the ICRCL Threshold Trigger Level shall be used. The
Contractor shall be responsible (to the extent required by the General Conditions of Contract)
for the loading, hauling and disposal of contaminated soils from the Site during the construction
of the Plant. Landfill sites operated by the Purchaser and its affiliated Companies shall be used
in preference to alternative disposal sites.
3.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1
Legislation and Regulations
The Works shall comply with all appropriate by-laws, statutory regulations, Factory Acts, Health
and Safety, Construction and Design Management and Fire Regulations and other provisions
required by Law. The Contractor. shall prepare, make all submissions and pay all costs in
obtaining approvals from the appropriate Authorities. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the timing of all submissions and no extensions of time will be entertained by the Purchaser
regarding obtaining such approvals or for any related costs.
3.3.2
Construction Noise and Pollution
The Contractor shall have taken into account all costs and be responsible for preparing and
applying for an Application for Consent under Section 61 of the UK Control of Pollution Act
1974, and subsequent compliance with any special provisions required under the Consent as
granted during all construction works. The Contractor shall provide the Application for Consent
for review by the Purchaser. The Purchaser shall then forward the Application for Consent to
the Local Authority for their response. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timing of all
submissions and no extensions of time will be entertained by the Purchaser regarding obtaining
such approvals or for any related costs. The Contractor shall also comply with the
recommendations of British Standards BS 4227 "Code of Practice for Noise Control on
Construction and Demolition Sites"
All equipment shall be operated, wired and maintained so that disturbance to people living or
working in the immediate area is minimised. In particular, all items of machinery powered by
internal combustion engines must be fitted with effective and well-maintained exhaust silencers
and acoustic insulation to minimise noise.
Demolition and piling operations must be carried out using the quietest practicable method
94
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
available.
3.3.3
Fees, Rates, Licences and Permits
The Contractor shall pay any Local Authority fees and rates in respect of all temporary
buildings/structures/hoardings etc provided by the Contractor for the purposes of the Works.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all licences and permits in connection
with such temporary facilities.
3.3.4
Import Permits, Licenses and Duties
The Contractor shall obtain all import permits or licences required for any part of the Plant or
Works within adequate time having regard to the time for delivery of the Plant and date for Take
Over. The Contractor shall pay all customs and import duties arising from the importation of
plant/materials into the country in which the Plant is to be erected.
The Purchaser possesses various drawings of the Site and the existing structures and services
that are available for review by the Contactor. This information is available on a for information
only basis. The Contractor is to satisfy himself of its accuracy and relevance and the
Purchaser absolves himself of any responsibility for this information.
The section Additional Documentation contains civils drawings, which were reviewed by the
Contractor from the original project plant drawings.. It is the Contractors responsibility to satisfy
himself that all available information has been used in the design and construction of the Plant,
as no variation shall be considered on the grounds of lack of information.
95
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
3.4
HEALTH AND SAFETY
3.4.1
Safety, Health and Welfare
EFW
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety, health and welfare of all persons visiting or
employed at the site in connection with the Works. The Contractor shall strictly observe all
relevant legislation, regulation and safe working practices. The Contractor shall ensure that the
Works are carried out safely and in accordance with all applicable Health and Safety
Regulations, and the requirements of the local Health and Safety and Fire Officers.
Smoking is not permitted on the site or within the confines of the building.
The Contractor shall observe and ensure compliance with the Purchasers existing site rules
and regulations.
As soon as practicable after notification to proceed, the Contractor shall agree with the
Purchaser evacuation procedures from the site in the event of fire or such other emergency.
The Contractor shall keep daily records of site personnel working on the site and provide copies
to the Purchaser on a weekly basis.
The Contractor shall notify the Purchaser of the name of the Safety Adviser to be allocated to
the project as soon as notice to proceed is received.
The Contractor shall maintain a proper accident/incident/near miss reporting system for both
their personnel and that of their subcontractors throughout their presence on site and shall
comply with the Reporting of Injuries Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations 1995
(RIDDOR) copied monthly to the Purchaser.
The Purchaser shall employ an independent Planning Supervisor appointed in conformance

with the CDM Regulations.
The Contractor shall ensure that his employees and subcontractors do not park on or obstruct
in any way any public roadways. Arrangements for off-road vehicle parking or the bussing or
transporting of employees to and from the site shall be the responsibility of and cost to the
Contractor.
3.4.2
Safety Rules and Permit to Work Procedures
The Contractor shall supply to the Purchaser details of all their Safety Rules and Procedures to
be implemented on the site. These Safety Rules and Procedures shall be similar and
transparent with the Purchasers Safety Rules in order that the new plant and equipment can
be handed over with the least amount of disruption. These Rules and Procedures shall be
agreed with the Purchaser prior to implementation.
The Contractor shall ensure the competency of his staff and subcontractors staff prior to
allowing them to commence work on site. In particular, the Contractor shall provide to the
Purchaser a list of names of all their Senior Authorised Persons, Authorised Persons, Control
Persons, Persons allowed to Receive Sanctions for Tests and Competent Persons; the dates
when they attended the training courses for their authorisations as well as the venues and
against the names shall be notes as to their limits of authority.
The Contractor shall have in place prior to testing and commissioning a key safe system for
96
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
controlling the isolation and access of plant and equipment and a procedure for the control and
issuing of Permits to Work.
The Contractor shall adopt the Purchasers Permit to Work procedures.
3.5
PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
All project documentation shall be supplied in the English language.
3.5.1
Project Programme
The Contractor shall submit with his tender a preliminary programme bar chart of the whole of
the Works showing Takeover and Performance Testing.
3.5.2
Technical Bid Summaries
The Purchaser shall be entitled to attend technical review meetings with any tenderers prior to
order placement for the following:
Civil Engineering
Grate
Boiler
Turbo Generator
Cranes
Air Compressor Driers & filters
Flue Gas Treatment Equipment
DCS
Fans
CEMS
Air Cooled Condensers
Water Treatment Plant
Generator Transformer
HV, MV and LV electrical equipment
The Purchaser shall be allowed access to any drawing to which the Contractor has access
other than detailed manufacturing drawings, specification, tests, contracts, calculations,
electrical drawings etc and copies will be provided by the Contractor on request.
3.6
SPARES AND WARRANTIES
3.6.1
Spares
The Contractor shall request that all equipment suppliers submit with their bid, a required list of
spare parts with unit prices for 6 months operation. This list shall differentiate between long
term delivery/ strategic spares and 6 months operating spares. All spares required to ensure
the guaranteed availability shall be included in the list.
Before placing any order for plant or equipment, the Contractor shall use their best endeavours
to obtain confirmation of spare parts list from the supplier and a 12 month guarantee on unit
prices. The definitive list shall be passed on to the Purchaser together with the Contractors
final recommendation at least two weeks before the order is placed by the Contractor.
97
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
The cost of optional spares shall be provided as per Schedule 16 (Price Breakdown) of the
Construction Contract.
98
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Appendix B
General Weighbridge Specification

Mass Balance, Energy Balance,
Service Life Schedule
and Data Sheets
Appendix C
Architectural Concept Drawings
99
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
APPENDIX A:
WEIGHBRIDGE SPECIFICATION
An Approved Supplier
Refer to Schedule 14 (Sub-Contracting)
Type of Weighbridge
Full Pit Mounted 18m length
Standard Features
British Steel, Fully Blast Cleaned to SA 2.5

Epoxy Zinc Phosphate weldable primer
Bitumous Anti-corrosive micaceous iron oxide topcoat
Lightning Protection
Restraint-Post-System for loadcell protection
Number of Computer Screens

and number of input screens
Two PCs for input and two screens are required,

operating through a Control Hub
CCTV Cameras
Colour Camera, lens, case, 12 monitor, fixing bracket

and heater. Internal Junction Box and wall mounted.
Cameras shall be fitted to ensure full visibility of all fours
corners of local or remote weighbridges.
Alternatively a camera tower
Traffic Light
Red / green lights polycarbonate construction with

200mm diameter. Manually operated by weighbridge
operator in the weighbridge office with a timer and a
mimic panel.
Intercom
Two-way intercom required for driver to weighbridge

office
Software/Communications
Typically, Shering Sabre 8000 with internal modem link.
100
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
APPENDIX B
MASS BALANCE, ENERGY BALANCE, SERVICE LIFE SCHEDULE, AND DATA SHEETS
101
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
APPENDIX C
ARCHITECTURAL CONCEPT DRAWINGSThe Architectural Concept Drawings are as

follows:Internal Architectural scheme for office buildings
102
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
EFW
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A
AC ac
ACB
AGP
BATNEEC
BHN
BPEO
BS
CCR
CCTV
CDM Regulations
CEMS
CIBSE
CP
COSHH
CT
CTV
DC dc
DCS
DVDROM
EA
EC
EDC
EFW Plant
EMC
ERDs
EU
FBD
FGT
HAZOP Review
HDD
HSE
HWRC
Purchaser
ICRCL
IEC
IEE
IL
IP
IR
LCV
LD
LFD
LHV
LPC
LPCB
LSD
MCB
MCC
MCCB
MIS
ms
Current (Amps)
Alternating Current
Air Circuit Breaker
Advanced Graphics Port
Best Available Techniques Not Entailing Excessive Cost
Brinnell Hardness Number
Best Practicable Environmental Option
British Standard
Central Control Room
Closed Circuit Television
Construction, Design and Management Regulations
Continuous Emission Monitoring System
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
Code of Practice
Care of Substances Hazardous to Health
Current Transformers
Colour Television
Direct Current
Digital Versatile Disk Read Only Memory
Environment Agency
European Community
Electricity Distribution Company or National Grid Company whichever
shall apply.
Energy from Waste Plant
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Earth Resistance Detectors
European Union (including European Community)
Functional Block Diagram
Flue Gas Treatment
Hazard and Operation Review
Hard Disk Drive
Health and Safety Executive
Household Waste Recycling Centres
Purchaser Limited
Interdepartmental Committee for the Redevelopment of Contaminated
Land
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institution of Electrical Engineers
Instruction List
Internal Protection
Infrared
Lower Calorific Value
Ladder Diagram
Loop Flow Diagram
Lower Heating Value
Loss Prevention Council
Loss Prevention Certification Board
Loop Sequence Diagram
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Motor Control Centre
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Management Information System
Millisecond
103
Specification
Purchaser
Contract
msec
NCV
NER
NETA
EFW
NFPA
NTSC
O&M
OEM
OS
PAL
PCI
pf
PWU
QA/QC
REC (or PES)
RCV
RPI
SDRAM
SECAM
Millisecond
Net Calorific Value
Neutral Earthing Resistor
New Eletricity Trading Arrangements - Power Purchase Agreement with
REC
National Firepump Association, USA
National Television Systems Committee (CTV System Adopted in USA)
Operation and Maintenance
Original Equipment Manufacturer
Operating System
Phase Alternation Line (CTV System Used Generally in Europe)
Peripheral Control Interface
Power Factor
Private Water Utility
Quality Assurance/ Quality Control
UK Regional Electricity Company (or Public Electricity Supplier)
Refuse Collection Vehicles
Retail Price Index
Super Dynamic Random Access Memory
Squentiel Couleur Mmoire (CTV System Adopted in France)
SNCR
SVGA
SWA
SWG
TRRL
UA
UDMA
UPS
UTP
UV
V
VA
VDU
VME
VT
Selective Non Catalytic Reduction

Super Video Graphics Adaptor
Steel Wire Armoured
Standard Wire Gauge
Transport and Road Research Laboratory
Unitary Authority
Ultra Dynamic Memory Adaptor
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Un-Twisted Pairs
Ultraviolet
Potential Difference (Volts)
Volt-Amps
Visual Display Unit
Virtual Memory Extension
Voltage Transformer
104
Specification
ABC Ltd
EFW Contract
HV-LV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

33kV IMPORT/EXPORT SUPPLY
EDC
Metering
Interface/Boundary
Contractor
REC
Contractor
Metering
No. 1
33kV/11kV
Exp. Tran.
Generator
NER
Metering
No. 2
11kV BOARD
No. 3
No. 4
11kV/415V
11kV/415V
Aux. Tran.
Aux. Tran.
415V LV BOARD No.1
No. 5
Emergency
Diesel Generator
415V
415V LV BOARD No.2
11kV/415V
Existing Equipmen
Aux. Tran.
415V LV BOARD DHS

415V Auto Changeover
See Fig. 2 (b).
LV Single Line Diagram
415V LV EMERGENCY BOARD

To Fig. 2(b)
Emergency Switchboard 415V Auto c/o switch
Notes
11kV/415V Auxiliary Transformer nominally rated for stream load plus 20%
Interface/boundary between Contractor and REC defined at metering circuit breaker for import/export connection
Fig 2(a)
ESCCB&H-HV-LV-2aRev2.xls
34
Specification
ABC Ltd
HV-LV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
EFW Contract
nt
ESCCB&H-HV-LV-2aRev2.xls
35
Specification
ABC Ltd
EFW Contract
LV SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
Emergency
Diesel Generator
415V
See Fig.2(a)HV-LV Single Line Diagram

11kV/415V
11kV/415V
Aux. Trans.
Aux. Tran.
To Fig. 2(a)
Sp Sp Sp
1
2
3
415V LV BOARD
415V LV BOARD No.2

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 Sp
415V Auto Changeover
SP
415V LV EMERGENCY BOARD
Fans
Pumps
Note: Switchboard feeds
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SP
SP
SP
Note: Emergency Switchboard Feeds
UPSUPS
All LV Board Switches monitored and controlled via DCS
Hydraulic Pump BP (2)
Auto C/O of 415V Standby Supply upon loss LV board supply switch No. 4
Hydraulic Pump HP (2)
Furnace / boiler (others)
Air Register
Primary fan
PB Auxiliaries
Secondary fan
Fire Lift
Refuse crane
Bottom Ash
PB auxiliaries
110V/ 24V UPS
Hopper Heating
Reagent injection
Distribution Boards
Screw Conv. Heating
Bag filter
Lime Inj. Rotary valve
I.D. fan
End product
Compressor
Lighting / heating
Recirculation
Feedwater pumps
Lighting and small power
Note: UPS feeds
HP oil pumps
Spare switches suitably rated
CEM (Gas analysis)
Generator heater
Turbine aux. Oil pump
Weighbridge
Emergency oil pump
Spare switches suitably rated
Turbine control system

PLC system
Fig 2(b)
ESCCB&H-HV-LV-2bRev1.xls
35
Specification
OnyxUK Ltd
EFW Contract
SERVICE LIFE SCHEDULE
EQUIPMENT SERVICE LIFE

SERVICE LIFE per STATION ELEMENT
Sheet 1
Contractor
Service life Observations
Station description
Waste reception and handling equipment
Weighbridge - Weighing station
Year
FURNACE FLUE GAS
Overhead cranes and grabs
Year
COOLING -
Other handling equipment
Year
ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT
Furnace
Furnace (grate)
Combustion ancillaries (ducting, fans, burners, etc.)
Year
Year
Heat recovery installations

Boilers
Year
Ancillaries (pipework, cleaners, etc.)
Year
Steel frame, walkways, stairs, platform and duckboarding

Heat export heat exchangers
Year
Year
External DHS connection pipework
Year
Boiler Feed pumps
Year
Ash Disposal
Conveyors and Loading Equipment
Year
Ferrous sorting
Year
Other
Year
Miscellaneous equipment
Water treatment, demineralisation process
Water treatment, deaerator
Year
Year
Compressed air
Year
Special machinery - lifting gear
Year
Effluent treatment
Year
Measurement - Control - Regulation
Year
HV electrical installations
Year
Supply station and transformer
Year
Standby Supply
Year
CCTV monitoring
Year
The Contractor shall list the mandatory options in the same detail as per this Service Life table.
ESCCB&HServiceLife1.xls
1/2
OnyxUK Ltd
EFW Contract
SERVICE LIFE SCHEDULE

Contractor
Station description
Sheet 2
TURBO-
Turbine
GENERATOR
Generator
Year
Ancillaries and condenser (incl. bypass)
Year
Packaging, transport
Year
Unloading
Year
Turning gear
Year
Oil centrifugal pump
Year
Coolant
Year
Special tools for alternator rotor
Year
Equipment assembly/disassembly
Year
MV connections
Year
LV connections
Year
First oil fill
Year
Refrigeration loop
Year
Local control cabinet
Year
Ancillaries cabinet
Year
Electrical installation
Year
Contractor
Station description
Sheet 3
Dust extraction (Fabric filter)
Year
Reactor / filter inlet ductwork
Year
Reagent preparation / fresh reagent transport
Year
Residue removal/transport Equipment
Year
Reagent recirculation equipment
Year
Dewatering Equipment
Year
Framework, walkways
Year
Flue gas ducting and fluestack
Year
Electrical instrumentation
Year
Measurement
Year
FLUE GAS
TREATMENT
ESCCB&HServiceLife1.xls
2/2
Onyx UK Limited
EFW Contract
Contractor - Energy Balance Diagram - Sheffield
r 1 preheat
Loss of pipework
4
Soot blower
5
HP steam header
Superheater
22
21
20
Turbo-generator
7
Air 1 preheater
10
Boiler
MP steam header
19
13
Process off- take
Economiser
Air condenser
loss
18
11
16
Condensate
Condensate
tank
tank
Flash
tank
Make-up water
17
Deaerator
15
23
Hot tracing
14
12
Ejector
9
14
minimum* = minimum LCV without supplementary fuel oil
Operation 8000 h/yr.
Pressure
case 2-1
Temperature
Mini
Enthalpy
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Fluid
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
LP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
Condens.
Water
LP Steam
Water
Water
Water
Water
Electricity
HP Steam
LP Steam
Type
Saturat.
S. heated
Soot b.
loss
Ejector
Turb.
Intake
Turb.
Exhaust
Deaerator
Air heater
Process
To
deaerator
make-up
Deaerator
loss
feed pump
Eco. Inlet
Boiler
Blow d.
Desuper
heater
Alternator
Saturat. Air
heater
Hot tracing
Pass out 1 Pass out 2 Pass out 3
Bar abs.
Yield
Boiler yield (%) at MCR1500 hr(1) 8000 hr.

Air temperature reference (C)
case 2-1
French code (without heat from combustion air)
ASME code (with heat from air combustion)
Mini
C
kJ/kg
Turbo-generator yield (PF=0,8) 25% load
50%
75%
100%
case 2-1
Mini
Stream
LHV MJ/kg
case 2-1 Mini
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kW (2)
kg/h
kg/h
7.0
Thermal (Avg)
Alternator
mechanic
kW
(1) The flue gas temperature at boiler exit is controlled to ensure temperature
remains as per fouled conditions. Hence, boiler efficiency is the same in both situations
.../... .
10 C
(2) For an ambient air temperature of
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
Fluid
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
LP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
Condens.
Water
LP Steam
Water
Water
Water
Water
Electricity
HP Steam
LP Steam
Ejector
Turb.
Intake
Process
To
deaerator
make-up
Deaerator
loss
Eco. Inlet
Boiler
Blow d.
Desuper
heater
Alternator
Saturat. Air
heater
Hot tracing
Type
Pressure
case 2-2
Temperature
MCR
Enthalpy
Saturat.
S. heated
Soot b.
loss
Turb.
Exhaust
Deaerator
Air heater
feed pump
19
Bar abs.
Yield

case 2-2
MCR
C
kJ/kg
50%
75%
100%
case 2-2
MCR
Stream
LHV MJ/kg
case 2-2 MCR
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kW (2)
kg/h
kg/h
9.2
Thermal (Avg)
Alternator
mechanic
kW
.../... .
10 C
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
Fluid
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
HP steam
HP Steam
HP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
LP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
MP Steam
Condens.
Water
LP Steam
Water
Water
Water
Water
Electricity
HP Steam
LP Steam
Ejector
Turb.
Intake
Process
To
deaerator
make-up
Deaerator
loss
Eco. Inlet
Boiler
Blow d.
Desuper
heater
Alternator
Saturat. Air
heater
Hot tracing
Type
Pressure
case2-3
Temperature
maxi.
Enthalpy
Saturat.
S. heated
Soot b.
loss
Turb.
Exhaust
Deaerator
Air heater
feed pump
19
Bar abs.
Yield

case2-3
maxi.
C
kJ/kg
50%
75%
100%
case2-3
maxi.
Stream
LHV MJ/kg
case2-3
maxi.
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
12.0
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kg/h
kW (2)
kg/h
kg/h
Thermal (Avg)
Alternator
mechanic
kW
ESCCBHMassEnergy.xls
.../... .
10 C
Energy Balance Diagram
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
WORKGROUP: 210: STEELWORK AND METALWORK
SECTION NO: 220
TITLE: FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL
MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
Fabrication Drawings
Materials and Workmanship
Handrails and Ladders
Open Grid Steel Flooring
PARAPETS
UN-TENSIONED SAFETY FENCE
ANCILLARY STEELWORK
BOLTED CONNECTIONS
FOUNDATION BOLTS
CWSpec-220-Rev4.doc
1/5
Onyx South Downs
220.010
EFW Contract
GENERAL
The contractor shall submit to the Purchaser for his agreement the names of all
suppliers and manufacturers of proprietary or fabricated items prior to entering
into any agreement for the supply of such items. The Purchaser may order the
removal from site of any materials not so agreed.
220.020
MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
220.021
Fabrication Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare fabrication drawings and associated
documentation for all items of Miscellaneous Metalwork, and copies of these
shall be submitted to the Purchaser for his agreement in accordance with
Section 211 of this Specification.
220.022

Materials and workmanship for Miscellaneous Metalwork shall comply generally
with the requirements of Section 211 of this Specification.
Surface preparation galvanising and painting of Miscellaneous Metalwork shall
be in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.
Steel used in fabrication of Miscellaneous Metalwork shall be new material of
Grade S275 to BS EN 10025 : 1993 or equivalent unless instructed otherwise
by the Purchaser.
220.023
Handrails and Ladders

Handrails shall be provided to stair cases and elevated platforms.
Handrails shall be designed and detailed by the contractor in accordance with
BS 6399 : Part 1, and BS 5395 : Part 3 as appropriate. Handrails shall be
designed to withstand a horizontal force on the top rail of 0.7kN/metre.
All handrails shall be steel, fabricated generally in accordance with Section 211
of this Specification, and shall be finished with a galvanised metal coating and
decorative paint system in accordance with this Specification.
Steel handrails shall be fabricated from steel tubes complying with BS 6326.
The minimum section thickness shall be 4mm for rails and 3mm for posts.
Handrail standards shall be at maximum 1.5 metre centres. Minimum 100mm
CWSpec-220-Rev4.doc
2/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
high kick plates shall be provided.

Handrails and standards may be solid bar or hollow tube with minimum 3.25mm
wall thickness.
Full details of the proposed handrail layout shall be submitted to the Purchaser
for agreement prior to commencement of fabrication.
Access, maintenance and safety ladders shall generally comply with BS 4211
and the recommendations of BS 5395 Part 3.
220.024
Open Grid Steel Flooring

Open grid steel flooring shall be designed to support a uniformly distributed
load of 5kN/m2 with a maximum deflection not exceeding 1/200 of the span, and
to withstand three times the design load without collapse. The walking surface
of such flooring shall have a serrated or equivalent non slip finish.
Open grid steel flooring shall comply with BS 4592 except where amended
below.
The minimum thickness of load bearing bars shall be 5mm and the load bearing
bars shall have a minimum depth of 1/40 x span but not less than 20mm. They
shall span in the shortest direction and, where practical, the pattern shall be
continuous at the meeting point of separate pieces of decking.
Floor panels shall be clipped down to the supporting steelwork so that each
individual panel is held by a minimum of four clips. Studs shall be welded to the
supporting steelwork as required.
All panels shall be removable and fixing shall be such that where a panel is
removed, the remaining panels will remain firm and replaced panels are safe
against displacement and dropping through before the clips have been
fastened.
Each panel shall have an edge bar on the bearing edges, which shall have a
thickness not less than the load bearing bars.
Open grid steel flooring shall be finished with a hot dip galvanised coating.
Materials used in construction shall comply with BS 4360: 1990. Rolled steel
sections shall comply with BS 4: Part 1 and BS 4848: Part 2.
220.030
PARAPETS
CWSpec-220-Rev4.doc
3/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Parapets shall comply with the requirements of The Department of Transport

Technical Memorandum BD 53/93 and BS 6779. They shall be BD 52/93
Group 1 and shall be supplied by an approved manufacturer.
Parapets shall be erected to the lines and levels shown on the agreed
drawings, but with the agreement of the Purchaser, may be adjusted where
necessary to give a smooth flowing alignment to the finished parapet.
Parapets shall be securely supported in their final position until the anchorages
and bedding have attained adequate strength.
The threads of the steel anchorage sockets shall be treated with red lead
compound Type 3 complying with BS 217 immediately prior to fixing parapet
holding down bolts into their final positions.
220.040
UN-TENSIONED SAFETY FENCE

Safety fences shall be of the single-sided untensioned corrugated beam type
with a maximum post spacing of 3.2m. Materials and fabrication of components
and fittings, assembly and tensioning shall all be in accordance with the
Department of Transport Specification for Highway Works.
220.050
ANCILLARY STEELWORK
All rolled steel plate and sections shall, as regard quality test, method of
manufacture and general procedure to be followed during fabrication, conform
to BS 5950, Part 2 and the standards referred to therein where these are
relevant to the works. Angles and hollow sections shall conform to BS 4848.
The material to be used for this Contract shall be new selected for the purpose
for which it is intended to be used, and shall in accordance with BS 4360: 1990.
The Purchaser or his appointed representative shall at all reasonable times
have free access to the works where the steelwork is being fabricated and to
the places where materials for the works are being manufactured or from which
it is being supplied, and shall be at liberty to inspect the steel and reject it if it is
not in accordance with the Specification.
220.060
BOLTED CONNECTIONS
All connections shall be bolted with bolts and nuts to BS 4190 which shall be
fitted with one flat circular washer conforming to BS 4320 under each nut.
CWSpec-220-Rev4.doc
4/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Where bolt heads or nuts bear on bevelled surfaces they shall be provided with
square taper washers conforming with BS 4320 to afford a seating square with
the axis of the bolt
The size and location of all bolts shall be clearly shown on the Contractors
Shop Drawings.
Rivetting will not be permitted.
220.070
FOUNDATION BOLTS
Holding down bolt assemblies shall be of approved manufacture and shall be
fitted with washer plates of angles and nuts, etc. as required by their design.
Purpose made templates shall be provided to facilitate accurate positioning of
holding down bolts during the placement of concrete.
CWSpec-220-Rev4.doc
5/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORKGROUP: 210: STEELWORK AND METALWORK
SECTION NO: 225
TITLE: PROTECTIVE COATING TO STEELWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL
MATERIALS
Paint
Storage of Paint
SUBMISSIONS
Particulars of Paint
Details of Vent Holes for Galvanising
PAINTING TRIALS
Paint Trials
Results of Paint Trials
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
Cleaning of Steelwork and Coated Surfaces
Preparation of Steelwork Surfaces
Blast Cleaning of Steelwork
Acid-pickling of Steelwork
Mechanical Cleaning of Steelwork
Cleaning of Bolts Nuts and Washers
Agreement of Surface Preparation
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
1/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
METAL COATINGS TO STEELWORK
Galvanised Coatings
PAINTING OF STEELWORK
Painting Systems
Application of Paint
Working Conditions for Painting
Priming and Over coating Time Limits
Stripe Coats to Steelwork
Paint Coats to Steelwork
Etch Primers and Blast Primers
Repairs to Damaged Areas of Paint
PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK
Protection of HSFG Bolted Joints
Protection of Other Shop-bolted Joints
Protection of Other Site-bolted Joints
Protection of Welded Joints
Joints Made After Coating the Parent Material
Sealing of Joints in Steelwork
PROTECTION OF SPECIAL SURFACES OF STEELWORK
Protection of Hollow Steel Sections
Protection of Uncoated Steelwork Surfaces
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
2/15
Onyx South Downs
225.010
EFW Contract
GENERAL
All surface preparation and coating of steelwork shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 5493 and with BS 7079. All steelwork shall be blast
cleaned in accordance with this Specification unless specifically noted
otherwise.
All exposed surfaces of steelwork shall be finished with a surface coating as
indicated in Table 7.1.
Item
Paint System - Table 7.2
Structural steel including maintenance

walkways and associated works
System C or D1 as agreed with the

Purchaser
Open grid flooring
System D1
Handrailing and miscellaneous

metalwork
System D2
Lighting columns.
System D3
Table 7.1 Protective Coating Systems
The finish coat to painted members shall be a high gloss finish colour as
directed by the Purchaser. The finish coats to galvanised and painted
surfaces (systems D2, D3) shall generally be the same paint as used for the
finish coats to painted steelworks (system C), subject to compatibility with
the galvanised coating.
225.020
MATERIALS
225.021
Paint
Paint and materials shall comply with the requirements of BS 5493 and shall
be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. The
complete surface coating system shall be detailed from one manufacturer
only, and the Contractor shall liaise with the supplier to guarantee continuity
of supply and consistency of colour between batches.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
3/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers of not more than 5 litres

capacity. Each container shall be marked on the side to show the following:
(a)
the name of the manufacturer,
(b)
the paint manufacturers reference number,
(c)
intended purposes, type of pigment and binder,
(d)
batch number, date of manufacture, expiry date and pot life,
(e)
colour, gloss, drying times and flash point.
The containers shall be stored in ventilated temperature controlled premises

in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
225.022
Storage of Paint
Paint and associated materials shall be stored in sealed containers marked
as stated in this specification and protected from exposure to conditions
which may affect the material. The materials shall be stored in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be used after the
recommended expiry date has been exceeded. The materials shall be
stored in a locked store.
225.030
SUBMISSIONS
225.031
Particulars of Paint
The following details of the proposed paints and associated products shall
be submitted to the Purchaser not less than 14 days before application of
any system commences:
-
name of manufacturer
duplicate copies of the manufacturer's data sheets including

temperature, humidity and other conditions at the workshop or on the
Site under which the paint is to be applied,
manufacturer's product specifications, product range and technical

information.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
4/15
Onyx South Downs
225.032
EFW Contract
Details of Vent Holes for Galvanising

Details of the method of plugging vent holes required for hot dip galvanising
of hollow sections shall be submitted to the Purchaser for Agreement.
225.040
PAINTING TRIALS
225.041
Paint Trials
A painting trial shall be carried out for each painting system to demonstrate
that the proposed materials and methods of application will produce a
painted surface which complies with the specified requirements.
Paint trials shall be carried out at the place where painting to the permanent
work will be carried out and using the employees and equipment which will
be used to carry out painting to the permanent work.
Painting trials shall be carried out on blast cleaned steel.
225.042
Results of Paint Trials

If the painted surface produced in a painting trial does not comply with the
specified requirements for the paintwork, the cause of failure shall be
established by the Contractor and particulars of proposed changes shall be
submitted to the Purchaser. Proposed changes to the paint formulation,
other than an adjustment in the amount of thinner, shall be carried out at the
paint manufacturer's works before the final painting trial and before the first
batch of paint is delivered.
Commencement of Painting
Painting shall not commence until the painted surface produced in painting
trials complies with the specified requirements for paintwork.
Changes in Materials and Methods of Application for Painting
Unless permitted by the Purchaser, the materials and methods of application
used in a painting trial which complies with the specified requirements shall
not be changed.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
5/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
225.050
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
225.051
Cleaning of Steelwork and Coated Surfaces

Soil, concrete and other adherent matter shall be removed immediately from
steelwork or coated surfaces and the surfaces shall be made good by
methods agreed by the Purchaser.
Dust, soot, grit, detritus, metallic or other loose particles shall be removed by
vacuuming after steelwork surfaces have been blast cleaned or before
coated surfaces are washed or steam cleaned.
Oil and grease shall be removed by emulsion cleaners, by steam cleaning or
by high pressure water jets before removing rust and mill scale or
overcoating. Oil and grease shall not be removed by turpentine or other
solvents. If steam cleaning is used, steam cleaning shall be carried out after
the greasy deposits have been removed by scraping and a detergent shall
be added to the feed water of the steam generator.
Salts, chemicals, corrosion or paint degradation products, including rustspotting on blast cleaned surfaces and zinc salts on zinc coatings or zincrich paints, shall be removed by washing with detergent solution before
coating steelwork surfaces or over coating.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Purchaser finished coated surfaces shall
be cleaned as stated above not more than 14 days before handover of the
steelwork.
Cleaning agents to be used shall be as agreed by the Purchaser. Surfaces
which have been cleaned using cleaning agents shall be rinsed with fresh
water to remove all traces of cleaning agent.
Cleaning tools shall be a type which will not result in damage to the surfaces
being cleaned. Wire brushes and brooms shall not be used for cleaning
coated surfaces.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
6/15
Onyx South Downs
225.052
EFW Contract
Preparation of Steelwork Surfaces

Bare metal surfaces of steelwork which are to be painted or metal coated
shall be treated before rust and mill scale are removed in accordance with
the following requirements:
(a)
Burrs, arises and serrations shall be smoothed by grinding or filling.
(b)
Weld spatter, weld slag and raised metal laminations shall be

removed by grinding or chipping and the surface shall be made
good.
Rust and mill scale shall be removed from steelwork which is to be painted
or galvanised by blast cleaning.
Steelwork to be galvanised will then be treated by a pickling process which
is compatible with the metal coating process.
225.053
Blast Cleaning of Steelwork

Blast cleaning of steelwork shall be carried out to second quality of surface
finish in accordance with Sa2 in Swedish Standard SIS 05 59 00 using
chilled iron abrasive.
Chilled iron grit shall be graded in accordance with BS 2451. The maximum
size of grit shall be G17 for use in automatic impeller type equipment and
shall be G12 for manual or compressed air equipment. The difference in
level between a peak and the adjacent trough of the blasted surface profile
shall not exceed 0.1mm.
Non-metallic abrasives with a maximum particle size not exceeding 1mm
shall not be used other than with portable equipment.
Abrasives shall not contain materials which may contaminate the steel
surfaces. Sand containing salt or excessive amounts of silt shall not be
used. Contaminants shall be removed from recovered abrasives before reuse.
Blast cleaning shall be carried out in a fully enclosed space separated from
the place of painting. The enclosed space shall be fitted with dust extractors
and filters to prevent the dispersal of dust outside the enclosed space.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
7/15
Onyx South Downs
225.054
EFW Contract
Acid-pickling of Steelwork
Acid-pickling of steelwork shall be carried out by the Footner process in
accordance with BS 5493, Clause 14.3.2. The first priming coat of paint
shall be applied as soon as the steel has dried and is still warm.
225.055
Mechanical Cleaning of Steelwork

Mechanical cleaning of steelwork where agreed by the Purchaser shall be
carried out using carborundum grinding discs or other power-driven tools
followed by steel wire brushing and dusting to remove all loosened material
which is not firmly bonded to the metal surface. Excessive burnishing of the
metal through prolonged application of rotary wire brushes shall not be
carried out. Visible peaks and ridges shall be removed. Pneumatic chipping
hammers shall not be used.
225.056
Cleaning of Bolts Nuts and Washers

Bolts, nuts and washers for steelwork shall be kept free from dirt and
deleterious material. Oil and grease on bolts, nuts and washers, other than
agreed lubricants for nuts of HSFG bolts, shall be removed before
assembling and coating the exposed parts of assembled bolts, nuts and
washers.
225.057
Agreement of Surface Preparation

Surfaces shall not be coated until the cleaning and preparation of the
surfaces has been agreed by the Purchaser.
225.060
METAL COATINGS TO STEELWORK
225.061
Galvanised Coatings
Galvanised coatings shall be applied by hot-dip galvanising in accordance
with BS 729. The coating thickness shall comply with BS 729, Table 1.
Metal coatings which will be overcoated with paint shall be passivated
Allowance for the thickness of the metal coating shall be made in the sizes
of the threads of metal coated threaded components. Nuts shall not be
tapped oversize by more than 0.4mm. Metal coated HSFG bolts and nuts
shall not be tapped oversize unless agreed by the Purchaser.
Damaged areas of metal coatings shall be rubbed down to remove

CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
8/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
excessive roughness, cleaned and made good by the use of an aerosol zinc
rich paint containing an aluminium pigment, of a type agreed by the
Purchaser, to give a repair coating thickness of 100 microns.
Metal coatings required on part of a component shall be completed before
the rest of the component is painted.
225.070
PAINTING OF STEELWORK
225.071
Painting Systems
Painting systems for steelwork shall be as detailed in Table 7.2. Members
shall be finished with the paint system identified in this Specification or as
otherwise instructed by the Purchaser.
System Reference C:
Surface coating to new structural steelwork.

preparation:
coating
Blast clean to SIS SA2.

: BS 5493 system reference SE7. Nominal total
dry film thickness 475 mm.
System Reference D:
Surface Coating to Miscellaneous Metalwork.

preparation:
coating
In accordance with BS 729.

: D1 - Galvanise. BS 5493 System Ref. SB2.
D2 - Galvanise. BS 5493 System Ref. SB2,
plus compatible paint system.
D3 - Galvanise. BS 5493 System Ref. SB9.
Table 7.2 Paint Systems

Different paints in a given system shall be compatible with each other and
shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. Successive coats in a
paint system including stripe coats, shall be in contrasting colours to aid
identification.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
9/15
Onyx South Downs
225.072
EFW Contract
Surfaces which are to be painted shall be dry and clean immediately before
paint is applied.
Paint shall be taken from the paint store ready for application. Thinning, if
necessary, shall be carried out in the paint store in the presence of the
Purchaser and using the type of thinner in the ratio stated in the
manufacturer's data sheets.
Paint shall be applied by airless spray. Sealer and primers shall be applied
by continuous spraying.
Each coat in the paint system shall be sufficiently dry or cured before the
next coat is applied. The time between the application of successive coats
shall be within the limits recommended by the manufacturer and stated in
this Specification.
Paints having a pot life specified by the manufacturer shall be discarded on
expiry of the pot life or at the end of each working day, whichever comes
first. Other paints in opened containers shall be kept in sealed containers
with not more than 10% ullage in store after each day's work and shall not
be thinned or mixed with fresh paint when re-issued for another day's work.
225.073
Working Conditions for Painting

Paint shall not be applied to steelwork under the following conditions:
(a)
when the ambient temperature falls below 4C or the relative

humidity rises above 90%,
(b)
for outdoor work, during periods of inclement weather including fog,

frost, mist, rain and snow or when condensation has occurred or is
likely to occur on the metal,
(c)
(c)
(d)
when the surface temperature of the metal to be painted is less than

3C above the dew point of the ambient air,
when the amount of dust in the air or on the surface to be painted is
excessive in the opinion of the Purchaser.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
10/15
Onyx South Downs
225.074
EFW Contract
Priming and Over coating Time Limits

Blast cleaned steel shall be primed or metal coated within 4 hours after blast
cleaning. After fabrication, welds shall be cleaned using portable blast
cleaning equipment and primer applied to give a nominal DFT of 75mm .
Primed steel surfaces shall be overcoated within 8 weeks after priming.
Second undercoats shall be applied within 72 hours after application of the
first undercoat.
No more than one coat shall be applied in a 24 hour period.
Etch primer to galvanised steelwork shall be applied within 14 days after
delivery of the steelwork to the Site. The etch primed surfaces shall be
overcoated within 48 hours after priming.
225.075
Stripe Coats to Steelwork

Immediately after the first undercoat of the painting system to steelwork has
dried, a stripe coat of undercoat paint shall be applied by brush to edges,
corners, crevices, exposed parts of bolts, nuts, rivets and welds. Another
stripe coat of finishing paint shall be applied in the same manner after the
last undercoat has dried.
225.076
Paint Coats to Steelwork

The dry film thickness of paint coats to steelwork shall be measured using a
magnetic dry film thickness gauge or other apparatus agreed by the
Purchaser. The total dry film thickness shall be measured at spacings of
approximately 1.0m. If the measured dry film thickness is less than 85% of
the specified nominal dry film thickness or if more than 10% of the measured
dry film thickness are less than 95% of the specified nominal dry film
thickness, repair work shall be carried out as stated in this Specification.
Wet film thickness gauges shall not be used as a means of determining
whether the dry film thickness of the painting system complies with the
specification.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
11/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Where a finish coat is to be applied on site, the procedure for application

shall be:-
The exposed surfaces of any nuts, bolts, washers and other

untreated areas shall be prepared to SA 2 if not previously blast
cleaned, or ST3 if previously blast cleaned to SA 2 and the works
paint system applied.
All steelwork shall be thoroughly washed down to remove any site

contaminants.
The finish coating shall be applied overall to a nominal dry film

thickness of 75 microns. The colour of this coat shall be in
accordance with the Purchaser's instructions. The Contractor shall
verify with the paint manufacturer that for each colour, the method of
application will provide an acceptable cosmetic finish with a single
coat. Where this is not achievable the Contractor shall apply
additional coats to achieve the desired quality of finish.
Each coat of paint shall be free from embedded foreign matter, mechanical
damage and surface defects, including bittiness, blistering, brush marks,
bubbling, cissing, cracking, cratering, dry spray, floating, pinholing, rivelling,
runs, sagging, spotting and spray mottle as stated in BS 2015. The finished
paintwork system shall have an even and uniform appearance.
Each coat of paint shall adhere firmly to the substrate without blistering,
chipping, flaking or peeling.
225.077
Etch Primers and Blast Primers

Etch primers and blast primers shall not be applied on phosphated steel and
shall not be overcoated with zinc-rich primers.
225.078
Repairs to Damaged Areas of Paint

Areas of paint to steelwork which have been damaged shall be cleaned to
bare metal or to the metal coating; the edges of the undamaged paint shall
be bevelled. Care shall be taken not to damage any galvanised or sprayed
metal coating.
The full specified painting system shall be restored in such a manner that
each new paint coat overlaps the existing paint by at least 50mm all round
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
12/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
the affected part.

225.080
PROTECTION OF JOINTS IN STEELWORK
225.081
Protection of HSFG Bolted Joints

The faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints in steelwork which is metal
sprayed overall and sealed or metal sprayed and painted overall shall be
coated with the sprayed metal. The sealer on the parent material shall
extend for a distance of between 10mm and 20mm inside the perimeter of
the faying surfaces. Free surfaces and edges of the joint material shall be
coated with the same sealer.
The joint material and the faying surfaces on the parent material of steelwork
which is metal sprayed only at joints and painted overall shall be metal
sprayed. The sprayed metal on the parent material shall extend for a
distance of between 10mm and 20mm outside the perimeter of the faying
surfaces. The primer on the parent material shall extend for a distance of
between 10mm and 20mm inside the perimeter of the faying surfaces.
Sprayed metal on the free surfaces and edges of the joint material shall be
coated with a sealer which is compatible with the painting system.
The primer on the parent material of steelwork which is painted overall and
uncoated at faying surfaces of HSFG bolted joints shall extend for a distance
of between 10mm and 20mm inside the perimeter of the faying surfaces.
225.082
Protection of Other Shop-bolted Joints

Blast primer for painted steelwork or sprayed metal plus sealer for metal
sprayed steelwork shall be applied to the joint and parent material of shopbolted joints other than HSFG bolted joints; joints for painted steelwork shall
be assembled after the first undercoat of the painting system has been
applied to the contact surfaces and while the undercoat is still wet.
225.083
Protection of Other Site-bolted Joints

Surfaces of the parent and joint material of site-bolted joints other than
HSFG bolted joints shall be coated with the same protective system as the
parent material.
225.084
Protection of Welded Joints

Welds and steelwork surfaces which have been affected by welding shall be
coated with the same protective system as the parent material.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
13/15
Onyx South Downs
225.085
EFW Contract
Joints Made After Coating the Parent Material

Hot-dip galvanising to steelwork shall not be carried out until all welds for the
steelwork which is to be galvanised or electroplated have been completed.
Except as stated below, successive coats of paint on the parent material
shall be stepped back to 30mm intervals commencing at 100mm from
welded joints and at 10mm from the perimeter of HSFG bolted joints.
If the parent metal in the agreed welding procedure is coated with the prefabrication primer or sprayed metal such coatings are permitted to cover the
area to be welded. After welding the pre-fabrication primer or sprayed metal
adjacent to the weld shall be made good.
The parent material, jointed material, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and
washers, welds and weld affected areas shall be cleaned, prepared and
brought up to the same protective system as the adjoining surfaces not more
than 14 days after the joints have been made.
225.086
Sealing of Joints in Steelwork

The different parts of joints in steelwork shall be dry immediately before the
joints are assembled.
Gaps around the perimeter of bolted joints and load indicator gaps of HSFG
bolts in steelwork painted overall shall be sealed by brush application of the
same painting system as the parent material; gaps shall be plugged if
necessary with soft solder wire without flux core as a backing before sealing
with paint.
225.090
PROTECTION OF SPECIAL SURFACES OF STEELWORK
225.091
Protection of Hollow Steel Sections

The ends of hollow steel sections shall be sealed by welding mild steel
plates over the open ends; the plates shall be at least 5mm thick.
Immediately before hollow steel sections are sealed, bags of anhydrous
silica gel shall be inserted in each void at the rate of 0.25kg/m3 of void.
225.092
Protection of Uncoated Steelwork Surfaces

The coated surfaces of steelwork coated over part of the surface shall be
protected from rust which may form on the uncoated surfaces. Temporary
coatings which may affect the bond between concrete and uncoated
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
14/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
surfaces against which the concrete is to be placed shall be removed and

the uncoated surfaces shall be cleaned before the concrete is placed. The
full coating system shall extend 25mm, or 75mm for steel piles, into areas
against which concrete is to be placed.
CWSpec-225-Rev4.doc
15/15
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL
STANDARDS AND CODES
DESIGN LIFE
MAINTENANCE
DATUM LEVELS
GROUND CONDITIONS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS
Purchasers Requirements
Submittal Procedure
Mechanical and Electrical Work
RECORD DOCUMENTS
CWSpec-BGENREQRev4.doc
1/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
GENERAL
The design of the Works for which the Contractor has design responsibilities
shall be strictly in accordance with current good practice, the principles set out in
the relevant British Standards, Codes of Practice, the Building Regulations and
other relevant regulations and fully comply with the Contract.
Allowance shall be made in the structural design of the buildings, structures and
all other elements for all combinations of dead and live loads which can be
reasonably assumed to act together to give the most onerous condition.
All design work shall be undertaken within a Quality Management system with
minimum standards equivalent to BS 5750.
In the Specification reference is made to items being shown, specified, indicated
or detailed on the Drawings. Where the Contractor is responsible for the design
associated with the items concerned then he shall, unless otherwise agreed with
the Purchaser, comply with the intent of the Specification by including the
information required on the relevant Drawings.
1.2
STANDARDS AND CODES

Notwithstanding the following provisions within this Clause, European Standards
as defined in Annex III to EEC Directive 89/440/EEC shall be used where they
exist.
The designs shall conform with the requirements of all relevant parts of the latest
editions of British Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice, other relevant
standards, regulations and statutory documents and amendments thereto current
at the date of the Tender being issued, except where qualified by this
Specification, and applicable to the type of buildings and forms of construction
adopted.
The Contractor's designs shall comply in all respects with the Building
Regulations and all amendments thereto current at the date of the Tender being
issued.
The Contractor shall liaise with the Building and Fire Authorities to ensure full
compliance with any fire safety precautions and building control requirements for
all the buildings. Copies of all correspondence and the submissions to the Local
2/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Authority, Service Authorities and Fire Authorities shall be provided to the

Purchaser.
The Works shall also comply in all respects with the relevant requirements of the
following regulations:
Health and Safety at Work Act
Factories Act
16th Edition of the IEE Regulations
The Work Equipment Regulations 1992
The Safety Signs Regulations
1.3
DESIGN LIFE
The design life for all the buildings and structures described in this Specification
shall be in accordance with, Section 2.10 - Design, of the Civil Engineering and
Building Specification.
Mechanical and electrical systems shall be designed to be of sufficient duty
robustness and reliability to ensure that, unless the Contractor had identified
otherwise with his Tender, major components shall not require replacement
during the design life of the Works.
1.4
MAINTENANCE
The designs shall take full account of requirements for future maintenance of the
buildings structures and equipment. All equipment and fittings shall be mounted
to facilitate ease of maintenance and repair. Means of access shall be provided
as necessary for maintenance or inspection purposes.
Any items requiring frequent maintenance or replacement (eg consumables)
shall be readily available in the UK.
In general the Works shall be designed to minimise any requirement for
maintenance. All parts of the structures and other items shall be suitable for the
environmental conditions.
1.5
DATUM LEVELS
Datum levels are to be agreed with the Purchaser.
3/9
Onyx South Downs
1.6
EFW Contract
GROUND CONDITIONS
The Contractor's attention is drawn to his obligations to carry out such
investigations as may be necessary to establish parameters for his designs.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is required to operate procedures to control and verify all designs
for which he is responsible in order to ensure that all specified requirements are
met.
At the commencement of the design work the Contractor shall submit his
procedures for the consent of the Purchaser indicating how this will be achieved.
All companies employed by the Contractor to carry out design work shall comply
with the Contractors QA System and shall operate their own QA system for the
checking of design work.
As a minimum, all calculations, drawings and other design related documents
shall be independently checked. The independent check shall be carried out by
suitably qualified and experienced staff from the Contractors own design
organisation, or his subcontractors organisation, or by an independent firm.
The design check shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:i)
Checking of all calculations in accordance with Contractors and Designers

QA Systems.
ii)
Check that all items detailed on drawings are supported by appropriate

design calculations.
iii)
Review of all drawings to check dimensions particularly with regard to items

affected by site constraints.
iv)
Confirm that the overall design will meet specified requirements.
v)
Confirm that the design concept is proven and appropriate to use.
vi)
Confirm that the design inputs, design methods and assumptions made are
satisfactory.
vii) Confirm that all statutory requirements, including safety issues, are met.
viii)
Confirm that the design is practical and safe to construct, use and
maintain.
4/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall provide a certificate for all calculations, drawings and other
design documents which confirm that independent checks as specified above
have been carried out. The certificate(s) shall clearly indicate which sections of
calculations, with page numbers and which drawing numbers and other
documents have been checked. The name of the checker shall be clearly stated
and the checker shall sign the certificate to confirm that the check has been
made and any required corrections also carried out and checked.
The Contractor shall only use properly qualified and experienced engineers and
technicians to undertake design and drawing preparation and checking.
All Drawings shall be prepared to microfiche standards in accordance with BS
4210.
1.8
1.8.1
Purchaser's Requirements
The Purchaser will require the following Construction Information to be provided
by the Contractor:
i)
Preliminary Scheme Proposals - Within 28 days from the date of

acceptance of the Contractor's Tender he shall provide a full and detailed
description of his proposed buildings, walkways, sewage treatment plant
and mechanical and electrical services and systems. The description shall
confirm and expand upon information previously supplied and shall include
comprehensive details of the Works to be provided together with detailed
performance characteristics and features and preliminary general
arrangement drawings, services schematics and design basis statements.
The information shall be adequate to demonstrate compliance with the
overall minimum requirements set out within this Specification.
ii)
Design basis statements: Design Basis Statements shall be prepared by

the Contractor for the whole of the Works and shall include the following:-
Identify structures, section of work or elements covered by the

statement.
State functional and performance requirements.
Specify the applicable statutory regulations, design standards,

criteria and parameters.
5/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Define the basic design concepts.
Define the construction materials to be used including grades, class

as appropriate.
Specify the method of design and any computer program to be

used.
Specify the superimposed loads.
Identify principal design assumptions.
The Purchaser will review the design basis statements and provide his
consent or non-acceptance with explanatory comments.
iii)
General arrangement drawings - These will clearly show the arrangement

of the buildings, structures or other item to be provided. All principal
dimensions are to be included. The drawings shall include plans of all
floors, all elevations and appropriate sections. Architectural drawings shall
indicate the type and make of all cladding materials with column and
surface texture as appropriate.
The drawings shall clearly indicate how the buildings or structures relate to
existing works and where appropriate indicate space allocations and
clearances for vehicles and plant.
iv)
Plant, Equipment and Services Details: Schematic drawings are to be

provided for all building and other services which clearly indicate the
Contractor's proposals. The information shall generally be as follows:
a)
Plumbing:
Isometric drawings showing pipe arrangements and sizes, break
tanks, pumps, boilers, etc.
b)
Electrical (including alarm systems etc):

Single line diagrams showing arrangement and number of circuits,
fuse and distribution boards, transformers, switches sockets,
alarms, etc.
6/9
Onyx South Downs
c)
EFW Contract
Ventilation:
Single line flow diagrams showing duct runs and sizes, grill
locations and sizes, location and size of fans, location of fire
dampers etc.
d)
v)
Full technical specifications of plant and equipment.
Calculations: A set of calculations for all the works together with certificate
of independent checking as specified in Clause B1.7 herein.
The Purchaser will generally not review or check these calculations which
are to be provided for reference and proof of independent checking.
vi)
1.8.2
Detailed working drawings: A set of detailed working drawings in a style

and format appropriate for the work involved shall be supplied together with
a certificate of independent checking as specified in Clause B1.7.
Submittal Procedure
Submissions may be made as a complete design package or in stages. In the
latter case the submissions shall be made in a logical and progressive order
following the necessary sequence of design. For staged submissions the
Purchaser will provide interim consent to each stage, with final consent being
given once all stages have been reviewed as appropriate. The granting of
interim consent by the Purchaser does not prejudice his right to refuse consent
at later stages of design.
The Purchaser will generally require 14 days after receipt of a submission or
resubmission for review.
Prior to commencement of designs for each section of work the Contractor shall
submit for the agreement of the Purchaser a programme or schedule which sets
out dates for submission of each section or stage of design.
The Contractor shall allow in his programme sufficient float such that any
unacceptable submissions can be modified without having a detrimental effect to
the programme.
On receipt of final consent from the Purchaser the Contractor shall provide 5
copies of the Construction Information.
Copies of accepted drawings for which consent has been received from the
Purchaser shall be provided within 14 days of acceptance and shall be endorsed
"WORKING DRAWING".
7/9
Onyx South Downs
1.8.3
EFW Contract
Mechanical and Electrical Work

Additional requirements for submissions for mechanical and electrical work are
detailed in Part C of the Specification.
1.9
RECORD DOCUMENTS
Record documents shall comprise the following as appropriate for the class of
work concerned:a)
Final Design Calculations.
b)
Record Drawings and Schedules for all architectural, structural, mechanical

and electrical services layouts and details.
c)
Electrical Wiring and Schematic Drawings.
d)
Maintenance and Operating Manuals and Relevant technical literature.
e)
List of proprietary items which details and name and address of

manufacturer.
f)
Commissioning certificates, guarantees, warranties and maintenance

agreements.
g)
Maintenance and cleaning instructions for all finishes. (This information to

be supplied at handover).
The Contractor shall provide the Purchaser with all record documents within 28
days of the final completion of the Works.
All record documents shall be provided in triplicate except that six copies of
maintenance and operating manuals shall be supplied. In the case of drawings
and diagrams the material shall be stout plastic, one of the three sets shall be
opaque and the other two sets shall be transparencies suitable for photocopying.
All record drawings shall also be provided on 3 inch computer diskette in
AutoCad v.14.0 drawing file. All record drawings shall also be provided on
microfilm individually mounted on card and complete with index cards, all in
accordance with BS 4210.
8/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The Record Drawings provided by the Contractor shall be endorsed clearly

"RECORD DRAWINGS" near to the title block.
The record document shall be adequate for the following purposes:
a)
To record clearly the arrangements of the various sections of the Works as

actually constructed and to identify the locations of all component parts
thereof.
b)
To make it possible to comprehend the extent and purpose of the works

and the method of operation of any equipment.
c)
To demonstrate the methods of operation for any equipment.
d)
To identify the items requiring regular maintenance or components of

equipment requiring inspection, servicing or replacement, the periods
between maintenance and the methods and equipment to be employed.
Each drawing prepared by the Contractor shall contain the following information:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Name of Contract.
Description of drawing.
Drawing number.
Scale.
Name and address of the Contractor.
Name and address of the Employer.
Names of the Architect or Consulting Engineers, if any, employed by the
Contractor to undertake the design on his behalf.
The Contractor shall demonstrate from time to time as required by the Purchaser
during the progress of the Works that adequate and accurate records are being
kept as will ensure the ultimate completeness and accuracy of the record
drawings and that the record drawings are themselves being compiled
progressively as the work proceeds on site. If the Contractor fails to comply with
these requirements the Purchaser shall have the right to arrange for the record
drawings to be prepared elsewhere and the whole of the costs involved including
all costs of surveying and printing shall be borne by the Contractor.
9/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR CIVIL AND BUILDING WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS
BUILDINGS GENERAL
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
General
Foundations and Structural Frame
External Walls
Roofs
Internal Walls
Service Supplies
Building Services and Equipment within Buildings
Fire Engineering Systems
Drainage
Fixtures, Finishes and Decoration
Signage
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - PERMANENT BUILDINGS
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES
VEHICULAR GATES
WEIGHBRIDGE
ELECTRIC ARM BARRIERS
DESIGN LOADS AND FLOOR FINISHES
DOOR PROTECTION FRAMES
CWSpec-PTBSEC2Rev4.doc
1/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION 2 - PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR CIVIL AND BUILDING WORKS
2.1
DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

This Section describes the particular requirements for design of the building, civil,
structural, mechanical and electrical services comprising the Contractor designed
Works.
2.2
BUILDINGS GENERAL
The Purchaser's requirements for the Buildings are shown on the Drawings and
further specified on the Room Data Sheets. The Contractor shall develop these
designs architecturally and undertake detailed engineering designs whilst
maintaining the general form, dimensions and layout of the buildings.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design of all elements of the
Works, as defined in the Scope of Works.
The materials, fabric and mechanical and electrical services within the building
shall be designed to be energy efficient so that operational costs are minimised.
Mechanical and electrical systems shall all be designed for ease and economy of
maintenance.
2.3
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
2.3.1
General
The permanent buildings have been conceived as a 'family' of buildings with
common architectural and structural features.
2.3.2
Foundations and Structural Frame

The foundations shall be either piled, pads or rafts as appropriate for the
structural configuration, loadings and ground conditions. The foundations shall
be designed and located not to interfere with existing structures and foundations
that are to be maintained. Foundation design shall comply with BS 8004.
2/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The structural frames shall comprise steel columns and beams with columns
located within external and internal walls as far as is practical. Where columns
are not located within walls they should be sited to minimize any effect on the use
of rooms or on the efficient circulation through the public areas.
Design Loadings shall be in accordance with BS 6399, Part 1 unless otherwise
specified.
The roof beams shall be formed from either curved universal beams or fabricated
curved beams. All beams following curved roof lines must be curved where they
are exposed to view (ie where there is no ceiling).
The steelwork shall be fire protected as required by the Building Regulations and
the local Fire Safety Authority. Any steelwork requiring such protection shall be
clad with a proprietary system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for consulting and liaising with, and satisfying
all requirements of the Fire Safety Authority and shall demonstrate to the
Purchaser that this has been done.
2.3.3
External Walls
Design of cladding shall be in accordance with Part C of the Specification.
External walls shall comprise:
i)
Cladding as detailed on the Architectural drawings and as per the external

elevation data sheets, with all necessary vapour barriers and insulation
fixed to secondary steelwork. The blockwork shall be flush jointed and
suitably restrained with stainless steel ties firmly fixed to the structural
steelwork. Materials to form a suitable and appropriate damp proof course
shall be included.
ii)
Glazing in anodised aluminium frames suitably fixed to the structural steel

frame. Glazing units shall be double glazed with solar control glass
(Suncool Float standard silver finish by Pilkington Glass Ltd or similar
agreed). The glazing system shall be provided with thermal breaks.
External wall constructions shall provide insulation U values in accordance with

current Building Regulations.
2.3.4
Roofs
3/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The roofs shall comprise galvanised steel sheeting, complete with all insulation
and waterproof membranes as appropriate. Details given on the external
elevation data sheets shall dictate. Where appropriate and indicated on the
layout drawings and Room Data Sheets the soffit shall be exposed internally and
colour coated. The system adopted shall incorporate an inner layer of sheeting
spanning between the roof beams/purlins. If the system adopted incorporates
purlins they should be sandwiched between the outer and inner sheeting layers
such that they are not visible.
The roof construction shall provide insulation U values in accordance with the
Building Regulations.
Surface water drainage shall be via gutters and downpipes connected to the
surface water drainage system designed by the Contractor.
2.3.5
Internal Walls
Internal walls shall be blockwork of a strength and thickness appropriate to room
uses and wall dimensions.
2.3.6
Service Supplies
Incoming service supplies to each of the buildings shall be designed by the
Contractor.
All services will be connected to the existing in the location of the site boundary.
2.3.7
Building Services and Equipment within Buildings

Building Services including heating and ventilation, water and electrical building
services shall be in accordance with Part C of the Specification.
Small power, lighting, alarm and security circuits shall be provided to rooms as
detailed in the Room Data Sheets in the Scope of Works and Part C of the
Specification.
Requirements for design, performance, materials and workmanship for these
items are included in Part C of the Specification.
4/10
Onyx South Downs
2.3.8
EFW Contract
Fire Engineering Systems

The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers, emergency lighting and all other
equipment required by the local fire safety authorities.
Water cannon/drenchers in bunker area are detailed in the main specification.
2.3.9
Drainage
Foul water drainage within the buildings shall be designed to suit the
accommodation layouts shown on the Drawings.
2.3.10
Fixtures, Finishes and Decoration

Fixtures, finishes and decorations shall be as detailed on the Drawings and
described in the Room Data Sheets.
2.3.11
Signage
A scheme for signage fixed to the buildings internally and externally shall be in
compliance with the Purchasers requirements. The Contractor shall liaise with
the Purchaser to arrive at a scheme which reflects the Terminal Operator's
corporate identity whilst at the same time providing clear messages.
2.4
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION - PERMANENT BUILDINGS
2.4.1
These requirements shall be read in conjunction with the Scope of Works and
Room Data Sheets and are provided as general background to the intended
usage for the Buildings which shall be taken into account by the Contractor in
undertaking his designs.
2.5
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES

Design requirements for building and external site mechanical and electrical
services are included in Part C of this Specification.
5/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
In addition to the design of permanent mechanical and electrical installations the

Contractor shall design and construct all temporary electrical, water, drainage
service diversions or other measures which may be necessary to maintain
existing services as specified and to enable the Works to be constructed,
together with permanent diversions of these services where they pass under or
unacceptably close to permanent buildings.
2.6
VEHICULAR GATES
(i)
(ii)
Main Gate - electrically operated from control room.

Secondary vehicle gate - electrically operated from control room and key
pad or sensor tab.
2.6.1
Vehicular gates shall be hinged or sliding gates with clear opening.
2.6.2
The gates shall be fabricated in accordance with Section 071 of Part C of the
Specification.
2.6.3
Gate posts shall have suitable fittings for attaching the adjacent fence and the
posts and their foundations shall be capable of acting as a straining post for the
fence.
2.6.4
Each hinged gate shall be secured in closed position by a 30mm drop bolt with
guides welded to frame and handle at top, which shall be between the closing
stiles and inoperable when the gates are locked, and which rests on a flush fitting
cast iron ground support block which will be set into the roadway. Hinged gates
shall be secured in the open position by adjustable foot-operated holding back
catches, which shall attach to hooks welded to bottom rail of gate.
2.6.5
Stiles of hinged gates shall be extend vertically and fitted with brackets to take
three rows of twin strand barbed wire at 100mm centres to match the wire on
adjacent fences.
2.6.6
Gate hinges shall enable 180 degree opening with phosphor bronze bushes and
greasing points, and with facility to allow vertical, horizontal and lateral
adjustment. When installed the gap beneath the bottom of the gate shall be no
greater than 130mm when closed and no less than 20mm when open. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the pavings necessary to
achieve these limits.
6/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
2.7
WEIGHBRIDGE
2.7.1
The Contractor shall design, construct, install and commission a complete

weighbridge in the position shown on the drawings. This shall be of a size and
capacity to cater for all current HGV's currently using public highways and
planned for the next 5 years. The weighbridge shall be mounted in a pit with its
running surface level with finished surfacing level.
The weighbridge shall be of robust and durable construction designed for
operation in the prevailing environment and shall be supplied and installed by an
established specialist manufacturer agreed by the Purchaser. All materials and
equipment shall conform with the appropriate British Standard Specifications and
Codes of Practice and with Part C of this Specification.
The following minimum dimensions and capacity shall apply:
Platform length
18m
Capacity
50 tonnes
Accuracy
0.1%
2.7.2
The weighbridge control system shall be in accordance with main specification

documents.
The weighbridge control system shall be linked to a traffic light control at the
weighbridge such that the light turns green after the ticket is dispensed and turns
red to prevent passage of the next vehicle until after the weighed vehicle has
departed. Traffic light control shall also be provided to prohibit more than one
vehicle on the weighbridge.
2.7.3
The load cell shall be microprocessor controlled and capable of recognising and
automatically correcting errors and compensating for off-centre loading and
temperature changes.
The load cell shall be contained in a stainless steel or equal non-corrodible
sealed container, waterproof and totally resistant to lightning and other electrical
discharges.
2.7.4
The bed shall be manufactured from high quality steel blast cleaned to Swedish
Standard SIS 055900, grade SA 2 and then a suitable protection coating
applied to the Purchasers agreement and to Table 3 Part 9 of BS 5493, to
provide a 10-20 year life. The surface of the flat bed shall be skid-resistant.
Suitable multiple manholes shall be provided for access to the load cells and for
7/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
cleaning.
2.7.5
The electrical installation shall comply with the requirements of Part C of this
Specification. All enclosures, junction boxes etc shall have a minimum enclosure
classification of IP65.
2.7.6
Lightning protection shall be provided to BS 6651 and all electronic equipment

shall be designed so that outside interference cannot affect the accuracy of the
operation. All signal cable cores shall be screened and the cable screened
overall. Power supplies shall be surge protected.
2.7.7
Adequate drainage shall be provided in the pit. Effluent shall pass through an
interceptor before discharge. This interceptor and the associated outfall are part
of the Contractor's design.
2.8
ELECTRIC ARM BARRIERS
2.8.1
Electric Arm Barriers shall be installed with appropriate clearances for vehicles.
2.8.2
The power requirements shall be 240V, 50Hz Single Phase Supply. The barrier
arm shall incorporate a shearing feature to suit left and right hand knock-off
facility. The base shall be fixed to a concrete foundation and the electrical supply
will be ducted in the concrete and rise into the barrier from below.
2.8.3
The control circuitry shall provide for the following:

-
Pass card operation.

"Loop to open" and "loop to close" operation.
Remote operation from Control Room.
Remote operation from sender unit in vehicle.
2.8.4
An inductive loop vehicle detector is required at each barrier. It shall be sensitive

enough to detect vehicles from loops that are wound into slots, approximately 57mm wide and 25-50mm deep, cut into the road surface.
2.8.5
The Contractor shall indicate his specification for laying loops where concrete
reinforcement or mesh exists with dimensions and conditions required.
Specifications of loop cables shall also be given with maximum length of feeder
cable from loops to detector box.
2.8.6
The detector must be capable of "Screening" out other metal objects such as
prams, bicycles and supermarket trolleys which may inadvertently induce
8/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
incorrect signals into the system. The loops should be capable of detecting "back
off" and vehicles manoeuvring in error and details of the loop configurations or
patterns of loops to accommodate this shall be submitted for agreement by the
Purchaser. Loop detectors shall have automatic tuning and fault detection with
facility to transmit fault messages to the central controller.
2.8.7
Electric arm barriers shall be of robust and durable construction and shall be
supplied and installed by a specialist manufacturer agreed by the Purchaser.
2.9
DESIGN LOADS AND FLOOR FINISHES

Design loads shall be calculated on accordance with relevant codes, standards
and regulations provided that design superimposed loads shall not be less than
the following:
Area
Load
Finish
Unloading areas, silo area, flue gas

treatment area
15 kN/m2
Quartz mineral hardener
Effluent storage areas and water

treatment plant area
10 kN/m2
Acid-resisting coating
Transformer areas, tank areas
10 kN/m2
Dust proofed concrete
Workshops, stores
15 kN/m2
Quartz mineral hardener
Lift and load lift machinery rooms,

electrical rooms and archives
10 kN/m2
Floor paint
Oil storage
15 kN/m2
Unfinished
Tipping Hall and Storage Bays
30 kN/m2
Quartz hardener
ferrous scrap and bottom ash storage
30 kN/m2
Quartz hardener
Turbine and Generator Room
15 kN/m2
Truck circulation areas
15 kN/m2
Refuse grab parking areas
80 kN
Light rooms and corridor zones
6 kN
9/10
Onyx South Downs
2.10
EFW Contract
DOOR PROTECTION FRAMES

All steel columns at main door openings shall be protected against damage by an
in-situ concrete encasement not less than 1.5m high and providing a minimum
concrete cover to the steel section of 100mm. The encasement shall be
reinforced in accordance with BS8110.
10/10
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 060: EXTERNAL WORKS
SECTION NO: 062
TITLE: PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS AND ROAD MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL
LOCATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
General
Position of Traffic Signs
FACES OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
Legend
Installation
POSTS FOR PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS
General
Tubular Steel Posts
PREPARATION AND FINISH OF STEEL POSTS AND POST HOUSINGS
FOUNDATIONS FOR PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS
SIGN LOCATIONS IDENTIFYING MARK
MANUFACTURER'S TRADE MARK
CWSpec-PTCAPPA-Rev4.doc
1/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COMPARTMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Base Housing
Locks and Keys
BOLLARDS
EXTERNALLY ILLUMINATED SIGNS
DAMAGE TO SIGNS, POSTS AND FITTINGS
CLEANING OF SIGNS
PERMANENT ROAD MARKINGS
2/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
062.010 GENERAL
Traffic signs shall comply with the Specification for Highway Works - Series 1200,
Traffic Signs issued by the Department of Transport December 1991. This particular
specification contains the information which the Highway Works Specification indicates
as being in Appendix 12/1.
LOCATION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
062.020 General
The location of each traffic sign shall be shown on Traffic Signs and Road Marking
Drawings.
062.030 Position of Traffic Signs
All traffic signs shall be positioned and erected in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter 1 of the Traffic Signs Manual published by Department of Transport (HMSO).
FACES OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
062.040 Legend
Details of the legend layout of directional information signs and non-prescribed traffic
signs shall be shown on the Drawings.
Other traffic signs which have standard symbols and markings (with permitted
variants) are detailed in the Traffic Signs Schedule. These traffic signs are shown in
the Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions, 1981 (as amended).
062.050 Installation
Traffic signs fascias shall not be erected until 3 days after concreting the posts. All
sign fixings shall be stainless steel or aluminium.
3/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
POSTS FOR PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS

062.060 General
All posts shall be steel. The number type and size of post required for each traffic sign
shall be detailed on the Drawings.
062.070 Tubular Steel Posts
Tubular steel posts shall have the following Sections.
(i)
(ii)
76mm (3")
outside diameter x 10 swg
89mm (3") outside diameter x 8 swg
Each post shall have a base plate having a minimum area of 0.052 square metres
(81 sq. inches) and also where no lighting unit is fixed to the top of the post a
waterproof cap. Both base plate and post cap shall be in accordance with BS 873.
062.080 PREPARATION AND FINISH OF STEEL POSTS AND POST HOUSINGS
Post and switch boxes shall be cleansed from grease, scale and rust, shot blasted and
then galvanised.
Galvanising shall be by an agreed hot-dip process at the rate of 610g per m2 (2
ounces per sq. foot) and in accordance with BS 729. When finished the galvanising
shall be smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections. Where
flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare patches or spots due to inefficient pickling or
persistent types of scale etc. are apparent, the work shall be completely stripped and
regalvanised. Where it is necessary to drill a hole in a hollow member to allow air to
escape, the hole shall be 12mm in diameter and shall be plugged with Neoprene or
other agreed material after dipping.
062.090 FOUNDATIONS FOR PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS
The type and size of foundations required for each sign shall be shown on the
Drawings.
Where signs are illuminated provision shall be made for cable entry by means of a
75mm diameter UPVC duct.
The base section of bollards shall be concreted to within 50mm of the top of the base
4/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
section, so that the whole of the holding down bolts are embedded in concrete.
Bollard bases shall be set in a block of concrete extending to 300mm in width outside
the edge of the base unit with provision for a cable entry.
062.100 SIGN LOCATIONS IDENTIFYING MARK
The reference number of the sign shall be indicated by self-adhesive 25mm sign
numbers on the reverse side of the sign in the bottom left hand corner so that it is
readily visible and legible after erection.
062.110 MANUFACTURER'S TRADE MARK
The manufacturer's name or trade mark will not be permitted on the face of the sign. It
may be affixed to the back provided prior agreement to the size and colour of the mark
is obtained from the Purchaser in writing.
062.120 COMPARTMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Base Housing
Where illuminated signs are erected on tubular posts the electrical equipment shall be
enclosed in a large integral base housing of inside diameter not less than 130mm.
Entrance to the interior of such compartments shall be by means of a weatherproof
door having tamper-resistant key fastenings. The door opening shall be not less than
100mm x 400mm and shall be positioned so that, when the post is installed as
intended, it is not less than 300mm above ground level.
An internal baseboard of dimensions not less than 80mm x 300mm x 12mm
manufactured from substantially non-hydroscopic and rot-resistant material shall be
fixed in the box and an earthing screw or bolt shall be provided. The distance from the
face of the baseboard to the inside front to the housing shall be at least 100mm. A
suitable cable entry shall be provided just below ground level.
062.130 Locks and Keys
All compartments for electrical equipment shall be provided with vandal and weather
resistant locks. The number of different types and patterns of lock shall be kept to a
minimum. The Purchaser shall be provided with size keys for each type of lock.
062.140 BOLLARDS
Bollards shall be all plastic knock-down type.
5/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Bollards shall be complete with all wiring, fluorescent lighting units, lamps, starters,
capacitors, ballasts, fuses, photo-electric switches and with sockets or clips as
necessary.
The power supply to each bollard shall be 240 volts, 50 Hz, single phase.
Light sources shall be hot cathode tubular fluorescent lamps with a colour defined as
'standard colour 2' in BS 1853 : Part 1.
062.150 EXTERNALLY ILLUMINATED SIGNS
The traffic signs schedule indicates those signs which are required to be externally
illuminated.
Sign luminaries shall comply with requirements of BS 873, BS5433:Part 2, Section 2.7
and Chapters 11 and 13 of the Traffic Signs Manual.
Luminaries shall be completed with all wiring, fluorescent lighting units, lamps,
starters, capacitors, ballasts, fuses, phot-electric switches and with sockets or clips as
necessary.
The power supply to each luminaire shall be 240 volts, 50 Hz, single phase.
Light sources shall be high pressure mercury fluorescent lamps, type MBF complying
with BS 2677.
Details of the types of illuminations shall be shown on the Drawings.
062.160 DAMAGE TO SIGNS, POSTS AND FITTINGS
Signs, posts or fittings having damaged faces, backs, paintwork or plastic coating may
be rejected by the Purchaser and shall then be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Slight damage may be rectified by touching in, at the Contractor's expense, but only
with the agreement, and in accordance with the instructions, of the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of sign posts, sign fascias and
fixings until such a time as this responsibility is discharged by the Purchaser.
062.170 CLEANING OF SIGNS

Upon completion and servicing of the signs, they shall be thoroughly cleaned
6/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
immediately prior to being handed over.

The type of detergent used shall be to the agreement of the Purchaser.
062.180 PERMANENT ROAD MARKINGS
The types and locations of permanent road markings shall be shown on the Drawings.
The exact locations shall be agreed with the Purchaser prior to installation.
All permanent road markings shall be thermoplastic material complying with BS 3262
Class A except that markings applied to proprietary non-slip surfacing shall be
compatible with the surfacing system. All road markings shall be white and shall be
reflectorised. The Contractor shall submit evidence of a current BSI Certificate and
Kitemark licence for all thermoplastic materials used. Materials that have been
modified subsequent to the issue of certification shall not be used.
Road markings shall be applied in accordance with the Department of Transport
Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works, Volume 1, Specification for
Highway Works, Clause 12.12. They shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean
and dry. Markings shall have smooth edges and shall be uniform thicknesses and free
from streaks.
Thermoplastic material shall be laid to the following thicknesses:
a)
b)
Screed markings
Sprayed markings
4mm + 1mm
2mm + 0.5mm
The method of thickness measurements shall be in accordance with BS 3262, Part 3.

Tack coats are not required except on concrete surfaces.
7/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 000 : INTRODUCTION
SECTION: 001
TITLE: GUIDANCE NOTES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
STRUCTURE OF THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
CONTENTS OF CIVIL AND BUILDING WORKS SPECIFICATION
CWSpec-SECT001-Rev4.doc
1/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
001. 010
These Guidance Notes define the purpose and use of the Specification for
Civil and Building Works as part of the Contract Documents.
STRUCTURE
001. 050
001. 060
001. 070
The Specification is divided into Work Groups, Sections and Clauses.

.
Work Groups are generally major divisions of engineering activity.
Sections are sub-divisions of these activities which enable the

appropriate specifications to be selected for a particular contract.
Clauses are single subject statements within Sections grouped

under three main headings, Materials, Workmanship and Quality
Control.
The clause numbering system adopted for the Sections provides a unique
reference for each Clause. It identifies the Work Group, Section, clause
number within the Section e.g. 212.070 is a typical clause reference.
212
The first two numbers indicate the Work Group,
212
The last number indicates the Section,
.070
This represents the clause number within the Section,
New Clauses are inserted at the appropriate point in a Section by the

allocation of the next clause number after the immediately preceding
Clause. Clause numbers are not necessarily sequential.
2/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CONTENTS OF THE CIVIL AND BUILDING WORKS SPECIFICATION

SECTION
TITLE
001
Guidance Notes
012
Setting out and Monitoring
041
Excavation and Filling
051
Buried Foul and Surface Water Drainage
052
Building Drainage
061
Roads, Hardstandings, Car Parks, Paths, Kerbs, etc.
062
Permanent Traffic Signs and Road Markings
071
Fences and Gates
121
Buried Pressure Pipelines
131
Ducts and Trenches
201
Concrete Production
202
Reinforcement
211
Structural Steelwork
215
Crane Gantry Girders, Rails and Rail Fixings
231
Brickwork and Blockwork
241
Metal Cladding
251
PVC Sheet Roof Coverings
261
Carpentry and Joinery
271
Sanitary and Plumbing Installations
281
Plastering, Rendering and Dry Lining
282
Suspended Ceilings
283
Wall Tiling
284
Screeds and Floor Finishes
3/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
311
Windows, Doors and Shutters
312
Shutter Doors
331
Painting of Buildings
401
Waterproofing and Waterstops
402
Caulking and Sealants
403
Proprietary Anchor Systems
411
Copings and Flashings
412
Louvres
413
Piling
4/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
GENERAL SETTING OUT AND MONITORING

012
WORK GROUP: 010 : GENERAL
SECTION: 012
TITLE: SETTING OUT AND MONITORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Permanent Setting Out Stations
Bench Marks
Temporary Reference Points
Instruments
WORKMANSHIP
Site Datum
Temporary Setting Out Points
Temporary Bench Marks
Monitoring of Ground and Structures Movements
QUALITY CONTROL
Accuracy of Setting Out
Adjustments in Setting Out
Instruments
Records
1/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 1 BSI STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCES

APPENDIX 2 ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
2/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
012. 010
This Section defines the standards to be applied to the setting out register for the
Works and surveys for the monitoring of ground and building movements.
MATERIALS
012. 030
These shall be constructed in locations agreed by the Purchaser.

Bench Marks
012. 040
These shall be dome headed brass bolts fixed into the concrete of the Setting
Out Stations or at other locations agreed with the Purchaser.
Monitoring Reference Points
012. 050
Monitoring Reference Points shall be non-corrodible pins or plates set in

concrete of suitable proportions and location to avoid movement of the point.
Instruments
012. 060
Instruments to be used for checking setting out and monitoring shall be provided
by the Contractor and maintained in good working order.
WORKMANSHIP
General
012. 070
All survey, setting out and levelling shall be carried out in accordance with BS
5964.
012. 080
The setting out of the works shall be defined to an arbitrary site grid. On entry to
the site the Contractor shall check that co-ordinates of any existing survey
stations are consistent with each other and with critical existing features. He
shall then establish an adequate number of Permanent Setting Out Stations as
specified from which to set out the works, and establish and record their coordinates on the site grid.
3/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Site Datum
012. 090
Site Datum levels and co-ordinates shall be established as necessary and

agreed with the Purchaser prior to commencement of any setting out of the
Works.
012. 100
Permanent Setting Out Stations shall be accurately positioned and shall be

adequately protected from damage during the construction of the Works. Each
Permanent Setting-Out Station shall be visible from at least two other Permanent
Setting Out Stations and be referenced in such a way that it can be accurately
re-established if disturbed.
Temporary Setting Out Points
012. 120
All temporary setting out points which the Contractor deems necessary in order
to set out the Works shall be established to the accuracy given in BS 5964
Section 7.
012. 130
Temporary setting out points shall be adequately protected during the

construction of the Works and replaced if damaged or displaced. They shall be
removed at the completion of the Works or when directed by the Purchaser.
012. 140
Survey records for temporary setting out points shall be maintained by the
Contractor and made available to the Purchaser.
Temporary Bench Marks
012. 150
The Contractor shall establish such temporary bench marks as are necessary for
the execution of the Works. The levels shall be established and recorded and
shall be accurate to within the permissible deviations set out in BS 5964 Section
11.
012. 160
The Contractor shall record which bench mark has been used for each section of
the Works when setting levels.
012. 170
Bench marks shall be checked against permanent stations at frequent intervals

and at least weekly when in use.
012. 180
Survey records for verification of bench marks shall be maintained by the

Contractor and made available to the Purchaser upon request.
4/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Monitoring for Movements of Ground and Structures

012. 190
Monitoring for movements of ground or structures shall be carried out by the

Contractor at locations and frequencies as specified or when instructed.
012. 200
The locations of monitoring reference points shall be established by the

Contractor and adequately protected against any damage or displacement and
shall be accessible at all times.
012. 210
Precise methods of survey shall be used and the Contractor shall submit details
to the Purchaser of his method and the equipment to be used.
012. 220
All surveys shall be related to the Site Datum. Survey records shall be submitted
to the Purchaser.
012. 225
On entry to the Site the Contractor shall check the invert levels of all existing
drains and sewers to which the new drainage will connect and report any
discrepancies to the Purchaser.
QUALITY CONTROL
Accuracy of Setting Out
012. 230
The Contractor shall set out all the works as accurately as possible from the
appropriate setting out lines, established as described above. The maximum
tolerance permitted for any part of the works shall be as given in BS 5964
Section 8 unless specified otherwise in the Specification.
Adjustments in Setting Out
012. 240
Changes proposed because of discrepancies of line or level shall be submitted

to the Purchaser for agreement. Any consequent minor adjustments to the
setting out shall be made prior to the re-commencement of the construction
work.
5/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Instruments
012. 250
All equipment shall be regularly checked and calibrated to BS 5781 in

accordance with the manufacturers instructions or the Contractors own QA
Procedures.
012. 260
Tests on calibration shall be carried out at least every 6 months and at any time
when the accuracy of the equipment is suspect. Calibration certificates shall be
retained by the Contractor.
Records
012. 270
All surveys shall be fully recorded by the Contractor and the details and results
provided to the Purchaser as soon as possible on completion of each section of
the Works.
6/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The British Standards referred to in Section 012 are listed below, together with any other
references specified therein.
The latest editions shall be used, including all current amendments and additions.
Any differences between their requirements and this Specification shall be submitted to
the Purchaser for his ruling.
BS 5781
BS 5964
Measurement and calibration systems.

Methods for setting out and measurement of buildings: permissible
measuring deviations.
7/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 2 - ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR
CLAUSE REFERENCE
DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
012. 080
Site datum establishment.
012.100
Survey of setting out stations.
012.180
Verification of bench marks.
012.210
Details of method and equipment.
012.220
Movement survey records.
012.240
Discrepancies of line or level.
8/8
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 040 : EARTHWORKS
SECTION: 041
TITLE: EXCAVATION AND FILLING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Unsuitable and Suitable Materials
Topsoil
Turf
Grass Seed
Fertilizer
Classification of Special Filling Material
Hardcore
Materials Used in Reclaimed Areas
WORKMANSHIP
General
Materials Arising from On Site Excavations
Dealing with Water
Excavation
Explosives and Blasting
Filling
Method of Compaction of Suitable Filling Materials
Compaction of Hardcore
Planning & Compaction of Material in Reclaimed Areas
CWSpec-SECT041Rev4.doc
1/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
QUALITY CONTROL
Sampling of Fill Materials
Samples of Imported Filling Material and Hardcore
Soil Testing Laboratory
Laboratory Tests on Fill Materials
Field Tests and Fill Materials
Tolerance Limits
Settlement and Heave Allowance
CONTAMINATED SOILS
TOP SOILING, TURFING AND GRASS SEEDING
APPENDIX 2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
2/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
041. 010
This Section describes the general requirements for earthworks with

respect to excavation works and filling works.
MATERIALS
Unsuitable and Suitable Materials
041. 030
Unsuitable fill material shall comprise:

(a)
Material from swamps, marshes and bogs and organic

material.
(b)
Peat, logs, stumps and perishable materials.
(c)
Material susceptible to spontaneous

combustion.
(d)
Material in a frozen condition.
(e)
Clay of liquid limit exceeding 90 and/or plasticity index

exceeding 65.
(f)
Material having a moisture content outside the limits

permitted by this specification. All material with a moisture
content more than 2% above the optimum shall be classified
as unsuitable.
(g)
Any natural material or industrial or domestic product which

will not compact to form a stable fill or will adversely affect
other materials in the Works.
(h)
Any other material which the Purchaser considers to be

unsuitable.
Materials of type (d) if otherwise suitable may be classified as

suitable when thawed.
041. 040
Suitable fill material shall be categorised as follows:
3/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Class I: General cohesive fill shall include

-
Clays with not more than 20% of gravel or any larger sized
particles and having a moisture content within -4% to +2% of the
plastic limit unless otherwise stated.
Class II: Well graded granular fill which shall include:-
Sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient greater than 10.
Chalk with a saturation moisture content within the range 1520%.
Inert shales and clinker ash.
Maximum particle size 125mm.
Class III: Dry cohesive fills which shall include:-
Clays containing more than 20% of gravel or any larger sized

particles, and with a moisture content less than 4% below the
plastic limit.
Class IV: Uniformly graded fill which shall include

-
Sands and gravels with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less.
Pulverised fuel ashes.
Silts containing 80% or more of material in the particle size

range 0.06mm to 0.002mm.
Topsoil
041. 050
Topsoil shall be from the top humus-bearing horizons of the soil, free from
chemical or other pollutants, pests, unwanted weeds, roots and rubbish.
Imported topsoil shall be medium rated to BS 3882.
Turf
041. 051
Imported turf shall comply with BS 3969.

Grass Seed
4/21
Onyx South Downs
041. 052
EFW Contract
Imported seed, including where agreed by the Purchaser, that incorporated

in a hydraulic mulch, shall be a tested mixture suitable for a severe coastal
environment and certificates of germination and purity shall be provided
before sowing, together with the names of the varieties used in the mixture.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Purchaser, this shall contain the seeds
listed in Table 1 to the proportions therein.
Table 1: Grass Seed Mixture per 50kg
kg
Strong creeping red fescue
17.5
35
Smooth-stalked meadow grass
12.5
25
Highland browntop bent
5.0
10
Saltmarsh grass
12.5
25
White clover
2.5
Note: Seed varieties to be from the UK National List.

Fertilizer
041. 053
Fertiliser, including where agreed by the Purchaser that incorporated in

hydraulic mulch, shall consist of a compound containing not less than 10%
nitrogen, 15% phosphoric acid and 10% potash and samples shall be
submitted to the Purchaser for agreement prior to its use in the permanent
Works.
Classification of Special Filling Material
041. 060
Special material for filling shall be classified as follows:CLASS 'A' filling material shall consist of:
Crushed rock
Hoggin
Well burnt colliery shale
Sand and gravel
BS Sieve
)
) Graded as follows:
)
Percentage by
5/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Weight Passing
75mm
63mm
37.5mm
19mm
9.5mm
100
85-95
50-70
20-40
0-15
CLASS 'B' filling material shall consist of Hardcore as specified in Clause

[041.070], graded as follows:
BS Sieve or Ring
Percentage by
Weight Passing
125mm
75mm
37.5mm
19mm
9.5mm
100
70-90
30-50
10-25
0-10
CLASS 'C' filling material shall consist of:

Quarry stone
Concrete or stone rubble
) Graded as follows:
)
BS Sieve or Ring
Percentage by
Weight Passing
375mm
150mm
75mm
100
Not exceeding 50
Not exceeding 15
6/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLASS 'E' filling material shall consist of well graded crushed rock graded
as follows:
BS Sieve
Percentage by
Weight Passing
37.5mm
9.5mm
4.75mm
600 micron
75 micron
100
40-70
25-45
8-22
0-10
CLASS 'F' capping material shall consist of selected granular material other
than unburnt colliery point, argillaceous rock or in the case of class F1,
chalk. Capping may be either fine graded F1 or coarse graded F2 as
follows:
Percentage by Weight Passing

BS Sieve
F1
F2
125mm
100
90mm
80-100
75mm
100
65-100
37.5mm
75-100
45-100
10mm
40-95
15-60
5mm
30-85
10-45
600 micron
10-50
0-25
63 micron
<15
0-12
Hardcore
041. 070
Hardcore shall consist of any combination of broken or crushed concrete,

clean hard brick, coarse gravel or hard stone capable of passing in every
direction a ring of diameter not greater than two thirds the thickness of the
placed layer subject to a maximum diameter of 150mm. It shall be free
from dust, rubbish and any other deleterious matter.
7/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Materials Used in Reclaimed Areas

041. 075
Material placed below MHWN in reclaimed areas shall meet the

requirements of Class 6A of the Department of Transport's Specification for
Highway Works.
WORKMANSHIP
General
041. 080
All earthworks shall be adequately supported or formed to ensure stability

of the sides and to prevent any damage to the surrounding ground or
structures.
041. 090
The Contractor shall submit for agreement when required method

statements for his temporary support arrangements.
Materials Arising from On Site Excavations
041. 100
Excavated materials suitable for re-use in the works shall be stored in

stockpiles at locations and to profiles specified or otherwise agreed with the
Purchaser.
041. 110
Excavated top soil for re-use as topsoil shall be stockpiled separately in

storage heaps not more than 1.5m high to retain fertility for re-use as
topsoil. Compaction of the material shall be avoided and the only plant
permitted to travel over the heaps shall be that used for the transport of the
soil.
041. 120
Surplus excavated materials and excavated material not agreed by the

Purchaser for reuse shall unless stated otherwise be removed from site to a
tip provided by the Contractor and controlled or recognised by a Local
Authority.
041. 130
Where excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable

materials, the Contractor shall, when agreed by the Purchaser, carry out the
excavation such that the suitable materials are excavated separately for
use in the Works without contamination by the unsuitable materials.
041. 140
No excavated material shall be dumped or run to stockpile without the

agreement of the Purchaser. Material which is unsuitable only by reason of
being frozen may be retained on Site for future use.
8/21
Onyx South Downs
041. 150
EFW Contract
Material used for haul roads shall not be re-used without the agreement of
the Purchaser.
Dealing with Water

041. 160
The Contractor shall not permit water to accumulate in any excavation

unless otherwise instructed.
Any water whether arising from the excavation or draining into it shall be
drained or pumped to an agreed location via adequate settlement
arrangements or other means to prevent the deposition of solids or other
pollution into the receiving water.
041. 170
The Contractor shall take adequate steps to prevent adjacent ground from
being adversely affected by loss of fines through natural drainage or any
dewatering process and shall submit his proposals for dealing with water.
Excavation
041. 180
Topsoil shall be removed from the area of the Works and the working area
and set aside when required for reuse.
041. 190
For excavations in cohesive materials the final 150mm of material above

formation level shall only be removed immediately prior to placing the
blinding concrete or sub-base when the work can be programmed to be
carried out during the same day.
041. 200
Unsuitable hard or soft material encountered at formation levels shall be

removed and made good as agreed by the Purchaser.
041. 210
The Contractor shall make good at his own expense and in a manner
agreed with the Purchaser any parts of the formation and sides of
excavations made unsuitable by his working methods.
041. 220
Notice shall be given to the Purchaser prior to covering any formation.

Explosives and Blasting
041. 230
The use of explosives for blasting of excavations is not permitted without

the Purchasers written agreement.
9/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Filling
041. 240
No filling shall be carried out without the agreement of the Purchaser.

Haulage of material to areas of filling shall proceed only when sufficient
spreading and compacting plant is operating at the place of deposition.
Areas to be filled shall be clear of topsoil, rubbish, scrap material and
standing water when fill is placed.
041. 250
Filling material used in forming embankments, raising site levels, backfilling

around structures, in trenches and other similar works shall be deposited in
layers. Compaction shall be carried out in accordance with British Standard
BS 6031.
Each layer of fill shall be adequately consolidated throughout its full depth
prior to placement of an additional layer.
The filling material shall be compacted to a dry density not less than 95
percent of its maximum dry density as determined by BS 1377 where the fill
is to support any structure, including roads, and services, and to not less
than 90 percent elsewhere.
041. 260
Areas of general fill and embankments shall be built up evenly over the full
width and with side slopes not greater at any time than agreed by the
Purchaser. Areas of fill shall be kept free of water. During construction of
areas of fill the Contractor shall control and direct construction traffic
uniformly over their full width. Damage to compacted layers by construction
traffic shall be made good by the Contractor. In carrying out embankments
up to or over culverts, piped drains or other services, and where required in
the Contract up to or over bridges, the Contractor shall bring the
embankment up equally on both sides. Sloping surfaces of fill shall be
compacted.
041. 270
Backfilling to foundations shall be carried out at a time and to a programme

agreed by the Purchaser. Pipe trenches shall be backfilled as soon as
possible consistent with the specified testing requirements; power rammers
shall not be used within 300mm of any part of the pipe.
041. 280
Unless otherwise directed backfilling shall consist of agreed suitable

material as specified which shall be deposited in layers not exceeding
250mm loose depth.
10/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
041. 290
Due regard shall be paid to the method of backfilling and of compaction to

ensure that no damage is done to any structure, including pipes and
services. Care shall be taken to ensure that the filling to all trenches and
excavations proceeds at the same rate as the timbering or other supports
are removed.
041. 300
Filling around flexible pipes shall be brought up uniformly on each side of

the pipe and the method and degree of compaction shall be carried out as a
controlled process using suitable compacting equipment in a manner not to
cause irregular or excessive distortion of the pipe.
041. 310
Trenches under structures and roadways including up to 1m outside the

roadway edge shall be filled with imported fill material class 'A' (Clause
041.060) in layers fully compacted to the underside of the road-base or
structure.
041. 320
Filling around structures shall be carried out in such a manner as to avoid

uneven loading of the structure and only at such time as any Works have
achieved adequate strength to accept the loading.
041. 330
The upper surface of intermediate layers of fill material shall be laid to falls
to allow drainage of surface water and prevent ponding.
Method of Compaction of Suitable Filling Materials
041. 340
All materials placed as filling or embankments shall be compacted as soon

as possible after deposition.
041. 350
The permitted depth of each layer of fill is dependent upon the type of fill to
be consolidated and the compaction plant which will be used for its
compaction.
041. 360
The Contractor's proposals for compaction shall be submitted to the

Purchaser for agreement. The submission shall include full details of the
type of plant and method of operation to be used. Regardless of the method
of compaction he proposes to use, the Contractor shall compact the filling
to the specified density or as agreed by the Purchaser. Tests shall be
carried out in accordance with this Specification to measure the actual
density achieved.
Wherever low test results are obtained the Contractor shall improve the
degree of compaction to the specified level and carry out additional tests.
041. 370
Where materials of widely divergent characteristics are used they shall be
11/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
deposited in separate clearly defined areas as agreed by the Purchaser so

that compaction as appropriate may be carried out in each area.
041. 380
The depth of a compacted layer is the height by which an area is raised by

each successive compacted deposition
041. 390
The number of passes is the number of times that each point on the surface
of the layer being compacted has been traversed by the item of compaction
plant.
041. 400
Where different types of compaction plant are used in combination, the

depth of layer shall be that applicable to the plant requiring the greatest
number of passes.
041. 410
Where the Contractor uses a lighter plant to provide some preliminary

compaction, this shall be disregarded in arriving at the compaction
requirements.
041. 420
The effective width of pneumatic tyre rollers shall be taken as the sum of
the widths of the individual wheel tracks plus the sum of the spaces
between the wheel tracks providing each space does not exceed 225mm.
Where the spaces exceed 225mm the effective width shall be the sum of
the widths of the individual wheel tracks.
041. 430
The load per metre width shall be the total weight on the roll divided by the
total roll width. Where a smooth-wheel roller has more than one axle, the
machine will be assessed on the basis of the axle giving the highest value
of load per unit width. For pneumatic-tyre rollers the wheel load shall be the
total weight of the roller divided by the number of wheels.
041. 440
Vibratory rollers shall have means of applying mechanical vibration to one

or more roller. Their requirements are based on the use of the lowest gear
on a self-propelled machine or a towing speed 1.6 to 2.4 km/h for a towed
plant.
Where higher gears or speeds are used an agreed increased number of
passes shall be made in proportion to the increase in speed. They shall be
operated with their vibration mechanism operating only at the frequency
recommended by the manufacturers, and all rollers shall be equipped with a
device automatically indicating this frequency and the speed of travel.
Vibratory rollers which are operated without their vibration mechanisms
working shall be classified as smooth-wheeled rollers.
Vibrating-plate compactors shall have a baseplate to which is attached a
source of vibration consisting of one or two eccentrically weighted shafts,
and shall be operated at the frequency of vibration recommended by the
041. 450
12/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
manufacturer. Where they are operated at travelling speeds greater than

15m per minute the number of passes required shall be increased in
proportion to the increase in speed of travel.
041. 460
Vibro-tampers shall have an engine-driven reciprocating mechanism acting

on a spring system to set up oscillations in a baseplate.
041. 470
Power rammers shall be actuated by explosions in an internal combustion

cylinder, each explosion being controlled manually by the operator. One
strike of the compacting shoe shall count as one pass on the area
concerned.
Compaction of Hardcore
041. 480
Each layer of hardcore shall be compacted and the degree of compaction

obtained on layers not exceeding 300mm thick shall be not less than that
which would be obtained by six passes with a vibration-plate compactor
with a static pressure under the baseplate of not less than 17 kN/m2.
Planning and Compaction of Material in Reclaimed Areas
041. 481
Clauses 041. 482 to 041. 490 relate to material placed below MHWN in
reclaimed areas. Fill material above MHWN shall be placed and
compacted in accordance with Clause 041. 240 to 041. 480 hereof.
041. 482
All filling in reclamation areas shall be carried out in accordance with

principles contained in BS 6349 Part 5 1991, except as amended herein
041. 483
The Contractor's method of transporting, placing and forming the fill shall
ensure that environmental impacts are minimised. In particular he shall
ensure that fill is stable at all times under the action of currents, wind and
waves and that the loss of material into suspension is minimised either by
ensuring that exposed material is of sufficient size and grading to remain in
position or that the material is protected from wave and current action by
such measures as containment bunds or temporary armouring.
13/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
041. 484
The Contractor shall also ensure that the drainage of water from
reclamation placed above sea water level shall be such as to minimize
suspended sediment in the vicinity and shall continually monitor
concentration levels of suspended materials to demonstrate that no
increase in concentration levels results from his operations and he shall
submit his proposals to the Purchaser for agreement.
041. 485
Prior to the commencement of filling operations the Contractor shall provide

details of the post construction settlement characteristics of the completed
reclamation based on his proposed construction methods and sequencing,
fill gradings and seabed conditions. The details shall include full
justification of the suitability of the completed fill for the construction of the
road above.
041. 486
The Contractor's methods and sequence for placing fill within the
reclamation area and for treating the fill during and following placement
shall be subject to the Purchasers agreement.
041. 487
The formation of silt-ponds in the reclamation areas will not be permitted

and any significant soft areas which, in the opinion of the Purchaser, would
cause differential settlement of the fill, shall be removed at the Contractor's
expense and disposed off site.
041. 488
The layout and details of containment bunds for the purpose of retaining
material shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
041. 489
Any material placed outside agreed site limits shall be removed by the
Contactor prior to completion or sectional completion as appropriate.
041. 490
All finished surfaces shall be trimmed and graded to the levels agreed with
the Purchaser and rolled by an agreed weight and type of roller. All
settlement below the agreed levels shall be made good and re-rolled and
repeated as necessary.
14/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
Sampling of Fill Materials
041. 495
The Contractor shall provide all necessary plant and labour for obtaining,
handling and testing samples.
Samples of Imported Filling Material and Hardcore
041. 500
Sample loads of imported filling material and hardcore shall be supplied for
agreement by the Purchaser. Filling material or hardcore shall not be
delivered to the Site for use in the Works before the Purchaser has agreed
the sample and the source from which it was obtained. The quality of all
materials in the Works shall conform with that of the agreed samples which
shall be retained on Site.
041. 510
For permanent earthworks the Contractor shall nominate, subject to the

Purchasers agreement, a suitable laboratory where soil tests may be
carried out independently to confirm that the workmanship is in accordance
with the Specification. Tests shall include Tests 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13
and 15 as specified in BS 1377. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements with the laboratory at his own expense.
Laboratory Tests on Fill Materials
041. 520
Before using fill materials in permanent earthworks the Contractor shall, if

required by the Purchaser, carry out compaction tests using BS 1377, Test
13 to determine the dry density/moisture content relationship for each
classification of fill material he proposes to use and submit the results of
these tests to the Purchaser for information.
Field Tests on Fill Materials
041. 530
At the commencement of the permanent earthworks the Contractor shall, if

required by the Purchaser, construct a trial area of filling or embankment for
each classification of fill material proposed. Field density tests shall be
carried out in accordance with BS 1377 Test 15 to determine the density of
placed fill and the acceptability of compaction methods. Results of these
tests shall be submitted to the Purchaser for agreement.
041. 540
During the progress of the Works the Contractor shall carry out field density
15/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
tests in accordance with BS 1377 Test 15, and the results of these tests will
be used as a check on the Contractor's operations. The frequency of these
tests shall be:
For all areas of fill there shall be a 1 test per 1000 m2 with a minimum of
three tests per layer. If a material of uniform consistency is used and a
reliability of testing achieved then subject to the approval of the purchaser
NDM testing may be used.
041. 550
If a test shows the compaction achieved to be inadequate compared with

the trial area, a further test shall be carried out in the fill. Should this test
show the compaction achieved to be inadequate compared with the trial
area then the Contractor shall carry out such further measures as are
necessary to obtain the required compaction.
041. 560
Results of all tests shall be submitted to the Purchaser within 24 hours of

each test. A monthly summary report of all tests shall also be submitted to
the Purchaser.
Tolerance Limits
041. 570
The tolerance limits for the permanent finished earthworks shall be as

follows:
Horizontal dimensions shall be within + 150mm.
For slopes to embankments or cuttings the horizontal deviation

between the top and the bottom of the slope shall be within + 5
percent of the horizontal component of the slope.
Formation levels shall be within zero and -25mm.
Other earthworks levels shall be within zero and -100mm.
Settlement and Heave Allowance

041. 580
In the setting out and construction of excavations and filled areas the
Contractor shall allow for settlement and heave whether caused by
consolidation of fill, settlement of foundations, heave in excavations or
change in volume of materials after excavation.
CONTAMINATED SOILS
16/21
Onyx South Downs
041. 590
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall satisfy the Purchaser as to the likelihood of

excavation, backfilling or transport operations causing hazards to health or
pollution either immediately or over an extended period of time. Operations
involving contaminated soil shall be subject to prior agreement from the
Purchaser.
TOPSOILING, TURFING AND GRASS SEEDING
041. 700
In areas where existing roads or other hard surfaces are to be broken out
and topsoiled, all material down to formation level (except as noted below)
shall be excavated and removed.
Excavation for topsoiled areas shall not take place where this would reduce
support to the kerb. This requirement will be satisfied if none of the
concrete race or haunch is removed and no excavation takes place within a
line at 45 to the horizontal extending down and outwards from the point on
which the kerb meets the surfacing.
041. 710
No work shall be carried out when rain is falling, when there has been rain
within the previous 24 hours or when, in the opinion of the Purchaser, the
sub-soil is likely to be damaged.
041. 720
Topsoil shall not be stored in temporary stockpiles unless agreed by the

Purchaser.
If temporary stockpiles are agreed by the Purchaser, topsoil shall not be
excavated from stockpiles:
i)
ii)
iii)
which have been exposed to a cumulative rainfall exceeding

100mm over the preceding 28 days measured at a point agreed by
the Purchaser; or
when heavy rain is falling; or
with a tracked vehicle.
041. 730
The areas to be grassed shall be topsoiled, fertilised and seeded or

topsoiled, fertilised and turfed. Fertiliser and seed may be applied by
hydraulic mulch.
041. 740
Topsoil mounds to be grassed shall be constructed at no steeper than 25

to the horizontal.
Topsoil shall:
17/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
i)
be deposited and spread to a minimum thickness of 100mm for

seeding and 75mm for turfing. It shall not be spread using a tracked
vehicle;
ii)
have stones and other debris removed and disposed off Site which
have:
iii)
iv)
a) dimensions greater than 100mm equivalent diameter, unless

otherwise agreed by the Purchaser; and
b) dimensions greater than 50mm equivalent diameter which lie
within 50mm of the surface;
not have stones or other debris protruding above the surface by
more than 30mm; and
immediately prior to sowing of seed, including that applied by
hydraulic mulch, and before laying of turf, have:
a) its upper 50mm thickness reduced to a fine tilth by use of a
chain harrow or other plant producing a similar fine tilth; and
b) fertiliser shall be evenly distributed and raked in, at a rate not
less than 75g/m2. If hydraulic mulch seeding is used such
fertiliser may be incorporated in the mulch and no raking in is
necessary.
041. 750
041. 760
Seeding shall:
(i)
include that incorporated in a hydraulic mulch shall be a tested

mixture and certificates of germination and purity shall be provided
before sowing, together with the names of the varieties used in the
mixture. This shall contain the seeds listed Table 6/5 of Volume 1
of "Specification for Highway Works".
(ii)
be carried out by evenly distributing such seed at a rate of not less

than 35 g/m2 unless agreed by the Purchaser; and
iii)
be immediately followed by lightly raking, by use of a chain harrow

or other plant agreed by the Purchaser, the surface of the topsoil to
cover the seeds, except that no raking is required following
hydraulic mulch seeding.
iv)
Hydraulic mulch seeding shall be applied by a process and consist

of a mulch agreed by the Purchaser.
Turf shall:
18/21
Onyx South Downs
i)
ii)
EFW Contract
be laid well bonded and lightly tamped and, when on slopes, be laid
diagonally;
be regularly watered as necessary during prolonged dry weather.
041. 770
Areas that have been grassed by seeding or turfing shall be mown twice to
leave a nominal 75mm height. The first mowing shall be carried out once
the grass has reached a height of between 100mm and 150mm, the second
when it has re-grown to between 150mm and 200mm. All areas shall,
unless agreed otherwise by the Purchaser, be left clear of grass cuttings
following each mowing, by raking or other method agreed by the Purchaser
and arisings disposed off Site.
041. 780
At the times (which may include times within the period of maintenance)
and within the areas agreed by the Purchaser, a selective herbicide,
agreed by the Purchaser, especially formulated for the eradication of
docks, thistles, ragwort and other pernicious agricultural weeds, shall be
applied by spot treatment spray to such plants individually; the use of a
spray boom will not be permitted.
19/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The British Standards and other documents referred to in Section 041 are listed
below and shall be the current edition, including all amendments.
The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Purchaser any inconsistencies
between the requirements of these Standards and this Specification Section.
BS 1377
Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.
BS 6031
Code of practice for earthworks.
Department of Transport: `Specification for Highway Works': Part 2 (HMSO)

(including all BSI Standards referenced therein).
20/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 2 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
CLAUSE REFERENCE
041.100
Method statements for temporary supports.
041.170
Proposals for dewatering.
041.220
Covering formation.
041.230
Method statement for blasting.
041.250
Start of compaction.
041.360
Contractor's proposal for compaction.
041.484
Proposals for monitoring suspended solids.
041.486
Methods and sequence for placing fill in

reclamation areas.
041.488
Details of containment bunds.
041.500
Sample details of fill materials.
041.510
041.520
Results of compaction tests.
041.530
Results of field density tests.
041.560
Results of field tests.
041.560
Monthly summary of all density tests.
041.590
Details of operations involving health or

pollution hazards.
21/21
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 050 : DRAINAGE
SECTION NO: 051
TITLE: BURIED FOUL AND SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Pipes and Gullies
Pipe Joints and Fittings
Pipes Protection
Pipe Bedding and Fill Material
Chambers and Manholes
Open Channel Drains
WORKMANSHIP
General
Excavation
Pipe Laying
Cutting
Deflection
Pipe Jointing
Backfilling
Reinstatement of Surfaces
Pipe Sundries
Laying Open Channel Drains
1/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Cleaning and Survey of Existing Drains
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing - General
Water test
Air test
Infiltration Test
Testing - Manholes
Testing - Line and Level
Tolerances
2/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
051. 010
This Section defines the materials and workmanship required for the
installation of buried gravity foul and surface water drainage.
MATERIALS
Pipes and Gullies
051. 020
UPVC drainage pipes and fittings shall conform with the requirements of BS
4660 and BS 5481 as appropriate to the size of pipe.
051. 030
Clay pipes and fittings shall be vitrified and shall be to BS 65. They shall be
flexibly jointed using an external sleeve or spigot and socket joints.
051. 040
Precast Concrete pipes, fittings and road gullies shall be to BS 5911. They
may be reinforced or unreinforced and shall have flexible joints. Gulley
gratings shall be to BS 497.
051. 050
Ductile Iron pipes, fittings and joints shall be to BS 4772 and shall have
flexible spigot and socket joints.
051.055
In the Tipping Hall and Boiler Plant Area, floor gullies shall be fitted with
removable covers and stainless steel lift-out baskets.
Pipe joints and fittings
051. 060
All jointing materials shall be unaffected by the material being carried.

Elastomeric joint rings shall be to BS 2494 and shall be obtained from the
pipe manufacturer.
051. 070
Gaskets for flanged joints shall be to BS 2494 and be of the inside-boltcircle type to BS 4865.
051. 080
Black hexagon bolts and nuts shall be to BS 4190.
051. 090
Metal washers shall be to BS 4320.
051. 100
Pipe Couplings and flange adapters of the Viking Johnson type may be
agreed by the Purchaser for use in special circumstances.
Compressible board for movement joints in concrete bedding and surround
shall be expanded polystyrene to BS 3837 or bitumen impregnated fibre
051. 110
3/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
board to BS 1142.
Pipe Protection
051. 120
Polythene tubular sleeving shall be used to protect ductile iron pipelines

and joints and shall be to BS 6076.
051. 130
All exposed ferrous metal including pipes, valves and brackets in chambers
shall be given two coats of an agreed bitumen solution to BS 3416.
051. 140
All buried Viking Johnson couplings and adapters shall be protected with an
agreed self-adhesive bandage prior to being covered with polythene
sleeving.
Pipe Bedding and Fill Material
051. 150
Concrete for use as pipe bedding, surround, cradle or arch shall be Class
C20.
051. 160
Granular bedding Type 'A' for pipes, and backfilling material for temporary
drains (trench sub-drains), shall consist of aggregates from natural sources
or sintered pulverized-fuel ash complying with the relevant provisions of BS
882 and BS 3797, respectively, sized in accordance with the following table:
Nominal bore
of pipe
(mm)
Alternative Aggregate sizes

(mm)
100
150
225-300
375-525
exceeding
4/18
Single-sized
Graded
10
10 or 14
10, 14, or 20
14 to 20
14, 20 or 40
14 to 5
14 to 5 or 20 to 5
14 to 5 or 20 to 5
15 to 5, 20 to 5
or 40 to 5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
051.170
Selected fill Type 'B', whether selected from locally excavated material or
imported, shall consist of uniform, readily compactible material, free from
vegetable matter, building rubbish and frozen material, or materials
susceptible to spontaneous combustion, and excluding clay of liquid limit
greater than 80 and/or plastic limit greater than 55 and materials of
excessively high moisture content. Clay lumps and stones shall be retained
on 75mm and 37.5mm sieves respectively.
051.180
Pipe bedding and fill materials to concrete pipes shall not contain more than
0.3 per cent sulphate, expressed as sulphur trioxide.
051. 190
Brick chamber construction shall be in Class B Engineering brick to BS

3921 in English bond 215mm thick with 1:3 cement mortar on a base of
concrete Class C20.
051. 200
Precast concrete units for manhole and other chamber construction shall be
to BS 5911.
051. 210
Cast iron manhole covers and frames shall be to BS 497 and be bedded
and haunched with class M1 mortar.
051. 220
Step irons shall be to BS 1247.

Open Channel Drains
051. 240
Open channel drains shall be ACO Drains S300 or S200 Super Heavy-Duty
channel as supplied by ACO Polymer Products Ltd, or similar agreed.
The system shall be of 300mm/200mm nominal width and manufactured to
a constant depth. The channel and grating combinations shall be designed
to withstand imposed loadings up to Grade A to BS 497.
051. 250
The channels shall be constructed from Syntolit P polyester concrete with a

cast-in-ductile-iron frame and shall be installed with the manufacturer's
standard cast ductile-iron grating, the grating shall be locked securely in
position by bolting to the channel edge railing using eight high-tensile steel
bolts to each metre length of channel.
051. 260
The system shall be designed to provide uninterrupted access to the
5/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
channel for cleaning when the gratings are removed.

WORKMANSHIP
General
051. 270
All pipes and fittings are to be handled, stored, installed and jointed in
accordance with the relevant manufacturer's requirements.
051. 280
Work shall be carried out in a safe manner in accordance with all applicable
Safety Regulations.
Excavation
051. 290
All excavation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 041,

'Excavation and Filling' of this Specification except where varied by the
following requirements.
051. 300
The stability of trenches and other excavations must be adequately ensured

by the Contractor to provide a safe working environment as well as
protecting any adjacent services or structures. The Contractor shall submit
details of his proposed method of working to the Purchaser for agreement
prior to commencement.
051. 310
Trench excavation for pipelines shall be cut with vertical sides not less than
300 mm wider than the outside diameter of the barrel of the pipe and not
greater than the maximum trench width necessary to install the pipe. The
sides of the trench excavation shall not be battered without the agreement
of the Purchaser.
051. 320
Excavations shall be kept free of water from any source and such water
shall be drained or pumped to an agreed discharge position taking steps to
prevent any loss of fines which might adversely affect the surrounding
ground and any pollution of water courses.
051. 330
Trench and chamber formations shall be inspected and agreed prior to work
proceeding. Any unsuitable hard and soft material removed shall be
replaced with compacted selected granular material.
Pipe Laying
051. 340
Natural bedding - The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately formed to
6/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
levels and gradients with pockets cut for pipe joints so that full bearing
support is provided over the whole length of the pipe barrel.
051. 350
Granular bedding - The trench formation shall be trimmed to permit a

minimum thickness of 100mm of granular material to be laid and compacted
to support the barrel of the pipe over the full width of the trench.
051. 360
Pipes laid on natural or granular bedding shall be laid on firm material over
the length of the pipe barrel. Temporary supports shall not be used.
051. 370
When the pipe has been bedded to the correct line and level granular or
selected material shall be placed either side of the pipe and compacted by
hand in layers 100 to 150mm thick up to the specified level. Thereafter the
material should be placed and compacted in 150 to 200mm layers to a
minimum height of 300mm above the crown.
051. 380
Concrete bedding - The trench bottom shall be trimmed to permit the

minimum thickness of concrete required under the barrel of the pipe. The
pipe shall be laid and supported to the correct line and level on precast
concrete support blocks covered with two layers compressible packing.
051. 390
Concrete shall be placed on to the trench formation and brought up evenly

either side of the pipe to the required level in one operation ensuring that no
voids are left and that the pipes are not disturbed by this operation.
051. 400
Where flexibly jointed pipes are bedded or surrounded in concrete the

concrete shall be discontinuous at every pipe joint and shall be jointed
using compressible packing 15mm thick shaped to fit around the pipe and
to match the concrete cross-section.
7/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Cutting
051. 410
Pipes which are cut on site shall be cut clean and square with minimum
damage to any coating, using equipment recommended by the
manufacturer. Where ductile iron pipes larger than 450mm diameter are to
be cut to form non-standard lengths the manufacturer's instructions
regarding ovality correction shall be carried out.
Deflection
051. 420
Where joints are to be deflected such deflection shall not exceed the
manufacturer's recommendations and a method statement shall be
submitted to the Purchaser for agreement prior to work being carried out.
Joints to be deflected shall be made square before being displaced. With
bolted joints the required deflection shall be set prior to final tightening.
Pipe Jointing
051. 430
All pipes fittings and valves shall be carefully cleaned immediately prior to
jointing, and pipes shall normally be laid uphill with the socket leading.
051. 440
The closure of spigot and socket joints shall be made in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations using special equipment as
necessary.
051. 450
Flange joints shall not be pulled into alignment or drawn together by the
flanges. The setting of flanges must be parallel and as close together as
possible before the bolts are tightened up to the specific order and torque
recommended by the manufacturer. Flange gaskets shall not be held in
position using lubricant.
051. 460
Bolts and nuts shall be run by hand before assembly and shall be greased
with graphite paste or equivalent before use.
051. 470
After jointing, the open end of each pipe shall be closed to prevent the
ingress of water or foreign material. Care shall be taken to prevent flotation
of sealed pipes.
Backfilling
8/18
Onyx South Downs
051. 480
EFW Contract
Where the particular bedding type specified does not extend to a level
300mm above the top of the pipe, backfilling to that level shall be made
using carefully selected material free from large stones etc. and compacted
by hand in 100mm layers, carefully working under and around pipes .
Backfilling shall proceed thereafter using suitable material as specified in
layers not exceeding 250mm placed thickness, each layer being thoroughly
compacted whilst progressively withdrawing trench supports.
051. 490
Mechanical compaction shall not be carried out until there is 600mm of

compacted material above the pipe crown. The use of mechanical
compactors shall not be permitted without the agreement of the Purchaser.
051. 500
Where the pipe has been protected with concrete bed or surround,
backfilling shall not be commenced for 24 hrs; neither shall traffic loads be
imposed within 72 hours of placing the concrete.
051. 505
Where a trench for a pipeline is cut through an existing paved surface that
will not be reconstructed as part of the works, the surface shall be
reinstated in accordance with the HAUC "Specification for Excavations and
the Reinstatement of Openings in Highways (1991)".
In permanent reinstatement of bituminous surfacing each layer of the
original construction shall be reinstated with material to match the original.
Joints in bituminous materials shall be saw cut in straight lines and painted
with hot bitumen. Joints in any course shall be steeped back 100mm from
the joint in the course below.
In situ concrete shall have sawn edges to the trench in the top 30mm only.
Below this level the trench sides shall be rough. Before re-casting the sides
shall have all laitance and loose material removed. They shall be painted
with cement grout before casting of the new slab. Concrete mix shall be of
Grade C40 concrete complying with Section 301 of this Specification with
the added requirement that it shall be air-entrained (4 1%). Surface
finish to match existing.
051. 508
When excavating blocks, setts, cobbles or brick paving ("blocks etc") care
shall be taken to ensure that all blocks etc. excavated are set aside for reuse. Reinstatement shall be the same as the existing construction where
9/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
this is possible, except that where no sub-base or roadbase exists at

present a suitable sub-base shall be provided. All blocks etc. that are
disturbed or have moved in any way shall be re-set even though this may
involve re-laying the blocks etc. for a considerable distance outside the
pipetrench. The requirements of Section 061 of this Specification shall
apply where appropriate.
Pipe Sundries
051. 510
Where connections to existing services are to be made the written

agreement of the Purchaser shall be obtained for any works involving live
chambers or pipes.
051. 520
The position and invert levels of existing chambers and pipes to which
connections are to be made shall be verified by the Contractor before pipe
laying commences and any discrepancies notified to the Purchaser
immediately.
051. 530
Where loose polyethylene sleeving is applied to ductile iron pipes it shall be

held in position using PVC tape applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and with appropriate overlap at the joints
made after any other joint protection has been applied.
051. 540
At each point where a pipeline is temporarily terminated a fixed marker shall

be attached to the pipeline and held above ground level.
051. 550
During cold weather adequate protection shall be given to prevent freezing

of any charged pipeline prior to backfilling.
051. 560
All brick and precast concrete chambers shall be constructed to be

substantially watertight with no identifiable flow of water visible within the
Permanent Works.
051. 570
All manhole covers shall be set on 1:3 cement mortar and where the
manholes are of precast concrete on at least two but not more than four
courses of Class B engineering brickwork.
051. 580
Precast concrete manhole units shall be bedded on mortar and flush

pointed internally.
051. 590
Concrete surrounds for the chambers shall be formed using a suitable
10/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
shutter with any horizontal construction joints formed at least 150mm from
the ring joint.
051. 600
For main pipe diameters up to and including 300mm, the open channel of
the manhole or inspection chamber shall be formed in complete channel
sections tapers or junctions of the same material as the pipe.
051. 610
Side branches shall be brought into the main channel by the use of
standard channel bends within the manhole which shall have the largest
practicable radii. Connections to the main channel shall be such that the
discharge from the branches is in the direction of flow in the main channel.
051. 620
Channels, branches and bends shall be fully bedded in mortar.
051. 630
Where channel fittings are not available in the appropriate sizes, they shall
be properly formed in in-situ concrete and finished with granolithic or mortar
rendering to a minimum thickness of 20mm in two coats.
051. 640
The soffits of the main pipes entering and leaving a manhole or chamber
shall be set to equal levels.
051. 650
The inverts of branch drains entering a manhole shall be set above the
horizontal diameter of the main channel.
051. 655
Rectangular manhole covers shall be set with two sides parallel to the
kerbline or nearby road markings.
051. 660
Connections to main pipes not made at manholes or inspection chambers

shall generally be made using pre-formed junctions ("branches"). Preformed saddles may be used to joint into existing pipes or in special
circumstances with the Purchaser's agreement. Saddle connections shall
be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using an epoxy
mortar adhesive and carefully making good the inside of the pipe prior to
any connection being made. In either case the junction shall be surrounded
with concrete up to the next pipe joint.
051. 670
Where a connection either direct or as a back-drop enters an existing

manhole, the benching shall be cut away, built up and made good to form a
channel equal in depth to the diameter of the incoming connection, and
shaped to direct the discharge in the direction of flow.
Laying Open Channel Drains
11/18
Onyx South Downs
051. 760
EFW Contract
The channels shall be installed in continuous trenches bedded on a C20

concrete foundation 150mm deep with C40 concrete haunching brought up
both sides.
The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
Cleaning and Survey of Existing Drains
051. 761
On entry to the Site the Contractor shall clean all existing drains and sewers
within and in the immediate vicinity of the Site.
Pipelines shall be cleaned by high pressure jet or rodding and flushing or by
other means agreed by the Purchaser. Cleaning shall be continued until
flushing water is clean, there is no resistance to drainage rods other than
that which could be expected from pipe joints and (in situations where there
are straight runs between manholes) no debris is visible in the invert when
a light is shone from one manhole to the next. All gullies and manholes
shall be cleaned by suction until visibly clean.
051. 762
After cleaning the drains the Contractor shall carry out a complete survey of
the location, level, size and condition of the existing drainage runs and
report the results to the Purchaser. The survey shall define the position of
all visible features by co-ordinates related to the local grid and define the
size, direction and invert level of all pipes entering or leaving. Where there
is any doubt as to which pipe connects to which the Contractor shall prove
the network by die testing. The Contractor shall plot the results at a scale
of 1:500 on a film copy of the survey drawings, which he will provide for the
purpose. The survey drawing shall be accompanied by a written report on
the condition of the drains suitably cross-referenced to the drawing. A
record of manhole sizes is also required.
051. 763
If the cleaning and survey or the shape of the external pavings imply the
likelihood of the existence of manholes or gulleys that are not visible from
the surface, the Contractor shall locate them by trial excavation (combined
if appropriate with the use of metal detectors) and clean and survey them
as specified above.
051. 764
If the Purchaser considers that existing drains may be in an unacceptable

condition the Contractor will carry out a CCTV survey of specific lengths of
12/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
pipeline. In this event the survey shall take place in the presence of the
Purchasers Appointed Representative. A complete log shall be made of
the condition and shape of the pipe and any signs of leakage, infiltration or
displacement and it shall all be fully referenced by chainage to manholes.
The survey shall be in colour and copies of a VHS video tape shall be made
with the reference and chainage visible when the tape is played.
One copy of the videotape shall be delivered to the Purchaser and one to
his Appointed Representative within one week of the survey.
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing - General
051. 765
Clauses 051.770 to 051.880 apply to surface water sewers. In the event of

salt water infiltration, in the case of foul sewers the permitted quantities of
air or water lost in the testing process shall be half those quoted.
The test methods shall remain the same.
051. 770
All pipelines shall be initially tested, utilizing either an air or a water test,
after laying and jointing, but before any concreting or backfilling takes place
other than that which may be necessary for the structural stability whilst
under test. A final water test shall be applied after completion of backfilling.
051. 780
The Contractor shall submit a statement of his proposed methods for

testing including details of the pipe lengths to be tested.
051. 790
Each test shall be witnessed by the Purchaser and results documented.
051. 800
Wherever possible, testing of drains shall be carried out from manhole to

manhole. Short branches up to 3m to the main pipelines shall be tested as
one system with the pipeline. Long branches shall be tested separately.
Water Test
051. 810
Clean water shall be used for the water test, and shall be removed after the
completion of the test.
051. 820
The test shall be carried out temporarily plugging the ends of the gravity
13/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
pipe under test including any connections, erecting a stand pipe at the head
of the pipe and filling the system with water at least one hour before test
commencement to allow for absorption.
051. 830
Drains and sewers shall be subject to an internal pressure test of 1.2m

head of water above the crown of the pipe at the high end but not more
than 6m at the low end. Steeply graded sewers shall be tested in stages
whenever the above maximum head would be exceeded if the whole length
was under test.
051. 840
The test shall measure the loss of water over a period of 30 minutes. Water
shall be added from a measuring vessel at intervals of 5 minutes, noting the
quantity required to maintain the original level.
The quantity of water added for pipes up to 750mm diameter shall not
exceed 1 litre per hour per linear metre, per metre of nominal internal
diameter. For larger diameter pipes the Contractor shall submit a statement
agreed by the pipe manufacturer stating the method of testing, the test
head and the permissible loss of water for the agreement of the Purchaser.
051. 850
Notwithstanding satisfactory testing any discernable leakage from a pipe or

joint shall be made good and the test repeated.
Air Test
051. 860
The length of pipe under test shall be effectively plugged and air pumped in
until a pressure of 100mm of water is indicated in a glass U-tube connected
to the system. The pressure shall not fall to less than 75mm during a
period of five minutes without further pumping after allowing a suitable time
for stabilisation of temperature. Failure to pass an air test shall not
preclude acceptance subsequently by a water test.
Infiltration Test
051. 870
When agreed by the Purchaser and where the crown of the high part of the
length under test is more than 1.2m below the water table, an infiltration test
shall be employed. All inlets shall be effectively closed. Visual inspection of
manholes or inspection chambers will then reveal any excessive flow. The
acceptable rate of infiltration shall not exceed 0.5 litre per linear metre per
metre of nominal bore in 30 minutes.
Testing - Manholes
14/18
Onyx South Downs
051. 880
EFW Contract
After sealing all pipe openings all manholes shall be filled with water up to
underside of the cover or to a maximum of 9m total head in the system,
whichever is the lesser, and left for a minimum period of 24 hours. At the
end of this period the manhole shall maintain the test water level for a
minimum period of 1/2 hour without the water level falling more than 10mm
per metre depth. Before sealing the outgoing pipe the Contractor shall
ensure that the seal may be easily removed upon completion of the test.
Testing - Line and Level
051. 890
Test for line, level and freedom from obstruction shall be applied to all
pipelines prior to the placing of the backfill and again when backfilling and
the reinstatement of the surfaces has been completed. The tests shall be
carried out by means of a mirror at one end of the line and a lamp at the
other demonstrating a 90 percent "full moon". When this test cannot be
applied a mandrel of the size and type agreed by the Purchaser with a
maximum diameter 10mm smaller than the pipe diameter shall be drawn
through the pipeline to prove the pipework.
Tolerances
051. 900
The position of the internal face of any pipeline shaft or tunnel shall not
deviate from that detailed in the contract by more than:Pipeline
Line and level 10mm. Provided that no pipe shall

have a reverse gradient.
15/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 65
BS 497
Part 1:
BS 882
BS 1142
BS 1247
BS 2494
BS 3416
BS 3797
BS 3837
BS 3921
BS 4190
BS 4320
BS 4346
BS 4660
BS 4772
BS 5480
BS 5481
BS 5834
BS 5911
BS 6076
BS 6209
Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings joints and ducts.

Specification for manhole covers, road gully gratings and
frames for drainage purposes.
Cast iron and cast steel.
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 124: 1994.
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for
concrete.
Specification for fibre building boards.
Specification for manhole step irons.
Specification for elastomeric joint rings for pipework and pipelines.
Specifications for bitumen based coating for cold application suitable for
use in contact with potable water.
Specifications for lightweight aggregates for concrete.
Expanded polystyrene boards.
Specification for clay bricks.
Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes.
Joints and fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes.
Specification for unplasticized PVC underground drain pipes and
fittings.
Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings.
Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes and fittings
for use for water supply or sewerage.
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for gravity sewers.
Surface boxes grounds and underground chambers for gas and
waterwork purposes.
Precast concrete pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage.
Specification for tubular polyethylene film for use as protective sleeving
for buried iron pipes and fittings.
Specification for solvent cement for non pressure thermoplastics pipe
systems.
Highway Authorities and Utilities Committee - Specification for the
Reinstatement of Openings in Highways (HMSO)
16/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
17/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
051.300
Temporary excavation details.
051.320
Proposals for discharge of water.
051.330
Notification for formation inspection.
051.420
Method statement - deflection of joints.
051.490
Agreement of mechanical compactors.
051.510
Agreement for connections to live

services.
COMMENT
051.780
Proposed method of testing.
051.790
Notification of tests.
051.890
Agreement of mandrel.
18/18
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 060 : EXTERNAL WORKS
SECTION NO: 061
TITLE: ROADS, HARDSTANDINGS, CAR PARKS, PATHS, KERBS ETC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Car Parking, Footways, Kerbs etc.
Traffic Signs
Road Markings
Safety Fences
WORKMANSHIP
General
Earthworks and Filling
Drainage and Buried Services
Roads
Tolerances for Roads
Hardstandings
Car Parking Areas
Block Paving
Tolerances for Block Paving
Footways
Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants
Traffic Signs
Road Markings
Temporary Road Markings
1/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Safety Fences
Repair of Damaged Pavings
Regrading of Surfaces
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Inspection and Testing
APPENDIX D PUBLICATIONS REFERRED TO IN THE
SPECIFICATION FOR HIGHWAY WORKS
2/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
061. 010
This Section defines the materials, workmanship and quality control

required for the construction of roads, hardstandings, car parks and paths,
road signs, road markings and associated works.
MATERIALS
General
061. 030
The primary construction materials for use in the construction of road

pavements (i.e. unbound materials, bituminous bound materials, concrete
and cement bound materials), hardstandings, car parks, footways, and
associated kerbs etc shall comply with the DTp 'Specification for Highway
Works' 6th edition as amplified by Appendices D, 7/1 and 7/4 herein and
except where otherwise specified herein.
061. 031
All roads and pavings for vehicular traffic shall be constructed in rigid
pavement construction. Footways shall also be constructed in rigid
pavement construction, unless agreed otherwise with the Purchaser.
061. 035
Traffic signs shall comply with the DTp Specification for Highway Works
except where modified by this Specification, which contains the information
the DTp Specification indicates as being in Appendix 12/1.
061. 040
Materials selected for use within 450mm of the designed final road surface
shall not be frost susceptible.
061. 050
Natural sands and gravels are not acceptable materials for Type 1 Subbase.
Car Parking, Footways, Kerbs etc.
061. 055
Rigid pavement construction to be adopted for car parking and footways,

unless agreed otherwise with the Purchaser.
061. 060
Concrete paver blocks shall be 200mm x 100mm x 80mm to BS 6717: Part

1, coloured or Brindled blocks from Marshalls "Keyblock" range or similar
agreed. Colours and patterns will be agreed by the Purchaser.
061. 070
Clay and calcium silicate paver blocks shall be to BS 6677: Part 1.
3/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
061. 080
Bedding sand for block paving and sand for filling joints shall be washed
clean sharp sand graded in accordance with Table 2 of BS 6717 Part 3.
061. 090
Precast concrete flags shall be to BS 7263 : Part 1.
061. 100
Precast kerbs, edgings and channels shall be to BS 7263 : Part 1.

Traffic Signs
061. 125
The Contractor shall provide details of the legend layout of directional

information signs and non-prescribed traffic signs.
Traffic signs shall be as shown in the Traffic Signs Regulations and General
Directions, 1981 (as amended), or such variants as may be agreed by the
Purchaser.
Sign fabrication drawings shall be submitted for agreement by the
Purchaser.
All traffic signs, other than internally illuminated bollards, shall be
reflectorised, using materials having a photometric performance complying
with the requirements set out in Table 1 of Annex C of DTp Technical
Advice Note TA/19/9.
061. 121
The type and size of posts required for each traffic sign shall be determined
by the Contractor and submitted to the Purchaser for agreement.
Alternatives to steel posts may be used. These shall be designed by the
Contractor and the design submitted to the Purchaser for his agreement.
Tubular steel posts shall have the following Sections.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
76mm
86mm
114mm
140mm
(3")
(3")
(4")
(5")

Each post shall have a base plate having a minimum area of 0.052 square
metres (81 sq. inches) and also where no lighting unit is fixed to the top of
the post, a waterproof cap shall be provided. Both base plate and post cap
shall be in accordance with BS 873.
4/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
061. 122
The manufacturer's name or trade mark will not be permitted on the face of
traffic signs. It may be affixed to the back provided prior agreement to the
size and colour of the mark is obtained from the Purchaser in writing.
061. 123
Where illuminated signs are erected on tubular posts the electrical

equipment shall be enclosed in a large integral base housing of inside
diameter not less than 130mm. Entrance to the interior of such
compartments shall be by means of a weatherproof door having tamperresistant key fastenings. The door opening shall be not less than 100mm x
400mm and shall be positioned so that, when the post is installed as
intended, it is not less than 300mm above ground level.
061. 124
Where switch boxes are used as root boxes, they shall be bolted to the
posts so that their base is just within the ground. Otherwise the boxes shall
be fixed to the posts in such a position that they are not unsightly when
viewed from the front of the sign.
Switch boxes shall be of steel not less than 5mm thick. An internal
baseboard of dimensions not less than 80mm x 380mm x 12mm
manufactured from a substantially non-hydroscopic and rot-resistant
material shall be fixed in the box and an earthling screw or bolt shall be
provided. The opening to the box shall afford easy access to the
equipment. A weatherproof door shall be provided for the opening and this
shall be fitted with a tamperproof lock. The distance from the face of the
switchboard to the inside front shall be at least 100mm and a suitable cable
entry shall be provided just below ground level.
All compartments for electrical equipment shall be provided with vandal and
weather resistant locks. The number of different types and patterns of lock
shall be kept to a minimum. The Purchaser shall be provided with six keys
for each type of lock.
061. 125
Bollards shall be Baselite Bollard MK2 manufactured by Haldo

Developments Limited or equivalent agreed.
Bollards shall be complete with all wiring, fluorescent lighting units, lamps,
starters, capacitors, ballasts, fuses, photo-electric switches and with
sockets or clips as necessary.
The power supply to each bollard shall be 240 volts, 50 Hz, single phase.
5/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Light sources shall be hot cathode tubular fluorescent lamps with a

colour defined as 'standard colour 2' in BS 1853 Part 061. 126
Lantern(s) is (are) to be overhead mounted for those signs which
are required to be externally illuminated.
Sign lanterns shall comply with requirements of BS 873 and Chapters 11
and 13 of the Traffic Signs Manual.
Lanterns shall be completed with all wiring, fluorescent lighting units, lamps,
starters, capacitors, ballasts, fuses, photo-electric switches and with
sockets or clips as necessary.
The power supply to each lantern shall be 240 volts, 50 Hz, single phase.
Light sources shall be high pressure mercury fluorescent lamps, type MBF.
Road Markings
061.135
Thermoplastic markings shall comply with BS 3262 Class A. The

Contractor shall submit evidence of a current BSI certificate and kitemark
licence for all thermoplastic materials used. Materials that have been
modified subsequent to the issue of certification shall not be used.
061. 139
Road marking paint shall be suitable for applying by brush or mechanical

means to concrete or bituminous pavement to give a chemically stable film
of uniform thickness and shall be either chlorinated rubber, one pack epoxy
or alkyd based.
061. 140
The Contractor shall submit details of paint materials and methods of

application to the Purchaser for agreement.
061.150
The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers and
stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
061. 190
White paint shall contain not less than 6% by mass of titanium dioxide as a
pigment, conforming to Type 'A' (Anatase) or Type 'R' (Rutile) specified in
BS 1851.
061. 200
Yellow paint shall be standard colour BS 3816 No 355, except where an

alternative shade is specified and contain not less than 6% by mass of a
suitable yellow pigment.
61.205
All road markings shall be reflectorised white unless otherwise detailed.
6/23
Onyx South Downs
061. 210
EFW Contract
Road studs shall be to BS 873. The Contractor shall submit details of the
studs to the Purchaser for agreement.
Safety Fences
061. 215
Tensioned Safety Fences shall be single sided tensioned corrugated beams

with posts at 3.2m centres, complying in all respects with the Department of
Transport's "Specification for Highway Works" (Ref TSI in Table 4/1).
061. 216
Demountable Safety Fences. The post and baseplate assembly shall be of

all welded construction with full strength fillet welds on each joint.
Fabrication and galvanising of the post and baseplate assembly shall
comply with Section 211 of this Specification. Minimum thickness of
galvanizing is 85 microns.
WORKMANSHIP
General
061. 220
Road pavement construction shall be to the Department of Transport's:

'Specification for Highways Works' 7th Edition and Appendices herein with
due cognisance taken of any related Sections of this Specification. Any
more onerous requirements in this Specification shall take precedence.
061. 230
Any conflicts between the above specification documents shall be referred

to the Purchaser.
Earthworks and Filling
061. 240
All earthworks and filling shall be in accordance with the Section 041 of this
Specification the requirements of which shall take precedence over any
related clauses in the DTp 'Specification for Highway works'.
061. 250
Fill under roads and backfilling of trenches shall be completed before any
pavement construction is started.
061. 260
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that appropriate compaction

methods are used to prevent uncompacted spots in the fill, backfill, subbase or base materials when backfilling immediately against structures.
061. 270
The preparation of the formation shall be carried out only after completion
of the sub-grade drainage and immediately prior to the application of the
first layer of the pavement construction.
7/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The surface shall be cleaned and trimmed to shape and compacted.

Drainage and Buried Services
061. 280
All drainage and "services" work beneath the proposed pavement

construction shall be completed before any pavement construction is
started. Drainage shall be in accordance with Section 051 - 'Buried Foul
and Surface Water Drainage'.
061. 290
All drainage and pressure pipelines under the road pavement shall be
completed and tested before any pavement construction is started.
061. 300
All chambers and road gullies located in permanent roads shall have the
access covers or gratings flush with the finished road surface.
061. 310
Temporary roads which eventually will become part of the permanent road
system shall have covers and gratings set flush with the top of any course
used as a temporary running course and re-set flush with the finished
wearing cause when this is laid.
Roads
061. 330
All necessary traffic signals and road warning lamps shall be installed and
maintained throughout the duration of the construction.
061. 340
Temporary roads required due to the Contractor's method of working shall

be removed on completion.
061. 350
Contractor's proposals for additional temporary roads shall be submitted to

the Purchaser giving details of the layout, materials and traffic signs.
061. 360
Unless stated to the contrary, any thickness of construction material layers

shall mean the compacted thickness after construction.
061. 370
Works construction traffic other than that involved with the road construction
shall not be permitted on pavements under construction unless permitted by
the Purchaser.
061. 380
All road construction plant proposed shall be agreed by the Purchaser

before the start of the works. All plant shall be maintained in good order.
Tolerances for Roads
8/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
061. 390
Surface levels and surface regularity of pavement courses for permanent

roads shall be to DTp 'Specification for Highway Work' - 702.
061. 400
Horizontal alignments shall be determined by the Contractor to suit the

general layout.
All other parallel alignments shall be correct within a tolerance of 13mm
except for kerbs, channel blocks and edge lines which shall be laid with a
smooth alignment within a tolerance of 10mm.
061. 410
Tolerances for temporary roads shall be twice the tolerance for permanent
roads.
061. 420
The Contractor shall carry out surveys at each stage of construction i.e.
sub-formation, formation and pavement courses. Records to be submitted
to the Purchaser.
Hardstandings
061. 440
Concrete block paving hardstandings shall be constructed as for Block

Paving.
061. 450
Rigid hardstandings shall be constructed as for concrete pavement

construction as specified in this Generic Section.
061. 460
The surface of hardstandings shall be laid with falls to the drainage system.
No material shall enter the drainage system.
061. 470
Precautions shall be taken at the junction of hardstandings and road

pavements to ensure that any subsurface drainage for the hardstanding
does not detrimentally affect the road foundation.
061. 480
Concrete hardstandings shall be treated after the curing period with an

agreed proprietary surface hardener and dustproofer.
9/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Car Parking Areas

061. 490
Car parking areas shall be of rigid pavement construction, unless agreed

otherwise with the Purchaser.
Block Paving
061. 500
Concrete block paving shall be laid in accordance with BS 6717 : Part 3.
061. 510
Clay block and calcium silicate paving shall be laid to BS 6677: Part 3.
061. 520
Sample areas of interlocking blockpaving of approximately 1000mm x

1000mm shall be constructed for the Purchaser's agreement prior to the
commencement of any permanent work construction.
061. 530
The sand bedding course to blockpaving shall have uniform moisture

content at or around its optimum value and shall be spread loose in a
uniform layer, the precise depth being determined on site prior to spreading
such as to produce a compacted layer of a minimum thickness 50mm after
the blocks are laid.
061. 540
Sand shall not be laid more than 3000mm in advance of the block laying
unless otherwise agreed by the Purchaser and shall not be trafficked or
disturbed before blocks are laid. It shall be protected against inclement
weather during laying.
061. 550
The bedding sand under unrestrained edges of blocks disturbed by

inclement weather shall be raked out across the full width of the paving and
for a depth of at least three rows of laid blocks.
061. 555
Blocks shall be laid with chamfered face upwards.
061. 560
The blocks shall be laid working away from kerb or substantial edge
restraints which shall be bedded in concrete and haunched. Rectangular
blocks shall be laid in a regular diagonal herringbone pattern. Mitre blocks
shall be used at boundaries to minimise cutting. No cut block shall be less
than half size.
10/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
061. 580
The blocks shall then be compacted using a vibrating plate compactor to

BS 6677: Part 3 Clause 7.5.2 or as recommended by the block
manufacturer. At least two passes of the compactor shall be made to
prevent further movement of the blocks and to provide an even riding
surface. The actual number of passes shall be determined by trial. Gap
filling sand shall be brushed into the joints after two passes and a further
pass shall then be made, this process being repeated as necessary.
061. 590
The vibrating plate shall be kept at least one metre away from any
unrestrained edges.
061. 600
The blocks shall be protected as necessary from vibrating plate damage by

methods recommended by the block manufacturer.
061. 610
On completion of the compaction brush away surplus sand.

Tolerances for Block Paving
061. 620
The finished levels shall be within the following tolerances:

(a)
any point on surface 6mm
(b)
maximum deviation under 3000mm straight edge to be not

more than 5mm with allowance for any vertical curves
(c)
levels between adjacent blocks not to exceed 2mm
(d)
levels between block and adjoining gullies or drain entries

not to exceed + 6mm and - 0mm
Footways
061. 630
Footways shall be of rigid pavement construction, unless agreed otherwise

with the Purchaser.
061. 640
In-situ concrete, bitumen macadam, concrete or clay block paving shall be

laid as specified herein.
061. 650
Precast concrete flags shall be laid to the required cross falls with a bond
pattern and with joints at right angles to the kerb.
Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and Quadrants

11/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
061. 670
Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants shall be laid onto
a concrete base. The concrete shall have a 'roughened' surface to form a
key.
061. 680
The kerbs, channels etc. shall be bedded on 1:3 cement: sand mortar and
haunched in concrete to within 75mm of the top of the kerb.
061. 690
Expansion joints, requirements for curved runs, and tolerances for precast
concrete kerbs etc shall be to DTp 'Specification for Highway Works' Clause 1101. Joints shall not exceed 3mm in width.
061. 700
In-situ concrete kerbs and edge details shall be to DTp 'Specification for
Highway Work' - Clause 1103.
Traffic Signs
061. 701
All traffic signs shall be positioned and erected in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 1 of the Traffic Signs Manual published by
Department of Transport (HMSO).
061. 702
Post and switch boxes shall be cleansed from grease, scale and rust, shot
blasted and then galvanised.
Galvanising shall be by an agreed hot-dip process at the rate of 610g per
m2 (2 ounces per sq. foot) and in accordance with BS 729. When finished
the galvanising shall be smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free
from imperfections. Where flux, ash and dross inclusions, bare patches or
spots due to inefficient pickling or persistent types of scale etc. are
apparent, the work shall be completely stripped and regalvanised. Where it
is necessary to drill a hole in a hollow member to allow air to escape, the
hole shall be 12mm in diameter and shall be plugged with Neoprene or
other agreed material after dipping.
061. 703
The type and size of foundations required for each sign shall be determined
by the Contractor and submitted to the Purchaser for agreement prior to
construction.
Where signs are illuminated provision shall be made for cable entry by
means of a 75mm diameter UPVC duct.
12/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The base section of bollards shall be concreted to within 50mm of the top of
the base section, so that the whole of the holding down bolts are embedded
in concrete. Bollard bases shall be set in a block of concrete extending to
300mm in width outside the edge of the base unit with provision for a cable
entry.
061. 704
The reference number of every traffic sign shall be indicated by selfadhesive 25mm sign numbers on the reverse side of the sign in the bottom
left hand corner so that it is readily visible and legible after erection.
061. 705
Signs, posts or fittings having damaged faces, backs, paintwork or plastic

coating may be rejected by the Purchaser and shall then be replaced at the
Contractor's expense. Slight damage may be rectified by touching in, at the
contractor's expense, but only with the agreement, and in accordance with
the instructions, of the Purchaser.
The contractor shall be responsible for the protection of sign posts, sign
fascias and fixings until such a time as this responsibility is discharged by
the Purchaser.
Upon completion and servicing of the signs, they shall be thoroughly
cleaned immediately prior to being handed over.
The type of detergent used shall be to the agreement of the Purchaser.
Road Markings
061. 710
Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean
and dry. Markings shall have smooth edges and shall be of uniform
thickness and free from streaks. Carriageway lane and edge lines shall be
laid by mechanical means to the correct alignment.
061. 720
Road markings shall be in accordance with the "Specification for Highway

Work" 7th Edition.
061. 730
Thermoplastic material shall be laid to the following thicknesses:

(a)
(b)
(c)
061. 740
Screed markings 4 1mm

Sprayed markings other 2 0.5mm
than yellow lines
Sprayed yellow edge lines 1 0.2mm
These thicknesses are exclusive of surface applied glass beads. The

method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with BS 3262,
13/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Part 3.
061. 750
Thermoplastic markings shall be screed or spray applied incorporating

glass beads and also having a surface application of glass beads applied
evenly at the rate of 400-500 grams/sq.m.
061. 760
Where road markings are to be reflectorised with glass beads it shall be

sprayed uniformly onto the wet paint film at the rate of 400-500 grams/sq.m.
Glass beads shall comply with the requirements of BS 3262, Clause 15.
061. 770
The pavement shall be prepared in the following manner to receive

markings.
061. 780
(a)
On concrete surfaces the transverse texturing, where the

marking is to be applied, shall be freed from all traces of
curing compound by wire brushing or other agreed means.
A tack coat compatible with the marking materials shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
prior to the application of thermoplastic material. Tack coats
are not required except on concrete surfaces.
(b)
On surface dressed pavements, all loose chippings where

the marking is to be applied shall be removed from the
surface before applying markings.
Reflecting and Depressible road studs shall be fixed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Temporary Road Markings
061. 785
All temporary road markings and studs which conflict with the final
permanent road markings shall be removed or permanently obliterated to
the Purchaser's satisfaction where they are not subsequently required.
Permanent lines which conflict with temporary road markings and are
subsequently required shall be masked by a black paint meeting the
requirements of BS 6044 : 1987, or a temporary removable tape agreed by
the DTp. The use of black overband sealing compounds to temporarily
cover redundant markings will not be permitted.
14/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Safety Fences
061. 786
Tensioned Safety Fences shall be installed and tensioned in accordance

with the DTp "Specification for Highway Works".
061. 787
Demountable Safety Fences shall be installed to a smooth flowing

alignment with the laps on the beam facing away from on-coming traffic.
Repair of Damaged Pavings
061. 788
Where new pavings are not specified, the Contractor shall remove all
rubbish and thoroughly clean the existing pavings. He shall then carry out a
joint inspection with the Purchaser to establish whether any repairs are
required. If, as is anticipated, repairs are only required in small areas, they
shall be carried out as below.
061. 789
Cracks in bituminous paving shall be sealed with hot bitumen unless they
are considered by the Purchaser to be an indication of a serious local
weakness, in which case they shall be treated as below.
061. 790
Inadequate reinstatement of service trenches by others shall be cut out and

reinstated in accordance with Clauses 051.485 or 489
061. 791
Where there is localised failure of existing pavings or formation

(characterised by "pot-holes" or local "crazing", depression, or significant
movement of the pavement under traffic) the full thickness shall be cut out
and the formation excavated out until sound material is found.
Any local remedial works to the formation will be agreed by the Purchaser
(backfilling with Class 'E' material to Clause 041.060 or Type I sub-base to
Clause 061.030 are envisaged) and the surface reinstated in accordance
with Clause 051.485 or 489.
061. 792
The extent and details of all works to Clauses 061.788 to 061.791 shall be
agreed with the Purchaser in advance.
15/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Regrading of Surfaces
061. 793
For large areas of regrading no layer shall be laid thicker or thinner than
recommended for the material concerned and that the wearing course shall
always be of constant thickness.
The Contractor shall establish the extent of each layer and shall mark on
the surface of each layer for the Purchasers agreement the extent of the
next layer above.
061. 794
061. 795
The Purchaser may instruct local re-grading of surfaces to avoid sudden

changes of level or gradient or avoid unacceptable local ponding. If such
instructions are issued, the Contractor shall:
a)
in the case of block, brick paving, cobbles or setts, re-lay them

locally to achieve the required profile or level. Bedding shall be as
indicated in Clause 051.489.
b)
in the case of in situ concrete or bituminous paving, regrade with

close-textured bitumen Macadam to BS 4987. In this case the
existing surface shall be cut out such that at no place less than
30mm thickness of new bitumen macadam is laid, the edges of the
cut out area being straight, vertical, and painted with hot bitumen.
Local Regrading shall be kept to a minimum and only short ramps are
envisaged.
061. 796
Reinstatement of surfaces after excavation for bases for lighting and CCTV
masts or any other foundations shall be in accordance with Clauses
051.485 or 051.489.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
061. 797
A statement of the Contractor's proposed method of working shall be

submitted to the Purchaser prior to commencement of the Permanent
Works.
16/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

061. 800
The extent and location of any demonstration trials shall be agreed with the
Purchaser. The trials shall be programmed to ensure that all the tests
required by the Specification are carried out and test results available for
examination before the planned start of construction of the Permanent
Works.
061. 810
Where practical and with the Purchaser's agreement, the demonstration

areas shall form part of the Permanent Works if the trial tests successfully
comply with the Specification.
061. 820
Any changes in the source of supply of materials shall require new trial mix
designs and tests to be carried out before the Permanent Works can
proceed.
061. 830
Throughout the construction of the Permanent Works a continuous

programme of site control field testing and field surveys shall be carried out.
Records shall be submitted to the Purchaser on completion of the
appropriate test or survey.
17/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Department of Transport: 'Specification for Highway Works': (including all British
Standards referenced therein).
Department of Transport Technical Advice Note TA/19/9.
The Traffic Signs Regulations and General Directions (Amended) - (HMSO)
Traffic Signs Manual (Amended) - (HMSO)
BS 729
BS 873
BS 882
BS 1851
BS 1853
BS 3262
BS 3816
BS 6044
BS 6677
BS 6717
BS 7263
Specification for hot dipped galvanised coatings on iron or

steel works.
Road traffic signs and internally illuminated bollards.
concrete.
Specification for titanium dioxide pigments for paints.
Part 1 (Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 60081: 1994.
Hot applied thermoplastic road marking materials.
Specification for colours for identification, coding and special
purposes.
Specification for pavement marking paints.
Clay and calcium silicate pavers for flexible pavements.
Precast concrete paving blocks.
Part 1 : Specification for precast concrete kerbs, channels,
edgings, quadrants and paving flags.
18/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
061.120
Traffic sign fabrication drawings
061.121
Type and size of posts for traffic signs
061.122
Size and colour of traffic sign trade mark
061.140
Road marking paint details.
061.210
Road stud details.
061.360
Temporary road proposals.
061.390
Road construction plant.
061.430
Construction level surveys.
061.520
Notification of sample block paving.
061.703
Type and size of traffic sign foundations
061.705
Sign cleansing detergent
061.790
Method statement.
061.800
Demonstration trials and test results.
061.830
Field test results and survey records.
19/23
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX D
Publications Referred to in the Specification for Highway Works
1.
British Standards
(i)
BS 63: Single Sized Road Stone and Chippings

Part 2 : 1971 : Metric Units
Delete dated 1971 and replace with 1987.
(ii)
BS 812 Testing Aggregates

Right-hand column, beneath "Table 6/1" insert "705.2"; beneath "1001.9"
insert "1001.10"
Insert the following beneath Part 119:
Part 124: 1989. Method for determination of frost-heave.
(iii)
BS 4550: Methods of Testing Cement.

Right-hand column, above "1032.4 insert "705.2"
Insert the following beneath Part 2:
"Part 5 : 1978. Standard sand for concrete cubes".
(iv)
BS 4987 : 1973: Coated Macadam for Roads and Other Paved Areas.
Delete the whole section and insert the following:
"BS 4987: Coated Macadam for Roads and Other Paved Areas
Part 1 : 1988 Specification for constituent materials and mixtures
Part 2 : 1988 Specification for transport, laying and compaction."
(v)
BS 5212 : 1975: Cold Poured Joint Sealants for Concrete Pavements
20/23
Onyx South Downs
BS 5212 :
Part 1 :
Part 2 :
EFW Contract
Cold Applied Joint Sealant

systems for concrete pavements
1990 Specification for Joint Sealants
1990 Code of Practice for the Application
and Use of Joint Sealants.
21/23
1016.2
1016.7
1016.11
1017.4
Onyx South Downs
1.
EFW Contract
Production Documents
(Published by the British Standards Institution)
(i)
2.
3.
Add the following BSI Production Documents:-
Publication
Specification
Clause/Table/
Appendix
PD 6518 1987: Prefabricated temporary road

marking materials for use at
road works.
Appendix 12/3
Department of Transport Publications

(Published by HMSO)
Delete item (iv) and replace with the following:
(iv)
4.
Traffic Signs Manual

Chapter 1. Introduction 1977
Clause 1208.5
Chapter 8. Traffic Safety Measures
Clause 117.2
and Signs for Road Works and Temporary
Situations. 1991
Chapter 13. Sign Construction and
Clause 1216.2
Mounting. 1963.
Department of Transport Publications

(Published by the Department)
Delete item (ii) and insert the following:
(ii) Highway Construction Details 4th Edition
5.
Clause 1218
Transport and Road Research Laboratory Reports
22/23
Onyx South Downs
(i)
EFW Contract
Add the following Transport and Road Research Laboratory Reports in

addition to those listed in Appendix D dated August 1986 and as
amended by
Appendix L dated March 1988:Publication
Specification
Clause/Table/
Appendix
TRRL Research Report RR 90

TRRL Contactor Report 1
TRRL Accelerated Wear Machine
Clause 632
Clause 927
Clause 1033
23/23
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 070 : BOUNDARIES/FENCES
SECTION NO: 071
TITLE: FENCES AND GATES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
General
Site Preparation
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Materials
Workmanship
Workmanship - Demountable Security Fencing
PALISADE FENCING
General
Materials
Workmanship
WOVEN WIRE FENCING
Materials
Workmanship
STRAINED WIRE FENCES
Materials & Workmanship
WOODEN POST AND RAIL FENCES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLEFT CHESTNUT PALE FENCES

Materials
Workmanship
SOLID STEEL FENCING
Materials
Workmanship
HANDRAILS
Materials
Workmanship
PARAPET FENCING
Materials
Workmanship
PERMANENT VEHICULAR GATES
Swing Gates
Sliding Gates
- Materials
- Workmanship
- Materials
PROTECTIVE BOLLARDS
LIFTING ARM ROAD BARRIERS
General
Workmanship
MOVABLE BARRIERS
PEDESTRIAN GUARD RAILING
2/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
General
3/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

4/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
071. 010
installation of fences, gates and protective bollards. Final heights of fences
and gates to be agreed with the Purchaser prior to procurement.
071.015
Safety Fences are specified in Section 061.

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
General
071. 030
The Contractor shall agree the proposed fence lines with the Purchaser
before commencing any field work.
071. 040
Demountable fencing shall be provided with panels, posts and struts which
shall be capable of removal and re-installation.
071. 050
It is not permitted to drill into materials which have been galvanised.

Fixings to be made after galvanising shall be made with clamped fixings.
The Contractor shall submit his proposals of clamped fittings to the
Purchaser for his agreement.
071. 060
Minimum thickness of galvanising shall be 85 microns.
071. 070
Foundations to posts, struts, bases, anti-burrowing kerbs and pedestrian

gates shall be in plain concrete grade C40 where exposed and C30 where
buried in accordance with Section 201 of this Specification. Foundations to
vehicular gates shall be in plain or reinforced concrete complying with
Section 201.
071. 080
Steel embedments into concrete shall be galvanized.
071. 085
All fence types shall be installed plumb. Fence installation shall not deviate
from alignment by more than 10mm.
Site Preparation
071. 090
The Contractor shall clear a strip one metre wide, on either side along the
line of the fence except that the width of the strip shall be increased to 1.5m
for palisade fencing. He shall grade off this strip to remove local
irregularities before erection of the fence commences.
071. 100
The base of excavations for posts shall be consolidated.
5/20
Onyx South Downs
071. 110
EFW Contract
Unless otherwise specified excavation and backfilling shall be in

accordance with the 'Earthworks' Section of this Specification.
CHAIN LINK FENCING
Materials
071. 120
1.8 metre high chain link fence shall comply with BS 1722 : Part 1. It shall
have galvanised rectangular hollow section steel posts and extra heavy
mesh Type GLS 180A.
071. 130
2.9 metre high chain link security fencing shall comply with BS 1722 : Part
10 except that the extension carrying three stands of barbed wire shall be
vertical rather than cranked. Posts shall be galvanised rectangular hollow
section.
071.131
Chain link mesh shall be 5mmf, 50mm x 50mm. 2.4m high and zinc coated
and plastic coated Ring ties shall be used in preference to wire ties. Posts
shall have welded baseplates and be bolted into concrete.
Workmanship
071. 140
1.8 metre high chain link fencing shall be erected in accordance with
BS 1722: Part 1.
071. 150
2.9 metre high chain link fencing shall be erected in accordance with BS
1722 : Part 10.
071. 155
The mesh shall be secured to the ground using hairpin staples threaded
over the bottom row of mesh wire at 750mm centres and drilled and grouted
into the concrete haunch or other paving.
071.157
Extra posts and strainers shall be provided as necessary at steps in level

and changes of gradient.
071. 160
Pedestrian Gates in 1.8 metre high chain link fencing shall comply with
Section 2.3.3 and 3.4 of BS 1722: Part 1 to match the adjacent fence.
Gates shall have 1.5 metres clear opening and shall be fitted with lever
locks containing 5-lever profile cylinder with 3 keys.
071. 170
Pedestrian Gates in 2.9 metre high chain link fencing shall comply with
Sections 6 & 7 of BS 1722 : Part 10 to match the adjacent fence. Gates
6/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
shall have 1.5 metres clear opening and shall be fitted with lever locks
containing 5-lever profile cylinder with 3 keys.
Workmanship - Demountable Security Fencing
071. 200
Side posts, intermediate post, top and bottom rails and embedments in
foundations shall be in steel to BS 4360 and BS 4848: Part 2 and
galvanized to BS 729. The frame shall be of welded construction. Welding
shall be to BS 5135 using electrodes to BS 639.
071. 210
The chain link shall be fixed to the frame all along the posts and rails, and
three rows of barbed wire shall be fixed between the side posts, all to form
a complete removable panel.
071. 220
The foundations and anti-burrowing kerbs shall be cast with the embedment
for fixing the fencing level with the bases.
071. 230
The panels shall be offered into the embedments and shall form a sliding fit.
Adjacent panels shall be through bolted to each other with galvanized bolts,
washers and spacers at not more than 500mm centres along the full height
of the side posts.
071. 240
The joint between the posts and the embedments at the bottom shall be
sealed against ingress of water with a mastic agreed by the Purchaser.
The vertical tolerance of each panel in place shall not be more than 4mm in
1m.
PALISADE FENCING
General
071. 250
Palisade fencing shall comply BS 1722: Part 12 unless noted otherwise in

this specification. It shall have corrugated pales not less than 3.5mm thick
with triple pointed and splayed tops. Pales shall be welded to rails. The
lower structural rail shall be provided with two intermediate supports at
equal centres and shall be a 30mm x 10mm flat. Post shall have welded
base plates and be bolted into concrete.
071. 260
Fencing shall be 2.4m high above finished ground level.
071. 270
Maximum permissible space between adjacent pales or uprights shall be

80mm.
071. 280
All bolted connections shall have the exposed threads burred over upon
completion. Wherever practicable the nuts on bolted connections shall be
7/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
on the inside of the palisade.

071. 290
The Contractor shall arrange the setting out of the bases so as to minimise
the number of non-standard panels.
Materials
071. 300
All materials shall comply with the requirements of Table 1.

Table 1
Item
Material
Post
Rails
Pales
Bolts and Nuts
Plain Washer
H.R.S. Sections
BS 4 Part 1 or BS 4848
BS 4 Part 1 or BS 4848
BS 1449 Part 1 Grade HR154
BS 4190
BS 4320 Table 4
BS 4848: Part 2 and BS 4360 Grade
43
Intermediate Supports
BS 4360
Galvanizing
BS 729
Concrete
Grade C 30 to Section 201
Stainless Steel:
- Rivets
BS 970 Part 4, Grade 304S15 (Austenitic)
- Grooved Fasteners AISI 305 (Avdelok or similar)
071. 310
All ferrous components of the palisade and gates shall be hot-dip

galvanized before assembly. Damaged galvanizing on rivet heads and bolt
threads shall be wire brushed and made good with zinc rich paint to the
Purchasers agreement.
8/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Workmanship
071. 320
Palisade fencing shall be erected in accordance with BS 1722: Part 10.

The lower structural rail intermediate supports shall be embedded in
concrete to a depth of 100mm. The concrete base for each intermediate
support shall be 150mm x 150mm x 150mm with the top of ground level.
Each intermediate support shall be fixed to the lower rail by an 8mm
diameter bolt.
071. 330
Post bases shall be cast in situ concrete Grade C 30 with the top 100mm
below ground level.
071. 340
UB posts shall be erected on the bases with the palisade panels attached.
During erection the panel shall be propped up with the bottom rail with
suitable temporary packing to give a slight upward camber to the rail. After
lining up and plumbing all bolted connections shall be tightened and the
intermediate supports shall be embedded in concrete. The temporary
props under the bottom rail must not be removed until the concrete has
thoroughly set.
WOVEN WIRE FENCING
Materials
071. 350
Woven wire fencing shall be to BS 1722: Part 2, Woven Wire Fences. The
Contractor shall submit samples to the Purchaser for agreement.
071. 360
The fence shall be constructed from Type C6/90/30W Table 1 BS 1722:

Part 2, woven wire fences.
071. 370
Wood for straining posts, intermediate posts and struts shall be to Appendix
'E' and Tables 4 or 5 of BS 1722: Part 2. The Contractor shall propose the
type of timber for use and submit to the Purchaser for agreement with
details of the preservative treatment to be applied.
071. 380
Field Gates shall be hardwood to BS 3470 and shall be constructed to the

widths and details.
Workmanship
071. 390
Erection shall be to BS 1722: Part 2, section 2, Clause 3.
071. 400
Intermediate posts shall be placed at not more than 3.50m centres.
9/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
071. 410
Straining posts on a straight line shall be spaced at not more than 150m
apart.
071. 420
Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners, at changes in

direction horizontally and vertically greater than 1:3.
071. 430
A single line of galvanized mild steel barbed wire to BS 4102 shall be

strained and stapled 30mm below the top of each post.
071. 440
Mass concrete for surrounding the bases of posts and struts shall be not
lower by mass than one part of cement to ten parts of graded aggregate of
40mm nominal maximum size thoroughly mixed with the minimum requisite
quantity of clean water. The concrete shall be placed and compacted as
soon as possible after mixing.
STRAINED WIRE FENCES
071. 450
Concrete post and seven line wire fencing shall comply generally with the
requirements of BS 1722 Part 3 : 1986, Type SC 135A.
071. 460
Fencing shall be set with the top wire 1350 above the level of the adjacent
footpath and have concrete posts with 7 No. line wires. Fence posts shall
be 2.02m long 125 x 125mm at base tapering to 75 x 75mm at top. Posts
shall be set into the ground at maximum 3.50m centres in concrete
foundations, the dimensions of which shall suit ground conditions with a
minimum of 75mm of concrete below the bottom of the posts. Line wires to
be 3.15mm zinc coated high tensile steel passing through holes in concrete
posts.
End straining posts shall be precast reinforced concrete each with 45
degree reinforced concrete raking strut set into the ground in concrete
foundations, the dimensions of which shall suit ground conditions but with a
min. of 100mm of concrete below bottom of posts. Correct tensioning of
line wires shall be carried out by using 250mm fully threaded galvanised
eye bolts.
071. 470
Corner or intermediate straining posts shall be as previously described but

with 2 raking struts and 2 sets of eye bolts. Intermediate straining posts to
be set at a max. of 300m in straight runs of fencing and at all changes of
direction.
10/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WOODEN POST AND RAIL FENCES

071. 490
Wooden post and rail fences shall be to BS 1722: Part 7.

CLEFT CHESTNUT PALE FENCES
Materials
071. 500
Posts and struts shall be to BS 1722: Part 4.
071. 510
Stirrup wire shall be galvanized mild steel to BS 4102, 2.5 mm diameter.
071. 520
Barbed wire shall be galvanized mild steel to BS 4102.
071. 530
Pales shall be to BS 1722: Part 4.
071. 540
Fixings and fittings shall be to BS 1722: Part 4 galvanized to BS 729.

Workmanship
071. 550
Cleft chestnut pale fences shall be erected in accordance with BS 1722:

Part 4, Section 3.
SOLID STEEL FENCING
Materials
071. 551
Solid steel fencing shall consist of galvanised solid steel panels mounted
securely on steel posts at centres no greater than 3.0 metres and to the
height shown on the Drawings. The fixings shall be designed in such a way
that it is impossible to remove a panel or any other part of the fence from
outside the Site. Fence posts shall be extended upwards to carry 3 strands
of barbed wire.
071. 552
The fencing shall be a proprietary system of proven design by a responsible

manufacturer.
11/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Workmanship
071. 553
The fence shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers

instructions and Clauses 071.030 to 071.110 of this Specification.
071. 554
Fence posts shall be cast into concrete adequate to resist the design
loading.
HANDRAILS
Materials
071. 555
Handrails shall consist of natural, mill finish aluminium or galvanised steel

2-rail panels 1.1m high with vertical infill bars at 125mm centres. The
height between the top and bottom rail shall be 1.0m and post centres shall
be no greater than 2.5m. The system shall be sufficient to resist a design
load of 750N/m.
Posts shall be embedded in concrete footings adequate to resist the design
loading.
Workmanship
071. 556
The handrails shall be installed in accordance with Clauses 071. 030 to

071. 110 of this Specification.
PARAPET FENCING
Materials
071. 557
Parapets shall comply with the requirements of The Department of

Transport Technical Memorandum BD 52/93 and BS 6779. Parapets shall
be Group 1 class as designated by BD 52/93 and shall be supplied by an
agreed manufacturer.
Workmanship
071. 558
Parapets shall be erected to the agreed lines and levels, but with the
agreement of the Purchaser, may be adjusted where necessary to give a
smooth flowing alignment to the finished parapet.
071. 559
Parapets shall be securely supported in their final position until the

anchorages and bedding have attained adequate strength.
12/20
Onyx South Downs
071. 560
EFW Contract
The threads of the steel anchorage sockets shall be treated with red lead
compound Type 3 complying with BS 217 immediately prior to fixing
parapet holding down bolts into their final position.
PERMANENT VEHICULAR GATES
Swing Gates in Chain Link Fencing
Materials
071. 561
Swing gates shall be either of a single leaf or two leaves type.
071. 570
The perimeter and bracing rails shall be in steel to BS 4360 and shall be
fabricated from hollow structural sections to BS 4848. All free ends shall be
capped.
071. 580
Gates shall be of all welded construction and galvanized. Welding shall be

to BS 5135 using electrodes to BS 639.
071. 590
The gate infill shall be chain link of the same type as the adjacent fencing.
The Contractor shall submit drawings and details of the gate to the
Purchaser for agreement.
071. 600
The gates shall open and shall be provided with the following furniture:
(a)
Hasp and bolt for padlocking
(b)
Handles on both sides
(c)
Drop bolts for securing the gate in the shut position
(d)
Catch for retaining the gate in the open position
071. 610
The gates shall swing freely and stops shall be provided for the open and
shut positions. Wide gates shall have diagonal bracing and shall be
provided with suitable tracks and ground wheels unless the Contractor can
demonstrate that the gate will continue to swing freely throughout its design
life without this assistance. Ground wheels, if provided, shall be complete
with a suitable spring or other mechanism to support the gate in a level
position above a non-level track.
071. 615
Gates shall have a minimum ground clearance of 20mm at all times and a
maximum ground clearance of 130mm when closed. If the paving levels
beneath the gate are not such that this can be achieved, the Contractor
13/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
shall be responsible for any necessary modification of the pavings. Any

such modifications shall comply with Section 061 of this Specification.
071. 616
The tops of all gates shall be level in both the open and closed positions.
The top level of both leaves of a two leaf gate shall be the same.
If necessary to achieve the ground clearance limits specified in Clause
071.615, it is acceptable to slope the bottoms of gates provided that where
two leaves meet in the centre they shall be at the same level, and the two
leaves do not slope in opposite directions.
071. 620
The gate post shall be of hollow steel section and shall be anchored into the
foundation base concrete.
071. 630
The posts shall be provided with straining bars for connection of the
adjoining chain link fencing, straining wires and barbed wires.
071. 640
The gate shall be supported off the hinge post with three heavy duty rust
proof adjustable hinges of a design which will prevent the gate being easily
lifted off.
Workmanship
071. 650
The top of the gate shall line up with the top of the adjacent fencing. Gates
in security fencing shall be extended upwards to a total height of 2.9m to
carry three strands of barbed wire to match the adjacent fence.
071. 660
The height of the gate post shall suit the height of the adjacent fence and
top wire.
Sliding Gates
Materials
071.680
Sliding gates shall be single leaf. They shall be manually operated.
071.690
Gates shall be framed with RHS steel sections to BS 4848 of a size not less
than 90mm x 90mm x 3mm. Intermediate vertical members of a similar
section shall be provided at not less than 1000mm centres. Infill shall
match the adjacent fencing.
071.700
The support beam shall be fabricated from RHS section of a size not less
than 100mm x 100mm x 4mm welded to a heavy gauge track.
071.710
The gates shall run between 2 No. vertical guide posts of section size not
14/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
less than 120mm x 120mm x 4mm RHS and close to full height 100mm x
100mm x 4mm RHS steel posts with catch plate and 5 lever lock.
071.720
Closing posts and outside guide posts shall be complete with fittings for
attaching adjacent chainlink fencing.
071.730
Gate frames shall be provided with 2 hard rubber buffers at the closing end
of the gate frame.
071.740
Gates shall be of welded construction and shall be galvanised. Welding

shall be to BS 5135 using electrodes to BS 639."
PROTECTIVE BOLLARDS
071.745
Protective bollards shall be Grade 43 steel CHS or RHS and galvanised.
071.746
The whole of the bollards shall be painted with black heavy duty enamel
after treating the galvanised surface with an appropriate etching primer.
Bands of reflective yellow tape in horizontal stripes 200mm wide shall be
applied.
Colours to be used are:Black:
BS 4800 No. DOE 53
Yellow: BS 3816 No. 355 (lemon).
Tape shall comply with BS 873 Part C Table 1 (Class 1).
LIFTING ARM ROAD BARRIERS
General
071. 750
The scope of the work includes design, supply, fabrication, delivery,

storage, erection and setting to work complete and provision of operation
and maintenance manuals.
071. 760
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser the power supply loads,
cabling requirements including the proposed terminal point with regard to
the extent of supply.
071. 770
The Contractor shall erect the barriers at the agreed locations and effect all
the electrical and control connections.
071. 780
The Contractor shall submit general arrangements, details, along with the
electrical and control circuit diagrams to the Purchaser for agreement.
15/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
All materials and workmanship shall comply with British Standards.

Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Purchaser
for information.
071. 790
Manufacturer's details of road barriers shall be submitted to the Purchaser

for agreement.
071. 800
A pair of red lights and a pair of red reflectors shall be provided on both
sides of the boom. The boom shall be aluminium and shall be painted with
alternate red and white bands to BS 5378.
071. 810
There shall be provision for manual operation during power failure. When
the system is 'energised' the barrier shall not be capable of manual
operation.
071. 820
The control cubicle and the operational panel shall be provided with anticondensation heating. 071. 830 The operation of the barriers shall be by
remote push button control and shall comprise 'open', 'stop' and 'close'
modes. It shall also be able to be manually operated.
Workmanship
071. 840
The Contractor shall maintain the road barriers for the duration of the
Contract. On the completion of the Contract the equipment shall be
refurbished before handover to the Employer.
071. 850
The control cubicle and the operation panel shall generally be located in the
Gate House.
MOVEABLE BARRIERS
071. 860
Moveable barriers shall be 1650mm long x 450mm wide x 600mm high.

The system shall be linked together as per the Tuffchain System or similar
agreed. The barriers shall be constructed in tough impact resistant
L.M.D.P.E. Colours shall be alternate red and white as directed by the
Purchaser.
071. 870
The Tuffchain System is manufactured by Raydek Safety Products Limited,

Raydek House, Saltley Trading Estate, Birmingham B8 1BL.
071. 880
The Contractor shall maintain the moveable barriers throughout the

duration of the contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for ballasting
with sand or other such suitable fill to the agreement of the Purchaser.
16/20
Onyx South Downs
071. 890
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall be deemed to have included for ballasting in his

Tender.
PEDESTRIAN GUARD RAILING
071.891
Pedestrian guard railing shall be Alcan Bacorail or a similar agreed system

of aluminium alloy construction with 2 rails and vertical infill tubes.
071.892
The guard rails shall be designed and constructed in accordance with BS

3049 for Class A loading.
71.893
The top of the top rail shall not be less than 1.0m above finished ground
level and the minimum distance between posts shall be 2.0m.
71.894
071.894
071.895
Infilling shall be aluminium alloy tubes and gaps between adjacent tubes
and between tubes and posts not exceeding 100mm.
Guard rail posts shall be fitted with cast bases for surface mounting."
QUALITY CONTROL
General
071. 900
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser full details of products and
materials for agreement including samples where appropriate.
071. 910
Where fencework is required along the limits of ownership boundaries, the

Contractor shall submit for agreement, providing a minimum of 14 days
notice, his proposals for demolition of existing fences/gates or construction
of new fence/gates.
071. 920
The Purchaser shall be advised of the setting out points before erection of
any fencing is carried out.
071. 930
All fencework shall be checked for line and level on completion.
071. 940
All demountable sections, gates and road barriers shall be inspected on

completion for ease of operation and to confirm compliance with the
Specification.
17/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 4
Part 1:
Structural Steel Sections.

Specification for Hot-rolled Sections.
BS 639
Part 4:
Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese

steel electrodes for the manual metal arc welding.
Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and
steel articles.
Wrought steels in the form of blooms, billets, bars and
forgings.
Stainless, heat resisting or valve steels.
BS 1449
Part 1:
Carbon and carbon manganese plate, sheet and strip.
BS 1722
Part 1:
Part 2:
Part 3:
Part 4:
Part 7:
Part 10:
Part 12:
Fences.
Specification for chain link fences.
Woven wire fences
Specification for strained wire fences
Specification for cleft chestnut pale fences
Specification for wooden post and rail fences
Anti-intruder chain link fences.
Steel Palisade Fencing.
BS 3049
Pedestrian Guard Rails (Metal)

(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS 7818: 1995.
Specification for field gates and posts.
Specification of Colours for Identification, Coding and special
Purposes.
Specification for steel wire for fences and wire products for fences.
ISO Metric Black Hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
Metal Washers for General Engineering Purposes.
BS 729
BS 970
BS 3470
BS 3816
BS 4102
BS 4190
BS 4320
18/20
Onyx South Downs
BS 4360
BS 4800
BS 4848
BS 5135
BS 5378
EFW Contract
Specification for weldable structural steels.

(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS 7613: 1994, BS 7668: 1994,
BS EN 10029: 1991, Parts 1 to 3 of BS EN 10113: 1993, BS EN
10155: 1993 and BS EN 10210-1: 1994.
Schedule of Paint Colours for Building Purposes.
Specification for hot-rolled structural steel sections.
Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese
steels.
Safety signs and colours.
19/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
071.030
Agreement of fence lines.
071.130
Chain link samples.
071.590
Detail Drawings of permanent gates.
071.760
Road barrier power supply details etc.
071.780
Road barrier electrical/control details

and operation/maintenance manuals.
071.790
Road barrier type.
071.860
Submission of product and material

details and samples.
071.910
Agreement of ownership boundaries.
071.920
Setting out points.
20/20
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 120 : PRESSURE PIPELINES
SECTION NO: 121
TITLE: BURIED PRESSURE PIPELINES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Pipes
Joints
Fittings
Pipe (and Fittings) Protection
Pipe Bedding
Pipe Anchors
Chambers
Markers
WORKMANSHIP
General
Earthworks
Pipe Laying
Pipe Jointing
Backfilling
Reinstatement
Pipe Sundries
QUALITY CONTROL
Hydrostatic Testing and Inspection
Cleaning and Sterilising
Chambers
Tolerances
1/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

2/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
121. 010
installation of buried pressure pipelines for
i)
Potable water mains
ii)
Fire water mains
iii)
Foul pumping mains
121. 020
Gas pipelines are not specified in this section.

MATERIALS
Pipes
121. 030
Polyethylene pipe up to 63mm nominal size shall comply with the

requirements of BS 6572 with polyethylene fittings to Water Authorities
Association Information and Guidance Note No 4-32-04 or pipe
manufacturers agreed non-dezincifiable copper alloy or push fit
polypropylene fittings.
121. 040
Polyethylene pipe above 63mm nominal size shall comply with the
requirements of WAA Information and Guidance Note No 4-32-03 with
polyethylene fittings to WAA Information and Guidance note No 4-32-04.
Joints may be butt fusion welded or socket fusion welded couplings to the
pipe manufacturer's requirements.
121.050
Polyethylene pipe shall be blue coloured and capable of safely sustaining

10 Bar working pressure.
121.060
Ductile iron pipes shall comply with the requirements of BS 4772 Class K9
with flexible joints.
121.065
Ductile iron pipes for water mains or for fire mains with potable water
connections shall have a cement mortar lining.
The cement used shall be ordinary Portland cement in accordance with
BS12, or Portland blast furnace cement to BS 146 : Part 2 except that
sulphate-resisting cement to BS 4027 may be used. The sand shall consist
of inert, granular material having hard, durable uncoated grains and sand
shall meet the requirements of BS 882. The water shall be obtained from
the public water supply and shall contain no constituent that adversely
affects the quality of the cement.
3/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Joints
121. 090
All jointing materials shall be unaffected by and have no deleterious effect

on the material being carried. In particular for potable water mains all
jointing materials, gaskets, lubricants, joint rings, solvent cements etc shall
be agreed for use in contact with potable water and the contractor shall
provide a certificate confirming that the materials comply with the
recommendations in Information and Guidance sheet 4-40-01 published by
the Standing Technical Committee on Sewers and Water Mains.
121. 100
Elastomeric joint rings shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494 and
shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer.
121. 110
Gaskets for flanged joints shall comply with the requirements of BS 2494
and be of the inside-bolt-circle type the dimensions of which shall comply
with BS 4865.
121. 140
Black Hexagon Bolts and Nuts shall comply with BS 4190.
121. 150
Metal Washers shall comply with BS 4320.

Fittings
121. 160
Pipe Couplings and flange adaptors of the Viking Johnson type may be
agreed by the Purchaser for use in special circumstances.
121. 161
Flanges shall comply with BS 4504 PN16.
121. 170
Valves shall comply with the following unless stated otherwise

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
121. 180
Butterfly Valves - BS 5155

Cast Iron Check Valves - BS 5153
Cast Iron Wedge Gate Valves - BS 5150
Diaphragm Valves - BS 5156
Stop Valves - BS 1010 Part 2
Air release valves shall be of the double type combining
both large and small orifices and agreed by the Purchaser.
Fire hydrants boxes and covers shall comply with the requirements of BS
750 and shall be the screw down type.
4/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
121. 190
Penstocks shall be of the cast iron gun-metal type or coated steel and
plastic and agreed by the Purchaser for use.
121.195
Fittings on ductile iron piles shall be Class K12 (BS 4772).

Pipe (and Fittings) Protection
121. 200
Polythene tubular sleeving shall be used to protect ductile iron pipelines

and joints and shall comply with the requirements of BS 6076.
121. 210
All exposed ferrous metal including pipes, valves and brackets in chambers
shall be given two coats of an agreed bitumen solution to BS 3416.
121. 220
All buried Viking Johnson couplings and adaptors shall be protected with an
agreed self-adhesive bandage prior to being covered with polythene
sleeving.
121. 230
All bolted gland joints shall be given two coats of an agreed bitumen
solution to BS 3416 over a distance of 150mm either side of the face of the
socket prior to being covered with polythene sleeving.
Pipe Bedding
121. 240
Concrete for use as pipe bedding, surround, cradle or arch shall be Class
C20.
121. 250
Granular bedding material shall comprise gravel or broken stone graded

from 14mm to 5mm size, or coarse sand, or sand and gravel or single sized
gravel 10mm or 14mm, conforming with Water Authorities Association
Information and Guidance Note No. 4-08-01 and the relevant provisions of
BS 882.
Pipe Anchors
121. 260
Concrete Class C20 shall be provided for pipe anchors/thrust blocks at all
bends junction tees and stop-ends or where otherwise shown unless self
anchoring joints are used, and shall be cast in contact with undisturbed
ground immediately after the removal of loose or weathered material.
121. 270
A membrane of polythene film wrapped to give a minimum 3 mm thickness

shall be used between a uPVC pipe and the concrete of a thrust block.
5/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Bitumen products must not be used in contact with uPVC pipes and are
unacceptable as an alternative membrane material.
Chambers
121. 280
Brick Chamber construction shall be in Class B Engineering brick to BS

3921 in English bond two bricks thick in 1:3 cement mortar on a base of
Class C20 concrete.
121. 290
Precast concrete units for washout and other chamber construction shall
comply with BS 5911 and the requirements of the Generic Drainage
Specification, Section 051.
121. 300
Cast iron manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497 and be
bedded on 1:3 cement mortar.
121. 310
Small surface boxes for access to Valve Spindles shall be cast iron heavy
duty and shall comply with BS 5834. The hinged lid shall have cast in a
clockwise arrow and the word 'CLOSE'.
121. 320
Step irons shall comply with BS 1247

Markers
121. 330
Concrete marker posts shall be provided to indicate each valve, air valve,
and hydrant position and shall bear a vitreous enamel plate (size 230mm x
265mm to Class B of BS 3251). The concrete post shall project 600 mm
above ground level.
WORKMANSHIP
General
121. 350
All pipes valves and fittings are to be handled, stored, installed and jointed
in accordance with the relevant manufacturer's requirements.
Earthworks
121. 360
All earthworks shall be carried out in accordance with Section 041,

'Excavation and Filling' of this Specification except where varied by the
6/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
following requirements.
121. 370
The stability of trenches and other excavations must be adequately ensured

by the Contractor to provide a safe working environment as well as
protecting any adjacent services or structures. The Contractor shall submit
details of his proposed method of working to the Purchaser for agreement
prior to commencement.
121. 380
Trench excavation for pipelines shall be cut with vertical sides not less than
300 mm wider than the outside diameter of the barrel of the pipe and not
greater than the maximum trench width shown. The sides of the trench
excavation shall not be battered without the agreement of the Purchaser.
121. 390
Excavations shall be kept free of standing water which may arise from any
source and such water shall be drained or pumped to an agreed discharge
position taking steps to prevent the loss of fines which might adversely
affect the surrounding ground.
121. 400
Excavated formations shall be inspected and agreed prior to work

proceeding. Any unsuitable hard and soft material removed shall be
replaced with compacted selected granular material.
Pipe Laying
121. 410
Natural bedding - The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately formed to

levels and gradients with pockets cut for pipe joints so that full bearing
support is provided over the whole length of the pipe barrel.
121. 420
Granular bedding - Any soft material shall be removed from the trench
formation which shall be trimmed to permit a minimum thickness of 100 mm
of granular material to be laid and compacted to support the barrel of the
pipe over the full width of the trench.
121. 430
Pipes laid on natural or granular bedding shall be laid on firm material over
the length of the pipe barrel. Temporary supports shall not be used.
121. 440
When the pipe has been set to the correct line and level granular or
selected material shall be placed and compacted by hand in layers 75 mm
thick up to the pipe crown equally on either side of the pipe. Thereafter the
material is placed and compacted in 75 mm layers to a minimum height of
150 mm above the crown.
7/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
121. 450
Concrete bedding - The trench bottom shall be trimmed to permit the

minimum thickness of concrete required under the barrel of the pipe. The
pipe shall be supported to the correct line and level on precast concrete
support blocks covered with an agreed compressible material.
121. 460
Concrete shall be placed on to the trench formation to within 25 mm of the

underside of the pipe, either to the full width of the trench or within vertical
shutters to at least the minimum width required. It shall then be placed
equally either side of the pipe and carefully worked under and around the
pipe ensuring that no voids are left below the pipe, and brought up to the
required finished level, taking care to ensure that the pipes are not
disturbed by this operation.
121. 470
Where pipes have flexible joints the concrete support shall be broken with a
shaped compressible material coincident with every pipe joint and over the
whole of the concrete cross-section.
121. 480
Pipes which are cut on site shall be cut clean and square with minimum
damage to any coating using equipment recommended by the
manufacturer. Ductile iron pipes larger than 450 mm shall not be cut unless
specially ordered for the purpose from the manufacturer. All cut ends are to
be prepared for jointing as recommended by the manufacturer.
121. 490
Where joints are to be deflected such deflection shall not exceed the
A method statement shall be submitted to the Purchaser for agreement
prior to work being carried out. Joints to be deflected shall first be made
square. With bolted joints the required deflection shall be set just prior to
final tightening.
Pipe Jointing
121. 500
All pipes fittings and valves shall be carefully cleaned immediately prior to
jointing, and the joints made fully in accordance with the manufactures
instructions.
121. 510
The closure of spigot and socket joints shall be made in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations using special equipment as
8/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
necessary.
121. 520
Flange joints shall not be pulled into alignment or drawn together by the
flanges. The setting of flanges must be parallel and as close together as
possible before the bolts are tightened up to the specific torque and order
recommended by the manufacturer. Flange gaskets shall not be positioned
using lubricant.
121. 530
Bolts and nuts shall be run by hand before assembly and shall be greased
with graphite paste or equivalent before use.
121. 540
After jointing, the open end of each pipe shall be closed to prevent the
ingress of water or foreign material. Care shall be taken to prevent flotation
of sealed pipes.
121.545
Where ductile iron pipes are required at less than the standard length they
shall be cut with an agreed pipe cutter and the ends machined to suit the
particular joint in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
Backfilling
121. 550
Where the particular bedding type specified does not extend to a level 300
mm above the top of the pipe, backfilling to that level shall be made using
carefully selected material free from large flints/stones etc. and compacted
by hand in 100 mm layers, carefully working under and around pipes and
into joint holes. Backfilling shall proceed thereafter using selected
excavated material in layers not exceeding 250 mm placed thickness, each
layer being thoroughly consolidated while progressively withdrawing trench
supports.
121. 560
Mechanical compaction shall not be carried out until there is 600mm of

compacted material above the pipe crown. The use of mechanical
compactors shall not be permitted without the agreement of the
Purchaser.
121. 570
Where the pipe has been protected with concrete bed or surround,
backfilling shall not be commenced for 24 hrs; neither shall traffic loads be
imposed within 72 hours of placing the concrete.
Reinstatement
121.575
Reinstatement shall comply with Clauses 051.485 or 051.489 of this
9/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Specification.
Pipe Sundries
121. 580
Where connections to existing services are to be made, the written

agreement of the Purchaser shall be obtained for any works involving live
chambers or pipes.
121. 590
The position and invert levels of existing chambers and pipes to which
connections are to be made shall be verified by the Contractor before pipe
laying commences and any discrepancies notified to the Purchaser
immediately.
121. 600
Service connections to potable water mains shall only be made using

means appropriate to the material of the main and with the agreement of
the Purchaser.
121. 610
Where loose polyethylene sleeving is applied to ductile iron pipes it shall be

held in position using PVC tape applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and with appropriate overlap at the joints
made after any other joint protection has been applied.
121. 620
At each point where a pipeline is temporarily terminated a fixed marker shall

be attached to the pipeline and held above ground level.
121. 630
During cold weather adequate protection shall be given to prevent freezing

of any charged pipeline prior to backfilling.
121.635
Where concrete thrust blocks are provided the pipes shall be laid on
concrete blocks 380mm x 150mm x 140mm not fewer than one to each pipe
and adjusted to level with hardwood wedges under the blocks. The
remainder of the thrust block shall then be placed using Class C20
concrete. All operations of concreting shall be carried out so as to leave the
pipes correct and undisturbed as to line and level and undamaged in any
way.
QUALITY CONTROL
Hydrostatic Testing and Inspection
121. 640
All pipelines shall be tested before being brought into use. The test shall be
a hydraulic pressure test using clean water. A pipeline may be tested either
in one length or in sections, the lengths of section dependent on:
10/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
a)
The availability of suitable water and discharge points.
b)
The number of joints to be observed under test.
c)
The difference in elevation between one part of the pipeline

and another.
The Contractor shall submit details of his testing arrangements.

121. 650
Wherever possible joints shall be left uncovered until after testing but
sufficient material shall be backfilled over each pipe to prevent any
movement under test pressure.
121. 660
The test pressure for each section or complete pipeline shall be not less
than 1.5 times the working pressure (10 bar on ductile iron Class K9
pipelines) measured on a newly calibrated pressure gauge with a
calibration certificate and used only for testing purposes. A copy of the
calibration certificate is to be submitted to the Purchaser.
121. 670
When any sections which have been separately tested are joined, a further
hydraulic pressure test shall be carried out on the completed pipeline which
shall be not less than the working pressure.
121. 680
Each length under test shall be properly sealed off with special stop ends
secured by adequate temporary anchors. Testing shall not take place
against closed valves. All permanent thrust blocks shall be in position and
any concrete shall have achieved the required strength.
121. 690
The section or length under test shall be filled with water ensuring that all
air is displaced. Where concrete or concrete lined pipes have been used
they shall be filled with water and held at two thirds the working pressure for
two days prior to the test commencement to allow for absorption.
121. 700
After filling and any necessary allowance above, the pressure in the
pipeline shall be raised to the working pressure and left for a period in order
to achieve conditions as stable as possible for testing. Additional water
shall be pumped in until the test pressure is reached in the lowest part of
the section. The pump shall then be disconnected and no additional water
shall be allowed into the pipeline for 1 hour. If a drop in pressure occurs the
quantity of water added to re-establish the test pressure shall be carefully
measured.
11/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
This shall not exceed the equivalent of 0.1 litres per millimetre of pipe
diameter per kilometre of pipeline per 24 hours for each 30m head of
pressure applied for the test to be accepted.
121. 710
Work shall not be considered complete until a test has been successfully
applied and the results documented.
Cleaning and Sterilising
121. 720
Before a pipeline shall be considered ready for service, it shall be

thoroughly cleaned internally to ensure that no foreign matter remains
inside the pipeline. Pigs or foam swabs of suitable design shall where
directed by the Purchaser be passed through completed sections of the
pipeline or through the completed pipeline.
121. 730
Potable water pipes shall be dosed with a chlorine concentration of 50 mg/l

and the chlorinated water allowed to remain in the pipe for a minimum of
two hours. A sample shall then be taken to check for chlorine residual
using a Comparator. If less than 0.2 mg/l is obtained the dosing shall be
repeated until a residual is obtained.
121. 740
All chlorinated water shall be thoroughly flushed out prior to bringing the
main into service and discharged in such a manner agreed by the
Purchaser to avoid pollution.
121. 750
The Contractor shall provide all suitable equipment for chlorination including
any necessary pumps, tanks, piping cocks and tappings etc.
Chambers
121. 760
All brick and precast concrete chambers shall be substantially watertight

with no identifiable flow of water visible within the permanent works.
121. 770
All chamber covers shall be set on class M1 mortar and where the
manholes are of precast concrete on at least three but not more than four
courses of Engineering brickwork. Precast concrete manhole units shall be
bedded on mortar and flush pointed internally. The concrete surround for
the chamber shall be formed using a suitable shutter with any horizontal
construction joints formed at least 150mm away from the ring joint.
12/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Tolerances
121. 780
The position of the internal face of any pipeline shall not deviate from that
detailed in the contract by more than + 20mm.
13/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 12
BS 146
BS 497
Part 1:
BS 750
BS 882
BS 1010
BS 1247
BS 2494
BS 3251
BS 3416
BS 3921
BS 4190
BS 4320
Specification for Portland Cement

Specification for Portland Blast Furnace Cement
Specification for manhole covers, road gully gratings and
frames for drainage purposes.
Cast iron and cast steel.
Specification for underground fire hydrants and surface box
frames and covers.
Specification for aggregate from natural sources for
concrete.
Specification for draw-off taps and stopvalves for water services
(screw-down pattern).
Specification for manhole step irons.
Specification for elastomeric joint rings for pipework and pipelines.
Specification for indicator plates for fire hydrants and water
supplies.
Specification for bitumen based coating so for cold application,
suitable for use in contact with potable water.
Specification for clay bricks.
Metric series.
BS 4504
Specification for flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings.
BS 4772
Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings

(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 545: 1995, BS EN 598: 1995 and
BS EN 969:1996.
Specification for dimensions of gaskets for pipe flanges to BS 4504.
(Withdrawn) Replaced by Parts 1-4 of BS EN 1514.
Specification for Cast Iron Gate Values.
Specification for Cast Iron Chick Values for general purposes.
BS 4865
BS 5150
BS 5153
14/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 5155
BS 5156
Specification for Butterfly Values.

Specification for Diaphragm Values.
BS 5834
Surface boxes, guards and underground chambers for gas and

waterworks purposes.
BS 5911
BS 6076
Precast concrete pipe fittings and drainage ancillary products.

Specification for tubular polyethylene film for use as protective
sleeves for buried iron pipes and fittings.
Specification for blue polyethylene pipes up to nominal size 63 for
below ground use for potable water.
BS 6572
Water Authorities Association Information and Guidance Notes:

No. 4-08-01
No. 4-32-03
No. 4-32-04
No. 4-40-01
15/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
121.370
Details of method of working.
121.490
Details of joint deflections.
121.640
Details of testing arrangements.
121.660
Certificate of calibration of pressure

gauge.
16/16
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 130 : BELOW GROUND SERVICES
SECTION NO: 131
TITLE: DUCTS AND TRENCHES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Buried Pipework Cable Ducts and Service Sleeves
Miscellaneous Materials
WORKMANSHIP
General
Excavation and Laying
Cleaning and Identification of Ducts
Inspection Pits
Accessible Ducts and Trenches
Pipework Duct Entry into Buildings
QUALITY CONTROL
General
1/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
131. 010
This Section defines the materials, inspection and workmanship to be

applied to the installation of buried pipework cable ducts, open trenches
with covers and accessible below ground ducts for routing services external
to the buildings. It does not cover the installation of direct buried cables.
MATERIALS
131. 030
Unplasticized PVC pipes for cable ducting and service sleeves shall be to
BS 3506.
131. 040
Concrete pipes for service sleeves shall be to BS 5911. Pipes shall be

flexibly jointed.
131. 050
Vitrified clay pipes for cable conduits to BS 65 shall be suitable for high
voltage oil filled cables, and be free from any internal undulations,
roughness or projections and shall have smooth radiused internal edges at
the joints. The joints shall be of an agreed plastic type, flexible and selfaligning. Grooved cable conduits shall be provided for splitting where split
conduits are required for protection of existing services.
131. 060
Galvanised steel conduit shall be to BS 1387 medium grade in standard

lengths with screwed socket and tapered threads to BS 21.
Miscellaneous Materials
131. 090
Bricks shall be to BS 3921 class B (Engineering).
131. 100
Concrete work shall comply with Sections 201 and 202.
131. 110
Access covers and frames to inspection pits, cable draw pits, below ground
ducts etc. shall be to BS 497.
131. 120
Covers to continuous trenches shall be steel, cast iron, concrete infill type
or pre-cast concrete with provisions made for lifting purposes.
131. 130
Four pairs of lifting keys shall be supplied for each separate type of trench
cover.
131. 140
Granular bedding and fill material shall consist of naturally occurring
2/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
aggregates to BS 882 or sintered pulverised fuel ash to BS 3797.

WORKMANSHIP
General
131. 150
Workmanship shall comply generally with Section 051 'Buried Foul and
Surface Water Drainage' and as specified herein.
Excavation and Laying
131. 160
The permitted maximum deviation in profile of pipework ducts shall be

25mm in line and level. At terminal chambers the deviation shall not
exceed 25mm from the centrelines.
131. 170
Pipework ducts shall generally be laid in straight lines, to even falls, and laid
working uphill from the lowest point in each pipe run. Nominally level duct
runs shall be laid with nominal falls to create high points midway in each run
to allow moisture to run back to the access chambers.
131. 180
Joints in pipework ducts shall be sealed with a proprietary joint sealing

compound and carried out as recommended by the duct manufacturer.
131. 190
Changes in direction of more than 30o shall only be achieved by the use of
standard bends and fittings or inspection pits.
131. 200
The Contractor shall obtain the Purchaser's agreement of any changes to

the designed route necessitated by the discovery of buried obstructions.
Survey records shall be made and submitted to the Purchaser.
3/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
131. 210
A change in direction of less than 30o, e.g. to negotiate a local obstruction,

may be achieved by laying ducts along a slow radiused bend with the
agreement of the Purchaser. Survey records are to be submitted. The
radiused bend shall be made up of straight lengths of duct, laid within the
tolerance limits for bend deflections recommended by the duct
manufacturer.
131. 220
The open ends of pipework ducts shall be free from sharp edges. The
pipes shall terminate 25mm from the inner face of terminal chambers,
drawpits etc and bell-mouth terminations shall be formed in the concrete or
mortar.
131. 230
Where pipework ducts are built into a chamber or structure the first 3 joints
in the duct run shall be flexible joints. The first joint shall be within 300mm
of the face of the structure and the second and third within 600mm of the
first and second joints respectively.
131. 240
During the laying of the pipework ducts between inspection pits, a

continuous length of nylon or pigmented polypropylene draw cord of 5 kN
breaking load shall be left in each duct to be used later with the cleaning
mandrel.
131. 250
Pipework ducts laid under road or hardstandings shall be encased in

concrete for the length under the road/hardstanding plus an additional 1.5m
on either side of the road. Details of the concrete encasement, the spacing
between pipes in cluster groups, levels etc shall be shown on the Drawings.
Prior to concrete placement, all ducts and sleeves shall be inspected to
ensure that they are laid correctly.
131. 260
In the proximity of foundations, pipework ducts shall be encased in

concrete.
131. 270
In open ground, each pipework duct, or cluster of ducts, shall be given a

surround of sand not less than 300mm thickness.
131. 280
The trench shall then be backfilled with suitable excavated material in

layers not exceeding 200mm and compacted. All in accordance with
Section 051 of this Specification.
131. 290
Concrete identification tiles or PVC warning tapes shall be laid along with
the backfill.
4/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
131. 295
Reinstatement of surfaces shall be as specified in Section 051 of this

Specification.
Cleaning and Identification of Ducts
131. 300
Following the backfilling of the trench the pipework ducts shall be cleaned
and proved in lengths between inspection pits and termination points.
131. 310
A mandrel shall be drawn through each duct. The diameter of the mandrel
shall be no smaller than 5 mm less than the internal diameter of the duct.
The Contractor shall submit details of the mandrel to the Purchaser for
agreement. A continuous PVC coated 15 gauge steel draw wire to BS 1052
shall be threaded through each duct properly secured and left for future
use.
131. 320
The ends of each duct shall be plugged immediately after cleaning. Ingress
of water and/or concrete shall be prevented.
131. 330
Reinforced concrete marker posts shall be provided along the line of the
ducts at positions shown on Drawings.
Inspection Pits
131. 340
Inspection pits of brickwork, in situ or precast concrete or part plastic

construction shall be constructed to avoid the ingress of groundwater. An
access cover and frame of appropriate size and type shall be built into the
top slab.
131. 350
The floor of all inspection pits shall slope to a sump of size 300mm square
and 150mm deep.
131. 360
The invert of the lowest duct at the point of entry into an inspection pit shall
be not less than 150mm above the floor.
Accessible Ducts and Trenches
131. 370
Back-filling to the sides of ducts and trenches and over the cover slab of
below ground ducts shall not be carried out until the concrete has
attained 75% of its characteristic strength. The back-fill and compaction
thereof shall be in accordance with Section 041 of this Specification.
Pipework Duct Entry into Buildings
5/8
Onyx South Downs
131. 380
EFW Contract
Single or multiple pipework duct entries into buildings shall be constructed

to a plan tolerance of 25mm.
The ducts shall terminate with a socket projecting out of the top of the
foundation to facilitate future extension. The duct shall have a draw wire
and shall be plugged to prevent ingress of debris and water. The exposed
socket shall be suitably protected against accidental damage in a manner
agreed with the Purchaser.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
131. 390
The Contractor shall obtain manufacturer's product literature and material

test certificates as appropriate and submit to the Purchaser.
131. 400
The levels and alignment of all buried service ducts shall be inspected prior
to surveying and backfilling. Particular attention shall be made when buried
obstructions have to be negotiated and slow bends introduced. Record
drawings showing as-built duct locations shall be made by the Contractor.
131. 410
The proving of all ducts to confirm that they are clean and have a smooth
bore shall be witnessed and that draw wires have been provided as
specified prior to inserting plugs in the ends of each duct run.
131. 420
Inspections shall ensure that duct terminations into buildings or structures

are appropriate; also that flexible joints have been correctly provided as
specified eg the first three joints from each inspection chamber or structure.
131. 430
All lengths of ducts which are to be protected by encasing in concrete shall

be checked to ensure the adequacy of the flexible joints.
6/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 21
BS 65
BS 882
BS 1052
BS 1387
BS 3506
BS 3797
BS 3921
BS 5911
CP 312
Specification for pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressuretight joints are made on the threads (metric dimensions).
Specification for vitrified clay pipes, fittings and joints.
concrete.
Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes.
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and
for drain end steel tubes suitable for welding or for screwing to BS
21 pipe threads.
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe for industrial uses.
Specification for lightweight aggregates for concrete.
Specification for clay bricks
Precast concrete pipes and fittings and ancillary products.
Code of practice for plastics pipework (thermoplastic materials).
7/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
131.200/210 and 400
Survey records.
131.390
Material certificates.
8/8
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 200 : CONCRETE WORK
SECTION NO: 201
TITLE: CONCRETE PRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
CONTRACTOR'S INFORMATION
MATERIALS
Cementitious Materials
Aggregates
- Fine Aggregate
- Coarse Aggregate
Admixtures
Water
Ancillaries
- Waterproof membrane
- Grout and Concrete Packing
- Mix Design for Grout and Packing
QUALITY CONTROL - MATERIALS
General
Testing Facilities and Equipment
Sampling and Testing
- General
- Cement
- Pulverised Fuel Ash
- Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
- Blended Cements
- Aggregates
1/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- Admixtures
- Water
Frequency of Tests
Quartz Mineral Hardener
WORKMANSHIP
Concrete Mix Design
- General
- Initial Mix Design
- Trial Mixes
- Production Mix Design
- Alkali, Chloride and Sulphate Content
Concrete Production
- Batching and Mixing
- Ready-Mixed Concrete
Concreting
- General
- Transporting
- Placing
- Blinding Layer
- Curing
- Joints
QUALITY CONTROL - WORKMANSHIP
General
Routine Tests
- General
- Concrete Strength
- Test Cores
- Workability
- Aggregate-Alkali Reaction Testing
2/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FORMWORK
General
Formed Finishes
Worked Finishes
Permissible Irregularities
Sample Finishes
TOLERANCES
GENERAL
Construction Loads
Proprietary Solutions
Grouting and Filling
Watertight and Water Retaining Structures
Cutting Concrete
Faulty Works
Deviations
PRECAST CONCRETE
WATER RETAINING CONCRETE
GROUND BEARING CONCRETE SLABS
RETAINING WALLS
APPENDIX 1 BSI REFERENCES AND OTHER STANDARDS
3/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
201. 010
This Section defines all materials and operations relating to the production
of finished concrete. Reinforcement is specified in other Sections within this
Work Group.
CONTRACTOR'S INFORMATION
201. 020
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser, in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract, the information listed in, but not limited to,
Appendix 2 of this Specification and as identified within the Clauses of this
Specification.
MATERIALS
Cementitious Materials
207. 030
The term "cementitious material" refers to Portland cement or a combination

of Portland cement and Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) or Ground Granulated
Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS).
207. 040
Portland cements shall be ordinary to BS 12 (OPC), sulphate resisting to

BS 4027 (SRPC), rapid hardening to BS 12 (RHPC). Other cementitious
materials shall be Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA), Pozzolanic PFA (PPFA),
Portland Blast Furnace Cement, High Slag Blast Furnace Cement or
Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Cement to the appropriate standards as
listed in Appendix 1.
201. 050
PFA combined with Portland cements on Site shall be to BS 3892 Part 1

but material complying with the Grade A requirements of BS 3892 Part 2
may be used subject to the Purchasers agreement.
PFA to Grade B of BS 3892 Part 2 shall only be used for unreinforced,
minor items and then only subject to the Purchasers agreement.
Aggregates
201.110
Aggregates shall be to BS 882, hard, durable and clean and shall not be
chemically reactive. They shall not contain any deleterious material in
sufficient quantity to affect adversely the strength at any age or the
durability of the concrete or to cause corrosion of reinforcement.
201.120
The grading and shape of aggregates shall be such that a concrete can be
4/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
produced with the specified proportions and consistency and which will
readily work into position without segregation and without the use of
excessive water and which can readily be compacted into a dense
impervious mass.
201.130
Separate fine and coarse aggregates shall be used and these shall conform
to BS 882. All-in aggregates shall not be used in the Works unless
specifically authorised by the Purchaser.
201.140
The following tests as described in BS 812 shall be carried out as

appropriate on both fine and course aggregates:
Determination of Particle Size and Shape - Sieve Analysis
Determination of Flakiness Index and Elongation Index
Determination of Ten Percent Fines Values.
The flakiness index and elongation index when determined in accordance
with BS 812 of each of the predominant size fractions in each single sized
coarse aggregate, shall not exceed 20% and 25% by weight respectively.
Fine aggregate shall not contain appreciable amounts of flaky and/or
elongated material.
201.150
When tested in accordance with BS 812: Part 4 the total acid-soluble

chloride salt content for the aggregates shall not exceed the following
figures:
Fine Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate
- 0.05% by weight
- 0.03% by weight
The acid soluble sulphate salt content for the aggregates, when tested in
accordance with BS 812, shall not exceed 0.25% by weight for both fine
and coarse aggregates.
Notwithstanding the above figures every effort shall be made to obtain
aggregates with as low a chloride and sulphate content as possible.
201. 160
The shell content (as calcium carbonate) as a percentage by weight of dry

single size aggregates shall not exceed 20% for 5 mm to 10 mm and 8%
over 10 mm.
201. 170
All aggregates shall have negligible reactivity. Inspections and tests of

reactivity shall be carried out as required by the Purchaser.
5/42
Onyx South Downs
201. 180
EFW Contract
The water absorption of aggregate shall not exceed 2.5%.

Fine Aggregate
201. 190
The fine aggregate shall be from an agreed source and shall be sharp and
free from clay, organic matter and other impurities. The gradation of fine
aggregate shall be in accordance with gradings C or M of BS 882 Table 4
and the percentage by weight passing the 300 micron sieve shall not
exceed 50%.
The clay, silt and fine dust content shall not exceed the appropriate
percentage stated in BS 882 :Table 6 by volume when using the field
settling test given in BS 812 or such other equivalent test as agreed with
the Purchaser.
The amount of hollow shells which are likely to form voids present in
material retained on a BS No. 7 sieve determined by direct visual
separation shall not exceed 3% weight of the entire sample.
Coarse Aggregate
201.210
The coarse aggregate shall be from an agreed source shall be clean, free
from shell, sand, clay, mica shale, quarry refuse, dust, organic matter and
other impurities. The stone shall not be thin or flaky.
201.220
The amount of material passing a BS No. 200 (75 micron) sieve in each
size of the single-sized coarse aggregate, determined in accordance with
BS 812 (Decantation Method) shall not exceed 1% by weight.
201.230
The Aggregate Impact Value, determined in accordance with BS 812 and

using standard 14mm to 10mm test sizes, shall not exceed 30 except
where specified minimum compressive strength or characteristic strength of
the concrete is 50 N/mm2 or higher in which case the AIV shall not exceed
25.
Admixtures
201. 260
Admixtures shall be to BS 1014, BS 4887 and BS 5075.
201. 270
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser details of admixtures he

proposes to use in advance of their use.
201. 280
Admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride salt shall not be used.
6/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
201. 290
Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions in excess of 2% by weight of the

admixture or 0.03% by weight of the cementitious material content of the
concrete mix.
201. 300
Admixtures may only be agreed if the Contractor demonstrates to the

satisfaction of the Purchaser that they do not impair the properties of
finished concrete in terms of strength, shrinkage, bleeding or any other
factor.
201. 310
Admixtures shall be suitable for use in concrete containing PFA or GGBFS

as appropriate. If the use of admixtures is permitted they shall be used
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and any method
statement agreed with the Purchaser after site trials have been carried out.
201. 311
For air-entrained concrete the air-entraining agent shall be added at the

mixer, by an apparatus capable of dispensing the correct dose within the
tolerance for admixtures given in BS 5328 : Part 3 and to ensure uniform
distribution of the agent throughout the batch during mixing.
Water
201. 320
Water which is to be used for mixing concrete, curing concrete and any
other operation affecting steel or formwork which could subsequently come
into contact with fresh concrete shall at all times comply with the
requirements of BS 3148. It shall be fresh, clean, potable and free from any
substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
201. 330
The ph of water used in concrete work shall be not less than 5.0 and not
more than 8.0. 201. 340
Under no circumstances shall seawater be
used for mixing or curing concrete.
Ancillaries
Waterproof Membranes
201. 360
Waterproofing underlay membranes shall consist of waterproof paper to BS

1521 Class B or impermeable plastic sheeting.
Grout and Concrete Packing
201.370
Ordinary Portland cement, aggregate, water and admixtures shall be to the

requirements of Section 201.
201.380
Coarse aggregate shall be 10mm single-size and fine aggregate shall be

within the limits for medium grading.
7/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Mix Design for Grout and Packing

201.390
The characteristic strength of the grout or concrete shall be not less than
that of the concrete in the associated foundation or structure of 20N/mm2
whichever is the greater.
201.400
Uncongested areas shall be filled with concrete having the mix proportions
4:5:7 cement: fine aggregate: coarse aggregate by weight.
201.410
Where the smallest clear dimension of the void to be filled is less than
50mm grout having the mix proportions 1:2 cement: fine aggregate by
weight shall be used.
201.420
The water cement ratio shall be kept to the minimum compatible with
adequate workability.
QUALITY CONTROL - MATERIALS
General
201.430
To ensure that requirements in respect of materials quality are met, the

manufacturers and suppliers of materials in the Works shall implement a full
programme of Quality Control in respect of all aspects of concrete materials
production.
201.440
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Purchaser for
his agreement at least two weeks prior to the Contractors proposed use of
materials in the concrete works, for each type and source of cementitious
material, aggregates, admixtures and water, and any other material
proposed for inclusion in the Concrete works:Material Description and Details of Proposed Use
Name of supplier and source
Is Supplier a BSI registered firm
BS No and Classification
Test Certificates.
201.450
The test certificates provided prior to agreement shall indicate the

applicable material test results for at least the preceding 12 month period
and shall include the following where readily available from the supplier:
Cementitious Material
Chemical Constituents
8/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Alkali Content
Sulphate Content (expressed as S03)
Chloride Content
Loss on Ignition
Insoluble Residue
Fineness
Soundness
Initial Setting Time
3 day and 28 day Compressive Strength
Aggregates
Petrographic description
Sieve Analysis
Clay/Silt/Dust Content
Specific Gravity
Water Absorption
Flakiness
Elongation
Drying Shrinkage
Mg SO4 Soundness
Chloride Content
Sulphate Content
AIV
10% fines
LA Abrasion
Alkali Reactivity
Shell content
Water
As required by BS 3148
Admixtures
Certification to demonstrate that admixture complies with the relevant
British Standard.
Testing Facilities and Equipment

201. 460
The Contractor shall provide a suitably equipped testing laboratory for

conducting tests on concrete and its constituent materials. This may be an
independent organisation or, alternatively, the Contractor may set up his
own laboratory facilities on site. The laboratory and equipment provided
9/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
shall be to the requirements of the Purchaser.

submitted to the Purchaser.
Full details shall be
201. 470
All equipment shall be calibrated by an authority agreed by the Purchaser to

the appropriate British Standard at the commencement of the Contract and
subsequently at intervals of 6 months, or lesser period if so directed by the
Purchaser. All certificates shall be retained by the Contractor as record
documents.
201. 480
Sufficient laboratory staff and equipment shall always be available to

undertake the materials and concrete testing requirements of this
Specification.
Sampling and Testing
General
201. 490
The Contractor shall sample and test materials as they are used in the
Works. Samples shall whenever possible be obtained from materials on
the Site.
201. 500
The results of all tests or certificates shall be submitted to the Purchaser

with a minimum of delay on completion of a test.
201. 510
The Purchaser shall inform the Contractor of any tests which he intends to
observe. The Contractor shall give the Purchaser 24 hours notice of the
commencement of such tests.
Cement
201. 520
Sampling and testing shall be to both BS 4550 and EN196.
201. 530
The Contractor shall obtain manufacturer's certificates for each delivery of

cement, and shall retain these as record documents. These certificates
shall include the results of tests verifying all the requirements of BS 12,
together with a recent analysis of the main chemical constituents.
201. 540
The Contractor shall give immediate notice of any significant change which
may increase the monthly mean alkali content by more than 0.2% above the
previous monthly mean, or give a monthly mean greater than 0.6%. A
revised mix design for any concrete which may be affected by the increased
alkali content shall be submitted to the Purchaser for agreement with
notification of the change.
10/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
PFA
201. 550
Sampling and testing shall be to BS 3892.
201. 560
The Contractor shall obtain the supplier's certificates for every delivery of
PFA and shall retain these as record documents. The certificates shall
state the results of tests verifying all the requirements specified in BS 3892.
GGBFS
201. 570
Sampling and testing shall be to BS 6699.
201. 580
The Contractor shall obtain the supplier's Certificates for every delivery of
GGBFS and retain these as record documents. The certificates shall state
the results of tests verifying all the requirements specified in BS 6699.
Blended Cements
201. 590
Where cement is supplied already blended with PFA or GGBFS, sampling

and testing shall be to both the appropriate British and European Standards
and Codes for the individual constituents and also cover the tests required
by any British Standard Specifications relating to the final, blended product.
201. 600
The Contractor shall obtain the supplier's certificates for every delivery of
blended cement and retain these as record documents. The certificates
shall state the results of tests verifying all the requirements of the
appropriate British and European Standards for the individual constituents
and also any British Standards relating to the blended product.
Aggregates
201. 610
Sampling and testing shall be to BS 812 unless otherwise stated in this

specification.
Admixtures
201. 620
The Contractor shall obtain, for every delivery of admixture, the

manufacturer's test certificates of conformance with the relevant British
Standard and ASTM C494 which he shall retain as record documents.
Water
11/42
Onyx South Downs
201. 630
EFW Contract
Water shall be tested to BS 3148 if instructed by the Purchaser and the

results submitted to the Purchaser.
Frequency of Tests
201. 640
The minimum frequency of testing by the Contractor of site batched

materials shall be as follows:
Weekly:-
Monthly:-
Three
Monthly:-
Cement, PFA and GGBFS:
fineness
alkali content
loss on ignition
Aggregates:
sieve analysis
clay, silt and dust content
organic impurities
shell content
PFA and GGBFS:
chloride and sulphate content
Aggregates:
chloride and sulphate content

oven dry density
moisture content
flakiness
elongation
Coarse Aggregate:
water absorption
aggregate crushing value
MgSO4 soundness
As Instructed by the
Purchaser:- Water
These tests are additional to those by the supplier.

The first test of each kind shall be performed and results reported to the
Purchaser at least one week before any materials of that source and type
are incorporated into the works.
201.645
Quartz Mineral Hardener

Quartz mineral hardener shall be a proprietary coating, of a type as agreed
by the Purchaser, (Polyquartz by Pieri or similar), resistant to impacts and
12/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
abrasion, such as quartz mineral hardener applied at a rate of 4kg/square

metre, levelled and travelled as recommended by the manufacturer.
Surface hardener shall be applied to all heavily trafficked areas, such as the
unloading dock, clinker storage area.
WORKMANSHIP
Concrete Mix Design
General
201. 650
The Contractor shall design the proportion of each concrete mix in

accordance with the recommendations of BS 5328 to obtain concrete of a
homogeneous structure which can be worked into the corners and angles of
the formwork and around reinforcement without segregation of the material
or excessive bleeding of free water at the surface and shall also, on striking
of formwork present a uniform face free from honeycombing and crazing.
When hardened the concrete shall have the required strength the maximum
density and low porosity.
The final proportions of cement aggregates and water shall be such that the
weight of cement used is the least amount which will produce concrete
complying with the Specification.
13/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Evidence should be submitted to the Purchaser for each class of concrete

showing the intended workability, the proposed mix proportions and
manufacturing method with proportions and manufacturing method will
produce concrete of the required quality.
201. 660
The mix design shall be appropriate to the exposure condition as defined in

table 5 of BS 5328.
The minimum grade of concrete shall be as defined as listed below:-
Condition of Exposure
Type of Concrete
Mild
Unreinforced non-structural
Unreinforced structural
Reinforced
Prestressed
C10
C20
C30
C35
Moderate
Unreinforced non-structural
Unreinforced structural
Reinforced and prestressed
C10
C30
C35
Severe
Unreinforced
C35
C40
Very severe
All
C40
Most severe
Unreinforced
C45
C50
Abrasive
All
C45
201. 670
Minimum Grade
The following mix design limits shall be used in the Works:
Concrete
Grade
Max. W/CM
Ratio
Min.
Cementitious
Material Content
kg/m3
Max. PFA
Content %
Min. PFA Content

(if PFA is used) %
C10
0.5
160
50
30
C15
0.45
200
50
30
C20
0.45
220
40
30
C30
0.45
275
40
30
C35
0.45
300
40
30
C40
0.45
325
40
30
C45
0.45
350
40
30
C50
0.45
400
40
30
14/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The cementitious material content of any mix shall not exceed 550 kg/m3.
GGBFS contents shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
Adjustments to minimum cement content should be made for aggregates of
nominal maximum size other than 20 mm in accordance with table 8 of
BS5328.
For concrete made with normal-weight aggregate and used in foundations
to low rise structures in non-aggressive soil conditions a minimum grade of
C20 may be used provided the cement content is not less than 220kg/m3
Where concrete is subject to freezing whilst wet, air entrainment should be
used. In the case of air entrained concrete the grade may be reduced by 5
and the % of air entrainment shall be 4% 1%.
201. 680
The `Design Margin' shall be the difference between the design strength of
the concrete and the characteristic strength.
201. 690
The "Current Margin" shall be the difference between the statistical mean
of cube test results and the characteristic strength.
Initial Mix Design
201. 700
Details of initial mix designs including the nature and source of all materials,
proposed quantities of each ingredient per cubic metre of compacted
concrete and trial mix proposals for each mix shall be submitted to the
Purchaser.
Trial Mixes
201. 710
Trial mixes shall be produced under full scale production conditions using
representative samples of cement and aggregates. Three separate
batches shall be produced each on a separate day. The workability of each
batch shall be determined and at least 6 cubes shall be made from each
batch, three for test at 7 days and three for test at 28 days.
201. 720
The trial mix proportions will be accepted if the average strength of the nine
cubes tested at 28 days is not less than 3.5N/mm2 below the target mean
strength. The trial mix may be agreed on the basis of 7 day results
provided the Purchaser is satisfied at the likely rate of gain of strength from
7 to 28 days. If the range of the strength of the three cube results in any
one batch should exceed 15% of the average of that batch the trial mixes
shall be repeated.
15/42
Onyx South Downs
201. 730
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall take precautions to ensure that the agreed mix
proportions are maintained in the concrete that is actually deposited in the
Works. The Purchaser may require additional trial mixes to be made if any
significant changes are made in the materials or in the proportions of
materials used.
The quantity of water used in mixing the concrete shall be controlled by an
agreed water measuring device and shall be sufficient, but not more than
sufficient, to produce a dense concrete of adequate workability for the
different parts of the Works. The water content of the mix shall be
maintained within the limits of 5 litre/m3 of the quantity determined by the
trail water content of aggregate. The Contractor is to maintain on Site a
suitable apparatus for checking the water content of the aggregate as and
when directed by the Purchaser.
Concrete will only be accepted for placement if its workability is within the
following limits at the time of placement.
Slump test _ of the trial mix mean or 25mm whichever is
the lesser value.
Compacting Factor 0.03 of the trial mix mean.
The slump of the concrete will be determined from samples taken from the
mixed concrete just before the concrete is placed in the work. The slump
tests and/or compacting factor tests shall be carried out in accordance with
BS 1881
Production Mix Design
201. 740
The Contractor shall carry out a statistical analysis of cube test results at 28
days for each mix to determine the current margin. The analyses shall be
updated weekly and submitted to the Purchaser.
201. 750
Analyses shall commence when the results of cube tests on 40 batches of a

mix are available.
The current margin shall be calculated as follows:
Current margin = 1.64 [# (x - x)2]0.5
[ n - l ]0.5
where n = number of samples
x = strength of individual test cubes
x = mean strength
# = sum of calculated values
16/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
For compliance of results the current margin shall not be less than as
follows:
a)
where the results of tests on 40 batches are considered, 1/3 of the

characteristic strength for mixes of less than 20 N/mm2 in strength
or 7.5 N/mm2 for mixes of 20 N/mm2 and above in strength.
b)
where the results of tests on 100 or more batches are considered,

1/6 of the characteristic strength for mixes of less than 20 N/mm2 in
strength or 3.75 N/mm2 for mixes of 20 N/mm2 and above in
strength.
Alkali, Chloride and Sulphate Content

201. 760
The total mass of equivalent alkali in a mix shall not exceed 3.0 kg/m3 of
concrete. This mass shall be the sum of the equivalent alkali contribution
from the constituent parts of the mix including all cement, chloride in
aggregate, PFA, GGBFS, water and admixtures.
201. 770
The equivalent alkali content contributed to a mix by the Portland cement,

PFA, GGBFS and aggregates shall be calculated by a method to the
agreement of the Purchaser.
201. 780
The chloride ion content shall not exceed 0.30% for 95% of test results with
no result greater than 0.4%.
201. 790
The total sulphate content expressed as sulphuric anhydrate (SO3) of the

mix shall not exceed 4% by weight of the cement.
Concrete Production
Batching and Mixing
201. 800
Where the Contractor intends to produce concrete on the Site the location
for the plant shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
201. 810
The batching equipment shall be fitted with an accurate mechanism for

weighing separately the cement, PFA, GGBFS fine aggregate and coarse
aggregate. Alternatively cementitious material may be measured by using a
whole number of bags in each mix (split, damaged or partly full bags must
not be used).
17/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The water may be measured by volume or by weight. All measuring devices

shall be constructed so that the correct quantities will be delivered
automatically. The equipment shall have an automatic system that records
the amount of each constituent material in each batch.
201. 820
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within + 2% of the

quantity of cement, PFA, GGBFS, water, total aggregates or admixtures
being measured.
201. 830
The scales of all weigh batching plant and all liquid dispensers shall be
zeroed daily and calibrated at intervals not exceeding one week. The
Contractor shall provide all weights, materials and labour for calibration and
tests and shall retain all certificates as record documents.
201. 840
Frozen or frost covered materials shall not be used.
201. 850
The mixing equipment shall be of a type and design agreed by the

Purchaser and shall combine the constituents of the mix within the mixing
time into a uniform mass.
201. 860
The mixing time shall be not less than that used by the manufacturer in
assessing the performance of the mixer.
201. 870
Control interlocks shall be provided on the mixing equipment to ensure that

a batch cannot be discharged until the mixing time has elapsed. The entire
batch shall be discharged without segregation before the mixer is
recharged.
201. 880
Separate containers and measuring devices shall be used for admixtures.
201. 890
Gauge boxes may only be used for batching aggregates with the
Purchaser's prior permission.
201. 900
The method of releasing the water into the mixer shall be such that the full
measured quantity is discharged in one operation and the flow is stopped
automatically by a valve or syphon arrangement only when the full quantity
of water has been released. Arrangements which allow the discharge of
partial quantities of mixing at the discretion of the mixer driver will not be
permitted.
201. 910
The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch shall not exceed the rated
capacity of the mixer.
201. 920
The whole of the mixed batch shall be removed from the mixer before
materials for a fresh batch enter the drum.
18/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
201. 930
The Contractor shall ensure that the mixing efficiency of the equipment is
not impaired by the build-up of cement and mortar on the mixing drum
blades. On cessation or work, including all stoppages exceeding 15
minutes the mixer and all handling plant should be washed out with clean
water.
201. 940
The first batch of a production run shall contain 15% less coarse aggregate
in order to compensate for the coating of the interior of the mixer.
Ready-Mixed Concrete
201. 950
The supply and delivery of ready mixed concrete shall comply with the
recommendations of BS 5328.
Prior to obtaining concrete from a ready-mixed supplier the Contractor shall
submit the following information:Ready Mixed Concrete Supplier
Location of Plant
Details required under Clause [201.440] and [201.450]
Standard Deviation (strength) currently achieved by Plant (N/mm2)
Design Standard Deviation (strength) (N/mm2)
Target Mean Strength (N/mm2)
Total chloride and sulphate ion content of concrete (%)
Total equivalent alkali content of concrete (Kg/m3)
201. 960
The Contractor shall arrange for the supplier to provide the facilities stated
in Clause 13.1 of BS 5328.
201. 970
A ticket shall accompany each delivery and shall contain the following
information:
Name or number of ready-mixed concrete depot
Serial number of ticket
Date
19/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Registration number of delivery vehicle

Name of purchaser
Name and location of project
Concrete mix designation
Cement content
PFA content
GGBFS content
Free water/cementitious material ratio
Workability
Type of cement
Proportions or quantities of PFA or GGBFS
Nominal maximum size of aggregate
Type name and quantity of admixtures, if included
Quantity of concrete in cubic metres
Time of loading
Tickets shall be retained as record documents by the Contractor.
201. 980
No water shall be added to the mix after it has left the ready mixed concrete
plant. Each delivery shall be tested at the site for workability.
CONCRETING
General
201. 990
Materials used in the handling and placing of concrete shall not be

manufactured from or contain materials likely to affect the concrete.
201.1000
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser, the following information:

(a)
Drawings showing the arrangement of shuttering, supports and
20/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
construction joints.
201.1010
(b)
A programme showing the sequence of concrete pours.
(c)
A statement describing his procedures for placing, consolidating,

curing, protecting and finishing concrete in all types of weather.
The Contractor's proposals for concreting during cold, hot or wet weather or
underwater shall take into account the following requirements:
Cold
(a)
No materials below the temperature of 2oC shall be used for

concreting and unless special heating arrangements are made to
the agreement of the Purchaser, concreting shall not be carried out
until the shade temperature has reached 1oC on a rising
thermometer nor shall it be continued on a falling thermometer
below a temperature of 3oC. Fresh concrete shall not be allowed to
come into contact with frozen reinforcement and formwork.
(b)
The Contractor shall protect all newly placed concrete from frost
and he will be required to cut out and replace, at no cost to the
Employer, any concrete damaged by frost.
(c)
Methods of heating employed shall not impair the quality of the

concrete. No salts or chemicals shall be used to prevent freezing.
(d)
If concreting is permitted by the Purchaser to be carried out when

either the air or ground temperature is below 2oC the concrete shall
be preheated at no extra cost to the Employer in order that the
temperature of the concrete when placed shall not be below 21oC
e)
In no case shall the temperature of the mixed concrete be less than

7 or greater than 38oC. The cement shall not be heated. Mixing
water shall not be heated above 60oC.
f)
All equipment used for concreting such as mixers and barrows and
all formwork shall be warmed by steam or hot water before use.
g)
All preheated concrete shall be protected after placing with suitable

coverings to prevent damage by frost. Particular care shall be
exercised when steel formwork is used.
Hot
21/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
(a)
The temperature of concrete at time of placing shall not exceed

30oC.
(b)
The Contractor shall maintain records of the temperature at the time

of placing.
Wet
(a)
Concrete shall not be placed during heavy rain, sleet or snow

without adequate protection.
(b)
Newly finished concrete surfaces shall be protected.
(c)
The workability of concrete shall be maintained within the agreed

limits.
Underwater
a)
Concrete to be placed underwater shall be Class C40 placed by

tremie unless otherwise agreed and shall not under any
circumstances be discharged freely into the water.
b)
The concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation

does not occur.
c)
During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to

the concrete from pumping and dewatering operations.
d)
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight
throughout. The pipe shall extend to the base of the boring and a
sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent direct
contact between the first charge of the concrete in the pipe of the
tremie and the water. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the
concrete, which has previously been placed, and shall not be
withdrawn from the concrete until completion of the concreting. At
all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within
the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from the
water.
The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie shall be not less than
150mm for concrete made with 20mm aggregate and not less than
200mm for concrete made with 40mm aggregate.
It shall be so designed that the internal face of the pipe of the tremie
shall be free from projections.
22/42
Onyx South Downs
e)
EFW Contract
Concrete shall only be placed underwater with the Purchaser's

agreement and where in his opinion it is not possible to place
concrete in the dry.
201.1020
All surfaces on which concrete is to be placed shall be clean with no debris

or free water.
201.1030
The Contractor shall give such period of notice as is required by the

Purchaser of his intention to commence any concreting and shall submit at
the same time a record of his inspection of completed preparatory works.
Transporting
201.1040
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the
Works by means that shall be agreed by the Purchaser and which shall
prevent contamination, segregation or loss of ingredients, and ensure that
the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.
201.1050
Concrete that has been mixed remote from the Works shall be transported
in truck mixers or agitators. The concrete shall be continually agitated
during transportation and until discharge. Mixing and transporting shall be
in accordance with BS 5328.
201.1060
The drum of the truck agitator or truck mixer shall be completely clean and
empty before it is filled with concrete. Trucks shall not be loaded in excess
of the manufacturer's rated capacity, which shall be displayed on the
vehicle in terms of volume of mixed concrete. Trucks shall be discharged
within one hour after the introduction of the water to the cement unless a
longer time is authorised by the Purchaser.
201.1070
The concrete shall be placed in the form as soon as possible after mixing
and before the initial set of the concrete has started. The Purchaser will
from time to time specify the maximum time between the mixing of the
concrete and its placement in the form and no concrete shall be placed in
the Works after this period has elapsed.
201.1080
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the need to ensure that every

precaution is taken to minimize the loss of workability of the concrete during
transit. Concrete should be transported from the mixer to the forms as
quickly as conditions will allow and the work streamlined and co-ordinated
so that delays are eliminated.
201.1090
Each consignment of concrete shall be accompanied by a docket giving the

class of concrete and the time when the mixing water was added.
23/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Placing
201.1100
Every delivery of concrete to the Site must be sampled and checked for
workability by the slump or compaction factor method prior to discharge into
the work. The Purchaser will generally require to witness these tests.
Concrete outside the workability limits will be rejected. Also, the concrete
shall be rejected and not placed in the works if the initial set has taken
place in any part of the batch or if the Purchaser considers it to be
otherwise in an unsuitable condition.
201.1110
The Contractor shall submit and obtain the Purchasers agreement for all
details of his proposed method of placing and curing the concrete before
commencing work. If required, the Contractor should be prepared to
demonstrate, or otherwise prove, to the Purchaser the adequacy and
effectiveness of his proposed method.
201.1120
Concrete shall not be placed in the Works unless the Purchaser is present
and the fixing of all formwork and reinforcement has been completed and
agreed by the Purchaser. All surfaces shall be free of standing water.
201.1130
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in it final position,

and shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the
concrete and displacement of the reinforcement, waterbars or formwork.
201.1140
The concrete shall be consolidated by high frequency mechanical vibrators

agreed by the Purchaser, in such a manner as to obtain complete
compaction without segregation or excessive laitence or the formation of
"cold" joints. Particular attention should be made to ensure that concrete is
thoroughly worked into the corners of the formwork and around all
reinforcement, waterbars and embedments.
201.1150
Contact between the vibrators and reinforcement or formwork shall be

avoided and on no account shall vibration be used for the purpose of
distributing concrete horizontally.
201.1160
Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of not less than 5,000 cycles per
minute.
Blinding Layer
201.1170
All horizontal or sloping surfaces of reinforced concrete that bear on the

ground shall be protected by a layer of blinding concrete 75mm thick.
201.1180
The Contractor shall place the blinding layer of concrete in such a way, and
24/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
at such a time, as to ensure that the exposed surface of the ground on

which the blinding layer of concrete is to be placed does not deteriorate
after excavation through exposure to weather, traffic or other reasons and
the method of securing this shall be to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
Curing
201.1190
All concrete shall be adequately cured and protected from the harmful
effects of sunshine, drying winds, rain or running water.
201.1200
The Contractor shall be aware of the importance of adequately curing the

concrete particularly during the early stages of hardening.
201.1210
All exposed surfaces shall be protected immediately on completion of

placing and compaction of the concrete. All exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be kept moist by means of wet hessian or similar absorbent
material, and ponding. The surface of the concrete shall be protected by
application of an agreed curing membrane until the concrete has set
sufficiently to take the weight of coverings.
201.1220
All shutterings shall be loosened as soon as possible and provision made

for curing water to run down inside them.
201.1230
Timber formwork covering the concrete shall be covered and moistened

with water at frequent intervals to keep it from drying out during the curing
period.
201.1240
The wet curing shall continue for minimum of 7 days.
201.1250
All concrete shall be protected from anything which may interfere with the
process of setting or cause damage before the concrete has set.
25/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
201.1260
Samples of concrete being placed in the Works shall be taken and 150mm
test cubes made, in metal moulds, as and when directed by the Purchaser's
Appointed Representative. In general the Purchaser will require 3 No.
cubes to be made for each 40m3 of concrete in a pour and a minimum of 3
cubes from each pour. The slump test and/or compacting factor test will be
required for each set of test cubes.
201.1270
The Contractor shall ensure that the method and period of curing of the
concrete achieves the following conditions:
a)
sufficient water retention in the concrete to ensure full hydration of

the cement;
b)
adequate resistance to weathering and abrasion;
c)
control of plastic cracking by regulating evaporation from surfaces;
d)
control of thermal cracking by regulating temperature differentials

within the concrete to a maximum of 20oC
The Purchaser may require the Contractor to demonstrate that thermal

gradients are acceptable.
201.1280
Curing measures shall commence within 30 minutes of completion of a

concrete pour.
201.1290
All surfaces shall be cured and protected for the minimum period shown in
CIRIA Report 67 for the appropriate combination of cement, curing
conditions and temperature of concrete. During this period the surface
temperature of the concrete shall not fall below 5C.
201.1300
Water spraying or wet coverings shall not be used until the concrete
achieves a strength of 5N/mm2 or in freezing conditions.
Joints
201.1310
201.1311
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchasers Appointed Representative

details of the type and location of all construction joints he wishes to make.
In the case of the principal items of concrete work, these proposals will be
regarded as major Temporary Works and sufficient Drawings, covering the
whole structure must be submitted in advance of the start of the work to
enable the complete concreting plan to be accepted.
All construction joints are to be located and designed prior to the element of
work being constructed on site. No day joints will be permitted unless
26/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
previously designed and agreed.

201.1320
In addition to the foregoing, the Purchasers Appointed Representative shall

be empowered to require the inclusion of construction joints not previously
intended by the Contractor; such instructions will be issued in time for
inclusion with the associated formwork.
201.1330
All construction joints will normally be required to be keyed or toothed and

four clear days allowed between adjacent pours.
201.1340
Except for paper joints, the whole surface of concrete which has set shall
have been thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all loose and foreign
matter and laitance before further concrete is placed. Wherever
practicable, as at horizontal joints, laitance shall be removed whilst the
concrete is still green so as to expose the tops of the larger aggregate
particles without undue erosion of the mortar. Where concrete already
deposited has set but not set hard, laitance shall be removed and the
surface roughened by wire brushing and washing, care being taken not to
disturb the underlying mass. Where the concrete first poured has set hard,
any skin or laitance shall be removed and the surface roughened by
hammering with an agreed pattern, power operated, "bush" hammer
followed by wire brushing to remove all loose particles.
When carrying out this method of preparation, care shall be taken to avoid
breaking off the arises of the joint face or shattering or loosening particles of
coarse aggregate exposed.
201.1350
Immediately before depositing fresh concrete, the face of the joint shall be
thoroughly washed after which the excess water shall be removed. The
fresh concrete shall be forced hard on to set faces of concrete by means of
compacting and vibrating tools.
201.1360
Free joints to allow for expansion, contraction or shrinkage shall be formed

at positions appropriate to the design of the structure.
201.1370
Joint fillers and sealing compounds shall be of agreed manufacture, and

used in accordance with the maker's instructions as appropriate to the type
of joint, vertical, inclined or horizontal.
27/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL WORKMANSHIP

General
201.1380
Tests on concrete shall be to BS 1881.
201.1390
The Contractor shall safely retain all test reports, certificates and records for
tests required by this specification or at the Purchaser's request. He shall
provide copies to the Purchaser when so requested.
Routine Tests
General
201.1400
The Contractor shall maintain a record showing where the concrete related
to each set of test results is placed in the Works.
201.1410
Test reports relating to a concrete mix, the design of which has been varied
with the Purchaser's agreement, shall carry a suffix letter added to the mix
designation.
201.1420
Samples of concrete shall generally be taken at the point of discharge from

the mixer. In the case of ready mixed concrete, the samples shall be taken
at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle.
Concrete Strength
201.1430
Samples of concrete being placed in the Works shall be taken and 150mm
test cubes made, in metal moulds, as and when directed by the Purchaser's
Appointed Representative. In general the Purchaser will require a sample
for each 40m3 of concrete in a pour and a minimum one sample from each
pour. The slump test and/or compacting factor test will be required for each
set of test cubes.
201.1435
Three 150mm cubes shall be cast from each sample and tested to
determine the density and compressive strength as follows:
(a)
one cube shall be tested at 7 days.
(b)
two cubes shall be tested at 28 days.
28/42
Onyx South Downs
201.1440
EFW Contract
Concrete shall be assumed to have achieved its characteristic strength

when, at 28 days:
(a)
the average strength determined from any group of four consecutive

test results exceeds the characteristic strength by: 3N/mm2 for
concrete having a characteristic strength of 20N/mm2 and above.
2N/mm2 for concrete having a characteristic strength of less than
20N/mm2.
(b)
the strength determined from any test result is not less than the
characteristic strength minus 3N/mm2 for concrete having a
characteristic strength of 20N/mm2 and above and 2N/mm2 for
concrete having a characteristic strength less than 20N/mm2
201.1450
The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test

results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were
taken together with all intervening batches. A test result failing to comply
with Clause [201.1440 (b)] shall represent only the batch from which the
sample was taken.
201.1460
The Contractor shall prepare and test at his own expense additional
concrete cubes where he requires to demonstrate to the Purchaser that a
concrete element has achieved a particular compressive strength after a
period other than those specified for routine tests. Such cubes shall be
cured under the same conditions as the related element.
Test Cores
201.1470
When so required by the Purchaser the Contractor shall drill cylindrical

cores from concrete in the Works and shall supply to the Purchaser fully
detailed reports thereon with photographs all in accordance with the
procedure specified in BS 1881. Testing of cores shall be carried out by an
agreed laboratory.
201.1480
The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and testing cores
where these are required to satisfy the Purchaser that concrete complies
with the Specification.
29/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Workability
201.1490
The results of tests for workability shall be within the following limits
appropriate to the method of assessment and value agreed by the
Purchaser.
Slump:
Trial mix mean slump 33% or 25mm
whichever is the lesser.

Compacting Factor:
Trial mix mean CF 0.03%
Alkali - Aggregate Reaction Testing

201.1500
Samples from each class of concrete in production shall be tested for

potential alkali-aggregate reaction by casting into prisms of dimensions not
less than 200 x 75 x 75mm. For each concrete mix to be tested, one prism
shall be made using mix constituents and proportions identical to those
used in the works and a second prism made from concrete with its alkali
content artificially raised to 6kg/m3 equivalent sodium oxide by the addition
of potassium hydroxide. The prisms shall be fitted with measuring points
such that change in length can be measured at intervals during storage in
conditions of 100% R.H. and 38 1C.
Sample storage and measurement shall be as described in clause 11 of
draft BS 812 Part 123.
In the event that the expansion of the prisms exceeds 0.05%, the Purchaser
shall immediately be informed.
As an alternative to the prism test specified above, the Contractor may
perform mortar-bar tests to ASTM C227-81.
FORMWORK
General
201.1510
Formwork shall be to BS 5975, BS 8110 and Technical Report 13 of the

Concrete Society and the Institution of Structural Engineers.
30/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
201.1520
The formwork shall be in every way adapted to the structure and to the
required finish of the concrete. It shall, unless otherwise stated, be made
either of sound and seasoned timber wrought and thicknessed where
required and of sufficient thickness, or of treated plywood or other agreed
material suitably supported.
201.1530
The formwork shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely braced so as

to be able to withstand deflection, displacement or movement of any kind,
the weight and pressure of the moist concrete and the weight and
movements of men materials and plant.
201.1540
The supporting struts to formwork shall be adjusted and fixed in position by

suitable means and where necessary placed on timber bearers to prevent
them from sinking into the ground or from causing damage to finished work.
201.1550
Where it is necessary to use spacers or ties through a wall for supporting

the shutter above, such spacers or ties shall be of agreed pattern. The
holes left in the concrete shall be neatly pointed with an agreed expanding
grout as soon as the formwork is stripped.
201.1560
Concrete shall not be placed against vertical or inclined blinded earth faces
in lieu of formwork without the agreement of the Purchaser.
201.1570
Before any concrete is placed all formwork shall be carefully examined and
cleaned out, and the inside face shall be treated with an agreed mould oil,
which must not come into contact with the reinforcement or be allowed to
collect in the bottom of the formwork. Upon every occasion on which the
formwork is stripped it shall be thoroughly cleaned and oiled, if necessary
before re-use.
201.1580
The responsibility for the removal of any formwork after concreting rests
with the Contractor. Formwork shall be removed without causing damage
or excessive deflection to the concrete.
The minimum time which shall elapse between pouring concrete and
removal of formwork, shall not be less than that required for the concrete to
achieve a minimum compressive strength of 10N/mm2 or twice the stress to
which the member will be subject at the time of striking, whichever is the
greater.
The work of removing such formwork or support shall be carried out under
31/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
the personal supervision of a competent Foreman in the Contractor's

employment. The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury to the work
and any damage caused by or arising from the moving or striking of
formwork or supports.
201.1590
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser, if required, his formwork

design calculations.
201.1600
Formwork and supports shall resist all loads to which they will be subjected
without detriment to the finished concrete.
201.1610
Where the finished surface of concrete is at a slope greater than 35 a top

shutter shall be used.
201.1620
A 20 mm x 20 mm chamfer shall be formed on all arises exposed in the

finished work except where this would result in a loss of support to masonry
work.
201.1630
Joints, including those in form linings and between forms and completed
work, shall be constructed to prevent loss of grout.
201.1640
Formwork shall be in sound condition, clean and free of concrete remnants.

Portion of shutters at the level of each lift shall be removable to ensure a
thorough clearing out of any rubbish.
201.1650
Release agents shall be applied to formwork surfaces in contact with

concrete using the minimum necessary to obtain a clean release.
Any liquid applied to the formwork surfaces in contact with concrete shall be
compatible with any finish to be applied to the concrete and shall not
contaminate the reinforcement, embedded items or hardened concrete.
201.1660
No metal part of any fixing device for securing forms shall remain within the
concrete cover.
Formed Finishes
201.1670
201.1680
A smooth surface is required to all exposed surfaces of the concrete work.

Surfaces shall be true and free from imperfections. Every endeavour must
be made to obviate the necessity for surface treatment of the concrete after
the removal of moulds. For this purpose the formwork used for such
surfaces shall be wrought and thicknessed boards of a properly seasoned
timber accurately and closely fixed together or lined, laminated plywood
formwork or other agreed material.
Before the formwork is removed it shall be tapped on its exterior surface
with a light hammer or power operated vibrator in order as far as possible to
32/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
obviate the necessity for surface treatment after removal of the formwork.
Directly after the formwork has been removed all broken corners and such
parts of the surface where the face has been removed, shall be made good
with suitable cement mortar to bring same to the general level of the
surrounding surface. All exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly rubbed
down, if necessary with power operated carborundum grinders, to obtain
alignment of the surface, All areas shall be formed with a 50mm chamfer
unless otherwise shown.
201.1690
Type F1. As obtained with closely-jointed sawn boards. Voids, superficial

honeycombing and tie holes shall be made good with mortar to Clause
[201.1680].
201.1700
Type F2. As obtained with forms designed to produce a dense smooth

finish. Surfaces shall be free from voids greater than 10mm in diameter,
and from discolouration. Tie holes shall be in a regular pattern. Abrupt
irregularities shall not exceed 5mm and gradual irregularities shall not
exceed 10mm expressed as a deviation from a 3000mm straight edge.
Minor surface defects shall be made good with mortar to Clause [201.1680].
201.1710
Type F3. As obtained with forms designed to produce a dense smooth

finish with only minor colour variations. Surfaces shall be free from voids
greater than 5mm in diameter and discolouration. Tie holes and formwork
panel markings shall be in a regular pattern.
Abrupt irregularities shall not exceed 3mm and gradual irregularities shall
not exceed 6mm expressed as a deviation from a 3000mm straight edge.
Minor surface defects shall be made good with mortar to Clause [201.1680].
201.1720
Mortar for making good surface defects in concrete and filling tie holes shall
consist of ordinary Portland cement and sand in the ratio 1:2. Sand shall
pass a No 14 sieve and the water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.5. The
colour of the mortar shall match that of the concrete as closely as possible.
Worked Finishes
201.1730
Type W1. A wood float shall be used to produce an even texture.

Type W2. A steel float shall be used to produce a smooth even finish free
from float marks.
Type W3. A power float shall be used when the concrete has stiffened
sufficiently to be properly worked to produce a smooth even finish.
Type W4. A power grinder shall be used within the period 24-36 hours after
33/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
placing to produce a dense even finish.

Type W5. A stiff brush shall be used to produce a slightly roughened even
surface.
Type W6. The surface of the concrete shall be tamped with the edge of a
board or beam to produce an even texture of parallel ribs.
Permissible Irregularities
201.1740
There shall be no abrupt irregularities in worked finishes, and gradual

irregularities shall not exceed 3mm expressed as a deviation from a
3000mm straight edge.
Sample Finishes
201.1750
The Contractor shall prepare trial panels of all concrete finishes.

TOLERANCES
201.1760
Positive tolerances given below are the measurements by which the

concrete is permitted to exceed the stated dimensions. Negative tolerances
are the measurements by which the concrete can be short of the stated
dimensions. Departure from alignment is the permissible deviation from the
centre line horizontal or vertical face or edge of the concrete.
STRUCTURE
TOLERANCE
(mm)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES IN CONCRETE

DIMENSIONS
Concrete in structures against which backfill is placed
+25
-5
Concrete in structures not backfilled
+10
-5
Upper surfaces of concrete
+5
-5
Cross-sectional dimensions of concrete members
+5
-5
Departure from alignment
+10
-10
or 1 in 500 whichever
is more onerous
+10
-10
+10
-10
+5
-5
Dimensions of precast units

Position of architectural features and openings
34/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Position of embedded items

PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES IN VERTICALITY
Reinforced concrete columns, walls, piers and all plinths
1 in 1000
Mass concrete columns and walls
1 in 400
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES IN LEVEL

Concrete floor beams and floors - soffits and surfaces and all
plinths
1 in 500
Exposed lintels, cills and listed seatings for rails and plant
1 in 1000
ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES INCLUDING GROOVES

Vertical features
1 in 100 but 10mm

in any 5m
Horizontal or inclined features
1 in 1000 but
10mm in any 7.5m
201.1770
No reduction shall be permitted in the cover to reinforcement because of a

specified negative tolerance in a concrete section.
201.1780
Abrupt changes of surface alignment of concrete such as may occur at

badly made construction joints will not be allowed even though the concrete
surfaces are within the permissible tolerances.
201.1781
Variation in relative level of face between the concrete surface and the
surface of sleeve, fixing or embedment shall not exceed -0 + 1mm at all
points on the perimeter.
201.1782
Variation in level of face from true level or true face of pipes or flanges of
pipes shall not exceed 6mm.
35/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
GENERAL
Construction Loads
201.1790
The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to ensure that concrete

members are not overloaded during the execution of the Works.
Proprietary Solutions
201.1800
Details of all proprietary solutions which the Contractor proposes to apply to

the surface of concrete shall be submitted to the Purchaser. These
solutions shall be compatible with any applied finish.
Grouting and Filling
201.1810
The method for grouting of holding down bolt/base plates shall be agreed
with the Purchaser prior to commencement.
201.1820
Surfaces of voids shall be thoroughly wetted before filling and packing.
201.1830
Dry packing mortar or concrete shall only be used if agreed with the
purchaser.
201.1840
Grout and concrete shall be well worked from one side and in one direction
only to ensure complete filling of the void. Vibrators shall not be used.
201.1850
Bolt sleeves shall be filled to within 50mm of the concrete foundation level
prior to the grouting of the baseplate.
201.1860
Formwork shall be used to contain the grout as necessary to meet the

requirements of this Specification.
201.1870
Excess grout or concrete shall be cut back while still green.

Watertight and Water Retaining Structures
201.1880
Structures required to be watertight or water retaining shall be tested to BS

8007 and as required by this specification.
All water retaining structures are to be filled to capacity prior to backfilling or
the application of tanking materials. The water level is to be maintained for
a period of 48 hours during which time there is to be no visible or otherwise
identifiable leakage.
36/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Cutting Concrete
201.1890
No concrete or steel in the reinforced concrete work shall be cut in any way
without the permission of the Purchaser in writing.
Faulty Works
201.1900
The Contractor shall at his own expense remove and reconstruct any
portions of the work which, in the opinion of the Purchaser, give evidence
before or after the removal of the formwork that the concrete was of
insufficient quality at the time of placing, or was not properly placed and
sufficiently compacted in the formwork or that any bars of the
reinforcement have been omitted, incorrectly placed or displaced, or that
the formwork has been incorrectly positioned or displaced, or which given
any evidence of fault, defect of injury from any cause whatsoever which
may, in the opinion of the Purchaser, prejudicially affect the strength,
durability, watertightness or alignment of the work.
Deviations
201.1930
Documentation, in the form of as-built drawings, photographs, etc., shall

be prepared for all completed structures which are not in compliance
with these tolerances and submitted, to the Purchaser for agreement
201.1931
PRECAST CONCRETE
201.2000
When pre-cast concrete is used in the Works, the design shall comply with
BS 8110. The Contractor shall submit drawings and calculations to the
Purchaser in accordance with the Specification.
201.2010
Manufacture of pre-cast concrete components shall comply with BS 8110.

The Contractor shall arrange for the Purchaser or his Appointed
Representative to have full access to the manufacturer's works for
inspection purposes as if they were part of the site.
201.2020
When standard manufactured precast concrete components are used, the

Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser certificates from the manufacturer
of the components certifying the component has the required strength and
durability.
WATER RETAINING CONCRETE

201.2050
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section of the Specification,
37/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
concrete mix design for concrete designed to retain water or other liquids
shall comply with BS 8007.
201.2051
Effluent storage, water treatment plant rooms, flue gas treatment areas and
ash storage areas shall be constructed in water retaining reinforced
concrete.
201.2060
GROUND BEARING SLABS

Ground bearing slabs shall be reinforced concrete slabs placed on a
polyethylene isolating membrane on a levelled, blinded and compacted
formation suitable for the purpose. The slabs shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with Concrete Society Technical Report No 34.
Floor slabs which are not to received an applied finish shall be floated and
travelled to a flatness so that the gap under a 3m straight edge will not
exceed 3mm.
201.2070
RETAINING WALLS
Before backfilling retaining walls, the face in contact with the ground shall
be painted with two coats of a proprietary bituminous compound suitable for
the purpose as agreed by the Purchaser.
38/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The British Standards and other documents referred to in Section 201 and listed
British Standards
BS 12
BS 146
BS 812
BS 882
BS 1014
BS 1521
BS 1881
BS 3148
BS 3892
BS 4027
BS 4246
BS 4550
BS 4887
BS 5075
BS 5328
BS 5975
BS 6699
BS 8110
BS 8007
Specification for Portland Cement

Specification For Portland Blast Furnace Cement.
Testing aggregates.
concrete.
Specification for pigments for Portland cement and Portland cement
products.
Specification for waterproof building papers.
Testing concrete.
Methods of test for water for making concrete (including notes on
the suitability of the water).
Pulverized fuel ash.
Specification for Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement.
Specification for High Slag Blast Furnace Cement.
Methods of testing cement.
Mortar admixtures.
Concrete admixtures.
Concrete.
Code of practice for falsework.
Specification for Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag for Use With
Portland Cement.
Structural use of concrete.
Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining
aqueous liquids.
European Standards
EN 196
American Standards
ASTM C494
ASTM C227
Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

Test for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement - Aggregate
Combinations (mortar-bar method).
39/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Other References
Concrete Society Technical Report No.30 "Alkali Silica Reaction, Minimising the
Risk to Concrete"
Concrete Society and Institution of Structural Engineers Technical Report 13
"Formwork".
CIRIA Report 67 "Formwork"
40/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE
REFERENCE
201. 270
Details of admixtures
201. 310
Method Statement on use of

Admixtures
201. 440
Material supply information
201. 450
Material supply test results
201. 460
Testing facilities and equipment
201. 500
Results of sampling and testing
201. 540
Change in alkali content
201. 650
Mix Design evidence
201. 700
Mix Proposals
201. 740
Statistical analysis of results
201. 770
Alkali content calculation method
201. 800
Site batch location
201. 960
Concrete details (ready mixed)
201.1000
Details on concreting
201.1030
Record of inspection prior to

concreting
201.1100
Details for placing and curing
201.1140
Details of external vibrators
201.1270
Thermal gradients
201.1310
Construction joints
201.1390
Copies of test reports, certificates

and records
201.1470
Test core reports
As required by Purchaser
201.1580
Formwork calculations
201.1780
Details of proprietary solutions
201.1790
Grouting of bolts/assemblies
201.1910
Documentation of noncompliance with specified

tolerances
201.2020
Certificates of strength and

durability for precast concrete
components
41/42
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
42/42
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 200: CONCRETE WORK
SECTION NO: 202
TITLE: REINFORCEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Reinforcement
Tying Wire
Spacers
WORKMANSHIP
Cutting and Bending
Fixing
Site Bending
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Inspection

1/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
202. 010
This Section defines the materials and operations relating to the supply and
placing of reinforcement.
MATERIALS
Reinforcement
202. 030
Only high yield steel shall be used in the Works. High yield reinforcement
shall be either hot rolled deformed bars to BS 4449 or cold worked
deformed bars to BS 4461 and shall have Type 2 bond classification.
202. 050
Steel fabric or wrapping fabric shall be to BS 4483.
202. 060
Storage arrangements shall prevent contamination of or damage to the

reinforcement.
Tying Wire
202. 070
Tying wire shall be 1.6mm diameter black annealed mild steel or soft
annealed iron wire for uncoated mild steel bars or high yield steel bars.
202. 080
Galvanised or stainless steel tying wire is to be used for fixing reinforcing

bars of the corresponding material.
Spacers
202. 090
Dense sand/cement mortar spacer blocks shall be of low permeability

having similar strength, durability and appearance to the surrounding
concrete.
202. 100
Details of patent or proprietary spacers shall be submitted to the Purchaser.

WORKMANSHIP
Cutting and Bending
202. 110
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to BS 4466.
202. 120
Reinforcement shall be identified using clearly marked, securely fixed,

durable tags.
2/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Fixing
202. 130
Reinforcement shall be fixed, supported and maintained in position by the

adequate use of chairs, spacers and tying wire. Ends of tying wires shall be
turned in so us to not project into the cover concrete.
202. 140
Reinforcement shall be free of all loose rust and scale or contamination of

any kind.
202. 150
Different types of reinforcements shall not be intermixed unless instructed

by the Purchaser.
Site Bending
202. 160
Procedures for heating, welding and bending of bars on Site shall be

submitted to the Purchaser. Site bending of bars shall not be permitted
when the bar temperature is below 6oC.
202. 170
Bending and subsequent straightening of reinforcing bars projecting from

existing concrete shall be carried out as follows:
a)
b)
The minimum distance from an existing concrete surface to the

beginning of a bend, and the minimum inside diameter of the bend
shall be:
Bar Size
Min. Dist. from Min. Inside

surface to
diameter
beginning of
bend
10mm to 25mm
32mm
Over 32mm
3 Bar Diameters
4
5
6 Bar Diameters
8
10
Bars of 10mm to 16mm diameter inclusive may be bent once

without heating; heating is required for subsequent straightening or
bending.
3/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Bars 20mm to 32mm inclusive may be bent once and subsequently

straightened; heating is required in all cases.
Bars having a diameter greater than 32mm may be bent only with
the agreement of the Purchaser; heating is required in all cases.
202. 180
c)
Heat shall be applied as uniformly as possible over a length of bar

equal to 10 bar diameters. The centre of the heated length shall be
at the middle of the arc of the completed bend. The bar
temperature shall not exceed 350 C. The temperature shall be
maintained constant during bending or straightening operations.
Temperature measuring crayons or a contact pyrometer shall be
used to determine the temperature. Care shall be taken to prevent
quenching of heated bars either by application of water or by a high
volume of air.
d)
Straightened bars shall be visually inspected before and after

straightening to determine whether they are cracked or otherwise
damaged. A request for inspection is to be submitted to the
Purchaser.
Bars not exceeding 32mm in diameter not projecting from concrete may be
bent without heating in accordance with this Section providing no local
section is rebent or straightened, and the area of the bend is inspected for
cracks. A request for inspection is to be submitted to the Purchaser.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
202. 190
All reinforcement shall be obtained from agreed suppliers or manufacturer's

possessing a current certificate of agreement issued by the UK Certification
Authority for Reinforcing Steels (CARES).
202. 200
All documentation relating to the supply of reinforcement shall bear the

CARES mark and certificate number and shall ensure that it is traceable to
its parent cast.
202. 210
The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer's certificates for each

delivery of reinforcement which he shall retain as record documents.
These certificates shall state that the reinforcement complies with and
has been tested at the frequency specified in the appropriate British
Standard Specification. The chemical analysis reported in the
manufacturer's certificate shall include the nitrogen content
4/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Inspection
202. 220
The Contractor's record of inspection of completed preparatory works

prior to commencing concreting required under Section 201 shall include
the work in this Section.
5/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

BS 4449
Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 4466
Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of

steel reinforcement for concrete.
BS 4482
Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of

concrete.
BS 4483
Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.
BS 5400
Steel, concrete and composite bridges
BD 37/88
Loads for highway bridges (Department of Transport)
6/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
202.100
Details of patent spacers.
202.160
Procedures for Site bending of

reinforcement.
202.170
Notification of inspection for cracks.
202.180
Notification of inspection for cracks.
202.220
Notification for inspection prior to

concreting.
7/7
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 210 : STEELWORK AND METALWORK
SECTION NO: 211
TITLE: STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
STEELWORK SPECIFICATION
CONTRACTOR DESIGN AND DETAILING
Connections and Joints
Bolted Connections
Welded Connections
Drainage Holes
Drawings and documents
MATERIALS
Hot rolled steel
Bolts
Minimum thickness
Testing
WORKMANSHIP - GENERAL
Cutting, shaping, machining
Fitted stiffeners
Marking steelwork
Storage
Foundation bolts
1/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WORKMANSHIP - WELDING
General
Preparation of joint faces
Butt welded joints
Intermittent welds
Structural hollow sections
Inaccessible areas and contact surfaces
Removal of weld spatter
WORKMANSHIP - BOLTING
General
Bolted movement connections
Correcting hole alignments
High strength friction grip assemblies
WORKMANSHIP - ACCURACY OF FABRICATION
Fabrication tolerances
Trial assembly
WORKMANSHIP - PRACTICE AND ACCURACY OF ERECTED STEELWORK
Erection method statement
Handling works coated steelwork
Tolerances
Plumbing of stanchions
Damage
Packing and wedges
Grouting of structures
Site bolting
Site welding
Temporary works
2/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAINT TREATMENT FOR CORROSION PROTECTION
General
Materials
Surface preparation prior to paint application
Surface defects
Paint application
Exposed external steelwork
Internal steelwork generally
Internal exposed steelwork
Care and attention
Pre-fabrication primer
Top coat shade
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing of welding operators
Inspection and testing
3/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
211. 010
This Section defines the general requirements for Contractor design,

materials, workmanship and erection for structural steelwork construction.
STEELWORK SPECIFICATION
211. 030
Except where modified by this Specification, all structural steelwork shall be

in accordance with the 'National Structural Steelwork Specification for
Building Construction hereinafter referred to as 'NSSS'. In the event of
conflict between the requirements of this Specification and the 'NSSS', this
Specification shall apply.
211. 040
The structural steelwork materials and workmanship for bridges and similar
work is specified elsewhere in the Specification.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN AND DETAILING
211. 050
The Contractor shall carry out the design, detailing fabrication and erection
of all steelwork, connections, supports and details, in accordance with
'NSSS' and this specification.
211. 060
The design code of practice to be used for detail design is BS5950. The
Contractor shall ensure that his designs are based on good engineering
practice and are economical.
Connections and Joints
211. 070
The Contractor shall design the connections and carry out the detailing.
211. 080
Shop connections may be bolted or equivalent welded connections unless

specific types of connection are required by the purchaser.
Bolted Connections
211. 090
Bolted connections shall have a minimum of two bolts.

Welded Connections
211. 100
The minimum size of fillet welds shall be 6mm.
211. 110
The effective length of fillet welds shall be the length excluding the first and
last 25mm of the weld.
211. 120
The connection design shall provide adequate accessibility for welding and
4/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
inspection during fabrication. The profile of the joint shall enable

satisfactory non-destructive testing to be carried out.
211. 130
In addition to meeting the requirements of BS 5950, the guidance given by

BS 5135 shall be applied.
Drainage Holes
211. 140
Drainage holes shall be provided in members where water can collect

during and after erection. Reduced areas and sectional properties shall be
computed and the members strengthened as necessary.
Drawings and Documents
211. 150
The Contractor shall prepare the following documents:-
schematic general arrangement framing layout and detail

drawings
marking plans and details for holding-down bolts and other
embedded items
fabrication drawings
connection details including calculations
welder certificates
welding procedure details
fabrication method statement
erection marking plans
erection method statement including calculations
details of the Q.A. plan for structural steelwork together with full
details of the stage control and inspection documents.
Calculations and drawings shall be independently checked and signed.

All drawings shall be prepared to microphotographic standards.
MATERIALS
Hot Rolled Steel
211. 160
Except where modified by the Specification all materials shall comply with
the NSSS.
211. 170
All steel shall be new, selected for the purpose for which it is intended to be
used, shall comply with BS 4360 and shall be of a grade suitable for the
environmental conditions it will be subjected to.
5/20
Onyx South Downs
211.175
EFW Contract
Hot rolled and fabricated sections shall be Grades 43 or 50. Cold formed
sections shall be Grade 50.
Bolts
211. 180
Ordinary bolt assemblies shall use bolts of Grade 8.8 to BS 3692. Higher
grade bolts shall not be used without the prior agreement of the Purchaser.
Bolts shall have short thread lengths and be of the correct length for the
thickness of material to be connected.
HSFG bolt assemblies shall use general grade bolts and shall be in
211. 190
The minimum bolt size used shall be M16, unless prior agreement of the
Purchaser is obtained.
211. 200
Bolts are to be self-finished, unless noted on the drawings. Galvanised or

sheradized bolts nuts and washers shall be used for connecting galvanised
steelwork.
Minimum Thickness
211. 210
All gusset plates, stiffeners, flanges and elements of built-up sections shall
not be less than 6mm thick.
Testing
211. 220
The Contractor shall obtain all manufacturer's test report certificates for all
material used in the Permanent Works, eg. steel plates, sections, bolts, etc.
Details of such tests shall be submitted to the Purchaser for record
purposes.
211. 230
When tests are to be made away from the steelworks, the Contractor shall
provide sample pieces 500mm x 75mm for plates, or as near to that as
practicable, and 500mm long of full section for angles, joists, channels, flat,
rods etc. The sample pieces shall be selected and stamped by the
Contractor and as soon as selected shall be despatched to the Testing
Works where test pieces shall be made and tested. Test Certificates shall
be obtained and made available on request.
WORKMANSHIP - GENERAL
211. 250
Except where modified by the Specification, all workmanship shall comply

with the 'NSSS'.
6/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Cutting, Shaping and Machining

211. 260
The ends of all beams shall be square where required and flanges neatly
cut away or notched where necessary. All notches shall be kept as small
as possible and shall be radiused in the inner corner.
211. 270
The butt ends of compression members shall, except where bolts carry the
loads, have their abutting faces machined after fabrication so that they shall
be square to the member axes and in tight bearing contact when erected.
211. 280
The ends of columns at intermediate splices and where they bear on bases
or caps shall be cut true and square so that they shall be in tight bearing
contact i.e. to within 0.5 degree.
211. 290
All machining operations shall be performed after welding. All machined

surfaces, unless otherwise noted, shall have a finish of 6.5 micrometres
CLA.
Fitted Stiffeners
211. 300
Where stiffeners are required to be fitted, they shall be ground or machined

to fit and the surfaces on which the stiffeners bear shall be cleaned of all
loose mill scale or any deleterious matter to allow tight contact.
Marking Steelwork
211. 310
All members of mass exceeding 5 tonnes shall have their mass marked by
cold stamping and painting. Markings shall be inspected and where
necessary, repaired or replaced, upon delivery to site and at regular
intervals before erection. In addition each member shall be clearly marked
with a unique reference number which can be cross referenced to the shop
drawings indicating where that member is located in the structure.
Storage
211. 320
Each grade of steel shall be stored separately and marked to BS 4360.
211. 330
Each type of bolt and each type and grade of welding consumable shall be
clearly identified and stored separately.
Foundation Bolts
211. 340
Foundation bolts and any associated steelwork assemblies shall be

delivered to site in good time for being built into the foundations. Bolts shall
7/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
be designed to allow columns to free stand without guying during erection

of steelwork, provided no lateral forces are applied to column heads during
erection.
WORKMANSHIP - WELDING
General
211. 350
No welding shall be carried out unless a procedure has been submitted and
agreed by the Purchaser. This requirement shall include all repair welds,
welded attachments, supports and fabrication aids even where these may
subsequently be removed.
211. 360
Agreement of the welding schedules and procedures shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for the correct welding and for the minimising
of distortion in the finished structure.
Preparation of Joint Faces
211. 370
Preparation of joint faces shall be to BS 5135.

Butt Welded Joints
211. 380
All butt welds shall have complete penetration. On rolled section this shall
be achieved by the use of extension pieces, cross runs, or other means as
agreed by the Purchaser.
Intermittent Welds
211. 390
Intermittent welds shall only be permitted with the agreement of the

Purchaser. Submittals are to be made to the Purchaser for agreement and
record purposes.
Structural Hollow Sections
211. 400
The end of one hollow section shall be accurately shaped to fit the other.
This shall be done by using properly prepared templates or equivalent
agreed methods. The correct fusion bevel shall then be cut.
Inaccessible Areas and Contact Surfaces
211. 410
Areas which become inaccessible after fabrication or assembly, such as the

inside of structural hollow sections and other box sections, shall be sealed
off from the outside atmosphere by continuous welds unless specified
otherwise. The interior shall be kept clean, dry and free from loose scale
8/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
etc.
211. 420
Galvanised hollow sections shall have suitable vent holes to prevent

explosions due to the expansion of the trapped air during galvanizing.
Removal of Weld Spatter
211. 430
All weld spatter shall be removed and where steelwork is to be

blast-cleaned, all traces of spatter, together with any flux and other surface
contamination shall be removed before commencement of blasting.
WORKMANSHIP - BOLTING
General
211. 440
Bolting up and final tightening of bolts shall be carried out progressively as

the erection, alignment and grouting proceeds in order to release the
steelwork and the area under it for subsequent operations.
Bolted Movement Connections
211.450
Slotted holes for movement connections shall be greased and provided

with shouldered bolts, spring washers and flat washers.
Correcting Hole Alignments
211. 460
When holes can only be aligned by reaming, the agreement of the

Purchaser will be required.
High Strength Friction Grip Assemblies
211. 470
Only one type of HSFG fastening system shall be used on each section of
the Works unless otherwise agreed with the Purchaser.
211. 480
Metallic protective finishes when specified shall only be applied by the bolt
manufacturer.
211. 490
Only HSFG fastenings in good condition shall be used. Threads of bolts

and nuts, in particular, shall be free from damage, grit, corrosion or any
condition necessitating excessive torque to attain the required tension.
WORKMANSHIP - ACCURACY OF FABRICATION
Fabrication Tolerances
9/20
Onyx South Downs
211. 500
EFW Contract
All measurements shall be made with respect to a base temperature of

15oC.
Fabrication tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 5950 Part 2, and BS
5606, except where modified by this specification.
(i)
Length
Length after cutting as defined in NSSS Section 7.2.5.
Length less than 9.0m:
_+0
- 2mm
Length greater than 9.0m:
_+0
- 4mm
Trial Assembly
211. 510
Sufficient trial assemblies shall be carried out in the Steelwork Contractor's

works to prove the accuracy of the workmanship.
Where parts which have to fit together cannot be matched before despatch
to Site, the Contractor shall make adequate provision to ensure a correct fit.
WORKMANSHIP - ERECTION AND ACCURACY OF ERECTED
STEELWORK
Erection Method Statement
211. 520
Prior to the erection of any permanent steelwork on Site, the Contractor

shall submit to the Purchaser a Method Statement detailing a safe system
of working. The agreement of the Contractor's Detailed Method Statement
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the
contract.
10/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Handling Works Coated Steelwork

211. 530
The precautions to be taken when handling, storing, transporting and

erecting works coated steelwork shall include the following:
a)
All wire ropes and chain slings used for hoisting and securing
loads shall be covered to protect coatings and prevent scoring,
chafing and other damage.
b)
Softwood timber bearers with a sufficient contact area to prevent

crushing shall be provided at all stages including transport to site.
Bearers shall be level and sufficient in number to prevent
distortion of members. Beams used to support coated steelwork
stored externally shall be sufficiently high to ensure that the
lowest parts of the stored members are above and clear of the
rainwater splash zone and that from passing vehicles.
c)
Special consideration shall be given to the arrangements of

bearers if articulated vehicles which allow differential movement
of bearers are used to transport steelwork. Vertical timber
packing shall be used to separate members when required and to
prevent chafing to coatings. The methods used for securing loads
to transport vehicles shall ensure that coatings are not damaged.
d)
Members shall be stacked in such a manner as to permit free

drainage of rainwater from the surfaces and to avoid ponding.
e)
Precautions shall be taken at all stages to prevent coatings being

contaminated by oil, cement, soil, chemicals or other deleterious
agents. Should any contamination occur, the contaminating
agent shall be removed immediately by swabbing or brushing and
the surfaces washed thoroughly with clean water.
f)
Works coated steelwork shall be loaded and unloaded by hoisting

equipment. It shall not be moved by sliding or skidding.
g)
Small components without packing shall be handled singly and

shall not be thrown on or off vehicles or at any other time. They
shall be stored on pallets and precautions taken to prevent
chafing of coatings.
h)
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be protected and stored in dry
conditions. Adequate precautions shall also be taken to ensure
11/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
that threads are not damaged or contaminated with dirt etc.

Tolerances
211. 540
Erection tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 5950 Part 2, the NSSS

and BS 5606 whichever is the most onerous. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the correct positioning and levels of the structure in relation
to the datums given.
The erection of the steelwork shall be to BS 5950: Part 2 and BS 5531.
Plumbing of Stanchions
211. 550
Plumbing of stanchions shall be undertaken as follows:a)
The final tightening, or welding if permitted, of connections shall

not be carried out until a sufficient portion of the structure has
been erected and temporarily connected up to ensure that there
shall be no straining of members during erection and lining-up of
the remainder of the structure.
b)
If the Contractor proposes to use shims he shall submit details to

the Purchaser for agreement and record purposes.
c)
At the time of checking plumbness, the steel structure shall be

free standing and free of temporary erection ties/bracing, such as
tirfors, and the like.
Damage
211. 560
Damage to any part of the structure either before or during erection shall be
immediately brought to the notice of the Purchaser. No damaged part shall
be assembled in the structure without the consent of the Purchaser.
Packing and Wedges
211. 570
Packing and wedges shall be suitable for their purpose and shall not
protrude from the stanchion base. Generally they shall be grouted in.
Where they are grouted in they shall be totally enclosed by the grout.
Grouting up of Structures
211. 580
The Purchaser shall be notified when stanchions or other members have

been lined, levelled and plumbed and prior to grouting.
12/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Following review and agreement by the Purchaser of the alignment and

plumbing, the Contractor shall immediately grout the baseplates and
holding down bolts and concrete in stanchions or other members as
appropriate.
Site Bolting
211. 590
All site bolting shall meet the relevant requirements of this Specification.
Site Welding
211. 600
Where Site welding is required and permitted by the Purchaser, the

requirements of this Specification shall be met and the welding shall be
subject to all the inspection requirements. Special attention shall be paid to
the safety of welders working on site.
Temporary Works
211. 610
Temporary bracings shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure the

stability of his work during erection.
PAINT TREATMENT FOR CORROSION PROTECTION
General
211. 620
All workmanship and materials shall comply with the recommendations of

BS 5493: Protective Coating of Iron and Steel Structures Against Corrosion.
13/20
Onyx South Downs
211. 630
EFW Contract
No paint other than pre-fabrication primer shall be applied within 50mm of

any proposed welds.
Materials
211. 640
The paint system described in this specification is based on paints

produced by International Paint Ltd. Agreement of products from
alternative suppliers may be granted provided that the Contractor is able to
demonstrate that the alternative is of, at least, equivalent quality.
211. 650
All paints within any painting system shall be entirely compatible and
supplied by the same manufacturer.
Surface Preparation Prior to Paint Application
211. 660
All steelwork shall be blasted free from all millscale, rust and other
contamination to a minimum standard of Sa2.5 as defined in Swedish
Standard SIS 05 5900.
Surface Defects
211. 670
All surface defects likely to be detrimental to the protective painting system

shall be removed. The requirement of BS4360 shall be observed to ensure
that the steel is sound and free from cracks, laminations or surface flaws
such as might preclude it for the purpose for which it is intended.
211. 680
After shotblasting all spent shot or grit shall be removed by vacuum cleaner
or by oil and moisture free airline and brush. In the event of any shot or grit
being found embedded in the paint film the affected area shall be re-blasted
and re-painted to the original specified standard.
211. 690
The blasted surface shall be tested with a copper sulphate solution after
blasting. A 4% solution of copper sulphate in 1% sulphuric acid shall be
used. The surface treated shall show less than 10% residual millscale.
The requirements of BS5493: 1977 Appendix G shall be observed where
the presence of rust producing soluble salts is possible.
Paint Application
211. 700
All steel surfaces shall be dry before painting commences and the
prevailing shop conditions shall be monitored and recorded by the paint
applicator at the time of paint application. Painting shall not be carried out
at temperatures below that recommended by the paint supplier.
211. 710
The application of protective coatings is to be inspected by the Paint
14/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Supplier. Copies of inspection reports shall be issued directly to the

Contractor by the Paint Supplier.
211. 720
Technical support services provided by the Paint Supplier does not relieve
the Contractor of his contractual responsibility to ensure that the coatings
are applied in accordance with the specification.
15/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Exposed External Steelwork

211. 730
Application at works.
Apply overall:
1 coat Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Primer - Intergard Wintercure 200 Series to
75 microns nominal dft
1 coat High Build Epoxy MI0 - Intergard Wintercure 420 Series to 100
microns nominal dft
1 finish coat 629 to 50 microns nominal dft
211. 740
Application at site:
Any areas damaged in transit to be hand or power tool cleaned to St2
Swedish Standard SIS 05 5900 and bare areas touched up with two coats
Interplus 256 to 100 microns nominal dft per coat, followed by Interfine 629
to 50 microns nominal dft.
Internal Steelwork Generally, Except Components Such as Galvanised
Pressed Metal Sections
211. 750
Application at works.
Apply overall:
1 coat Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Primer - Wintercure 200 Series to 75 microns
nominal dft.
211. 760
Application at site.
Swedish Standard SIS 05 5900 and bare areas touched up with Interplus
256 to 100 microns nominal dft.
Internal Exposed Steelwork
211. 770
Application at work.
Apply overall:
1 coat two pack Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Primer to 75 microns minimum dft.
1 coat HB Epoxy M10 to 125 microns minimum dft
Finish coats to suit architectural requirements.
211. 780
Application at site.
16/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Swedish Standard SIS 05 5900 and bare areas touched up with compatible
system.
Care and Attention
211. 790
Painted steelwork shall at all times be stored above ground with suitable
timber bearers to separate individual members. Stacked members shall at
all times be accessible for inspection.
211. 800
When erection has been completed all steel shall be further inspected and
areas marked to indicate where remedial work is required. Areas
concerned will be hand or power tool cleaned to St2 Swedish Standard SIS
05 5900 and treated with the appropriate touch up system.
Areas of damaged paintwork shall be made good and the repair shall
overlap sound paintwork by at least 50mm.
Pre-fabrication Primer
211. 810
Where the use of a pre-fabrication primer is proposed by the Steelwork

Contractor this shall be a Zinc Phosphate Epoxy Prefabrication Primer Interplate 170 to 25 microns nominal dft. The dft of remaining coats shall
remain as specified.
Top Coat Shade
211. 820
Shade of any Interfine 629 top coat to be agreed with by the Purchaser.
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing of Welding Operators
211. 830
The Contractor shall pay all labour, plant and material costs with respect of
testing of welding operatives including independent testing authority costs.
The Contractor shall propose an offsite testing regime during fabrication
which is subject to the agreement of the Purchaser. The Contractor shall
pay all costs related to the testing together with the cost of rectifying and
replacing any defective work.
211. 840
The Contractor shall notify the Purchaser of inspection or checking stages

required by the workmanship section of this Specification and the
NSSS.This shall include, but is not limited to:
17/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Commencement of fabrication
After completion of surface preparation and prior to application of

protective treatments.
Inspection of prepared foundations and holding down bolts prior

to commencement of erection.
The first use of each agreed welding procedure.
At the commencement of major weld repairs.
Survey of erected structures prior to bolting up and grouting.
Grouting of base plates and holding down bolts.
Inspection of bolts before final tightening is carried out.
18/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Purchaser any inconsistences
between the requirements of these standards and this Specification Section.
Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.
National Structural Steelwork Specification
BS 3692
BS 4360
BS 4395
BS 5135
BS 5493
BS 5606
BS 5950
Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and

nuts
Specification for Weldable Structural Steels
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS 7613: 1994, BS 7668: 1994, BS EN
10029: 1991, Parts 1 to 3 of BS EN 10113: 1993, BS EN 10155:
1993 and BS EN 10210-1: 1994.
Specification for High Strength Friction Grip bolts
steels
Code of Practice for Protective Coating of iron and steel
structures against corrosion.
Guide to Accuracy in Building
Structural Use of Steelwork in Building
Swedish Standard SIS 05 5900
19/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 2 - INFORMATION TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR
CLAUSE REFERENCE
211.130
Drawings and documents
211.220
Manufacturer's test report certificates
211.350
Welding procedures
211.390
Intermittent welds
211.460
Agreement of reaming
211.520
Erection method statement
211.560
Damage
211.580
Readiness for grouting
211.820
Colour of top coats
20/20
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 210: STEELWORK AND METALWORK
SECTION NO: 215
TITLE: CRANE GANTRY GIRDERS, RAILS AND RAIL FIXINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
RELATED STANDARDS
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
MATERIALS
WORKMANSHIP
Fabrication
Site Erection
QUALITY CONTROL
APPENDIX 1
BSI STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCES
APPENDIX 2
ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
1/7
Onyx South Downs
215.010.1
EFW Contract
SCOPE
This section defines the materials and workmanship required for the
fabrication and erection of steel crane gantry girders, crane rails and the
fixing of the rails to the girders. The following clauses are in addition to the
requirements of section 211: Structural Steelwork.
RELATED STANDARDS
215.020.0
This section should be read in conjunction with Section 211: Structural

Steelwork.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
215.030.1
Crane Girders and fixings shall be designed in accordance with BS 6399

and BS 466.
215.040.1
Joints in tracks shall be designed to achieve a structural strength of at least

1.25 times the minimum strength of the section required at that point. The
design of any joint shall be subject to the consent of the Purchaser.
MATERIALS
General
215.050.1
Crane rails shall be new and in accordance with BS 105 - Light and Heavy
Bridge Type Railway Rails and shall also comply with the requirements of
BS 11 - Flat Bottom Railway Rails. The type and steel grade of the rails
shall be shown on the drawings. They shall be supplied by a manufacturer,
cold straightened to + 2mm in 1m and shall be free of twist. They shall also
be free from pitting, laminations and other defects.
215.060.1
The rail clips shall be of the type shown on the drawings and shall be
adjustable to overcome the differences in rolling tolerances and the
tolerances required by the crane manufacturer. The rail clips shall be
capable of resisting all applied side loads. The clips shall be used in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
215.70.1.1
A continuous resilient pad shall be used between the rail and the gantry
girder to reduce noise, vibration and load concentrations.
This pad shall be specified on the drawings and installed in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
WORKMANSHIP
2/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Fabrication
215.080.1
Each crane girder shall be clearly marked with an individual identification

number.
215.090.1
The top flanges of the girders shall be as flat as possible. Any cross
camber over the central width of 150mm shall have the convex surface
upwards only and shall not exceed 0.6mm. A concave surface is not
acceptable.
215.100.1
All girders shall be straight, the deviation shall be within L/3000 or 3mm
whichever is the lesser. Both flanges shall be straight and the outstand
from the web shall not deviate by more than 3mm within the length of the
girder.
215.110.1
No connections shall be permitted to the tension flanges.
215.120.1
Intermediate web stiffeners shall be fitted tightly to the top flange. Load
bearing stiffeners shall be fitted tightly to both top and bottom flanges.
215.130.1
Joints in rails shall be scarfed, cut square to the axis of the rail and
smoothly finished. The expansion tolerance allowed shall not compromise
the smooth running of the crane. Profile flame cutting shall not be used.
Site Erection
215.140.1
The maximum tolerance for line and level of the crane gantry girders shall
be + 2mm, with the difference in level between the top flanges of two
adjacent girders not exceeding 1mm.
215.150.1
Crane rails shall be laid to the tolerances stated in BS 466 Appendix F or

better. Where measurements of crane rails are taken using automatic or
laser methods, the calibration of any instrument employed and the precise
method of measurement shall be subject to review and consent by the
Purchaser.
215.160.1
The location of the rail on the girder shall be such that the centreline of the
rail is aligned on a vertical plane with the centreline of the web, within a
tolerance of half the thickness of the girder web.
3/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
215.170.1
NDT tests on weld shall be carried out in accordance with section 211.
between the requirements of these Standards and this Generic Specification
Section.
BS 4 Structural steel sections.
Part 1:
Specification for hot-rolled sections.
BS 11
BS 105
BS 466
BS 499
Part 2:
BS 639
BS 709
BS 729
BS 1192
Part 1:
Part 2:
BS 1449
BS 2451
BS 2569
Part 1:
BS 2583
BS 2853
BS 2901
BS 2989
BS 2994
Specification for railway rails.

Light and heavy bridge type railway rails.
Power driven overhead travelling cranes, semi goliath and goliath
cranes for general use.
Welding terms and symbols.
Specification for symbols for welding.
Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel
electrodes for manual metal-arc welding.
Destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel.
Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel
articles.
Construction drawing practice.
Recommendation for general principles.
Recommendation for architectural and engineering drawings.
Steel plate, sheet and strip.
specification for chilled iron shot and grit.
Specification for sprayed metal coatings.
Protection of iron and steel by aluminium and zinc against
atmospheric corrosion.
Specification for podger spanners.
Specification for the design and testing of steel overhead runway
beams.
Specification for filler rods and wires for gas-shielded arc welding.
Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and iron-zinc alloy
coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and slit wide strip.
Specification for cold rolled steel sections.
4/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 3692
Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, crews and

nuts. Metric units.
BS 3923
Part 1:
BS 4165
Methods for ultrasonic examination of welds.

Methods for manual examination of fusion welds in ferritic steels.
Specification for electrode wires and fluxes for the submerged arc
welding of carbon steel and medium-tensile steel.
Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, crews and nuts.
BS 4190
BS 4320
BS 4360
BS 4395
Part 1:
Part 2:
BS 4570
BS 4604

Metric series.
Specification for weldable structural steels.
Specification for High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts
and washers for structural engineering.
General grade.
Higher grade bolts and nuts and general grade washers.
BS 4848
Part 2:
Part 4:
Specification for fusion welding of steel castings.

Specification for the use of high strength friction grip bolts in
structural steelwork. Metric series.
Specification for hot-rolled structural steel sections.
Hollow sections.
Equal and unequal angles.
BS 4870
Part 1:
Specification for approval testing of welding procedures.

Fusion welding of steel.
BS 4871
Specification for approval testing of welders working to approved

welding procedures.
Part 1:
BS 4872
Part 1:
Specification for approval testing of welders when welding

procedure approval is not required.
BS 4921
BS 4929
Part 1:
Specification for sherardised coatings on iron or steel.

Specification for steel hexagon prevailing-torque type nuts.
Metric sizes.
BS 4933
Specification for ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts
and screws with hexagon nuts.
steels.
BS 5135
5/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 5289
BS 5493
Code of practice. Visual inspection of fusion welded joints.

Code of practice for protective coating for iron and steel structures
against corrosion.
BS 5536
Recommendations for preparation of technical drawings for

microfilming.
Structural use of steelwork in building.
Precast concrete masonry units.
Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow sections.
Loading for buildings.
Method of penetrant flaw detection.
Specification for limits and repair of surface discontinuities of hotrolled steel plates and wide flats.
BS 5950
BS 6072
BS 6363
BS 6399
BS 6443
BS 6512
Swedish Standard 05 59 00.

Health & Safety Executive Guidance Note GS 28.
ASME IX
AWS D1.1
National Structural Steelwork specification for building construction, BCSA Ltd London.
6/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
215.060
Manufacturers instructions.
215.070
215.170
7/7
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP : 230 : MASONRY
SECTION NO: 231
TITLE: BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Bricks and Blocks
Facing Bricks
Pre-cast Concrete Bricks
Pre-cast Concrete Blocks
Special Shapes and Standard Specials
Cement
Lime
Sand
Water
Admixtures
Pigments
Damp Proof Courses
Wall Ties
Reinforcement in Joint
Sills and Copings
Lintels
Flashings and Weathering
Joint Filling Sealants
Cavity Insulation
1/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WORKMANSHIP
General
Storage and Protection of Materials
Storage of Brickwork and Blockwork
Storage of Cement
Storage of Sand
Storage of Lime and Ready Mixed Lime Sand Mixes
Storage of Metals (Wall Ties, Reinforcement, etc.)
Storage of Bituminous Felt
Storage of Thermal Insulation Materials
Protection During Laying
Protection After Laying
Precautions During Cold Weather
Precautions During Wet or Warm Weather
Portland Cement Mortars
Laying Brickwork and Blockwork
Construction Tolerances
Cutting Brickwork and Blockwork
Openings in Brickwork/Blockwork
Bond
Structural Stability
Cavity Walls
Joint Finishing
Damp Proof Courses (DPC)
Movement Joints
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Testing
Inspection
2/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
231. 010
This Section defines the materials and workmanship requirements for

masonry (brickwork and blockwork) and related accessories (damp proof
courses and fixings etc.).
MATERIALS
General
231. 030
Brickwork and blockwork shall be to BS 5628 Part 3.
231. 040
Samples of all bricks, blocks, air bricks, insulation, and of associated

building works such as damp proof courses and other materials, shall be
obtained from manufacturers or suppliers and shall be submitted to the
Purchaser for agreement. The Contractor shall not subsequently change
the manufacturer or supplier of any materials without the agreement of the
Purchaser.
Bricks and Blocks
231. 060
Pre-cast concrete blocks and bricks shall be to BS 6073: Part 1.
231. 070
Aerated concrete blocks shall be to BS 6073: Part 1.
231. 080
Lightweight aggregate concrete blocks shall be to BS 6073: Part 1.
231. 100
Concrete air bricks shall be to BS 493.
231. 110
Clay blocks shall be to BS 3921.
231. 120
Clay bricks shall be to BS 3921.
231. 140
Clay air bricks shall be to BS 493.
231. 150
Calcium silicate bricks shall be to BS 187.
231. 170
Clay brick slips shall not be less than 25mm thick cut from facing bricks.
231. 180
Shapes and dimensions of special bricks shall be to BS 4729.
231. 190
The Contractor shall make sure that he understands clearly the Purchaser's
requirements for bricks and blocks before placing a procurement order. If
clarification is required the Purchaser's ruling shall be sought in writing and
confirmation received, also in writing.
3/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Facing Bricks
231. 200
Facing bricks manufactured from brickearth, clay or shale shall be sound,

well burnt bricks of uniform shape and colour.
Facing bricks with chipped exposed edges shall not be used.
Pre-cast Concrete Bricks
231. 210
Concrete bricks used in conjunction with concrete blockwork for infilling

round jambs, openings or heads of walls shall be of similar composition,
strength and appearance to the blocks and shall be of a size compatible
with the selected block.
Pre-cast Concrete Blocks
231. 220
Pre-cast concrete blocks of the specified class, shall be suitable for fair
faced work. The dimensions and compressive strength of the blocks shall
be indicated on the Drawings.
231. 230
Hollow concrete blocks shall be used at the discretion of the purchaser.
231. 240
Standard sized blocks shall be used, allowing a nominal joint thickness of

10mm to achieve the designated setting out module.
Special Shapes and Standard Specials
231. 250
Special shapes and 'standard specials' to BS 4729 shall be from the

manufacturer's standard range and shall be used for areas of fair faced
work.
Cement
231. 260
Cement for use in mortar shall be Ordinary Portland cement to BS 12

Portland blastfurnace cement to BS 146 unless otherwise specified.
231. 270
Rapid hardening Portland cement when specified shall be to BS 12.
231. 280
Sulphate resisting Portland cement when specified shall be to BS4027.
231. 290
Masonry cement when specified shall be to BS 5224.
231. 300
High alumina cement shall not be used.

Lime
4/26
Onyx South Downs
231. 310
EFW Contract
Lime shall be made from limestone or chalk and shall be either:

-
high calcium lime

semi hydraulic lime
magnesium lime
all in accordance with BS 890.

231. 320
The lime shall be classified as either

-
hydrated lime (powder)

quick lime
and shall be to BS 890 Part 2 and Part 3 respectively.

231. 330
Lime putty shall be to BS 890 Part 4.
231. 340
Ready mixed lime/sand building mortars shall be to BS 4721.

Sand
231. 350
Sand for general purpose mortars shall be to BS 1200, Table 1.
231. 360
Sand for reinforced brickwork mortars shall be to BS 1200, Table 2.
231. 370
Sand which has been in contact with sea water, loam or organic matter
shall not be used unless the Purchaser's permission is given in writing.
It shall conform to BS 1200 and shall not contain any harmful materials
that will adversely affect the hardening, strength, durability or
appearance of the finished work.
Water
231. 380
Water for use in mortar shall be of potable quality and tested in accordance
with BS 3148 if required.
Admixtures
231. 390
Details of admixtures proposed for use shall be submitted to the Purchaser

for agreement.
231. 400
Admixtures shall conform to BS 4887 and shall be used in strict accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions. They shall be delivered in sealed
containers bearing the name of the manufacturer.
5/26
Onyx South Downs
231. 410
EFW Contract
Calcium chloride shall not be used.

Pigments
231. 420
Pigments for colouring mortar shall be to BS 1014. They shall only be used
at the discretion of the purchaser.
231. 430
Pigments shall not exceed 10% by weight of cement. Carbon black, if used,
shall be limited to 2% by weight of the cement.
Damp Proof Courses
231. 440
Damp proof course type, class, description and thickness shall be shown
on the Drawings.
231. 450
Lead damp proof courses shall be to BS 743.
231. 460
Bituminous felt damp proof courses shall be to BS 6398.
231. 470
Mastic asphalt shall be to BS 6925 (limestone aggregate) or BS 6577

(natural rock asphalt aggregate).
231. 480
Impervious bricks shall be to BS 743 and shall not absorb more than 3 per
cent of their weight when tested to BS 743.
231. 490
Chemical damp proof courses shall be to BS 6576.

Wall Ties
231. 500
Metal wall ties for use in cavity brickwork or blockwork shall be stainless
steel to BS 1243.
231. 510
Wall ties for use in cavity walls part filled with insulation shall be of a design
which incorporates polypropylene cavity insulation retaining discs. The
Contractor shall submit details to the Purchaser for agreement.
231. 520
The minimum length of wall ties shall be equal to 100mm plus the width of
the cavity.
231. 530
Frame ties for securing masonry walls to structural supports shall be

stainless steel. They shall be securely fixed into stainless steel anchor
channels fixed to the structural support. Direct contact between stainless
steel and structural steel must be prevented.
6/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
When the channel is fixed to structural steelwork, plastic coated stainless

steel countersunk through bolts shall be used, together with an insulating
coating to the back of the channel, in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Reinforcement in Joints
231. 540
Reinforcement type and size shall be shown on the Drawings.
231. 550
Expanded metal (steel) shall be to BS 405.
231. 560
Steel fabric shall be to BS 4483.
231. 570
Galvanising of expanded metal or steel fabric shall be to BS 729.
231. 580
Steel bar reinforcement shall be Austenitic stainless steel, minimum 18/8

composition and to BS 970: Part 1 or BS 1554 excluding free machining
grades.
Sills and Copings
231. 590
Sills and copings shall be to BS 5642. The materials, type, dimensions,

profile and texture shall be shown on the Drawings.
Lintels
231. 600
Prefabricated pre-cast, prestressed reinforced concrete or galvanised steel

lintels shall be to BS 5977 Part 2. Dimensions, span(s), profile(s) and
loading(s) shall be shown on the Drawings.
231. 610
Steel lintels shall be hot-dip galvanised to BS 729.

Flashings and Weathering
231. 620
The material shall be compatible in colour, type code (for lead), grade,
thickness etc. to the cladding.
231. 630
Lead sheet or strip shall be to BS 1178.
231. 640
Hot rolled sheet or strip copper shall be to BS 2870.
231. 650
Zinc alloy sheet or strip shall be to BS 6561.
231. 660
Aluminium sheet or strip shall be to BS 1470.
7/26
Onyx South Downs
231. 670
EFW Contract
Bituminous felt flashings shall be to BS 747.

Joint Filling Sealants
231. 680
Refer to Generic Section 402.
231. 690
Movement joint filling sealants type and colour shall be stated on the
Drawings and shall be from a manufacturer agreed by the Purchaser.
Cavity Insulation
231. 700
The material type, thickness and method of installation of the insulation

shall be stated on the Drawings and meet the required 'U' values.
231. 710
Insulation shall be accompanied by an Agreement Certificate.
231. 720
Mineral fibre insulation shall be to BS 6676.

WORKMANSHIP
General
231. 730
Workmanship shall be to BS 5628: Part 3.
231. 740
On completion, all putlog and other holes shall be made good using bricks
and mortar of types which ensure that the face matches the surrounding
brickwork. Putlog and other similar holes shall where possible be of full
brick size.
231. 750
Chasing of completed walls or the formation of holes shall be carried out

only when agreed by the Purchaser after the mortar has set hard.
8/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Storage and Protection of Materials

231. 760
All materials, i.e. bricks, blocks, cement, mortar, sand, lime, ready mixed
sand and lime, damp proof courses, bituminous felts, thermal insulation
materials, etc., shall be stored/protected to the agreement of the Purchaser
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and to ensure
that they are protected from rain, frost, snow and splashing from passing
vehicles and accidental damage.
Storage of Brickwork and Blockwork
231. 770
A suitable hard standing shall be prepared for storing bricks and blocks.
They shall not be off loaded by tipping from vehicles, but shall either be off
loaded by hand or in pallets by means of a fork lift truck, crane or similar
lifting device.
They shall not be stacked directly on sulphate bearing ground, clinker or
ashes. They shall not be stacked on newly cast slabs of concrete.
231. 780
All bricks and blocks shall be arranged in orderly stacks and used
approximately in the order in which they are delivered, except in the case of
facing bricks or blocks which shall be intermingled so that any agreed
variation in colour or texture of different consignments does not form
defined areas in the completed work.
231. 790
Stacks of bricks and blocks shall be arranged so that if they become

accidently wetted, they can be dried out prior to use by forced circulation of
air round the stack, and so that in frosty and/or extremely cold weather,
heat can be applied to the materials to ensure that the temperature of the
completed work shall not be lower than 5C.
Stacks of each type and strength of bricks and blocks shall be kept
separate and labelled accordingly. Broken and rejected bricks and blocks
shall be stacked separately and removed from site as soon as possible.
231. 800
Storage of Cement
231. 810
Cement purchased in bulk shall be stored in purpose built containers that

are maintained in good condition all to the agreement of the Purchaser.
231. 820
Bag cement shall be stored off the ground in a well ventilated, weather tight
and damp proof building.
231. 830
The cement shall be stored in such a manner as to permit easy access for
proper inspection and identification of each consignment or type and shall
9/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
be used in the order of receipt.

Any cements stored on Site for more than one month shall be tested to
BS 4550.
Storage of Sand
231. 840
Sand shall be stored on clean surfaces in such a manner as to allow

adequate drainage. It shall be stockpiled in a suitable manner to prevent
contamination by other materials.
Storage of Lime and Ready Mixed Lime Sand Mixes
231. 850
Quick lime shall be delivered to the site as soon after manufacture as

possible and slaking commenced immediately. After slaking is completed,
it should be protected from drying out and remain undisturbed for a period
of at least two weeks prior to use to permit it to fatten up to a lime putty.
231. 860
Hydrated lime shall be stored off the ground in a well ventilated, weather
tight and damp proof building.
231. 870
Ready mixed lime sand mortar shall be stored on a banker board and
protected from rain and frost.
10/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Storage of Metals (Wall Ties, Reinforcement, etc.)

231. 880
Metals shall be protected by being stored off the ground and under cover.
Ferrous and nonferrous materials shall be kept separate and care shall be
taken to prevent direct contact between copper-bearing materials and
aluminium or zinc.
Storage of Bituminous Felt
231. 890
Bituminous Felt shall be stored on a level surface, covered from direct sun
and away from heat, in such a manner as to prevent damage by squashing.
Storage of Thermal Insulation Materials
231. 900
These materials shall be stored under cover and off the ground to prevent
contamination. They shall be protected from wetting at all times.
Protection During Laying
231. 910
All masonry shall be adequately protected against physical damage and

splashing with contaminating substances by the use of boards, covers and
other agreed means. Special care shall be taken to ensure that angles and
sills are adequately protected.
231. 920
Precautions shall be taken against abrasions from scaffolding. Scaffold

boards shall be turned away during periods of heavy rain, and at night, to
avoid splashing.
Protection After Laying
231. 930
Where insitu concrete is cast above or adjacent to completed work the

latter shall be protected from splatter and cement paste.
231. 940
Freshly completed masonry shall be covered with waterproof sheets in

locations where damage may be caused by rain or frost, or quick drying.
231. 950
Door and window frames and also other items built in shall be fully
protected by boards, sheets or other measures.
Precautions During Cold Weather

11/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
231. 960
Precautions to be implemented during cold weather shall be submitted to

the Purchaser for agreement and shall ensure reasonable rates of
hardening of the mortar and that the masonry is not subjected to freezing
action until the mortar has matured sufficiently. Masonry shall be protected
from frost by the use of suitable insulating coverings or by heaters.
Coverings shall be adequately supported.
231. 970
Suitable means shall be provided to warm mortar ingredients, including

water and also bricks, to ensure that the temperature of the mortar in the
brickwork does not fall below 5C.
Mixing water shall not be heated above 60C. In no case shall the
temperature of the combined materials exceed 32C before the cement is
added. Mortars of a higher classification than that specified shall not be
used for the brickwork for the purpose of preventing freezing or accelerating
hardening. The use of additives to the mortar which prevent freezing or
accelerate hardening will not be permitted.
231. 980
Bricks and blocks in a frozen condition shall not be used. Mortar shall not
be laid on frozen surfaces. Frost damaged mortar shall be raked out and
replaced. Damaged brickwork/blockwork shall be taken down and rebuilt as
required by the Purchaser.
231. 990
Rolls of damp proof coursing shall be warmed prior to unrolling to avoid

cracking.
231. 1000
Pointing shall not proceed in frosty weather.

Precautions During Wet or Warm Weather
231. 1010
Masonry shall be protected from the effects of hot sunlight and drying winds
until the mortar has matured.
231. 1020
In dry or warm weather clay bricks and blocks, except engineering bricks,
shall be wetted with water from an agreed source to prevent mortar drying
out prematurely.
231. 1030
During construction, and at the end of each working day, masonry shall be
protected from heavy rain. Wet bricks or blocks shall not be used.
Portland Cement Mortars

231. 1040
Mortar designation shall be by Class number with a minimum of Class (iii)

as defined in BS 5628 pt 1. Any type of mortar of the same Class may be
12/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
selected subject to the agreement of the Purchaser.

231. 1050
Mortar shall have the mix proportions, by volume, stated in the table below:
MORTAR TYPE (PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME)

Class
No.
BS Mortar
Designation
Cement:
sand
Cement: Ready mixed

lime/sand (proportions
of lime and sand as
given in brackets)
Cement:
sand with
plasticizer
Masonry
cement:
sand
M1
(i)
1:3
1:3
(1:12)
M2
(ii)
1:4
(1:9)
1:3-4
M3
(iii)
1:6
(1:6)
1:5-6
1:4-5
231. 1060
Sulphate resisting mortars shall be specified on the Drawings. Sulphate

resisting cement shall be substituted for ordinary cement in the proportions
given in the above table.
231. 1070
Proportions of mixes given in the above table are for dry sand. Allowance
for bulking shall be made when gauging by volume.
231. 1080
Equipment proposed for gauging mix proportions shall be submitted to the

Purchaser for agreement.
231. 1090
Mixing shall be carried out by machine in accordance with BS 5628 Part 3

unless a small quantity only is required. Mixing shall continue until the
mortar is of uniform consistency and colour.
231. 1100
Where an admixture is agreed for use it shall be added in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations.
231. 1110
The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed mixing sequences for
each mortar type to the Purchaser for agreement, i.e. cement/sand or
cement/premixed lime and sand.
231. 1120
Mortar shall not be used more than 2 hours after it has been mixed, unless
retardants have been added. Unused mortar shall be discarded.
Laying Brickwork and Blockwork
13/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
231. 1130
Kiln fresh bricks shall not be used.
231. 1140
If facing bricks are delivered in loads with a noticeable variation in colour

they shall not be used in rotation as delivered. Bricks from different loads
shall be intermingled to ensure that any differences in colour do not form
defined areas in the completed brickwork.
231. 1150
Brickwork and blockwork shall be built in a uniform manner and corners and
other advanced courses, shall not be raised above the general level by
more than 1.2m. Corners shall be raised first and these shall be laid to a
gauge rod and be racked back to the main wall.
231. 1160
Horizontal and vertical joints shall have a uniform thickness, nominally

10mm.
231. 1170
Bricks and blocks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar and single-frogged
bricks shall be laid with the frogs uppermost. If bricks with double frogs are
used then they shall be laid with the deeper frog uppermost and the bed
joints shall have sufficient mortar to ensure that the frogs on the underside
of the bricks are completely filled with mortar. Voids in hollow blocks shall
not be filled with mortar.
231. 1180
All bricks and blocks shall be well buttered with mortar to form the vertical
joints before being laid and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed up after
each course has been laid. Particular care shall be taken when laying
blocks to ensure that deep vertical joints are completely filled with mortar.
After laying, the faces shall be cleaned of excess mortar.
231. 1190
Brickwork built with Standard Format bricks shall rise four courses in
300mm.
231. 1200
Blockwork shall rise four courses in 900mm.
231. 1210
The maximum height of brickwork/blockwork that shall be built in a day is

1.5m.
231. 1220
Work below ground or below DPC level shall be built of Class E engineering
bricks laid in sulphate resisting mortar, unless otherwise specified.
231. 1230
External faced brickwork shall commence two courses below the finished
ground level.
231. 1240
Edge cover to joint reinforcement shall be as the table below:
14/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
EXPOSURE CONDITION OF
THE MASONRY
BRICKWORK OR
BLOCKWORK
TYPE OF STEEL
REINFORCEMENT
Unprotected
Galvanised to BS729
REINFORCEMENT IN
MORTAR JOINTS
BETWEEN BRICKS OR
BLOCKS - COVER TO
OUTER FACE OF
BRICKWORK OR
BLOCKWORK
Not to be used
Austenitic stainless
Sheltered from severe rain
and against freezing whilst
saturated with water. Buried
masonry and masonry
continuously submerged in
fresh water
Galvanised to BS729
and Austenitic stainless
Completely protected against

weather or aggressive
conditions
Galvanised to BS729
and Austenitic stainless
25mm
25mm
25mm
Construction Tolerances
231. 1250
The following tolerances and deviations shall not be exceeded:

a.
b.
plan position: 10mm

length (except where defined up to 5m
by adjacent construction):
5m-10m
10m-20m
over 20m
c.
15mm
20mm
25mm
30mm
height: up to 3m
15mm
3m-6m
20mm
over 6m
25mm
15/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
d.
level of bed joints:

up to 5m
5m-10m
e.
10mm
15mm
verticality:
in any 3m
overall in
walls higher
than 6m
10mm
20mm
f.
thickness of walls or width of piers: 15mm provided not

more than 10mm at any two points 3m apart.
g.
openings up to 3m wide: 6mm on structural dimensions.
h.
openings over 3m wide: 10mm on structural dimensions.
Cutting Brickwork and Blockwork

231. 1260
Fair faced blockwork shall be cut to size wet with a mechanical masonry
saw, hosed and dried before use unless otherwise agreed with the
Purchaser. Bolstering shall not generally be permitted.
Where lintel bearings over penetrations do not coincide vertically and/or
horizontally with incidental blockwork courses the residual volume may
be filled with horizontally laid concrete brick matching the colour and
texture of the block.
231. 1270
High strength bricks shall be cut with a masonry disc or saw.
231. 1280
Where the underside height of a slab or beam does not coincide with the
top of a blockwork course (i.e. a multiple of 225mm) the residual space may
be filled with concrete brickwork to a nominal depth of 75mm, 112mm or
187mm. Where impractical the blockwork shall be cut to size wet, with a
mechanical masonry saw.
231. 1290
Rises and quoins shall be racked back, and toothing shall only be used
when appropriate.
Openings in Brickwork/Blockwork
16/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
231. 1300
Joint reinforcement of expanded metal 50mm narrower than the width of the
wall must be provided at all positions above and below wall openings in
blockwork, extending for a minimum of 600mm either side of the opening to
the first and second courses above and below the opening. Corresponding
reinforcement must be provided in the brickwork of cavity walls.
231. 1310
Door and window frames which are built in as the work proceeds shall be
supported and braced to prevent misalignment and distortion of the frames.
231. 1320
All lintels shall be set level bearing on a full brick/block at each end. The
lengths of bearing of the lintels shall be as specified in BS 5628 Part 3.
231. 1330
Pre-cast reinforced concrete lintels shall be built in with their correct side
uppermost relative to the reinforcement.
231. 1340
Prestressed reinforced concrete lintels spanning 2m or over shall be

propped at centres not exceeding 1m until the superimposed masonry
construction has aged at least seven days.
231. 1350
Steel lintels with drip nosings shall be positioned to ensure that they are
clear of main head frames.
Bond
231. 1360
Brickwork one or more bricks thick shall be built in English bond unless
specified otherwise. Half brick walls, including half brick leaves of cavity
walls, shall be in stretcher bond.
231. 1370
Where a fair face is required on both sides of a wall one brick thick, each
face shall be in stretcher bond with full width expanded metal placed in
alternate courses to tie the leaves together.
231. 1380
Bricks shall be laid throughout the work with cross joints in any course not
less than a quarter of a brick from those in the course below. Half bricks
and bats shall not be used except where necessary to maintain the
specified bond.
231. 1390
Where dimensions do not permit normal bonding the Purchaser shall be

consulted before laying is commenced.
231. 1400
New brickwork/blockwork shall be bonded to existing work in blocks not

more than 300mm high.
231. 1410
Angles and intersections in walls shall be fully bonded or tied as instructed

by the Purchaser.
17/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Structural Stability
231. 1415
The Contractor shall ensure that brickwork and blockwork is stable and safe
at all stages of construction.
Cavity Walls
231. 1420
During construction, one leaf of the cavity wall shall not rise more than
450mm in advance of the other.
231. 1430
Cavity wall ties shall be laid sloping downwards towards the exterior and
staggered alternate courses to the following spacings:
(a)
Both leaves 90mm thick or more
Cavity width
Horizontally
Vertically
50-75 mm
75-100 mm
100-150 mm
900 mm
750 mm
450 mm
450 mm
450 mm
450 mm
(b)
Either leaf is 75mm thick or less
Cavity width
Horizontally
Vertically
50-75 mm
450 mm
450 mm
(c)
When the cavity is to receive board or slab insulation the

bottom row of cavity ties above the DPC shall have a
maximum spacing of 600mm
231. 1440
Where a vertical damp proof course prevents bonding of the two leaves at
the reveals to openings or similar locations, a vertical line of additional wall
ties shall be used at a maximum spacing of 300mm and within 225mm
horizontally of the openings.
231. 1450
Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar droppings and other rubbish by means
of lifting screeds. Mortar droppings shall be cleaned from the ties and the
inside mortar joints flushed up as the work proceeds.
231. 1460
Openings shall be left at the base of walls and other locations where mortar
and rubbish can collect in the cavity. Rubbish and mortar droppings shall be
cleaned from the cavities daily and removed through the openings in the
wall. After a wall has been completed the opening shall be closed with
18/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
bricks and mortar to match the surrounding wall.

231. 1470
Cavities below ground level shall be in-filled by a method agreed by the

Purchaser, to a level of 150mm below the damp proof course.
231. 1480
Weepholes shall be formed in the outer leaf of a cavity by leaving open

vertical joints at 900mm centres at the base of cavities and where the cavity
is bridged horizontally.
The cavity in-fill shall slope towards the weepholes and towards the outer
leaf.
231. 1490
Where a structural steel or concrete member with a width of at least 450mm

interrupts the inner skin of a cavity wall the outer skin shall have one layer
of expanded metal or agreed equal reinforcement to every fourth course
carried beyond the steel or concrete member for a distance of 900mm in
each direction.
231. 1500
Cavity insulation boards and slabs are to be installed in accordance with

the manufacturers recommendations, clipped against the internal leaf with
close butt joints. The cavity face of the inner leaf is to be clean of all mortar
droppings before insulation is installed. The retained cavity space is to be
kept free of mortar droppings and other debris. All slabs and cut slabs shall
be retained by at least two clips.
Joint Finishing
231. 1510
The faces of fair faced brickwork shall be pointed with neat weatherstruck
joints as the work proceeds, unless otherwise specified. The mortar joints
to external fair faced brickwork shall, if the brickwork is to be pointed in the
bedding mortar, be worked to the required profile whilst the mortar is still
green.
231. 1520
Special pointing shall be carried out using purpose made pointing tools.
231. 1530
The joints of brickwork and blockwork finished to receive plaster or

rendering shall be raked out not less than 12mm and not exceeding 18mm
deep as the work proceeds.
231. 1540
Gaps in brickwork movement joints shall be left free from debris and shall
be filled with an agreed flexible jointing material to within 20mm of face, and
externally the remaining gap will be primed and sealed using a two part
polysulphide sealant in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. Colour to match brickwork.
19/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Hemp, fibreboard, cork and similar materials shall not be used as the filler
material.
231. 1550
Control joints shall have a minimum width of 10mm filled with mortar to
within 20mm of the block face and pointed with an agreed two part
polysulphide sealant.
Damp Proof Courses (DPC)
231. 1570
Damp proof courses shall be laid in accordance with the workmanship

recommendations given in BS 5628 Part 3.
231. 1580
The DPC shall form a watertight joint with any adjacent waterproof
membranes.
231. 1590
Brickwork and blockwork shall be built up flush with mortar to an even bed.
The DPC shall be laid on the mortar in continuous strips, flush with the
outer surface of the bricks or projecting from the wall, with 150mm laps in
length and full laps at angles. The joint shall then be completed to normal
thickness with mortar.
231. 1600
Proprietary shaped DPC's shall be used at junctions and corners in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Stepped DPC's
shall be used where the external ground is sloping.
231. 1610
In cavity walls, separate DPC's shall be provided for each leaf and the
edges shall not project into the cavity.
231. 1620
The DPC's used with cavity wall bridges, such as door and window opening
lintels, ducts, etc., shall be unjointed wherever possible, but where joints
cannot be avoided, lapped at least 150mm and sealed with an agreed
jointing compound. They shall be fixed tightly across the cavity, stepped up
towards the inner leaf and supported to prevent sagging. They shall extend
at least 150mm beyond the end of the bridge.
231. 1630
Vertical jambs in cavity walls shall have the DPC in close contact with the
frame. The DPC shall be fully lapped under the DPC at head and over the
DPC at sill and shall extend at least 25mm into cavity.
231. 1640
In parapets a full width DPC shall be placed immediately below the coping.
An additional DPC shall be placed above the roof level and stepped down
across the cavity towards the inner leaf.
20/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Movement Joints
231.1650
Movement joints, both horizontal and vertical, shall be provided in

accordance with BS5628 part 3 and the block/brick manufacturer's
recommendations.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
231. 1660
Two copies of Certificates verifying that the materials comply with the
Specification, and containing the test results of the tests specified in the
relevant British Standards, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Purchaser at the intervals specified below.
231. 1670
Cement
each consignment within four days of delivery.
Water
(from any source other than a statutory undertaking)

- at commencement of work and then monthly.
Sand
each 10m3 or weekly, whichever is the more

frequent, or whenever the supply pit or area of the
pit is changed.
Lime
each consignment within four days of delivery.
Bricks and Blocks

Other Materials
231. 1680
-each consignment within four days of delivery.
as specified by the Purchaser.
Where manufacturer's documentation is not available, the Contractor shall

carry out tests at a frequency not less than that stated in the appropriate BS
to ensure that materials comply with this Specification.
Testing
231. 1690
Building sealants shall be tested in accordance with 402.
231. 1700
Mortar mixes shall be tested at least six weeks prior to use on Site in
231. 1710
The laboratory control test shall comprise:
21/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
preparation of specimen mixes with a consistency which allows a

dropping ball to penetrate 10mm.
Cast a set of six sample specimens. The size shall be 100mm

cubes or as agreed with the Purchaser. Store the cubes in
Core test three cubes at 7 days and three cubes at 28 days for
compressive strength.
Submit results to the Purchaser.
231. 1720
Site control tests shall be carried out after commencing the masonry work
at intervals agreed with the Purchaser. The specimens shall be of the
same size and stored as for the laboratory control test.
231. 1730
A set of six mortar specimens shall be prepared for each class of mortar, for
every 150m2 of wall or for every storey of a building.
231. 1740
Three specimens shall be core tested after 7 days to BS 4551. If the 7 day
strength falls below that specified the Contractor may elect to continue to
work at his own risk.
If the 28 day strengths of the remaining three specimens also fail to achieve
the specified strengths then the Contractor shall take down and rebuild the
work affected.
231. 1750
The Contractor shall submit all results to the Purchaser.
22/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Inspection
231. 1760
Details of equipment proposed for weigh batching cement, lime and sand
shall be submitted to the Purchaser for agreement. The accuracy of the
equipment shall be checked at intervals in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, and it shall not be used if it has an error
of +2.5 per cent or more. Each material shall be weighed individually.
231. 1770
The Contractor shall build sample panels of faced brickwork and blockwork,
2m long by 1m high. These panels shall be built using bricks or blocks and
mortar to the bond and pointed in the manner as specified for the wall for
which the panel is representative and submitted to the Purchaser for
agreement. They shall form the standard for all subsequent work and shall
be protected against damage. They shall be removed on completion of the
Works.
231. 1780
The Contractor shall perform inspection of brick and blockwork to ensure

that the work conforms with the requirements of this Specification. A
certificate of conformance shall be provided for work in each room or area.
231. 1790
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser for agreement an inspection

procedure for blockwork. The procedure shall address the requirements for
'special category' construction as described in BS 5628, Part 1.
231. 1800
All structural blockwork in buildings shall be inspected in accordance with

the agreed procedure. Inspection shall be performed continuously during
blockwork construction. Inspections shall be documented and submitted to
the Purchaser.
231. 1810
The Purchaser shall be notified when construction of block or brickwork is

started.
23/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
between the requirements of these Standards and this Generic Specification
Section.
BS 12
BS 146
BS 187
BS 405
BS 493
BS 680
BS 729
BS 743
BS 747
BS 890
BS 970
BS 1014
BS 1178
BS 1181
BS 1200
BS 1243
BS 1289
BS 1470
BS 1554
BS 2870
BS 3148
BS 3921
BS 4027
BS 4483
BS 4550
BS 4721
BS 4729
Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement.

Specification for Portland-blastfurnace cement.
Specification for calcium silicate (sandline and flintline) bricks.
Specification for uncoated expanded metal carbon steel sheets for
general purposes.
Specification for air bricks and gratings for wall ventilation.
Specification for roofing slates.
Specification for hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel
articles.
Specification for materials for damp proof courses.
Specification for roofing felts.
Specification for building limes.
Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and allied
engineering purposes.
products.
Specification for milled lead sheet for building purposes.
Specification for clay flue linings and flue terminals.
Building sands from natural sources, for mortar for plain and
reinforced brickwork, brickwalling and masonry.
Wall ties for cavity wall construction.
Flue blocks and masonry terminals for gas appliances.
Specification for wrought aluminium alloys for general engineering
purposes: plate, sheet and strip.
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 485 Parts 1-4, BS EN 515: 1993
and BS EN 573 Parts 1-4.
Specification for stainless and heat resisting steel round wire.
Specification for rolled copper and copper alloys: sheet, strip and
foil.
Methods of test for water for making concrete.
Clay bricks and blocks.
Specification for sulphate-resisting Portland cement.
Specification for steel fabric for reinforcement of concrete.
Specification for ready-mixed building mortars.
Shapes and dimensions of special bricks.
24/26
Onyx South Downs
BS 4887
BS 5224
BS 5628
BS 5628
BS 5642
BS 5977
BS 6073
BS 6398
BS 6561
BS 6577
BS 6676
BS 6925
EFW Contract
Mortar admixtures.
Specification for masonry cement.
Part 1: Unreinforced masonry.
Part 3: Materials for components, design and workmanship
Sills and copings.
Lintels.
Part 1 and Part 2: Pre-cast concrete masonry
Specification for bitumen damp proof courses for masonry.
Specification for zinc alloy sheet and strip for building.
Specification for mastic asphalt for building (natural rock asphalt
aggregate).
Code of practice for installation of batts (slates) filling the cavity.
Specification for mastic asphalt for building and civil engineering
(limestone aggregate).
25/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
231.040
Submission of samples.
231.190
Clarification for procurement.
231.390
Proposals for admixtures.
231.510
Details of cavity insulation discs.
231.960
Precautions against inclement

weather.
231.1080
Gauging mix equipment.
231.1110
Proposed mortar mixing

sequence.
COMMENT
231.1660
231.1710
Laboratory control test results.
231.1750
Site control test.
231.1790
Inspection procedure for
blockwork.
231.1800
Inspection documents.
26/26
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 240 : CLADDING & FACADES
SECTION NO: 241
TITLE: CLADDING & FACADES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Cladding sheets
Sheet Metal Accessories
Lining Sheets for Insulated Cladding
Filler Blocks
Sealants
Insulating Tape
Insulaton
Fixings
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
Design General
Design Life
Detailed Design and Drawings
Wind Loading
Deflection
Tolerances
Weatherproofing
Colour
Surface Finish
Climatic Variations
Thermal Transmission
Vapour Transmission
Penetrations
1/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WORKMANSHIP
Packaging, Handling, Storage and Protection
Installation Works
QUALITY CONTROL
Cladding Tests
Fastener Tests
Leak Tests
2/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
241. 010
This Section defines the requirements for the insulated and non-insulated
cladding & facades including all necessary matching accessories, fixings,
internal linings, fire stops, gutters and other items required to provide a
complete durable and weathertight installation.
MATERIALS
General
241. 030
All materials specified shall comply with the relevant British Standards listed
in Appendix 1. Recommendations of approved manufacturers of proprietary
cladding and facade systems, relating to design, materials and
workmanship, shall be adhered to in conjunction with the contents of this
section 241. Where differences occur, the higher standard will be adopted.
241. 040
All materials shall be resistant to fungal attack, infestation, vermin and other
forms of biological attack. All materials shall be free of asbestos and other
substances carrying a health risk.
241.045
Samples of a range of typical flashings and junctions shall be submitted

with the contractors design submissions for agreement by the Purchaser.
241.048
A completed section of cladding & facades including typical flashings,

eaves, cills, closures etc shall be presented for inspection on each building
one month before substantial completion.
Cladding Sheets
241. 050
The type of material, the profile and the finish of cladding sheets shall be
shown on the Drawings.
The minimum material thickness of metal cladding shall be 1.2mm unless
otherwise agreed by the Purchaser.
Sheet Metal Accessories
241. 060
Sheet metal accessories shall be formed from the same material as the
cladding sheets and shall be colour matched, The material thickness shall
be appropriate to the particular application, but shall not be less than
0.9mm for aluminium sheets.
Lining Sheets for Insulated Cladding
3/13
Onyx South Downs
241. 070
EFW Contract
The type of material, the profile and the finish of internal lining sheets shall
be shown on the Drawings. The minimum material thickness shall be
0.7mm for aluminium sheets and 0.55mm for steel sheets.
Filler Blocks
241. 080
Filler Blocks shall be manufactured from EPDM and shall be of closed cell
construction to ensure a weathertight seal.
Sealants
241. 090
Lap sealants shall be EPDM or elastomeric compound tape type sealants.

The sealants shall be soft enough not to interfere with the fit of the sheets
and resilient enough to accommodate any variations in fit and thermal
movements that may occur. Sealants shall not harden with age and shall
be compatible with filler block materials.
Insulating Tape
241. 100
Tape for insulating dissimilar metals shall be self adhesive PVC. The
thickness shall not be less than 0.25mm.
Insulation
241. 110
Insulation material shall be mineral wool of 60kg/m3 density unless

otherwise specified.
Fixings
241. 120
Primary fixings shall be grade 316 stainless steel self tapping screws with
stainless steel/EPDM sealing washers. The particular type of fastener for a
given application shall be selected in accordance with the fastener
manufacturers recommendations, noting that hot rolled and cold formed
steel substrates require different fastener designs.
241. 130
Secondary fixings shall be blind rivets with integral load spreading washers
and EPDM sealing washers.
241. 140
All fixings shall have integral or snap-on caps colour matched to the
cladding sheets being fixed.
241.145
All fixings shall be agreed by the manufacturer of the cladding.
4/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Design General
241. 150
Designs shall comply with the relevant British Standards listed in Appendix
1. Particular reference shall be made to BS 5427.
241.155
The Contractor's design submissions shall comply in every respect with the
Design Requirements section of this Specification.
Design Life
241. 160
The cladding system shall satisfy the following requirements:i)
A performance life of 30 years minimum.
ii)
A decorative life of 15 years minimum.
iii)
A minimum period to first maintenance of 20 years.
iv)
A 5 yearly cycle of inspections with maintenance generally

limited to repair of accidental damage.
In satisfying the above requirements, the design shall take full account of
the environmental conditions at the site.
241. 170
The term "performance life" is defined as the period over which the cladding
system will perform effectively as cladding or roofing with a minimum of
maintenance. There shall be no loss of integrity of the metal substrate or
coatings over the 30 year period.
241. 180
The term "decorative life" is defined as the period over which the cladding
system will maintain its aesthetic appearance, with maintenance limited to
no more than a wash down at the end of the 15 year period.
241. 190
The term "first maintenance" is defined as the time at which repairs are
required to small areas of the coating, (not exceeding 5 per cent of the total
area), to maintain protection to the metal substrate.
241. 200
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the cladding system,
which shall meet the requirements for design life listed above.
241. 210
The Contractor shall verify that the cladding materials, profiles and finishes
will satisfy the performance requirements of the Specification. Should the
Contractor wish to propose alternative materials then these shall be notified
at the time of tender.
5/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
241. 220
The Drawings may show indicative details for cladding junctions (ridge,
eaves, corners etc.). In such cases the Contractor shall be responsible for
developing the working details, but shall not vary the intended architectural
treatment without the agreement of the Purchaser.
241.225
The Contractor shall provide extensive and comprehensive details of all

cladding junctions, flashings and closures with the details to be submitted in
accordance with Clause 241.155 of this specification.
241. 240
The Contractor shall prepare all necessary detailed design, general

arrangement and detailed drawings to enable fabrication and erection of the
cladding to be carried out.
241. 250
The drawings shall show details and sizes for all accessories and shall
specify the type and location of all fasteners. The length and width of
cladding sheets shall be shown together with full details of laps, ridges,
eaves, gutters, closures etc.
241. 260
The arrangement of cladding sheets shall minimise the need for laps.
Where required, laps and their fixings shall be continuous and shall
coincide with the edges of large openings for doors, windows and other
major features. Flashings shall be secretly fixed wherever possible.
Minimum laps for cladding sheets shall be as follows.
241. 270
Side Cladding 100 mm

Roof Cladding 225 mm
Larger laps may be required for exposed sites and for low pitched roofs.
241. 280
The Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings to the

Purchaser for agreement. The calculations shall include stress and
deflection checks for the cladding sheets and designs for all fasteners.
Wind Loading
241. 290
The cladding system shall be designed to withstand the wind loadings

derived from the appropriate British Standards and Codes of Practice.
6/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Deflection
241. 300
The cladding system shall be capable of resisting sporadic pressure from

wind gusts without fracture or permanent deformation. The deflection shall
not exceed the following:Due to wind load
Span/150
Due to imposed load
Span/250
The cladding system shall be designed to resist the effects of drifting snow
in accordance with BS 6399 Part 3.
Tolerances
241. 310
The out of tolerance of the cladding sheets and accessories shall not
exceed 1/250 of the distance between fixings or width of flat surface.
Weatherproofing
241. 320
The cladding system shall be designed to be completely waterproof and

shall be air-tight to the extent that gaps between components shall be
closed with filler blocks or seals. Side laps shall be arranged to face away
from the direction of prevailing winds.
Colour
241. 330
The following requirements shall apply for the decorative life of the cladding
system:i)
Differences in colour of adjacent panels or accessories

visible to the naked eye shall not occur.
ii)
The colour change and loss of gloss of the individual panels

and accessories shall be minimal and the panels shall not
be subject to severe chalking.
Surface Finish
241. 335
The cladding coating is to have a smooth, flat finish to minimise retention of

dust, dirt etc on the surface.
7/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Climatic Variations
241. 340
The cladding system shall be designed and detailed to take account of

variations in dimensions and shape due to changes in temperature and
humidity without deterioration in performance. Coatings shall not suffer
mechanical or chemical breakdown under extremes of temperature and
humidity.
241. 350
Unless otherwise specified insulated cladding shall have a sufficiently low

thermal transmittance to ensure that an overall maximum U value of
0.45W/m2 deg C is achieved. Cold bridges, pattern staining, inside surface
condensation and interstitial condensation shall be prevented in the design.
Vapour Transmission
241. 360
Insulated cladding shall have liner panel side and end laps sealed to
prevent the transmission of moisture and water vapour.
241. 370
Penetrations
Penetrations through cladding shall be sealed with purpose-designed
flashings, soakers and seals.
WORKMANSHIP
241. 380
The Contractor shall comply with the manufacturers recommendations for

packaging, handling, storage and protection of materials. Cladding sheets,
linings and accessories shall be supplied in marked, fully enclosed cases
with paper interleaves between sheets.
Prior to erection, all materials shall be stored in their packages, off the
ground and under cover.
241. 390
All materials shall be protected against mechanical or other damage and

contamination by dirt, oil or other contaminating matter. During erection
and until handover measures shall be taken to avoid damage or soiling of
materials. In particular, scaffolding shall be independent of the cladding
with plastic buffers at the ends of the poles adjacent to complete cladding.
During handling operations nylon slings or ropes shall be used. The use of
8/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
clamps shall not be permitted.

241. 400
Damaged components shall not be used or repaired. Touching up with paint

will not be permitted.
Installation Works
241. 410
Prior to commencing installation, the Contractor shall inspect the framing to

which the cladding is to be fixed to ensure that it has been erected correctly
and within the tolerances specified. Any defects shall be corrected prior to
the commencement of installation of cladding in the affected area.
241. 430
The installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the shop
drawings and in accordance with a method statement to be provided by the
Contractor for review by the Purchaser prior to commencement of the work.
241. 440
Where possible, sheeting of complete elevations shall be carried out as a

single operation, all sheets being fixed continuously from one end, to
ensure tight fitting at end and site laps. Cladding sheets shall be fixed and
lined accurately. In particular, fixings shall be arranged in accurate lines to
give a neat visual impact.
241. 450
Holes for fasteners shall be drilled to the size recommended by the fastener
manufacturer. The use of punches for forming holes will not be permitted.
241. 460
PVC tapes used in conjunction with aluminium cladding sheets shall have
75mm minimum end laps, 25mm minimum side laps and shall project
beyond the edges of the face to be covered by at least 13mm.
241. 470
All extraneous material, such as drilling swarf, metal off-cuts, insulation,

paper, sealants etc, shall be removed as the work progresses. All dirt and
grease shall be removed from the surfaces of the cladding prior to handover.
9/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
Cladding Tests
241. 480
Where tests are to be carried out to prove the design of the cladding
system, the Contractor shall provide evidence of the tests for review by the
Purchaser.
241. 490
The Contractor shall prepare a sample panel of the complete cladding

system, including the sheeting rails and purlins, in order to prove the design
and to provide a comparator which the finished permanent works shall
match.
Fastener Tests
241. 500
The Contractor shall provide evidence of the strength of the proposed

fasteners. Particular attention shall be paid to the "fixing pull-through"
mode of failure on thinner gauge materials. A minimum of six test results
shall be provided for each application.
Leak Tests
241. 510
Prior to handover the Contractor shall carry out a leak test to verify the
watertightness of the building. The test shall use a high pressure hose
simulating the conditions of a rain storm intensity of once in 20 years.
Details of the proposed testing shall be submitted to the Purchaser for
agreement.
10/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 729
BS 1091
BS 1449
BS 1470
BS 1494
Part 1:
BS 2989
BS 4174
BS 4255
Part 1:
BS 4800
BS 4868
BS 4904
BS 5427
BS 6213
BS 6367
BS 6399
Part 1:
Part 3:
Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and

steel articles
Specification for pressed steel gutters, rainwater pipes, fittings and
accessories.
Steel plate, sheet and strip
Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for
general engineering purposes: plate sheet and strip.
Specification for fixing accessories for building purposes.
Fixings for sheet, roof and wall coverings.
coated steel: wide strip sheet/plate and slit wide strip.
Specification for self tapping screws and metallic drive screws.
Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from
buildings
Specification for non-cellular gaskets.
Specification for paint colours for building purposes
Specification for profiled aluminium sheet for building.
Specification for external cladding colours for building purposes.
Code of practice for performance and loading criteria for profiled
sheeting in buildings.
Guide to selection of constructional sealants.
Code of practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas
Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads
Code of Practice for imposed roof loads.
11/13
Onyx South Downs
CP 3
Chapter
Part 2:
EFW Contract
Code of basic data for the design of buildings.

V Loading
Wind Loads
CP 118
The structural use of aluminium
CP 143
Code of practice for sheet roof and wall coverings
CP 153
Windows and Rooflights
BS EN ISO 11963
Polycarbonate sheets. Types, dimensions and characteristics
BS 5516
Code of practice for design and installation of sloping and
vertical patent glazing
12/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
241.225
Details of cladding junctions,

flashings and closures.
241.230
Additional framing and trimming

steelwork.
241.280
Calculations and shop Drawings.
241.410
Notification of inspection prior to

installation.
241.430
Method statement.
241.480
Cladding test results.
241.500
Fastener test results.
241.510
Leak test details and notification.
13/13
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 250 : ROOFS
SECTION NO: 251
TITLE: PVC SHEET ROOF COVERINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
Timber
Warm Deck Insulation
Ancillary Products and Accessories
WORKMANSHIP
General
Inclement Weather
Fixing of Timber
Vapour Control Layer on Continuous Base
Attachments of Warm Deck Insulation
Suitability of Base
Movements Joints
Laying PVC Sheet
Partial Bonding
Skirtings and Upstands
Edge Trims to Canopies
Completion
1/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
251. 010
This Section defines the requirements for built-up PVC sheet roof coverings.
MATERIALS
Timber
251. 030
Timber for trims etc used in roofing shall be planed and shall be free from
wane, pitch products decay and insect attack. Maximum moisture content at
time of covering shall not exceed 22%. It shall be preserved in accordance
with British Wood Preparing Association Commodity Specification C8.
Warm Deck Insulation
251. 040
Warm deck insulation shall be polystyrene board to BS 3837 : Part 1 with foil
face.
Ancillary Products and Accessories
251. 050
Ancillary products and accessories that are not specified shall be types
recommended for the purpose by the PVC sheet manufacturer agreed by
the Purchaser.
WORKMANSHIP
General
251. 070
The full roof covering shall be laid in a single operation to provide a secure,
free draining and completely weathertight roof.
The Contractor shall form details with adequate overlapping, staggering of
laps and full bonding of successive layers so that they are waterproof.
Strips of PVC sheet required for "linear" details shall be cut from the length
of the roll rather than the width.
2/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Inclement Weather
251. 080
Rolls of PVC sheet shall be stored indoors in reasonably warm conditions

until immediately before use.
Temporary covers and drainage shall be provided as required to keep
unfinished areas of the roof dry.
Daywork joints in warm deck roofs shall be protected as required to keep
unfinished areas of the roof dry.
Work shall be suspended in severe or continuously wet weather unless an
effective temporary roof is provided over the working area.
If unavoidable wetting of the construction does occur the Contractor shall
take prompt action to minimise and make good any damage.
Fixing of Timber
251. 090
Timber for trims etc. shall be fixed with sheradized steel screws at not more
than 600mm centres.
Vapour Control Layers in Continuous Boards
251. 100
Sheets shall be laid with fully bonded 50mm side and 75mm end laps.
Joints in second layer (if any) shall be staggered by half a sheet. Adequate
free edge shall be left for sealing perimeter of insulation.
Penetrations shall be fully sealed using bonding or taping methods
recommended by the manufacturer.
Attachment of Warm Deck Insulation
251. 110
Boards shall be laid with long edges running at 45 degrees to structure,

tightly butted together with staggered end joints and in a full bed of bonding
compound. On completion of laying the Contractor shall ensure that boards
are in good condition, well fitting and with no springing, flexing or rocking
and that the waterproof covering is sealed to the free edge of the vapour
control layer to form a complete envelope around the insulation.
Suitability of Base
3/6
Onyx South Downs
251.120
EFW Contract
Before laying PVC sheet the Contractor shall ensure that:

-
The base is to even falls with no areas which will pond.

Surfaces to be covered are firmly fixed, clean, dry, smooth, free from
frost, contaminants, voids and protrusions.
All preliminary work including formation of upstands, kerbs, box
gutters, sumps, grooves, chases, expansion joints, etc. and fixing of
battens, fillets, anchoring plugs/strips, flashings, copings, roof
outlets, pipesleeves, ventilators, etc. is complete and satisfactory.
Movement Joints
251.130
Movement joints shall consist of steel plate fixed to insulation board on one
side only and covered with polyester fleece.
The PVC sheet shall be carried straight over the sheet.
Laying PVC Sheet
251.140
The Contractor shall start at the lowest point of roof and unroll PVC sheet up
the slope with not less than 50mm side and 75mm end laps, ensuring that
water will drain over and not into laps.
-
Between layers, side laps shall be staggered by one half sheet width
in two layer coverings and one third sheet width in three layer
coverings. Successive layers shall be applied with minimum delay,
ensuring that moisture is not trapped. Liquid PVC shall be applied to
all exposed edges of membrane.
Partial Building
251.150
The Contractor shall loose lay the specified first layer to roof surfaces, but
do not carry up angle fillets and vertical surfaces or through details.
Skirtings and Upstands

251.170
The Contractor shall:
4/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Form upstands at ends of rolls by carrying felt up without using

separate strip. Elsewhere use matching strips of felt, maintaining the
specified laps.
Carry layer of PVC Sheet to full height of upstand, fully bonding each
layer. Where practicable carry top layer of felt over top of upstand.
Secure PVC Sheet to upstand by solvent welding.
Edge Trims to Canopies

251.180
Polyester Fleece Underlayer(s) shall be laid under upstand and free edge
shall be left projecting 25mm from wall or fascia.
The rim shall be secured by solvent welding.
The Contractor shall fit jointing sleeves fixed one side only and leave 3mm
gaps between ends of trip.
Purpose made corner pieces shall be used.
Completion
251.190
The Contractor shall ensure that:

-
Roof areas are left clean with all outlets clear.

All work by others necessary to provide a weathertight finish is
satisfactorily completed.
Finished roof areas are adequately protected from damage by
subsequent building operations.
Defects are repaired without delay to minimise damage and
nuisance.
5/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
between the requirements of the Standards and this Specification.
BS 3837 : Part 1
Specification for boards manufactured from expandable

beads.
British Wood Preparing Association Commodity Specification C8.
6/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 260 : WOODWORK
SECTION NO: 261
TITLE: CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
DESIGN
MATERIALS
General
Structural Softwood
Softwood for Joinery
Hardwood for Joinery
Sheet Materials
Mechanical Fastenings and Adhesives
Structural Fastening and Adhesives
Joinery Fastenings
Preservatives
WORKMANSHIP
General
Joinery
Timber Skirtings
Removable Duct Panels
Protection
QUALITY CONTROL
1/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

2/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
261. 010
This Section defines all carpentry and joinery and associated fixings to be
carried out on or off the Site for the Permanent Works in wrot or unwrot
softwood, in hardwood or using manufactured sheet materials made
principally with timber. Additional requirements for timber doors and
windows are given in Section 311.
DESIGN
261. 030
The fabrication design of structural timbers shall be to BS 5268.

MATERIALS
General
261. 040
All timber shall be clean, sound, properly seasoned timber free from any
disease, defects or combination of defects, natural or otherwise, making it
unsuitable for its function. It shall be selected at time of fabrication as
suitable for the particular purpose.
Structural Softwood
261. 050
Softwood for carpentry shall be General Structural (GS) Grade, to BS 4978,

with a minimum average density of 510kg/m3 at 15% moisture content.
261. 060
Softwood for structural use shall be Western Hemlock, European

Whitewood, European Redwood or Douglas Fir, unless otherwise specified.
261. 070
All timber shall be finished sawn, unless otherwise stated, and the sizes
shall, wherever possible, be those listed in BS 4471. Sizes not in
accordance with BS 4471 shall be sawn from appropriate larger sizes.
Softwood for Joinery
261. 080
Softwood for trim, skewing and similar items shall be clear grade, straight
grained and air or kiln-dried to a moisture content of 12%, to BS 1186: Part
1, with a minimum average density of 430 kg/m3 at 15% moisture content.
3/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
261. 090
Softwood for internal joinery shall be European Redwood, Douglas Fir,

Western White Pine or European Whitewood, unless otherwise specified.
261. 100
Softwood for external joinery shall be European Redwood or Douglas Fir,

unless otherwise specified.
261. 110
All timber shall be wrot on all faces, unless otherwise stated, and the sizes
shall be, wherever possible, as those listed in BS 4471. Sizes not in
accordance with BS 4471 shall be sawn from appropriate larger sizes.
261. 120
Timber having defects arising from machining, knots etc. shall not be used
unless defects are repaired in accordance with BS 1186: Part 1. Pitch
pockets and pin wormholes shall be repaired in accordance with BS 1186:
Part 1.
261. 130
Timber containing splay knots, checks or shakes as defined in BS 1186:

Part 1, shall not be used where these defects will appear on the exposed
edges or faces of joinery work.
Hardwood for Joinery
261. 140
Hardwood for joinery shall be to BS 1186 Part 1, except that the use of
timber having defects arising from manufacture, knots and other defects
requiring plugging shall not be permitted. Sizes shall be as defined in
BS 5450. The type of hardwood shall be specified on the Drawings.
Sheet Materials
261. 150
Softwood plywood for general purposes shall be manufactured from

European Pine, European Birch, Douglas Fir, Columbian Pine or other
equal agreed timber, Grade CBR to BS 6566.
261. 160
Hardwood ply shall be Weather and Boil Proof (WBP) bonded as Grade
WBP in BS 6566.
261. 170
Wood chipboard shall be of Type II/III as defined in Section 1 of BS 5669.
261. 180
Blockboard and laminboard shall be to BS 3444.
4/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Mechanical Fastenings and Adhesives

261. 190
All ferrous metalwork, nails, screws, bolts and other mechanical fastenings
shall be protected by galvanising or suitable plating for all external work,
work in areas of high humidity or corrosive conditions.
261. 200
The types of adhesives used shall be in accordance with the

recommendations in Tables 1 and 2 of BS 5442, Part 3.
Structural Fastenings and Adhesives
261. 210
Nails shall be round wire, annular ringed shank or helical threaded shank to
BS 1202: Part 1.
261. 220
Wood screws shall be of steel, brass or stainless steel to BS 1210 with

slotted countersunk heads as described in Table 1.
261. 230
Hexagon black bolts and nuts for timber/timber or for timber/metal

connections shall be to BS 4190, each supplied with 2 No. large washers to
BS 4320. Heads of bolts over 6mm diameter shall be embossed or
indented with the letters ISOM or M and the manufacturer's name.
261. 240
Timber connectors shall be of the galvanised split-ring/shear plate/ toothed

plate type to BS 1579.
261. 250
Straps shall be of galvanised pre-drilled factory made steel, but not less
than 2.5 mm x 30 mm in section.
261. 260
Joist hangers shall be standard proprietary galvanised steel of 2.5 mm

minimum thickness to suit timber sizes and predrilled for nailing.
Joinery Fastenings
261. 280
Nails shall be to BS 1202: Part 1. For decorated work they shall be losthead nails suitable for stopping.
261. 290
Wood screws shall be of steel, brass or stainless steel to BS 1210. Brass

or stainless steel shall be used for hardwood or clear-finished work.
261. 300
Cups for screws shall be brass or stainless steel heavy pressed socket
pattern.
5/14
Onyx South Downs
261. 310
EFW Contract
Adhesives shall be cold setting synthetic resin to BS 1203 or 1204 as

appropriate, of the correct class for the duty and type of joint. Unless
otherwise stated, use Type INT for internal work, Type MR for internal work
in areas of humidity, and Type WBP for external work. The Contractor shall
submit details to the Purchaser for agreement.
Preservatives
261. 320
Methods of treatment for constructional timbers as protection against

degradation by wood destroying organisms and environment shall be to BS
5268 Part 5, and shall be a double vacuum process appropriate to the
timber being treated and as described in British Wood Preserving
Association's Specifications BWPA 112-116 (obtainable from BWPA, 150
Southampton Road, London WC1B 5AL).
WORKMANSHIP
General
261. 330
The moisture content of the timber used at the fabrication and erection
stages shall lie within the range 16-20%.
Tests shall be carried out at regular intervals to be agreed with the
Purchaser.
Testing to BS 5268 Part 2 using an electrical moisture meter is permitted. 510% of the timbers shall be tested and 90% of the test values shall lie within
the specified range of moisture contents.
261. 370
Defects which reduce the strength of the connection shall not be permitted
at joints, bearings or assembly locations.
261. 380
Workmanship, testing and maintenance shall generally be to BS 5268.
261. 390
Joints in the length of a structural member shall only be permitted if they

can be shown by calculation to develop the full strength of the member.
Joints over bearings shall be made in a manner agreed by the Purchaser.
261. 400
Structural timbers shall not be cut, notched or modified other than as

specified.
6/14
Onyx South Downs
261. 410
EFW Contract
All joints shall be nailed, screwed, bolted or jointed as necessary.

Glued site joints shall not be permitted without the permission of the
Purchaser.
261. 420
Nails shall be of adequate length to provide a secure fixing and, where

appropriate, shall be driven on the slant so that the connection does not
loosen under load. Splitting of timber by nailing shall be avoided by
sensible spacing and, where necessary, pre-drilling not in excess of threequarter nail diameter.
261. 430
Masonry nails shall not be used.
261. 440
Screw sizes shall match pre-drilled holes in carpenter's metalwork and shall
be of adequate length to provide a secure fixing. Screws shall be driven
tight at right angles to the face in pre-bored holes. Pre-boring shall be for
the length of, and to the diameter of, the plain shank and to the diameter of
the thread core. Countersink for countersunk holes. Hammering of screws
shall not be permitted.
261. 450
Only durable proprietary fibre composition or plastic plugs let into drilled
holes shall be used for screw fixings to concrete, masonry and blockwork.
261. 460
Bolts shall be of a length that will project one complete thread length
beyond the head of the nut without undue tightening. They shall pass
through holes slightly larger than their diameter, be fitted with thick washers
under the head and nut, and tightened so that the washers just compress
the timber.
261. 470
Glued joints shall be made in controlled workshop conditions. The moisture

content shall not exceed 20% and joint faces shall be freshly prepared,
clean and clamped together in full contact under pressure.
261. 480
Masonry bolts shall adequately penetrate into masonry to provide a secured

fixing. Resin anchors shall be used instead of expanding bolts near edges
of masonry. Large washers shall be used to protect the timbers.
261. 490
Bolt holes for timber connectors shall be accurately located at the

intersection of the centre lines of the timbers to be joined.
Toothed-plate connectors shall be embedded before
bolting by
compressing joint faces with a temporary threaded high tensile steel rod
with a large thick washer and nut on both sides, or by cramping or other
means of pressure. Split-ring or shear plate connections shall have
grooves pre-cut with special tools. Bolts and connectors, size and type,
7/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
shall be shown on the Drawings.

261. 500
Straps and anchors shall be fixed at each timber contact point with two
galvanised screws when the number is not specified. Straps shall span at
least two members when strapping joists and rafters. Any gaps between
timber members and masonry shall be blocked when strapping to masonry.
Any strap taken into a cavity wall shall be turned down tight against the
inner skin for an adequate distance. The fixing of straps to resist lateral
loads to tops of masonry shall ensure that the fixing is not limited to a single
brick or cut block. All faces intended to be in contact shall be in close
contact without any unspecified bending or improvisation.
261. 510
Joist hangers shall be screw-to-wall hangers, unless otherwise indicated,

and shall be of the correct size to fit the timber and to suit the loadings.
They shall be fixed in close contact with all supporting and fixing surfaces
and with the timber being supported. The joists shall be nailed through all
pre-drilled holes and shall be properly levelled to avoid notching.
261. 520
Framing anchors shall only be used instead of timber joints subject to the
agreement of the proposed type and locations by the Purchaser.
261. 530
Wall plates shall be in one piece between changes of direction wherever

possible, otherwise a 100 mm lap joint shall be used. They shall be laid
truly level in a bed of mortar and fixed with straps as necessary.
261. 540
Timbers shall bear in full contact on designed supports. The ends of

timbers that are built into masonry shall be liberally coated with
preservative. All timbers shall be protected from contact with potentially
damp surfaces and structures. Any necessary packings shall use material
that will not rot or compress.
261. 550
Openings shall be properly trimmed. The trimmers shall correctly align with
upper and lower surfaces and shall be fitted tightly using joist hangers.
Wherever possible, loads shall be transmitted to other solid structures.
261. 560
Joists shall use regularised timber to ensure level supports for floors and
linings, etc.
261. 570
Studding shall be constructed with tight butt joints securely nailed. The top
of the partitions shall be securely fixed, but shall not transmit any
unintended loading from structures above. Regularised timbers shall be
used when truly flat backgrounds are required.
8/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
261. 580
Noggings shall be provided wherever necessary. They shall be plugged and

screwed if end fixing is prevented by joist hangers.
261. 590
Gaps between masonry walls and joists, rafters, trusses, etc. shall be
packed with timber blocking to match fixing centres.
261. 600
Bowing and twisting of joists shall be prevented by solid blocking at all

bearings and solid or herringbone strutting at intermediate span as
appropriate. Herringbone strutting shall be in full contact and properly
nailed and shall not project.
261. 610
All necessary temporary bracing shall be provided. Diagonal bracing shall

be provided for all rafters and trusses to resist wind forces.
261. 620
Chipboard shall be stored for 2 days prior to fixing in conditions similar to

those which will occur in the completed building.
261. 630
All flooring and decking shall be fixed in a manner that has been agreed by
the Purchaser.
261. 640
Roof trusses shall be erected in accordance with the fabricator's erection

method statement.
261. 650
Timbers shall be prevented from contact with potentially damp surfaces and
structures or shall be provided with suitable protection as agreed by the
Purchaser.
261. 660
Designed ventilation routes of the roof structure shall not be obstructed.
261. 670
Holes and notches etc. for services, where required, shall be as small as
practicable and not closer than 100 mm apart unless otherwise agreed with
the Purchaser. U-shaped notches, made by sawing down to a drilled hole,
shall be located only in the upper edge of the outside quarters of beams
and joists and shall have a maximum size one-eighth depth of member.
Holes shall only be drilled along centre line through centre two-thirds of
span of beams and joists and shall have a maximum size one-sixth depth of
member. Notches and holes in other members shall be made in locations
of least stress and never adjacent to point loads.
261. 680
2mm minimum flat steel plates, let in flush with top of joists, shall be fixed
over services in notches under flooring to prevent nail damage.
9/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
261. 700
Framework to receive laminated panels shall be designed to allow fixings

70mm from the edge of each panel and to allow a gap of 5mm between
panels or between an end panel and wall finish. Framing for panelled duct
covers in toilets or change areas shall be made entirely of suitably
preserved softwood, three faces 'left from the saw'. The framework shall be
constructed to present a true and accurate surface for receiving the panels.
261. 710
Supporting timbers for plasterboard shall permit nailing of the board not less
than 13mm from cut or unbound edges and 10mm from bound edges and
allow nails to be driven straight, not skewed. The dimensions of the
supports shall allow for a gap of 3 mm between the cut edges of boards.
Where the above fixing requirements cannot be met by simple framing
additional timbers shall be fixed to the side of the support to increase the
bearing surface.
Joinery
261. 720
Jointing shall be accurately formed using the recognised form for each
position and shall generally be as described in Part 2 of BS 1186, Section
2, except that the adhesives employed shall be to BS 1203 or BS 1204 as
appropriate.
261. 740
Loose joints shall be used in positions where provision shall be made for
shrinkage or movement. Glued joints shall only be employed in positions
where provision for movement is not required and where necessary shall be
cross tongued or otherwise reinforced.
261. 750
Where 'nominal' dimensions are stated for 'wrot' timber an allowance of

3mm shall be permitted for each planed surface. Large scale detail
drawings shall be held to show actual dimensions.
261. 760
The standard of surface finish shall be as described in Part 2 of BS 1186,

Section 5. All exposed faces of timber shall be 'wrot' and shall be machined
or worked to the correct shapes and sizes.
261. 770
Where a 'natural' finish for staining, polishing or clear varnishing is required,

timber in adjacent faces shall be matched to be uniform or symmetrical in
colour and grain.
261. 780
Reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent capillary penetration in

external joinery or in places where joinery is exposed to wet conditions. The
joiner must ensure that all throatings and grooves are properly executed on
all external joinery.
10/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
261. 790
Nails shall only be used in areas to be painted. All heads of nails, sprigs
etc. are to be punched home and the surface of the timber be made good
with an agreed filler material.
261. 800
Screws in hardwood other than for fixing ironmongery, shall be either

countersunk and pelleted or, if they need to be removable, shall be cupped.
261. 810
Screws for fixing removable panels shall be of the 'mirror' type with screwon dome heads.
261. 820
For glued joints in external joinery, Type WBP adhesives shall be used. For
timber in change areas, toilets, and ducts containing plumbing, Type MR
adhesives shall be used. In all other cases Type INT adhesives shall be
used.
Timber Skirtings
261. 830
These shall be of profiled rectangular softwood, or hardwood, and skew

nailed to grounds or fixing pads.
261. 840
Skirtings shall be installed after the floor has been laid.

Removable Duct Panels
261. 850
These shall be either of blockboard, plywood or of a proprietary laminated

board. The thickness, type and duty (grade/fire rating etc) of the panels
shall be shown on the Drawings. The edges shall be lipped with hardwood
when specified.
261. 860
Blockboard shall be veneered on both sides and along all edges with all
arisses softened to a 45 angle when hardwood lipping is not required.
261. 870
Holes shall be drilled for screw fixings 70mm from the sheet edges and
equally spaced at a maximum of 900mm centres.
Protection
261. 880
Any floors subject to construction traffic shall be protected by temporary

hardboard or other suitable cover. All joinery exposed to damage shall be
cased up. Architectural ironmongery shall be fixed as a final operation or
else wrapped.
11/14
Onyx South Downs
261. 890
EFW Contract
All shavings and offcuts, etc. shall be collected and removed from site. No
surplus material shall be left in concealed spaces where they could attract
vermin or contribute to a fire.
QUALITY CONTROL
261. 900
Inspections to roof structures shall ensure that adequate lateral restraint is

provided to the tops of walls and that all bolts have been tightened
correctly.
261. 910
All bolts shall be checked, and tightened if necessary, at the end of the
maintenance period.
261. 920
The Contractor shall submit for agreement a programme for the testing of
the moisture content of timbers for use in fabrication and during erection.
12/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 1186
Part 1:
Part 2:
Timber for and workmanship in joinery.

Specification for timber.
Specification for workmanship.
BS 1202
Part 1:
Specification for nails.

Steel Nails.
BS1203
Synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic and aminoplastic) for plywood.
BS 1210
BS 1579
BS 3444
BS 4190
BS 4320
Part 5:
Specification for wood screws.

Specification for connectors for timber.
Specification for blockboard and laminboard.
Metric series.
Specification for sizes of sawn and processed softwood.
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 1313-1:1997.
Specification for softwood grades for structural use.
Structural use of timber.
Code of practice for permissible stress design, materials and
workmanship.
Preservative treatments for constructional timber.
BS 5442
Part 3:
Classification of Adhesives for Construction.

Adhesives for use with wood.
BS 5450
BS 5669
Specification for sizes of hardwoods and methods of measurement.

Specification for wood chipboard and methods of test for particle
board.
Plywood.
BS 4471
BS 4978
BS 5268
Part 2:
BS 6566
13/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 2 - INFORMATION TO BE AGREED BY CONTRACTOR
CLAUSE REFERENCE
261.270
Adhesive details.
261.310
Adhesive details.
261.330
Moisture content test results.
261.640
Roof truss erection statement.
261.920
Programme for testing moisture content.
14/14
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 270 : SANITARY AND PLUMBING
SECTION NO: 271
TITLE: SANITARY AND PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
MATERIALS
Sanitary Fittings, Glazed Ceramic (including
associated fittings)
Pipes and Fittings
Pipe Supports
Insulation
Storage and Protection
WORKMANSHIP
General
Fixing of Appliances
Jointing and Pipework
Supports
Overflows
Vent Pipe Terminals
Sealing Pipework Open Ends
System Access
QUALITY CONTROL
Submittals
Testing
Sterilisation of Water System
1/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
271. 010
This Section defines all sanitary appliances and fittings to be used for
domestic purposes together with associated pipework for hot and cold
water services, waste water drainage and overflows.
It does not include equipment for producing hot water or hot water heating
systems.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
271. 030
The installation shall be to BS 6700, BS 5573 and BS 6367.
271. 035
All service runs shall be concealed unless prior authorization is granted by

the Purchaser.
271. 038
The Contractor shall submit detail drawings of all service runs in

accordance with the Design Requirements section of this Specification.
MATERIALS
Sanitary Fittings, Glazed Ceramic (including associated fittings).
271. 040
Sanitary fittings shall be white glazed unless otherwise stated and be to:BS 3402
BS 1206
for vitreous china

for glazed fireclay
All fitting styles/designs shall be agreed by the Purchaser.

271. 050
WC pans shall be to BS 5503 pedestal type or BS 5504, corbel or wall

hung, and shall be heavy duty type of vitreous china. Corbel pans shall be
washdown type P trap only with a hinged block open-front seat. A chair
support shall be provided for mounting. Pedestal pans shall be washdown
type 'P' or 'S' trap with a black plastic ring seat and secured with chromium
plated screws. The height of either pan shall not exceed 405mm above
finished floor.
271. 060
Urinal bowls and divisions shall be to BS 5520 and shall be heavy duty
vitreous china with concealed supports such that the lip of the bowl is not
more than 610mm above finished floor level. The waste outlet shall be
32mm diameter.
271. 070
Flushing cisterns shall be to BS 1125 of ceramic ware and mounted such
2/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
that the underside is not less than 1905mm above finished floor level.
Automatic flushing cisterns shall have a water control device to economise
water usage.
271. 080
Flushing pipes shall be white enamelled steel, plastics or copper, self

finished, painted or chromium plated.
271. 090
Basins (ablution and hand) shall be to BS 1188 and BS 5506 and of heavy
duty vitreous china and mounted using fishplates, wall hangers, bolts or
cast iron brackets. Central leg supports shall be provided where light wall
construction or heavy usage of basins is anticipated. Waste outlets shall be
32mm with captive plug and overflow. Spray tap basins shall have one tap
hole on the right hand side.
271. 100
Shower trays shall be to BS 6340 of glazed fireclay with anti-slip base and
waste outlet of 38mm diameter fitted with a strainer waste and overflow.
271. 110
Washing sinks shall be to BS 1206 of glazed fireclay, with a waste outlet of

38mm diameter, captive plug and overflow, and mounted on cast iron wall
brackets finished in white nylon, vitreous enamel or other agreed finish.
Where the wall is of light construction, stainless steel leg and strap supports
shall be provided.
271. 120
Bucket sinks shall be to BS 1206, of glazed fireclay and fitted with bucket
grating of chromium plate brass or stainless steel with a hardwood pad and
38mm diameter waste outlet. Mountings shall be as for washing sinks.
271. 130
Drinking fountains shall be vitreous china provided with a 19mm or 32mm

waste outlet with chromium plated domed outlet grating and 13mm selfclosing non-concussive lever or wheel action valve mounted with a cast iron
supporting bracket finished in white porcelain enamel or nylon.
271. 140
All water fittings and materials for domestic use shall comply with the Water
Byelaws and be listed in the Water Byelaws Advisory Service (WBAS)
Directory.
271. 150
Draw-off taps for sinks and basins shall be to BS 1010, BS 5388, BS 5412
as appropriate. They shall be chromium plated and marked blue for cold,
red for hot. All draw-off taps shall have fitted in the supply pipe an in-line
ball type isolating valve to facilitate maintenance of the draw-off tap.
271. 160
Thermostatic mixing valves shall be to BS 1415.
271. 170
Waste outlet bodies plugs and chains shall be to BS 3380. The bodies and
3/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
chains shall be chromium plated and the plugs plastic.

271. 180
Ball cocks for cisterns shall be to BS 1212.
271. 190
Gate valves on hot and cold water services, cold feeds and washout pipes
shall be of gun-metal to BS 5154 for sizes up to and including 54mm
nominal bore, and flanged cast iron to BS 5163 for larger sizes. Flanges
shall comply with BS 4504 PN 16.
271. 200
Stop valves shall be of gunmetal to BS 1010.
271. 210
Drain valves shall be of gunmetal and to BS 2879.
271. 220
Water storage cisterns shall be made from hot moulded glass reinforced
plastics, sectional steel suitably corrosion protected, galvanised mild steel
to BS 417 Part 2, polyphone or olefin copolymer to BS 4213.
271. 230
Stainless steel sink units shall be to BS 1240 and pressed from 1.2mm
gauge stainless steel.
Pipes and Fittings
271. 240
Copper pipes shall be to BS 2871 (Part 1 to Table X) and shall have

capillary soldered, brazed or compression joints to BS 864. Lead free
solder shall be used for potable water systems.
271. 250
Plastics pipes and fittings (including uPVC, abs, polypropylene,

polyethylene) for soil and waste drainage shall be, as appropriate, to BS
4514, BS 5254 or BS 5255 and shall have solvent welded or ring sealed
pushfit joints.
271. 260
Centrifugally cast (spun) coated ductile iron pipe and fittings shall comply
with the relevant requirements of BS 416 medium grade bearing the British
Standard Kite Mark, jointed with bolted couplings complying with BS 6087
all as the Timesave System or agreed equivalent.
The bolted coupling rubber gasket shall be specifically ordered
incorporating inset conductors to provide electrical continuity along the full
length of the pipe work systems.
Branch connection components shall consist of branch fittings or screwed

boss fittings.
271. 270
Floor drainage gullies shall be of cast iron stainless steel (304 Grade) with
4/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
gratings of stainless steel, polypropylene or equal agreed material secured

with stainless steel screws.
271. 280
Waste traps to sanitary fittings shall be of polypropylene, two-piece tubular

pattern to BS 3943.
Pipe Supports
271. 290
Supports to plastics and copper pipes shall be made using purpose made
nylon, plastic, copper or brass clips, brackets or hangers. Pipe hangers
shall be to BS 3974.
Insulation
271. 300
Cold water services subject to condensation shall be insulated with a

minimum 19mm thickness of preformed split section non-degradable
insulating material appropriate to the pipe size.
271. 310
Hot water services shall be insulated with a minimum 25mm thick insulation
similar to that above.
271. 320
All insulating material shall be to the fire requirements of BS 476 not less
than Class 'O' rating and shall have a low level of smoke generation. The
materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and shall, on completion, have a smooth continuous,
easily cleaned outer surface with all joints securely taped.
Storage and Protection
271. 330
Glazed ceramic sanitary fittings shall be stored with either their

manufacturer's packaging or with the manufacturer's gummed paper edge
protection intact. Care must be taken at all times to avoid chipping or
cracking. Fixing accessories shall be separately packaged labelled and
stored adjacent to the fittings.
271. 340
Stainless steel sinks, pipework, taps and all other valves or accessories
shall be stored with their manufacturer's packaging intact.
271. 350
Gummed paper and other edge protection shall be removed only when the
appliances are cleaned immediately before handover.
WORKMANSHIP
General
5/14
Onyx South Downs
271. 360
EFW Contract
The installation of internal sanitary drainage and water services shall be

carried out by, or under the supervision of, personnel registered with the
Institute of Plumbing. The Contractor shall submit details to the Purchaser
for information.
Fixing of Appliances
271. 370
Appliances shall be fixed with chromium plated steel or brass screws and
bedded as appropriate on 6:1 sand cement mortar.
Jointing and Pipework
271. 380
All joints in pipework shall be made in accordance with the pipework

manufacturer's instructions and the Contractor shall submit a statement to
the Purchaser for agreement, detailing the joints for each type of pipe
material to be used.
271. 390
Copper pipework under 42mm diameter bore shall be neatly bent in a

manner which preserves an even bore throughout and pipes shall be set
either horizontally or vertically.
271. 400
Copper pipes over 67mm diameter shall be bronze welded using filler rods
and an oxyacetylene flame.
271. 410
Copper pipes buried in floor screeds and wall chases shall be protected
from contact with the plaster, concrete or mortar either by precoating with
PVC or spirally wrapping in a mastic tape.
271. 420
Plastic pipes and copper pipes above 42mm diameter shall be routed using
straight pipes and standard bends.
271. 430
Screwed joints to metal fittings shall be made using ptfe tape.
271. 440
Connections between dissimilar pipe systems shall be by means of a

purpose designed transition piece agreed by both systems manufacturers.
271. 450
All pipework, jointing and support systems shall be constructed from

chemically and electrolytically compatible materials. Where incompatible
materials may be in contact suitable means of insulation shall be provided
to prevent damage to either surface.
271. 460
Hot and cold water service branches to ranges of sanitary fittings, or

branches to individual fittings, shall be provided with ball type isolating
valves fitted as close as practicable to the fittings served.
6/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
271. 470
All pipework installations of conducting materials shall be cross-bonded and

earthed in the manner recommended in the current regulations of the
Institute of Electrical Engineers.
271. 480
All bends on soil stacks shall be large radius bends. All changes of
direction and branch connections on suspended soil and waste pipe runs
shall be made with 145o bends and branches, except where this is not
practicable, in which case the fittings shall have the greatest angle possible
below 145o.
271.485
All piped drainage systems shall be provided with traps of suitable size and
type immediately adjacent to the sanitary device being served.
Supports
271. 490
Pipework systems shall be supported on hangers or brackets at not less

than the intervals given below:
SIZE IN MM
SPACINGS IN
METRES
HORIZONTAL RUNS
VERTICAL
RUNS
COPPER
10-15
20-30
32-40
42-50
1.2
1.4
1.7
1.8
1.2
1.4
1.7
1.8
PVC
32-38
50
75-100
150
0.5
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.8
1.8
IRON
All
1.8
2.4
MATERIAL
271. 500
In all cases the pipework manufacturer's recommendations shall be applied

where these require closer spacing of fixings than those indicated above
and on all flexibly jointed pipe systems at least one support shall be
provided for each unit length.
271. 510
Brackets and hangers shall be securely fixed with non-corrodible screws

and fixings appropriate to the base material.
271. 520
All pipework systems shall be run and supported in a manner which

provides for thermal or other expansion and contraction and predictable
building movement.
271. 530
All stacks shall be installed truly vertical, and horizontal pipework shall be
7/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
true in alignment and uniform gradient. All stacks shall be supported by at

least one pipe support bracket in a manner to support the vertical load and
in any case the distance between pipe supports shall not exceed the
distances specified.
271. 560
Provision shall be made in the fixing of branch pipes to the main vertical
stack to prevent shearing or deformation due to vertical movement of the
main pipe.
271. 570
Horizontal and vertical runs of adjacent pipes shall be fixed in a manner

which allows sufficient space between the pipes or adjacent surfaces to
carry out the installation, and subsequent painting and maintenance of the
pipes without obstruction.
271. 580
Care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe axis is parallel with the axis of
the pipe ring or bracket and that drop rod supports are vertical. All supports
shall be in alignment and shall not impose side strain on the pipework and
shall provide uniform pipe gradient.
271. 590
Water service pipes passing through fire barriers shall be fitted in a manner
which maintains the barriers' fire rating and excludes transmission of smoke
and flame across the barrier but which does not interfere with any thermal
movement of the pipework. Penetrations through walls and floors in a
visible position shall be provided with chromium plated or white plastic
wall/floor plates.
271. 600
Additional supports shall be provided at branch connections and changes of

direction on suspended pipework providing a stable and secure pipework
system capable of being rodded through without detriment to the system.
271. 610
Branch connections shall be supported independently and not used to help

in the support of it parent main.
271. 620
Overflows
Overflow and warning pipes discharging externally shall do so in a
conspicuous position in an area where the discharge will not be
disregarded. Where discharge internally is unavoidable this shall be
positioned over a suitable floor drainage gully in a manner which will draw
attention to the discharge without causing flooding or damage. The location
of overflow and warning pipes shall be agreed by the Purchaser.
Vent Pipe Terminals
8/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
271.660
Vent pipes shall only pass through the roof with the agreement of the
Purchaser which will not be given unless there is no practical alternative.
271. 670
Purpose made weathering slate or manufactured weathering fittings shall

be provided to all vent pipe terminals through roof.
271. 680
Purpose made traditional lead soakers shall comprise BS 1178 No. 4 sheet
lead slate size 600 x 600 and upstand 170 high with leadburned seam and
joint The upstand shall be a close tolerance fit to the pipe.
271. 700
PVC pipes shall be fitted with a PVC apron shrouding the lead upstand
terminating with PVC cowl and metal pipe shall be fitted with purpose made
lead apron with top edge dressed into top of pipe and terminating with wire
balloon grating.
271. 710
In the case of inverted roof construction the height of the upstand shall be
equal to the roof construction thickness above the waterproof membrane
plus 150mm.
271. 720
Vent pipes shall terminate 300mm above the finished roof level.
Sealing Pipework Open Ends
271. 740
All pipework open ends or open sockets or open fittings shall be properly
sealed, plugged or capped during the progress of the works to prevent entry
of building material and debris.
271. 750
Plastic, shaped hardwood or metal discs, plugs, caps or drain plugs will be
acceptable for this purpose.
271. 770
Rainwater outlets shall be temporarily plugged during the laying of

chippings.
271. 780
Loose chippings around outlets shall be swept clear prior to removing the
temporary plug.
System Access
271. 790
Access points shall be provided to facilitate rodding through, inspection and

testing of the entire pipework system.
271. 800
Access points shall be installed near the base of all stacks, at changes to
pipe direction, in the vicinity of or on all stack branches or grouped stack
branches at each storey, on the upstream end of common branch waste
9/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
pipes, on the top of stub pipe upstand.

271. 810
Access points shall always be positioned above flood level of sanitary

appliances unless it is impracticable to do so, and they shall be oriented so
as not to be obstructed by the structure or pipework, and such access
points shall correctly relate to removable panels in order to facilitate ease of
removal of the access plate, rodding through and replacement of the
access plate.
271. 820
All in-line access doors shall be contoured to match the pipe bore.
271. 830
Metal or plastic rectangular or oval type access doors shall be fitted with
brass or other rust-proofed fixings bolts/screws and soft rubber gaskets.
271. 840
Iron pipe end access shall consist of screwed cap brass ferrule, lead
caulked into iron socket, or an iron blank cap secured with bolted coupling.
271. 850
Copper pipe end access shall comprise copper or copper alloy screwed cap
fitting.
271. 851
Plastics pipe end access shall consist of plastic screwed cap, fitting, all
complete with sealing washer.
QUALITY CONTROL
Submittals
271. 860
The Contractor shall submit full details for agreement including samples of
the following items which he proposes to use:
(a)
ceramic sanitary ware
(b)
pipe brackets and hangers.
Testing
271. 870
Testing for soundness (air test) shall be carried out in sections as the works
proceed to suit the progress of the building work. Pipes to be concealed
shall be tested before being enclosed, and final testing shall be carried out
at completion.
271. 880
The Contractor shall take remedial action in respect of any defects found
and shall re-test the section at fault until satisfactory before proceeding
further to ensure soundness of the installation in readiness for the final tests
at completion.
10/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
271. 890
All services shall be subjected to hydraulic test at a pressure 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure for not less than 30 minutes and shall be
inspected under working conditions for flow and pressure., in accordance
with BS 6700.
271. 900
Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good and the tests
repeated until the results are satisfactory.
Sterilisation of Water System
271. 910
After completion of testing all debris shall be removed from the storage
cisterns and flushing cisterns and the whole system shall be thoroughly
flushed out with clean water and drained. The system shall then be refilled
with water into which is dispersed chlorine at a dilution of 50 parts per
million. All taps and outlets on the system must be opened in sequence until
chlorine is detected by comparator and then closed. After topping up the
system with the chlorine solution it shall be allowed to stand for a period of
at least 3 hours after which residual chlorine should be detectable at 0.2
mg/l by comparator. If chlorine cannot be detected the sterilisation
procedure shall be repeated.
271. 920
After a successful conclusion to this procedure the system shall be drained

and thoroughly flushed before handing over, with the disinfecting water
discharged to the agreement of the Purchaser.
11/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 417
Specification for galvanised low carbon steel cisterns, cistern

lids, tanks and cylinders.
BS 476
Fire Tests on Building Materials and structures.
Part 7: Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
BS 864
Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper
alloy.
Part 2:
Specification for capillary and compression fittings for copper tubes.
BS 1010
Specification for draw-off taps and stop valves for water services
(screw drawn pattern).
Part 2:
Draw-off taps and above ground stop valves.
BS 1125
Specification for WC flushing cisterns (including dual flush cisterns
and flush pipes).
BS 1188
Specification for ceramic wash basins and pedestals.
BS 1206
Specification for fireclay sinks: dimensions and workmanship.
BS 1244
Metal Sinks for Domestic Purposes, Part 2: Specification for
stainless steel sink tops (excluding inset sinks).
BS 1415
Mixing valves.
Part 2:
Specification for thermostatic mixing valves.
BS 2871
Specification for copper and copper alloy tubes.
Part 1:
Copper tubes for water, gas and sanitation.
BS 2879
Specification for Draining Taps (screw-down pattern).
BS 3380
Specification for wastes (excluding skeleton sink wastes) and bath
overflows.
BS 3402
Specification for quality of vitreous china sanitary appliances.
BS 3943
Specification for plastics waste traps.
BS 3974
Specification for pipe supports.
BS 4213
Specification for cold water storage and feed and expansion
cisterns (polyphone or olefin copolymer) and cistern lids.
BS 4504
BS 4514
BS 5154
BS 5254
BS 5255
Flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings, metric sizes.
Specification for unplasticized PVC soil and ventilating pipes.
Copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves.
Specification for polypropylene waste pipe and fittings (external
diameter 34.6mm 45.0mm and 54.1mm).
Plastic waste pipes and fittings.
12/14
Onyx South Downs
BS 5412
Part 1:
BS 5503
BS 5504
BS 5506
BS 5520
BS 6340
BS 6700
EFW Contract
Draw-off taps with metal bodies for water services.

Dimensional and design characteristics. (See also Part 2, Part 3,
Part 4 and Part 5).
Specification for vitreous china washdown pans with horizontal
outlet.
Specification for wall hung WC pans.
Specification for wash basins.
Specification for vitreous china bowl urinals (rimless type).
Shower units.
Specification for design, installation, testing, and maintenance of
services supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their
curtilages.
13/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
271.038
Details of Service Runs
271.350
Details of plumbing personnel.
271.370
Details of joints.
271.560
Details of sanitary ware and pipe

supports.
COMMENT
271.920
Disposal of disinfecting water.
14/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION WORK GROUP:

WORK GROUP: 280: FINISHES
SECTION NO: 281
TITLE: PLASTERING, RENDERING AND DRY LINING
TABLE OF CONTENT
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Cement
Aggregates
Water
Lime
Gypsum Plasters
Bonding Agent
Metalwork Accessories
Gypsum Plasterboards
Framing for Dry Lined Partitions
Plasterboard and Dry Lining Jointing Materials
WORKMANSHIP
General
Clean Working Conditions
Preparation of Background Surfaces
Plastering and Internal Rendering
- General
- Application of Plaster/Render
External Rendering
- General
- Application of Render
Plasterboard Dry Lining
- General
1/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENT
- Fixing Wallboards
- Joint and Angle Treatment
- Defects and Damage to Finished Work
- Plaster
- Dry Lining
QUALITY CONTROL
APPENDIX 1 BSI STANDARD AND OTHER REFERENCES
2/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
281. 010
This Section defines:

(i)
Plastering of internal walls.
(ii)
Rendering of internal and external walls.
(iii)
Erection of dry lining either as facing to internal walls or as

facings to internal partitions.
(iv)
Erection of plasterboard ceilings.
MATERIALS
General
281. 040
All premixed materials or materials in powder form shall be delivered to site

and stored on site in unbroken, dated containers bearing the manufacturer's
product name.
Cement
281. 050
Cement shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement to BS 12 or

Portland blast furnace cement to BS 146.
Aggregates
281. 060
Sand for rendering shall be to BS1199 Table 1. It shall be from a clean and
uncontaminated source.
Water
281. 070
Mixing water shall be from an agreed clean and uncontaminated source of

potable quality and shall be tested in accordance with BS3148 if required.
Lime
281. 080
Lime putty shall be either ready prepared to BS890 or made by mixing

hydrated lime powder to BS890 with water to thick cream consistency and
leaving undisturbed for 16 hours.
281. 090
Lime and sand (coarse stuff) shall be either:
3/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
ready mixed to BS 4721
lime putty mixed with sand (the hydrated lime powder and
sand to be mixed in the dry state before adding water then
left for 16 hours).
Gypsum Plasters
281. 100
Premixed lightweight gypsum plaster shall be to BS 1191: Part 2. The type

of undercoat shall be compatible with the background to which it is to be
applied.
281. 110
Retarded hemi-hydrate gypsum finish coat plaster shall be to BS1191: Part

1, Class B type 1.
Bonding Agent
281. 120
To be used to form a key when the background to receive the plaster is

particularly unfavourable (e.g. concrete surfaces cast against smooth
shuttering).
281. 130
Bonding Agents shall be proprietary treatments as recommended by the

manufacturer. Polyvinyl acetate emulsion used for internal plastering with
pre-mixed plasters shall be to BS5270.
281. 140
The agent shall be delivered in unopened cans bearing the maker's name
and be stored in dry frost-free conditions.
Metalwork Accessories
281. 150
Galvanised steel beads (corners, stops, architraves) with perforated angle

strip for use in internal plasterwork and dry lining shall be to BS6452: Part 1
with profiles appropriate to the application required.
281. 160
Expanded galvanised steel lathing shall be to BS 1369.
281. 161
Beads and lathing used externally in rendering shall be stainless steel.
281. 170
Staples, nails and fixing wire shall be galvanised steel to BS729.
281. 180
Galvanised steel clout nails for fixing beads, lathing and plasterboard shall
be to BS 1202: Part 1. The size and type shall be appropriate to the
material to be fixed.
4/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Gypsum Plasterboards
281. 190
Gypsum plasterboards for use as base boards and drylining wall-boards

shall be to BS 1230: Part 1, and of the following types:
square or round edges baseboard

fire resisting baseboard
thermal baseboard with polystyrene layer to BS 3837
vapour check baseboard with metallised polyester foil

vapour check thermal baseboard with vapour resistant
membrane
The thickness, type and particular specification shall be shown on the

Drawings.
Framing for Dry Lined Partitions
281. 200
Dry lined partitions shall be framed with proprietary systems based upon
galvanised mild steel channels to BS 2994 and BS 2989 or timber stud
supports. The thickness of the channels or studs shall be sized in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the dimensions of the
partitions. Plasterboard and Dry Lining Jointing Materials.
5/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Plasterboard and Dry Lining Jointing Materials

281. 210
Joint fillers, finishes, tapes etc. shall be as recommended by the

manufacturers of the gypsum plasterboards
WORKMANSHIP
General
281. 220
Handling and storage of materials shall be in accordance the

manufacturer's recommendations. Storage shall be in dry weatherproof
conditions and with different materials kept separate.
281. 230
Cements, plasters, lime, filler materials shall be stored in dry conditions on

timber platforms. Plaster must be used within 2 months of the date on the
bag; consignments shall be stored in a manner which allows them to be
used in strict rotation, related to order of delivery. Bags shall not be
punctured.
281. 240
Plasterboards shall be stacked flat in a dry building on a level surface

protected from rising damp. Dry lining boards shall be stacked with ivory
faces together to avoid damage to the finished surface.
281. 250
Sand shall be stored on clean surfaces in such a manner as to allow

adequate drainage. It shall be stockpiled in a suitable manner to prevent
contamination by other materials.
Clean Working Conditions
281. 260
Damage and soiling of the finished work shall be prevented during mixing,
transportation and application of plaster.
281. 270
All plaster and render shall be mixed with clean water on clean surfaces or
in clean containers. All surfaces shall be washed thoroughly after each mix.
Mechanical mixers shall not be used.
6/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

281. 280
The surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be:
281. 290
free from local projections and concrete fins

cleaned with detergent solutions to remove concrete release
agents, oil etc. and rinsed down with clean water
free from paint spillages etc. which could affect adhesion of
plaster of render
brushed down to remove dust and loose particles
brushed down to remove any surface salts (the treatment
shall be repeated after 48 hours until the salts are removed)
washed down with proprietary fungicide as necessary.
The surfaces shall be inspected prior to the application of the plaster or

render to check that:
surfaces are uncontaminated, sound and stable.

surfaces are sufficiently true and even to accommodate the
specified thickness of the finish
all openings, chases and built-in services have been
incorporated (corrodible metal surfaces shall be suitably
protected)
reasonably dry
each surface shall be checked to ensure adequate adhesion
is provided, or to establish whether a proprietary bonding
agent is required (or recommended by the block
manufacturer).
281. 300
Fix all metal angle beads and stops with plaster dabs or nails as
appropriate. All metal work to be plumb, square and true to line. Cut ends
to be protected with bitumen coating solution.
281. 310
Conduits buried in the undercoat shall be covered by jute scrim (90mm

wide) bedded in the finishing coat mix, pressed flat and pressed in.
281. 320
At junctions between dissimilar backgrounds which are to receive plaster,

fix plaster stops or steel lathing.
281. 330
At junctions between columns and panels of dissimilar backgrounds, a

separating layer of building paper shall be provided over the face of the
column and steel lathing bridging over the column face shall be fixed to the
panels at each side.
7/13
Onyx South Downs
281. 340
EFW Contract
Uneven backgrounds shall be dubbed out in thickness not greater than 10

mm in the same mix as the first coat. Each coat shall be cross-scratched
immediately after the set, and allowed to dry out before the next coat is
applied.
Plastering and Internal Rendering.
General
281. 350
Admixtures shall not be used.
281. 360
Plaster shall not be used after initial set has taken place. Retempered
plaster or reconstituted mixes shall not be used.
281. 370
Mixing surfaces shall be cleaned whenever there is a change in material, or

a break in the work, and at the end of the day.
281. 380
Plaster shall not be applied to frozen backgrounds or in frosty conditions or

during extreme temperature or moisture which might affect the finished
work.
The use of mechanical application methods shall be agreed by the
Purchaser. The work shall be carried out by trained operatives using
suitable plaster as recommended by the manufacturers.
281. 390
Application of Plaster/Render
281. 400
The undercoat shall be applied with a firm pressure and brought to a true
and level surface using a straight edge. Scratch the surface thoroughly to
provide a mechanical key for the finishing coat.
281. 410
Each wall or ceiling surface shall be carried out in one continuous

operation.
281. 420
The finishing coat shall be carried out with a steel trowel to give a smooth,
blemish-free finish, unless otherwise instructed.
281. 430
Render to receive wall tiles shall be finished with a dry wood float as soon
as the wet sheen has disappeared.
281. 440
All arises shall be slightly rounded.
281. 450
Succeeding coats shall not be applied until undercoats are set. Cementbased undercoats must be dry and cured with the drying shrinkage
substantially complete.
8/13
Onyx South Downs
281. 460
EFW Contract
Cement rendering shall be kept damp by spraying or alternative methods

for at least 7 days after the initial set.
External Rendering
General
281. 470
Cold weather. Work shall not be carried out during inclement weather or
frosty periods, or render applied to frozen backgrounds or when frost is
expected within the next 24 hours. Each coat shall be left at least 24 hours
before applying next coat.
281. 480
Hot weather. Each coat shall be prevented from drying out too rapidly;
spray with water as necessary. Application shall not be carried out in direct
hot sun or drying winds.
281. 490
Wet weather. Finished work shall be protected as necessary to prevent

damage.
Application of Render.
281. 500
All workmanship shall be to BS 5262.
281. 510
Undercoats shall be applied with a trowel by laying on to give a rough, open

surface, or by throwing on and levelling with a straight edge. The surfaces
shall be cross-scratched to give a key for hand-applied finishing coats.
281. 520
Apply all finishing coats, whether plain or textured, to a uniform thickness.
281. 530
Where a continuous finish is required, apply the render from top to bottom
to give a surface without joints. Day joints shall be planned to coincide with
surface features, e.g. changes in direction, to minimise their visual impact.
281. 540
Textured or dry dashed finishes shall be applied while coating is plastic,

wetting the undercoat as necessary to maintain plasticity.
281. 550
Movement joints shall be formed through the full depth of render.
Plasterboard Dry Lining

General
281. 560
All wallboards shall be stored flat on a level surface, off the ground and
9/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
protected against the weather and rising damp.

281. 570
Wall-boards shall be carried on edge. They shall not be dragged over each
other. Broken boards shall not be used.
Fixing Wall-boards
281. 580
All dry lining wall-boards shall be fixed as recommended by the

manufacturer and shall be plumb, square and true to line.
281. 590
Edges of wall-boards and ceiling boards shall be centred on timber batten

or metal furring supports leaving a gap between ends of boards as
recommended by the manufacturer.
281. 600
Fixing nails for timber battens shall be at 150 mm centres and not less
than 13mm from the board edges. The nails shall not fracture the paper
surface and depressions shall be filled with filler finished flush with the
surface. Apply coat of joint finish.
281. 610
Fixing to metal firings shall be by plaster dabs at 450 mm centres and then
screwed at 300 mm centres, not less than 10 mm from the edge of the
boards. Screw depressions shall be filled with filler finished flush with the
surface. Apply coat of joint finish.
281. 620
Ceiling and soffit linings shall be fixed to support joists. End joints of boards
to be staggered. Paper-covered edges to be lightly butted with 3 mm gaps
between cut edges.
Joint and Angle Treatment
281. 630
Apply a continuous thin coat of joint compound filler to joint tapers and
board edges and press on joint tape ensuring the surface is free from air
bubbles. Finish flush with joint filler compound.
281. 640
The use of mechanical jointing techniques must be agreed by the

Purchaser and carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
281. 650
External angles shall be reinforced with metal angle beads bedded in

jointing compound with outer edges touching the plasterboard surface.
Finish flush with two layers of jointing compound.
281. 660
Alternatively, subject to the agreement of the Purchaser, bed corner jointing

tape in jointing compound on each side of the angle. Finish flush with two
10/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
layers of jointing compound.

Defects and Damage to Finished Work
Plaster
281. 670
Make good, not only physical damage but the effects of blistering
efflorescence and flaking due to moisture penetration. Repairs to cracks
caused by background movement should be delayed as long as possible.
Dry Lining
281. 680
Minor damage such as denting or scuffing of the finished surface shall be

lightly rubbed down and filled flush with joint filler in two applications. Minor
damage resulting from heavier impact resulting in the fracture or
disintegration of the core must be repaired by removing all loose material,
the paper edge around the hole scored, cut back and sealed with PVA. The
hole shall then be filled by two applications of joint filler.
281. 690
For more extensive damage, trim the damaged hole to form a neat
rectangular opening and cut a new piece of wallboard to fit the opening. In
stud partition repairs the infill patch should be fixed to a piece of wallboard
100mm longer and 3mm narrower than the opening. This wall board shall
be fixed to the back face of the broken board with joint filler. For wall-board
lining defects, the patch shall be fixed to the wall with plaster dabs. When
the patch adhesive has set, the joints shall be treated in a similar manner to
cut edges during installation.
QUALITY CONTROL
281. 700
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser two copies of all certificates of
conformance for proprietary products used, and material test certificates to
comply with this Specification.
281. 710
Sample panels of plaster work and rendering for each type of background
substrate shall be prepared for the Purchasers agreement and to act as a
quality control reference.
281. 720
The Contractor shall notify the Purchaser when the background surface is
ready for plastering or rendering.
11/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Appendix 1 BSI STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCES
The British Standards referred to in Section 281 are listed below, together with any
other references specified therein.
The latest editions shall be used, including all current amendments and additions.
Any differences between their requirements and this Specification shall be

submitted to the Purchaser for his ruling.
BS12
BS146
Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland Cement.

Portland-blastfurnance cement.
BS729
Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel

articles.
Specification for building limes.
Specification for gypsum building plaster.
Excluding premixed lightweight plasters.
Premixed lightweight plasters.
BS890
BS1191
Part 1:
Part 2:
BS1199
BS1200
BS1202
BS1230
Part 1:
BS1369
BS2989
BS2994
BS3837
BS4022
BS4721
BS5262
BS5270
BS5492
BS6452
Specification for building sands from natural sources.

Gypsum plasterboard.
Specification for plasterboard excluding materials submitted to
secondary operations.
Steel lathing for internal plastering and external rendering.
coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and slit wide strip.
Specification for cold rolled steel sections.
Expanded polystyrene boards.
Specification for prefabricated gypsum wallboard panels.
Specification for ready-mixed building mortars.
Code of Practice. External rendered finishes.
Specification for polyvinyl acetate (PVAC) emulsion bonding agents
for internal use with gypsum building plasters.
Code of Practice for internal plastering.
Beads for internal plastering and dry lining.
12/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
281.390
Use of mechanical application methods.
281.640
Use of mechanical jointing techniques.
281.700
Material test certificates.
281.710
Sample panels.
281.720
Notifiction of background preparation.
13/13
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 280 : FINISHES
SECTION NO: 282
TITLE: SUSPENDED CEILINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
MATERIALS
General
Framing and Suspension System
Ceiling Tiles
WORKMANSHIP
General
Environmental Requirements
Packaging, Storage and Protection
Installation of Framework
Edge Detail
Ceiling Void Access Panels
Fixing Tiles
Painting
Cavity Fire Barriers
Tolerances
QUALITY CONTROL
1/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
282. 010
This Section defines the requirements for materials and installation of

proprietary acoustic suspended ceiling systems including suspension
systems and associated accessories.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
282. 030
Detail drawings shall be submitted to the Purchaser for agreement. The

drawings shall show, but not necessarily be limited to, the following
information:
282. 040
Reflected ceiling plan with direction of pattern.

Setting out dimensions for installation and future maintenance with
full allowance made to accommodate light fittings, ventilation grilles,
fire protection and detection points etc., location of hangers, primary
and secondary support members, access facilities, any structural
connections.
Panel joint details.
Changes in ceiling level and cavity barriers.
The Contractor's design submission shall also include manufacturer's full

supporting technical literature, certificates of fire resistance rating and flame
spread classification of testing organisation, certificate of sound absorption
coefficients to BS 3638.
MATERIALS
General
282. 050
Suspended ceilings shall be of a proprietary system type to BS 8290.
282. 060
The fire resistance rating shall be 1 hour unless otherwise specified for
stability, integrity and insulation as determined in accordance with the
requirements of BS 476.
282. 070
The flame spread classification shall be Class 'O', unless otherwise

specified, as determined by the large scale test conducted in accordance
with the requirements of BS 476, Part 7.
Framing and Suspension System

2/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
282. 080
Unless otherwise specified the suspension ceiling system shall be of the

exposed grid type, and shall include all fixings such as rods, brackets,
bracing, hangers, perimeters, connections and accessories designed to
form an integrated and rigid framework in two horizontal directions.
282. 090
All members shall be of galvanized steel or other agreed corrosion resistant

metal. Exposed flanges and trims shall be shop finished to the appropriate
colour agreed with the purchaser.
282. 100
Upper anchorage for hanger wire shall be power-driven eye-pin fasteners.
282. 110
Hanger wire shall be 12-gauge minimum, galvanised, soft annealed mild

steel.
282. 120
Hold-down clips, connectors and fasteners shall be standard types supplied

or recommended by the ceiling manufacturer.
282. 130
The main horizontal suspension members shall be of channel section, of a

size and gauge recommended by the ceiling manufacturer. Joints between
members shall be achieved by channels back to back with an overlap of
approximately 400mm and with a hanger support wire fixed at the mid-point
of the junction. Metal tees for supporting the tiles shall be located
immediately below the main horizontal support members.
282. 140
Perimeter edge support shall be of steel or aluminium angle. Angle size

shall be approximately 50mm (vertical edge) x 37mm (horizontal edge).
Ceiling Tiles
282. 150
Asbestos materials shall not be used in the manufacture of the ceiling tiles.
282. 160
Mineral fibre tiles face texture and size shall be shown on the Drawings.
Tile edges shall be rebated to allow a lay-in system where the bottom face
of support members are exposed.
282. 170
Reinforced Calcium Silicate tiles size and type shall be shown on the
Drawings.
282. 180
Tiles in toilet and shower areas shall be resistant to moisture.
WORKMANSHIP
General
3/9
Onyx South Downs
282. 190
EFW Contract
Suspended ceiling systems shall be installed to BS 8290 and to the

Environmental Requirements
282. 200
Any work which will be concealed by suspended ceilings shall be

completed, tested, inspected and accepted before suspended ceiling work
is started.
282. 210
Surfaces which will support the suspended ceilings, and those to which the
suspended ceilings abut, shall be inspected and accepted for completeness
and adequacy to receive the ceilings before suspended ceiling work begins.
282. 220
Any work that could cause wetting of the materials shall be completed
before the ceilings are installed. The building should be weatherproof
before erection commences.
282. 230
A uniform temperature above 13C shall be maintained in the area where

materials are to be installed before, during and after installation.
Packaging, Storage and Protection
282. 240
Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened, protective packaging,

with manufacturer's labels clearly indicating product name, pattern, size,
thickness and fire rating.
282. 250
Materials shall be stored in original protective packaging to prevent soiling,

physical damage or wetting.
282. 260
Cartons shall be stored in the installation area, opened at each end to

stabilize moisture content and temperature, for 48 hours prior to installation.
Installation of Framework
282. 270
The grid pattern shall be as indicated on the Drawings and care shall be
taken to co-ordinate all joint locations with internal partitions and/or the
raised access floor tiles and any other features, where instructed.
282. 280
Setting out shall be from the centre of the room. The centre of a tile or a tile
junction shall be located along the centre line of a room or principal wall,
with cut tiles only at the edges. As far as possible cut tiles should be larger
than half a tile.
4/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
282. 290
Hanger fixings shall be installed in the manner and positions shown on the
shop drawings but at not greater than 1200mm centres. Main suspension
members shall be accurately located to maintain the grid and to be level.
282. 300
Main runners shall be connected end-to-end with manufacturer's standard

couplings and shall be accurately levelled. Cross runners shall be
positively and rigidly connected to the main runners. Installation shall
ensure that there is minimal torsional movement or displacement of joints
and runners.
Edge Detail
282. 310
Tiles shall be cut in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

cut edges shall be located behind the perimeter edge supports to the
ceiling.
282. 320
Fixings for edge support angles shall be in accordance with the details and
at locations shown on the shop drawings and shall be either:
(a)
Fixed directly to softwood grounds approximately 50mm x

18mm i.e. with the face approximately 5mm proud of the
face of a plaster finish. The 5mm gap shall be caulked
using a one part polysulphide based sealant.
(b)
Fixed directly to softwood grounds approximately 50mm x

50mm with the bottom face wrot and painted black.
The bottom flange of the angles shall be 10mm lower than the bottom face
of the ground.
Ceiling Void Access Panels
282. 330
Access panels shall be approximately 1200mm square and shall consist of

one or two hinged flaps. Suspension wires shall be provided at each of the
four corners and the suspension system shall be suitably designed to be
able to support a softwood frame and blockboard flaps faced with standard
tiles. When closed the panel shall be flush with the remainder of the ceiling
with only discreet push plates to indicate its presence.
Fixing Tiles
282. 340
Ceiling tiles shall be installed in the grid system after completion of

installation of the suspension, lighting fittings, ventilation grilles and fire
5/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
detection/protection systems.
282. 350
Tile fixings shall provide for full access except as otherwise specified.
282. 360
Mineral Fibre tiles shall be installed in the manner recommended by the

manufacturer, to provide a level surface free from any bowing or sagging
and with accurately aligned joints.
282. 370
The Calcium Silicate tiles shall be screwed to the suspension system as

recommended by the manufacturer to provide a uniform appearance.
282. 380
Tiles in any room or space protected by an inert gas fire protection system
shall be secured to prevent lifting of the panel by the pressure differential
generated during inert gas discharge. Means of access to the above-ceiling
area shall be provided.
Painting
282. 390
Tiles shall be painted before installation in accordance with the finishing

schedule.
Cavity Fire Barriers
282. 400
Cavity Fire Barriers, shall be installed vertically in voids above ceilings at

not more than 20 metres spacing in any direction or as agreed with the local
Fire Authority.
282. 410
They shall be fixed positively to the soffit of concrete floors by means of a

sheradised steel angle. The blanket shall be of sufficient depth to provide
50mm minimum horizontal seal to back of ceiling tiles. End laps to the
blanket shall be 30mm minimum.
282. 420
Allowance shall be made to cut around ventilation ducts, pipes etc., within
the ceiling void with provision for a minimum of 50mm horizontal seal.
Tolerances
282. 430
Panel grid deflections shall conform to the requirements of BS 8290
282. 440
The finished suspended ceiling system shall be level within 1mm in 1m.
6/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
282. 450
The Contractor shall obtain manufacturer's test certificates for the

Purchasers inspection before any on site work shall commence.
282. 460
The Contractor shall inspect the suspension system for adequacy of

fixings, tolerances and levels etc prior to the installation of the ceiling tiles.
7/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 476
Part 7:
Fire Tests on building materials and structures.

Method for classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
BS 3638
Method for measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation

room.
BS 8290
Part 1:
Part 2:
Part 3:
Suspended Ceilings.
Code of practice for design.
Specification for performance of components and assemblies.
Code of practice for installations and maintenance.
8/9
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
282. 030
Contractor's detail Drawings.
282. 040
Manufacturer's literature.
282. 200
Notification of initial inspection.
282.450
Test Certificates.
282.460
Final inspection.
9/9
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION NO: 283
TITLE: WALL TILING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Tiles
Bedding and Grouting
Storage
WORKMANSHIP
General
Fixing Tiles
Cleaning and Protection
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Inspection
1/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
283. 010
This Section defines the requirements for the supply and fixing of tiles for
internal and external use.
283. 020
The BSI Standards together with other references specified in this Section
are listed in Appendix 1.
MATERIALS
General
283. 030
Representative samples of the tiles shall be submitted to the Purchaser to

demonstrate quality, colour and surface finish.
283. 040
All tiles shall match the agreed samples and shall be obtained from a single
source.
283. 050
Fittings and accessories shall be obtained from the same tile manufacturer.
Tiles
283. 060
Glazed ceramic wall tiles for internal or external use shall be to BS 6431.
283. 070
The type, size, water absorption properties, surface finish, colour and
method of manufacture (extruded, dust pressed or cast) shall be shown on
the Drawings.
283. 080
Tiles of the same batch numbers shall be used to avoid differences in

colour shades.
283. 090
Tiles for external use shall be frost resistant with a water absorption
capacity of 3% or less.
Bedding and Grouting
283. 100
Bedding adhesives shall be the following types:
283. 110
adhesive to BS 5980
cement based adhesive with Agreement certificate
polymer modified cement type.
The type of adhesive shall be as recommended by the adhesive

manufacturer for its suitability for its intended application with full allowance
2/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
made for its location (internal or external), the likely exposure conditions
and the substrate conditions when fixing the tiles.
283. 120
Grout for tiles shall be of the following types:
cement based
polymer modified cement based
epoxy resin based.
283. 130
The grout selected shall be appropriate for the conditions to which it will be
subjected e.g. wet, sterile and hygienic areas.
283. 140
Proprietary pre-formed filling strips shall be used at movement joints which

shall be finished with a joint sealant. Joint sealants shall comply with
Section 402.
Storage
283. 150
All tiles shall be stored in clean dry, frost free conditions in their original
cartons and separated from direct contact with the store room floor by a
sheet of polythene.
283. 160
Adhesives and jointing materials shall be stored in similar conditions and as

recommended by the manufacturer. Different materials shall be stored
separately from each other.
WORKMANSHIP
General
283. 170
Tiles shall be fixed by specialist workmen.
283. 180
Workmanship shall be to BS 5385 Parts 1, 2 and 4 as appropriate.
283. 190
All damaged tiles shall be rejected.
3/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

283. 200
The surface to be tiled shall be:
283. 210
dust free and any surface contaminants cleaned off

firmly bonded to its background
plumb and true (+ 3 mm in 2 metres)
adequately dried out (3 weeks minimum for cement sand render, 4
weeks for plaster and 6 weeks for concrete surfaces).
Surfaces shall be primed prior to applying the adhesive when

recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
Fixing Tiles
283. 220
Tiling adhesives shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturers instructions.
283. 230
Surplus adhesive shall be cleaned off the tiles as work proceeds and before
it sets.
283. 240
The thin bed notched trowel method is suitable for internal locations but
shall not be used where water penetration behind the tiles can occur.
283. 250
The thin bed/thick bed floating coat method is suitable for internal wet areas
and external locations.
283. 260
Cement and sand mortar can also be used for internal wet areas as well as
externally. This method requires the background to be wetted to prevent
excessive water absorption from the mortar. Porous tiles may need to be
soaked in clean water and allowed to drain.
283. 270
The finished tile face shall be plumb and true. The joints shall be vertical
and horizontal within 3 mm under a 2 metres straight edge. The width of
joints shall be uniform.
283. 280
Movement joints shall be shown on the Drawings. The joint shall be allowed
to dry out before inserting filler and applying sealant in accordance with
Section 402.
283. 290
Joints between tiles shall not be grouted up until the tiles are adequately
bonded to their background. The minimum period after tiling on porous
4/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
backgrounds shall be 24 hours and on impervious backgrounds 3 days.

283. 300
The surfaces of tiles shall be cleaned off and polished on completion.
283. 310
Washing down of the tiles with water shall not be carried out until the
bedding and grouting has fully set. In wet areas, e.g. showers, 14 days
shall be allowed.
283. 320
External tiles shall be protected against inclement weather conditions until

the grouting has fully set.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
283. 330
The Contractor shall submit full manufacturers literature for tiles, adhesives
and all other proprietary products with recommendations for their suitability
and instructions for their use.
283. 340
Sample reference panels of tiling shall be carried out when instructed by the
Purchaser.
Inspection
283. 350
The background surfaces to receive tiling shall be inspected to confirm their

suitability before the bedding of tiles commences.
5/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 5385
Part 1:
Part 2:
Part 4:
BS 5980
BS 6431
Wall and floor tiling

Code of practice for internal ceramic wall tiling and mosaics in
normal conditions.
Code of practice for external ceramic wall tiling and mosaics.
Code of practice for ceramic tiling and mosaics in specific
conditions.
Specification for adhesives for use with ceramic tiles and mosaics.
Ceramic floor and wall tiles.
6/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
283. 030
Submission of samples
283. 330
Manufacturer's literature
283. 340
Sample panels
283. 350
Notification of background preparation

prior to tiling
7/7
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION NO: 284
TITLE: SCREEDS AND FLOOR FINISHES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Floor Screeds and Heavy Duty Floor Finishes
Solid Tiled Floor Finishes
Plastic Tiles and Sheet Flooring
Mastic Asphalt Floor Finishes
WORKMANSHIP
General
Sand Cement Dense Screeds, Concrete and
Granolithic Toppings
- Surface Preparation/Directly Bonded Construction
- Surface Preparation/Monolithic Construction
- Mixing of Dense Screeds/Toppings
- Joints
- Formwork
- Laying
- Finishing of Screeds/Toppings
- Curing and Protection
- Tolerances
- Surface Hardeners
- General
1/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- Surface Preparation
- Laying of Tiles
- Cleaning and Protection
- Laying
CARPET LAYING
- Protection
- Laying
- Curing and Protection
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Testing
Inspection
2/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
284. 010
This Section defines the following floor finishes:

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
284. 020
screeds (dense, lightweight, proprietary)

plastic tiles and sheet
solid tile flooring
mastic asphalt
This Section does not cover:

(a)
(b)
in-situ terrazzo floor finishes

wooden block type floor finishes
MATERIALS
General
284. 040
The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of screeds and shall
submit samples and/or data sheets as instructed of all materials he
proposes to use to the Purchaser for agreement. All manufactured
materials shall be from agreed or BSI Registered Suppliers.
284. 050
Materials for each type of floor finish shall be obtained from a single
supplier
Floor Screeds and Heavy Duty Floor Finishes
284. 060
All concrete work associated with screeds which is not specifically covered
in Section 284 shall be in accordance with Section 201.
284. 070
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS 12 or Portland blast

furnace cement to BS 146.
284. 080
Coloured cements containing pigment to BS 1014 shall be used for

coloured toppings. Pigment shall not be added at the mixer.
284. 090
Fine aggregate shall be to BS 882 Table 5 (col M).
284. 100
Coarse aggregate shall be 10mm single-sized to BS 882 Table 4.
284. 110
For heavy duty concrete floors the aggregate impact value shall not exceed
25% when tested to BS 812.
3/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
284. 120
Coarse aggregate for granolithic screeds shall be 10mm single-sized

granite chippings to BS 882, Table 4.
284. 130
Aggregates for use in lightweight 'No-Fines' screeds shall be either:
expanded clay pellet aggregate to BS 3797 passing 20mm

but retained on a 10mm test sieve to BS 410.
pulverised sintered fuel ash pellet aggregate to BS 3797 and

passing 14mm but retained on a 10mm test sieve to BS 410.
284. 140
Proprietary dense screeds (modified sand-cement type) shall be supplied

and laid by agreed specialist firms.
284. 150
Proprietary lightweight screeds (aerated cement type with resinous air

entrainer) shall be supplied and laid by agreed specialist firms.
284. 160
Bonding compound agents shall be of agreed proprietary manufacture.
284. 170
Admixtures (eg calcium chloride and anhydrous calcium) shall not be used
unless agreed by the Purchaser.
284. 180
Surface hardeners shall be sodium silicate to BS 3984.

284. 190
The classification type, colour, surface finish, mechanical and physical

qualities and any tile pattern shall be specified on the Drawings.
284. 200
All fittings and special tiles (eg cove skirtings, cappings, channels, stop
treads etc) shall be obtained from the same manufacturer as the floor tiles.
284. 210
Ceramic quarry tiles shall be to BS 6431.
284. 220
Concrete tiles shall be to BS 1197: Part 2.
284. 230
Cast stone tiles shall be to BS 1217.
284. 240
Glazed ceramic tiles (internal) shall be to BS 6431.
284. 245
Terazzo floor tiles shall be to BS 4131.
284. 250
Separating layer membranes shall be polythene sheet, not less than 500
gauge.
4/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 260
EFW Contract
Sand for bedding mortar shall be to BS 1200: Table 1.

284. 270
PVC tiles or sheeting shall be to BS 5085 or BS 3261 and shall be of a type

and colour specified in the room data sheets. The size and thickness shall
be appropriate for the location.
284. 280
Sheeting shall be PVC flexible sheeting of a width to provide economy in

welding and satisfactory laying. All sheeting shall be capable of being
welded to provide a watertight membrane, and shall be welded where it
abuts PVC flexible skirting and in other areas instructed by the purchaser.
284. 290
Skirtings, where scheduled on room data sheets, shall be PVC flexible

sheeting, coved accordingly. They shall be capable of being welded at
junctions along their length, at corners and to the sheet flooring.
284. 300
Mastic asphalt grade shall be specified on the Drawings and shall be either:
(a)
limestone aggregate asphalt to BS 6925
(b)
natural rock aggregate asphalt to BS 6577
284. 310
Bitumen priming coats for metal and concrete surfaces shall be bitumen
cut-back with a viscosity Redwood No. 2 of 25 secs maximum at 25C and
a maximum volatile solvent content of 60 per cent by weight.
284. 320
Isolating membranes for asphalt floors shall be either:
284. 330
resin-coated glass fibre tissue

bitumenized sheathing felt to BS 747
Rubbing sand for surface treatment shall be clean coarse sand from natural
deposits (passing 600 micron sieve and retained by 212 micron sieve to BS
410).
5/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORKMANSHIP
General
284. 340
All materials shall be stored in dry, weathertight locations in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations to prevent deterioration and
damage. The general requirements in the Specification Section 201
Concrete Production shall apply.
284. 350
All screeds/toppings, mastic asphalt, tiles shall be laid by agreed

experienced or specialist personnel.
284. 360
Whenever practicable, flooring shall not be laid until the work of other
trades working in the same area has been completed.
284. 370
Flooring shall be protected adequately during subsequent building

operations. Damaged flooring shall be repaired or replaced as directed by
the Purchaser.
Sand Cement Dense Screeds, Concrete and Granolithic Topping
Surface Preparation/Directly Bonded Construction
284. 380
Hardened smooth concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of all debris and

loose dirt and then mechanically roughened to remove laitance and expose
but not loosen the coarse aggregate.
284. 390
When the concrete base is less than 100mm thick on precast concrete
units, and where mechanical scabbling may cause damage, the roughening
of the surface shall be achieved by shot or grit blasting.
284. 400
The hardened roughened concrete surfaces shall be washed clean to

remove all adhering dirt and dust immediately prior to laying the screed.
Any cracks or loose pockets shall be cut back to sound concrete and made
good to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
284. 410
The concrete surfaces shall be sprayed with water and maintained in a wet
condition for several hours prior to laying the screed to prevent suction.
Surplus water shall be removed 30 minutes before the application of a
proprietary bonding agent and the laying of the screed. Drainage holes in
roof slabs shall be made good with cement/sand mortar 1:3.
Surface Preparation/Monolithic Construction

6/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 420
EFW Contract
Fresh concrete bases to receive monolithic toppings/floor or roof screeds

shall be brushed with a stiff broom while the concrete surface is still plastic.
All laitance and dust shall be removed and the surface washed down prior
to laying the topping/floor or roof screed.
Mixing Dense Screeds/Toppings
284. 430
Mix proportions shall be:
cement sand screeds 1:4
cement/sand
concrete toppings
1:1:3
aggregate
(10mm maximum size)
cement/sand/coarse
granolithic toppings
1:1:3cement/sand/granite chippings
284. 440
The materials for dense screeds and toppings shall be gauged by weight
with allowance made for the moisture content of sand.
284. 450
Sufficient mixing water to ensure full compaction shall be used. The

excessive use of water shall be avoided.
284. 460
Forced action mechanical mixers shall be used. They shall be cleaned out
when there is a change in the mix, a break in the work and at the end of
each day's work.
284. 470
The gauging of materials for lightweight screeds shall be by volume unless

otherwise instructed.
284. 480
Proprietary screeds/toppings shall be mixed strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.
284. 490
In cold weather conditions:
screeds/toppings shall not be mixed or laid when the

ambient temperature is 3C and falling
7/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 500
284. 510
EFW Contract
mixing and laying can proceed when the temperature is 1C

and rising provided the sand and water are heated. Frozen
materials shall not be used.
screeds/toppings shall not be laid on frozen or frost covered

surfaces
In hot weather conditions ensure that:
full compaction can be carried out avoiding the drying out of

the mix and premature stiffening
proper curing and full hydration takes place
drying is controlled to minimise shrinkage
In wet conditions protect the freshly laid surface from rain damage.
Joints
284. 520
Construction joints shall be formed in the screed topping to coincide with

joints in the structural concrete. Joints will be of a clean vertical butt type.
One bay will be separated from another by a strip of building paper or
coating of bitumen or other agreed suitable material to prevent bond
between adjacent bays. The joints shall be compacted thoroughly at the
edges.
284. 530
Movement joints in the base concrete shall be continued through the

screed/topping.
284. 540
The difference in level between the screed or paving finish on either side of
the joints shall not exceed 1mm.
Formwork
284. 550
The forms for the screeds or pavings shall be fixed on a firm foundation and
supported throughout their length so that they will not be disturbed by
spreading and compaction. The forms shall be true to line within 3mm
and level within the permitted tolerance on the floors.
Laying
8/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
284. 560
Lay in bays not greater than 15m2 in area with a length to breadth ratio not
exceeding 1.5.
284. 570
Separate unbonded cement/sand screeds, concrete and granolithic

toppings shall be laid in 2 layers (65mm minimum thickness) without
bonding to the base concrete. The lower layer shall be thicker than the
upper layer. The minimum thickness of the upper layer shall be 20mm and
it shall be placed immediately following compaction of the lower layer.
284. 580
Thickness of separate bonded cement/sand screeds, concrete and

granolithic toppings shall be shown on the Drawings. The minimum
thickness shall be 40mm.
For thicknesses less than 50mm lay in one layer fully

bonded to the base.
For thicknesses greater than 50mm lay in two layers, with

the lower layer thicker than the upper layer. The minimum
thickness of the upper layer shall be 20mm and shall be
placed immediately following compaction of the lower layer.
284. 590
Monolithic cement/sand screeds, concrete and granolithic toppings shall be

laid to the required thicknesses within 3 hours (or less in hot weather) of the
base concrete being laid. Granolithic finishes shall not be less than 18mm
nor greater than 35mm thickness and the edges of the finish shall be
coincident with that of the structural base.
284. 600
'Lightweight' roof screeds shall be laid to a smooth even surface to receive

the topping. The minimum thickness laid shall be:
284. 610
50mm for bonded clay pellet aggregate screeds
25mm for bonded fuel ash aggregate screeds
'Proprietary' screeds shall be mixed and laid strictly in accordance with the
Finishing of Screeds/Toppings
284. 620
Hand or power float to a smooth even surface as soon as the surface is
9/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
sufficiently hard. Re-trowel as necessary to obtain a suitable finish.

Remove loose particles of laitance on completion.
The practice of 'dusting' of granolithic toppings shall not be allowed.
284. 630
Non-slip treatments, such as coarse chromite grains, shall be sprinkled on

the surface at a rate of not less than 1 kg/m2 and lightly trowelled in before
final trowelling.
Curing and Protection
284. 640
Screed toppings shall be cured for at least seven days by the use of plastic
sheeting secured to frames which overlap the bays or an agreed liquid
applied curing agent. Where plastic sheeting is used it shall be anchored to
adjacent bays to promote curing.
284. 650
The floor shall not be opened to traffic until the curing is complete and it has
attained adequate strength. Vehicles shall not be permitted on the floor for
at least 14 days. The Contractor shall take all possible precautions which
include the use of scaffold barriers and signboards to ensure that the
specified curing period and protection is provided.
284. 660
Artificial heating of areas where dense screeds/toppings have been laid

shall not be permitted for 4 to 6 weeks after laying, after which time the
temperature shall be raised slowly.
Tolerances
284. 670
The screed surfaces shall be laid true to levels or falls to prevent ponding.
284. 680
Tolerances on the surface levels of floor screeds shall be 6mm, with a

maximum variation in the gap beneath a 3 metre straight edge of 5mm, and
a maximum variation beneath a 1 metre straight edge of 2mm. The
tolerance on screed level shall not be combined with the tolerance on
structural floor level in such a way that the specified tolerance on screed
thickness is exceeded.
Surface Hardeners
284. 690
Surface hardeners shall be applied to fully cured concrete surfaces after the
surface has been cleaned and any cracks or holes repaired.
10/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 700
EFW Contract
Sodium silicate solution shall be applied in two coats in accordance with the
General
284. 710
All workmanship shall be to BS 5385
284. 720
Each delivery of tiles shall be checked to ensure a match with the agreed
sample.
Surface Preparation
284. 730
Ensure that the base is free from any contamination, any looseness or
hollows. Base screeds shall be air dried for at least 3 weeks and concrete
screeds for at least 6 weeks after curing.
Laying of Tiles
284. 740
Tiles shall be bedded either:
in mortar on a separating layer

in mortar bonded to the base
with bonding adhesive
284. 750
No work shall be carried out when the temperature is 2C or below, or when

temperatures of 2C or less are expected during the drying period.
284. 760
Bedding mortar shall be cement/sand, 1:4 mix. It shall be of 'dry mix' with
just sufficient water to hold the mortar together. The mortar shall be
machine mixed.
284. 770
Bedding mortar shall be laid to a depth not less than 15mm of more than
40mm. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated and screeded to the
required level using screeding rules no more than 750-900mm apart and
laid to levels and falls.
284. 780
The separating layer, when specified, shall be laid loose with minimum laps
of 100mm and overlaid by the cement/sand bedding mortar.
284. 790
To bond the bedding mortar to the base surface, a slurry of 1:1 cement:
clean fine sharp sand shall be brushed over the surface prior to the mortar
being spread or alternatively a proprietary bonding agent shall be used.
11/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
284. 800
The depth of the mortar bed will be average 20mm and in no case less than
15mm or more than 40mm. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated by
pounding to form a compact mass and screeded to the required level using
screeding rules. Rules should be 750 to 900mm apart.
284. 810
In areas where chemical resistance is not required a grout/doping coat shall

be poured onto the bedding mortar to a uniform depth of 3mm and will
consist of 1 : 1 Portland Cement and sand mixed with sufficient water to
make it slightly runny. The mixture shall be laid with a trowel over an area
not exceeding 2 square metres at a time.
284. 820
Alternatively, a layer of dry Portland cement shall be laid on top of the

compacted mortar bed. Tiles may only be laid after this cement has
become wet with the moisture in the screed.
284. 830
Tiles shall be completely free from dust and dirt and shall be dipped in clear
water and excess water shaken off before laying.
284. 840
When bedding in adhesive the tiles shall be dry and the adhesive applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommended
thickness. The tiles shall be pressed firmly and tamped into the adhesive.
284. 850
Tiles shall be laid to a straight joint and tapped lightly into position into the
grout before the bedding mortar has set. Care should be taken at this stage
not to move the tiles about more than absolutely necessary. The tiles shall
then be beaten down using a wooden beater to ensure that they are flat and
level.
284. 860
Normal floor joints shall be never more than 4mm wide and never less than
3mm wide. Floor tiles in corporate identity toilet and other areas shall be
laid with 6mm joints using grey grout.
12/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
284. 870
Where a sand/cement grout is required, the joints shall be filled with a grout
of 1 : 1 cement sand brushed over the tiles. After the joint mixture has sunk
below the level of the tiles an application of 1 part of cement to 1 part of fine
silver sand shall be made by rubbing over the tiling to fill up the joints. No
water is required for this operation and dry clean rags should be used for
cleaning and rubbing down. This process and cleaning shall be completed
when the pointing material is still moist.
284. 880
Coved skirting shall be bedded, jointed and pointed in the same manner as
the tiles and with joints aligning with the floor tiling joints.
284. 890
Expansion joints will be made at all junctions, between floor tiles and
skirtings, walls, gullies and other floor finishes and at intervals not
exceeding 4500mm centres in both directions, and directly over expansion
joints in the structural concrete and supporting walls and beams in
suspended floors.
284. 900
Expansion joints shall be 10mm wide taken down to the surface of the
damp proof membrane or concrete slab as appropriate. The joint filler shall
be expanded neoprene strips, taken within 10mm of the final surface of the
tiles and the final 10mm of the expansion joints filled with a polysulphide
filler laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
284. 910
All tiled floors will be finished evenly and level. They shall be free from all
irregularities. All joints will be flush and free from voids and all other
blemishes. The bottom of coved skirtings will be flush with the finished
floor.
284. 915
Terrazzo tiles shall be ground and polished after laying in accordance with
BS 5385 Part 5.
284. 920
After laying, the floor shall be closed to traffic for a minimum period of 4
days and only light traffic shall be allowed for a further 10 days
284. 930
The finished floor shall be left free from mortar, grout and all other marks
and imperfections. Final cleaning shall not be done until all joints are set
and shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
13/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

Surface Preparation
284. 940
The floor shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased with a fluid

recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Any irregularities in the
surface shall be made good with a filler supplied by the PVC tile or sheeting
manufacturer.
284. 945
Floors to receive PVC sheet or tiles shall be levelled with a self levelling
smoothing compound ("latex"), mixed and laid in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Protein free compounds shall be used in
food preparation areas.
Laying
284. 950
Before start of laying the flooring, the dryness/moisture in the base shall be
tested to BS 8203, and shall be the minimum stated in the code or the
requirements of the adhesive and flooring manufacturers.
284. 960
The adhesives used shall be to BS 8203 and as recommended by the

tiling/sheeting manufacturer.
284. 970
Tiles shall be set out and laid with continuous in-line joints in accordance
with a setting out layout submitted to the Purchaser for agreement. Joints
between the tiles shall be of the minimum width compatible with the efficient
laying of the floor. Tiles shall be set out from the centre of the space/room
unless agreed otherwise, so that:(a)
(b)
Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size, and;

Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width
284. 980
All flooring shall be neatly cut and tight around the profile of any
obstructions rising above the floor surface.
284. 990
Skirtings shall be fitted true to line complete with all stop ends, internal and
external mitres. All joints shall be neatly welded.
284. 1000
The floor shall be finished complete, welded where specified and all PVC
skirtings and dividing strips fixed. After the adhesive has set the floor shall
be washed clean. Layout of sheets shall be such that the number of seams
is kept to a minimum. The Contractor shall obtain the Purchasers
agreement to setting out of seams before commencing work.
CARPET LAYING
14/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 1001
EFW Contract
Carpet laying shall be laid generally in accordance with N.B.S.

Specification M51 as amplified below.
(b)
The carpet is supplied in 970mm widths and shall be edge sewn in

accordance with the manufacturers recommendation, using
machine sewing so far as practicable. The carpet shall be laid
using carpet grippers of appropriate quality and type laid round the
perimeter of the space/room. At openings and free edges, edging
strips or agreed alternative shall be used. Cross seams will be
permitted where necessary for practical purposes and subject to the
Underlay shall be hair/jute of 56oz/m2 .

284. 1003
Contract carpet shall be of a quality suitable for the locations and use
indicated on Room Data Sheets. The Contractor shall provide carpet
available in a range of colours for the Employer to select at the appropriate
time.
284. 1004
Edging/cover strips shall be stainless steel with matt finish.
284. 1005
Coir door mats shall be 18mm thick, located in purpose made mat wells.
Protection
284. 1010
The Contractor is responsible for providing protection to all floor finishes by

such as thick cardboard, if appropriate, which shall be taped down to
prevent damage. No vehicular traffic shall be permitted on the flooring.
The protective covering shall be removed and the floor washed clean and
made ready for use just prior to handover.
Surface Preparation
284. 1020
Concrete surfaces shall be clean, free from contamination and dry. The
surface shall be primed with one even coat of cut back bitumen primer.
284. 1030
Where an isolating membrane is specified the concrete shall have a slightly

coarsened surface.
284. 1040
Isolating membranes shall be laid loose with 50mm laps.
15/20
Onyx South Downs
284. 1050
EFW Contract
Metal surfaces shall receive one coat of cut-back bitumen primer and
allowed to dry.
Laying
284. 1060
Mastic asphalt shall not be laid at ambient temperatures below 10C.
284. 1070
Mastic asphalt blocks shall be melted in mechanically agitated mixers to

maintain strict temperature control. Molten asphalt should not be heated
above 230C. The use of heating cauldrons shall only be permitted with the
284. 1080
Dry limestone dust or other fine inert dust shall be used to prevent asphalt
sticking to buckets. The use of oil or ashes shall not be permitted.
284. 1090
Flooring asphalt shall be laid to the required thickness in one coat to

provide an even thickness and with a surface free from imperfections.
284. 1100
Blow holes shall be pierced and made good while the asphalt is still warm.
284. 1110
The asphalt shall be laid with joints staggered not less than 150mm. The
joints shall be clean and neat. Alternate bay construction shall be used
when bays exceed 100m2.
284. 1120
Hot asphalt shall be applied to warm and clean edges of previous bays.
Any surplus shall be removed and the asphalt laid to form joints while
edges are still warm.
284. 1130
A gap of 50mm shall be left between asphalt coats and abutting surfaces.
The gap shall be filled within 12 hours with flooring asphalt when cooling
shrinkage has taken place.
284. 1140
Float the surface to a smooth finish. If a rubbing sand finish is specified,

remove surplus sand on completion.
284. 1150
Skirtings shall be formed in two coats (13mm total thickness) with a 25mm
radius coved fillet.
284. 1160
All channels and outlets shall be formed to ensure watertight joints.
Curing and Protection

284. 1170
On completion, remove all droppings, leave floor in a clean condition and

prevent other materials coming into contact with the asphalt. Maintain an
16/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
ambient temperature above 10C for at least 3 days to allow conditioning of

the floor.
284. 1180
The flooring shall not be used before it has cooled to the ambient air
temperature.
QUALITY CONTROL
General
284. 1190
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser two copies of Certificates

verifying that all materials comply with the Specification and the relevant
British Standards including results of tests specified. Certificates for raw
materials shall be provided for each consignment.
284. 1200
Two copies of all manufacturers technical literature and installation

recommendations shall be submitted to the Purchaser.
284. 1210
The Contractor shall obtain samples of each proprietary material to

demonstrate quality and colour etc as proposed for use in the Permanent
Works.
284. 1220
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser proposals for laying, care and
maintenance of all screeds and floor finishes in accordance with the
284. 1230
The Contractor shall retain records of all stages of the installation of

screeds and floor finishes. Dates of laying, testing carried out, environment
conditions shall be noted for each area of floor finish.
Testing
284. 1240
Impact testing for suitability of screed for category of usage shall be carried
out on dense floor screeds laid on solid concrete floors not earlier than 14
days after laying the screed and before laying levelling screeds or finishes.
Tests shall not be carried out on dense screeds laid on hollow pot or similar
floors, toppings or lightweight screeds which could suffer damage.
284. 1250
The number and random locations of tests shall be agreed with the
Purchaser. The minimum number of tests shall be 4 per room area and not
less than 4 per each 10 m2 floor area for areas designed for heavy wheeled
traffic usage or 2 per each 10 m2 for light traffic usage.
A test shall be carried out in each doorway. Test results to be submitted to
17/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
the Purchaser.
284. 1260
The acceptable limits for indentation depths resulting from the tests shall be
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
equipment. (BRE screed tester and depth gauge).
284. 1270
After curing, all screeded floor finishes shall be inspected for curling,
excessive cracking, material breakdown or hollowness.
284. 1280
In all cases appropriate remedial action shall be agreed with the Purchaser
in the event of non compliance.
284. 1290
Hardness and composition analysis tests for mastic asphalt samples from
site re-melting equipment shall be carried out to BS 5284 at the time of
laying. Test results to be submitted to the Purchaser.
Inspection
284. 1300
The inspection of surface preparation of all substrates shall be carried out

prior to laying screeds or floor finishes.
18/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 12
BS 146
BS 410
BS 747
BS 812
BS 8203
Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland Cement

Specification for Portland-blastfurnace cement
Specification for test sieves
Specification for roofing felts
Methods for Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregate,
Sands and Fillers
Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
products
Specification for concrete flooring tiles and fittings
Specification for building sands from natural sources and 1200
Specification for cast stone
Specification for unbacked flexible PVC flooring
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS 649: 1997.
Specification for lightweight aggregates for concrete
Specification for sodium silicates
Specification for Terrazo tiles
Specification for backed flexible PVC flooring
Methods: Sampling and testing mastic asphalt and pitchmastic used
in building.
Code of practice for tile flooring and slab flooring
Ceramic floor and wall tiles
Specification for mastic asphalt for building (natural rock asphalt
aggregate)
Specification for mastic asphalt for building and civil Engineering
(limestone aggregate)
Code of practice for installation of sheet and tile flooring
CP 204
In-situ floor finishes
BS 882
BS 1014
BS 1197
BS 1199
BS 1217
BS 3261
BS 3797
BS 3984
BS 4131
BS 5085
BS 5284
BS 5385
BS 6431
BS 6577
BS 6925
19/20
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
284.040
Material samples.
284.1190
284.1200
Material technical literature.
284.1210
Quality control samples.
284.1220
Method statement.
284.1230
Construction records.
284.1250
Impact testing results.
284.1290
Mastic asphalt test results.
284.1300
Inspection of surface preparation.
20/20
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 310 : WINDOWS, DOORS & SHUTTERS
SECTION NO: 311
TITLE: WINDOWS AND DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Doors and Windows
Glazing
Ironmongery
Handling and Storage
WORKMANSHIP
General
Installation
Glazing
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Inspection
1/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
311. 010
This Section defines the general requirements for the supply and
installation of standard door and window sets including hatchways, shutters,
louvres and roof lights.
311. 030
This Section does not include specialist proprietary items including roller
shutter or sliding doors, etc.
MATERIALS
General
311. 040
Standard proprietary and purpose made doors, windows and shutters shall
be made by agreed manufacturers.
311. 050
Sample sections shall be submitted to the Purchaser to demonstrate the

standard of fabrication and finish to be provided.
311. 060
Types, duty and mode of operation, materials (timber, steel, upvc,

aluminium), dimensions, exposure classification and performance
characteristics, protective finishes, glazing requirements, acoustic
resistance, durability, level of insulation, fire resistance, locks and fittings,
ironmongery shall be shown on the Drawings.
Special furniture including escutcheons, card holders and name plates shall
be finished to match the remainder of the furniture unless otherwise
specified.
311. 070
All mechanical fastenings shall be protected against corrosion. Metalwork,

nails, screws shall be galvanised as a minimum requirement. In exposed,
corrosive or high humidity areas they shall receive other suitable protection
such as plating.
311. 080
Lost headed nails to BS 1202 shall be used for decorative wood work to
allow for wood stopping.
311. 090
Brass or stainless steel screws only shall be used in hardwood, acidic wood
e.g. oak, or when clear finishes are specified. Screw cups shall be brass or
stainless steel pressed socket pattern.
2/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
311. 100
The durability, maintenance and sound insulation requirements of windows

and rooflights shall comply with CP 153 Parts 2 & 3. The requirements for
wind resistance, watertightness and air permeability shall be to BS 6375.
Fire resistance shall be to BS 476 Part 8.
311. 110
Door and window sets etc when fabricated to site measurements shall allow
a 5mm perimeter clearance to the openings in the structure.
Doors and Windows
311. 120
External and internal wood door sets, leaves and frames shall be to BS
4787 and CP 151 Part 1.
311. 130
External wood door sets shall be of hardwood, internal doorsets shall be of

softwood unless otherwise specified.
311. 140
External opening doors and windows shall be fully weather stripped to

permit minimum air infiltration and maximum resistance to water
penetration.
311. 150
Weather stripping shall be one of the following types:

siliconised woven polypropylene pile
extruded flexible pvc to BS 2571
unless otherwise specified.
311. 160
Aluminium alloy windows shall be to BS 4873.
311. 170
Steel windows, sills and doors shall be to BS 6510.
311. 180
Agreed intumescent seals shall be provided around fire doors.
311. 190
Veneered doors in pairs shall have matching veneers.
311. 200
All flush timber doors shall be flat and smooth, with lippings, glue bonded
and facings and be of fire check construction to BS 476.
311. 210
Solid core flush doors shall be made from:
blockboard with hardwood lippings and edges
or solid timber core strips butt jointed glued with grain

reversed and with 4mm plywood facings and hardwood
lippings.
3/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Glazing
311. 220
Factory glazed windows shall be to BS 6262.

The type and thickness of glazing shall satisfy any particular performance
requirements and take fully into account the size of each panel with respect
to safety considerations.
Hermetically sealed double glazing units shall be to BS 5713.
311. 230
Glass for glazing shall be to BS 952 Part 1
311. 240
Glazing sealants and compounds shall be as recommended by the

manufacturers to provide the required hardness, be compatible with the
contact surfaces and be coloured where specified to match the adjacent
frame surround.
311. 250
Glazing accessories, beads, tape, setting blocks, channels, gaskets and

spacers shall be as recommended by the glazing manufacturers.
311. 260
Non combustible glazing channels shall be used for fire resistant doors.
311. 270
Setting blocks, distance pieces and location blocks in plasticised pvc shall
be to BS 2571.
311. 280
Linseed oil putty when used with soft wood frames shall be to BS 544.
311. 290
Cleaners, primers and sealers shall be as recommended by the sealant

manufacturers.
311. 300
Fixing screws shall be as recommended by the door and window

manufacturers. The fixing plugs shall be nylon or plastic correctly sized to
suit the fixing screws.
Ironmongery
311. 305
Door furniture in general shall be selected from the "Hewi" range nylon
coated and coloured grey or ivory. The Contractor may use an alternative
equivalent range subject to the Purchasers agreement.
311. 306
Locks shall be selected such that they are compatible to and may be suited
with locks in the Employers existing Buildings.
311. 310
The minimum requirement for hanging doors shall be as follows unless

otherwise specified:
4/11
Onyx South Downs
311. 320
EFW Contract
Internal non-fire doors up to 50 kg in weight or up to

2150mm x 850mm in size shall be hung on one pair of
unwashered steel hinges (bright zinc plated) 100mm x 75m
m each fixed to the door and frame by 8 steel countersunk
screws.
Internal fire doors up to 50 kg in weight or up to 2150mm x

850mm in size shall be hung on 1 pair of unwashered steel
hinges (bright zinc plated) 100mm x 75mm and fixed to the
door and frame by 8 steel countersunk screws.
Internal doors, fire and non-fire which are heavier or larger

than described above and up to 2500mm x 1000mm in size
shall be hung on 2 pairs of washered steel hinges (bright
zinc plated) 100mm x 75mm each fixed in the door and
frame by 8 steel countersunk screws.
External doors up to 50 kg in weight and up to 2150 x

850mm in size shall be hung on 1 pair of 100mm x 75mm
stainless steel hinges and fixed to the door and frame by 8
stainless steel countersunk screws.
External doors heavier than above and up to 2500mm x

1000mm in size similar to the above but 2 pairs required.
Internal doors which are required to open 180 shall be hung as follows:
Non-fire doors up to 50 kg in weight and up to 2150mm x

850mm in size shall be hung on 1 pair of unwashered steel
projecting hinges (bright zinc plated) 100mm x 100mm each
fixed to door and frame by 8 steel countersunk screws.
Fire doors as above - 1 pairs of hinges.
Internal doors which are required to open 180 and are

heavier and/or larger than that described above and up to
2500mm x 1000mm in size shall be hung on 2 pairs of
washered steel projecting hinges (bright zinc plated) 100mm
x 100mm each fixed to door and frame by 8 countersunk
screws.
External doors which are required to open 180 shall be hung as

follows:
5/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Doors up to 50 kg in weight and up to 2150mm x 850mm in

size shall be hung on 1 pair of S.S projecting hinges 100mm
x 100mm each fixed to door and frame by 8 S.S
countersunk screws.
Doors heavier than above and up to 2500mm x 1000mm in

size, similar to the above but 2 pairs required.
Handling and Storage

311. 330
All materials shall be stored in clean dry conditions.
311. 340
Doors, windows, rooflights and fittings shall be stored in the manufacturers

protective packaging. Priming of woodwork shall not be considered as
providing adequate protection.
311. 350
Timber door sets shall be maintained within specified moisture content

levels as necessary.
311. 360
Doors and windows shall be stored clear of the ground and stacked so that
they are not subject to distortion or damage. Door sets shall be stored flat.
311. 370
Glass units and sheets shall be handled with care to avoid breaking or
chipping and stored on edge in a near vertical position and protected
against hard uneven bearing surfaces. No moisture shall be trapped
between units or sheets.
311. 380
Glass shall not be allowed to come into contact with alkaline materials such
as cement or lime.
WORKMANSHIP
General
311. 390
The handling and unloading of doors, windows, rooflights etc shall avoid
damage and distortion. The units shall be kept in their protective packaging
prior to installation.
311. 400
All doors and windows shall be numbered to ensure installation at the

correct locations.
311. 410
The installation of doors, windows, rooflights, glazing etc shall be carried

out by experienced personnel.
6/11
Onyx South Downs
311. 420
EFW Contract
Proprietary door sets, windows, rooflights etc shall be fixed in accordance

with manufacturers instructions. Doors, windows etc supplied pre-hung
shall be kept closed and secured during the fixing of the frames.
Installation
311. 430
The framework of windows, doors, rooflights etc shall be fixed to the

surrounding structure by positive mechanical anchors.
311. 440
The units shall be correctly positioned in relation to the openings, fixed

plumb and level with packings at fixing points to prevent distortion as the
fixings are tightened.
311. 450
The gaps between the frames and the structure shall be filled with non
combustible material when fixing fire resisting door sets.
311. 460
Perimeter pointing with sealants shall be carried out in accordance with

Generic Specification Section 402.
311. 470
Timber exposed by site works shall be retreated with two liberal coats of
brush or spray applied preservative as used in the initial treatment or with a
solution recommended by the preservative manufacturer.
311. 480
Purpose made wood door sets shall be tested at fabrication and erection
stages for moisture content of timber sections using an electrical moisture
meter to the manufacturer's instruction. 5% of cross sections shall be tested
and 90% of test results shall lie within the ranges specified in BS 1186 Part
1.
311. 490
The quality of workmanship in joinery shall be to BS 1186 Part 2.
311. 500
Doors shall be hung from the frames by hinges as specified and fixed with 8
no matching countersunk screws per hinge.
311. 510
Hinges shall generally be located 125mm from the top edge and 250mm
from the bottom edge. Other hinges when specified shall be equally
spaced between the top and bottom hinges.
311. 520
All fire doors shall have a minimum of one pair of butt hinges. Clause
311.310 refers.
311. 530
Doors which are required to open 180 shall be hung on 100mm x 100mm
steel projecting hinges. Clause 311.320 refers.
311. 540
All door furniture shall be removed prior to carrying out any preparatory and
7/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
decorating work.
311. 550
All moving and closing parts of timber construction shall fit accurately with a
regular visible gap of 1.5mm.
Glazing
311. 560
Glazing workmanship shall comply generally with BS 6262.
311. 570
Glass with damaged edges or surface imperfections shall be discarded.

Glazed units with damaged edge tapes shall not be used.
311. 580
Glazing channels and surrounds which are to receive the glass shall be
cleaned and any coatings not firmly bonded to the substrate shall be
removed.
311. 590
Primer and sealer shall be applied to dry, clean joint surfaces as instructed
by the sealant manufacturer.
311. 600
Patterned glass in external locations shall be fixed with the smoother face
outside.
311. 610
Glazing in timber surrounds shall be well bedded, back puttied and

sprigged, front puttied and neatly cleaned off to sight lines.
311. 620
Georgian wired glass shall be cut square and parallel with the direction of
the wires. Observation windows in doors shall be bedded in a soft packing
or turned over wash leather or in neoprene gaskets as specified.
311. 630
Glazing in fire resisting doors shall be installed in accordance with the

8/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
General
311. 640
The Contractor shall submit all manufacturers literature including full

instructions for installation and shop drawings as appropriate.
311. 650
Test certificates shall be provided to confirm the adequacy of all units to

satisfy performance requirements.
Inspection
311. 660
Openings in external walls shall be checked prior to installation of frames to

ensure that all preparatory work, fixings and damp proof membranes have
been correctly installed.
311. 670
All units shall be checked for size, line and level, distortion. Hinged doors
and windows shall be checked for the correct hand and location.
311. 680
All opening units shall be checked for smooth swing and correct closure
with frame and locking mechanism.
311. 690
All furniture shall be checked and all keys labelled.
9/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 476
Fire tests on building materials and structures.
BS 544
BS 952
Part 1:
Specification for linseed oil putty for use in wooden frames.

Glass for glazing.
Classification.
BS 1186
BS 1202
BS 2571
BS 4787
BS 4873
BS 5713
BS 6262
BS 6375
BS 6510
Timber for and workmanship in joinery.

Specification for flexible PVC compounds.
Internal and external wood door sets, door leaves and frames.
Specification for aluminium alloy windows.
Specification for hermetically sealed flat double glazing units.
Code of practice for glazing in buildings.
Performance of windows.
Specification for steel windows, sills, window boards and doors.
CP 151
Part 1:
Doors and windows including frames and linings.

Wooden doors.
CP 153
Part 2:
Part 3:
Windows and rooflights.

Durability and maintenance.
Sound insulation.
10/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 2 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY TRACTOR
CLAUSE REFERENCE
311.050
Samples to be submitted.
311.640
Manufacturer's literature.
311.650
Test certificates.
11/11
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 310 : SHUTTER DOORS
SECTION: 312
TITLE: SHUTTER DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Finishes
Delivery and Storage
WORKMANSHIP
Handling
Erection and Installation
QUALITY CONTROL
Checking
Commissioning
Record Drawings
1/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
312. 010
This Section defines the supply, installation and commissioning of shutter

doors.
MATERIALS
General
312. 030
Shutter doors will be sliding folding type, motor operated from push-to-run
button stations with end of travel limit switches. Erection, installation and
commissioning instructions will be prepared and supplied by the
manufacturer.
312. 035
The door leaves shall be constructed absolutely resistant against torsion,

using stiffening frames torsion and appropriate steel sections.
Finishes
312. 040
Shutter doors are to be fabricated from mild steel galvanised by the

manufacturer.
Delivery and Storage
312. 050
The Contractor shall take delivery of the doors and associated components,
unload them from the delivery vehicle and store them in a dry covered
store.
The doors shall be protected from the effects of damp and all moving parts
and hinges be well greased. Large parts shall be laid on timber baulks.
WORKMANSHIP
Handling
312. 060
The doors shall be carefully handled and the contractor shall be fully
responsible for the doors and associated components upon delivery to site.
2/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Erection and Installation

312. 070
Door frames shall be of galvanised mild steel fixed to masonry, concrete or

steelwork with steel anchors. The space between the wall and frame shall
be entirely filled on all sides using cement mortar. Fixing on exposed
concrete or fair-face masonry surfaces shall be effected by means of an
appropriate construction which does not affect the uniform appearance of
the exposed or fair-masonry surfaces. The connecting joints between the
frame and all surfaces shall be sealed and finished.
312. 072
The doors shall be erected and installed in a workmanlike manner entirely

in accordance with the manufacturers instructions using personnel who are
fully experienced in the erection and installation of shutter doors.
The alignment, verticality and level of the doors and components shall be
within the manufacturers specified tolerances and all minimum clearances
shall be maintained. All motors, drives, chains and pulleys shall be properly
installed and power and control circuits connected as detailed in the
Any on-site modifications or deviations from the manufacturer's
recommendations shall be agreed by the Purchaser.
312. 075
The door when installed shall be operated entirely as intended. All safety
switches shall be fully tested. The doors shall be completely weathertight
when in a closed position.
Upon completion of erection and installation all parts and components shall
be thoroughly cleared of all grease, dust and other marks.
QUALITY CONTROL
Checking
312. 080
Immediately after delivery to site the doors shall be unpacked and all parts
and components checked against the inventory supplied by the
manufacturer. The Contractor shall also check for damage, corrosion or
other deterioration of parts or components.
The Contractor shall familiarise himself with the erection, installation and
commissioning instructions and ensure that he fully understands the
3/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
procedures prior to the doors being required for erection. The Contractor
shall allow sufficient time in his programme to obtain, if required,
clarification from the manufacturer.
Commissioning
312. 100
After completion of installation and connection of mains power the operation

of each door shall be proven to the satisfaction of the Purchaser. The
operation of all safety switches shall be checked by a suitable test to the
Record Drawings
312. 110
Upon completion of installation and commissioning the Contractor shall

mark up a set of the Installation Drawings to show any modifications which
have been made on site.
4/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
below.
None.
5/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
312. 100
Safety switch test method.
312. 110
Amended Installation drawings
6/6
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP : 330 : PAINTWORK
SECTION NO : 331
TITLE: PAINTING OF BUILDINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Miscellaneous Preparatory Materials
WORKMANSHIP
General
Colour/Finishes
Unsuitable Site Conditions
Surface Preparation
- General
- Iron and Steelwork
- Timber and Plywood
- Galvanised Metalwork
- Brickwork, Blockwork, Concrete,
Plaster and Rendered Surfaces
- General
- Primers
- Sealers
- Undercoats
- Finishing Coats
Methods of Application
- Roller Painting
1/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
- Brush Painting
- Spray Painting
QUALITY CONTROL
General

2/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
331. 010
This Section defines the requirements for the supply and site application of
paint including substrate surface preparation and related activities.
331. 020
This Section does not apply to structural steelwork, which shall be painted
in accordance with Section 211.
MATERIALS
General
331. 030
All painting work shall be carried out to BS 6150.
331. 040
All paint materials shall be branded and obtained from an agreed

manufacturer. Substitute materials will not be accepted. Preparatory
materials shall be compatible with the paint system to be applied.
331. 050
All materials shall comply with the paint systems defined in the
Painting/Colour Finishes Schedules and shall be delivered to Site with
labels on all containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand name, type of
paint, stock number, batch number. They shall be supported by analyses of
solids, storage instructions, thinning instructions, tinting instructions, drying
and re-coat times, application instructions with recommended methods and
any environmental restrictions.
331. 060
All paint materials shall be obtained from an agreed supplier. The

agreement of the Purchaser must be obtained before any change in
supplier is implemented.
Miscellaneous Preparatory Materials
331. 070
Knotting shall be to BS 1336.
331. 080
White spirit shall be to BS 245 Type A.
331. 090
Linseed oil shall be to BS 6900.
331. 100
Stopping for woodwork shall be ready mixed emulsion polymer or oil based
type suitable for internal or external use as appropriate.
331. 110
Filler for plasterwork shall be of water mixed powder type.
331. 120
Stopping and filler for woodwork to receive clear finishes shall be ready
3/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
mixed and tinted to match timber.

WORKMANSHIP
General
331. 140
Containers without labels, or with defaced and illegible labels, shall be

removed permanently from the Works.
331. 150
Materials that have exceeded the recommended shelf life or that have been
subject to adverse conditions shall be removed permanently from the
Works.
331. 160
Adequate ventilation and environmental conditions shall be ensured where

possible for all painting processes. Air demand respirators shall be used
when adequate ventilation cannot be provided.
331. 170
Unavoidable splashes, etc., shall be cleaned up immediately, and the

surfaces splashed left in a clean state. An appropriate cleaner is to be used
for the surface splashed. Damage resulting from the use of the wrong
solvent shall be put right at the Contractor's expense.
331. 180
The Contractor shall clean up all work including windows, etc., on

completion and clear away all rubbish to the entire satisfaction of the
Purchaser.
Colour/Finishes
331. 190
The Contractor shall carry out the painting of all items in accordance with
the Painting/Colour Finishes Schedules using the correct colours, methods
of application and sequence of undercoating in all cases.
331. 200
Paint colours shall be selected from BS 4800. Sample areas of each

selected type shall be painted as a control for colour, texture and
workmanship for each paint system.
331. 210
Each coat of paint shall have a distinguishing tint as recommended by the

paint manufacturer.
4/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Unsuitable Site Conditions

331. 220
Paint shall not be applied when

(a)
surfaces are affected by damp or frost
(b)
substrates have not dried out
(c)
the air temperature is below 4C
(d)
heat is likely to cause faults to develop
(e)
air borne dust is likely to spoil wet paint
(f)
condensation is likely to occur before paint is touch dry
(g)
rain is likely to affect the paint.
Surface Preparation
General
331. 230
Items to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared in

accordance with the Specification.
331. 240
All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure completed finishes, plant

installations and other fixtures and fittings are protected.
331. 250
Door furniture shall be removed prior to painting and refixed on completion.

Iron and Steelwork
331. 270
Bare iron and secondary steelwork, handrailing, sheeting and pipes etc.
shall be thoroughly prepared by removing all dirt, rust and loose millscale to
the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
331. 280
Preparation shall include the use of chipping hammers, scrapers,

mechanical wire brushes and carborundum grinding discs.
The use of mechanical chisels and other impact tools may exceptionally be
ordered if in the opinion of the Purchaser their use is necessary.
331. 290
Tools shall be operated in such a manner that no sharp ridges or burrs are
left and no cuts made in the steel.
5/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
331. 300
Dust and other loose material shall be removed after cleaning. Oil and
grease shall be removed with white spirit.
331. 310
Surfaces exposed to an atmosphere polluted with chemicals, etc., shall be

thoroughly washed with fresh water and allowed to dry before priming.
331. 320
Surfaces inaccessible to manual cleaning, where steel scraping is

insufficient, hall be treated with chemical rust remover applied liberally. All
surfaces and surrounding areas which become contaminated are to be
thoroughly washed with fresh water. Priming shall be carried out as soon
as practical and in any case the same day.
331. 330
Steelwork or ironwork primed before delivery and damaged in transit shall

have all damaged areas cleaned and patch primed immediately upon
delivery. Areas damaged during erection shall be similarly dealt with.
331. 340
Priming coats shall be applied before any contamination or rusting occurs.

Timber and Plywood Surfaces
331. 350
Surfaces shall be thoroughly rubbed down to give a perfectly smooth finish

and cleaned to remove all dirt and dust then twice knotted and stopped
before priming.
331. 360
After priming, defects such as open joints or nail holes shall be stopped with
hard stopping, and surface imperfections faced up. All such repairs shall be
primed before undercoating is applied.
331. 370
Primed hardwood and softwood shall then be painted in accordance with

the Finishes Schedule. Surfaces shall be lightly rubbed down, cleaned and
thoroughly dry before a further coat is applied.
331. 380
Hardwood containing an excess of natural oil shall be degreased with white

spirit immediately prior to priming.
331. 390
The moisture content of the substrate shall be checked to ensure that the
completed work will not be affected.
Galvanised Metal Work

331. 400
Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed from dirt and all traces of
grease and oil removed with an agreed de-greasing solution applied in
6/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

331. 410
After cleaning, if so directed by the Purchaser, the Contractor shall treat the
surface to be painted with an agreed mordant solution. The mordant
solution must be washed off the surface with copious supplies of cold water
before any paint is applied. It is important that no trace of the mordant
solution remains.
Brickwork, Blockwork, Concrete, Plaster and Rendered Surfaces
331. 420
All surfaces shall be cleaned down and all mortar and plaster splashes,
nibs, loose and flaking material shall be removed.
331. 430
All efflorescence surface salts shall be removed with a stiff brush and left
for 48 hours. If further efflorescence occurs the process shall be repeated.
331. 440
All holes, cracks and surface imperfections to be made good.
331. 450
Shutter release agents shall be removed by washing with a weak detergent

solution and rinsed with clean water.
331. 460
Adequate time shall be allowed for the primer to become thoroughly hard
and dry before the application on the undercoat.
General
331. 470
Paint materials shall be handled, stored, mixed and applied in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations. Any conflict between these
recommendations and the Specification shall be clarified with the Purchaser
before work starts.
331. 480
The methods of application of each type of paint shall be agreed by the

Purchaser before work starts.
331. 490
Paint shall be applied only to prepared, clean, sound and dry surfaces as
specified.
331. 500
A finished coat of one manufacturer shall not be applied to an undercoat of

another manufacturer.
331. 510
Paint shall be applied to the recommended minimum dry film thickness

(DFT) which shall be the absolute minimum coverage at any point of
7/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
measurement. Where DFT cannot be practically measured a coat shall be

applied at the manufacturer's DFT equivalent spread rate with full allowance
made for waste.
331. 520
Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dry before the next coat is applied
and the surfaces of primers and undercoats shall be lightly rubbed down
and dusted off.
331. 530
Coats shall be applied at proper intervals within the maximum and minimum
recommended drying periods to secure maximum adhesion.
331. 540
The Purchaser shall instruct the Contractor when to apply the final finishing
coat of paint. A considerable time delay may be required after completion
of the underlying coats.
Primers
331. 550
Priming coats shall be applied generally by brush to give a coat of adequate

thickness with no misses and to suit the porosity of the surface. The primer
shall be well worked into the surface, joints, angles and other places where
future moisture is likely to collect and on surfaces that will become hidden
from view and access.
Sealers
331. 560
Sealers and first coat P.V.A. shall be applied to suit the porosity of the
surface and/or seal in materials which are likely to adversely affected the
subsequently applied painting system.
Undercoats
331. 570
Undercoats shall be applied evenly over the whole surface to give a solid
film, care being taken to avoid uneven thickness of paint at edges and
angles.
Finishing Coats
331. 580
Finishing coats shall be applied evenly over the whole surface to give a
solid film, free from brush marks, sags, runs, orange peel effects or other
defects.
8/13
Onyx South Downs
331. 590
EFW Contract
Excessive brushing out of aluminium paint shall be avoided.

Methods of Application
Roller Painting
331. 600
Roller painting shall be carried out with mohair or short pile sheepskin
rollers. It will not be allowed for:
a)
Application of priming coats.
b)
Work other than of a straightforward plain character.

Brush Painting
331. 610
Paint shall be applied so that the finished surface is free from avoidable
brush marks.
331. 620
All areas or parts shall be laid off correctly.

Spray Painting
331. 630
Spray painting will be permitted with agreed machines but in no case will it
be allowed in the application of the following:
a)
Priming paints.
b)
First coat of P.V.A. emulsion paint.
c)
Where soiling of adjacent surfaces cannot be prevented.
d)
Tar based paints and creosote.
331. 640
Perforated acoustic surfaces shall be sprayed at an angle of 30 to the

surface.
331. 650
Surfaces adjoining those being sprayed shall be carefully and closely

masked.
331. 660
The coating shall be even and adequate and the finish shall be free from
orange peel appearance, runs, sags, curtaining and other defects.
QUALITY CONTROL
9/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
General
331. 670
A complete description of painting methods and procedures shall be

submitted to the Purchaser including, but not limited to, the following:
a)
Cleaning methods, materials and equipment, including

positive methods of pollution control of solvents and blasting
materials.
b)
Paint application procedures, including paint manufacturer's

recommended methods of application and equipment types
and sizes; recommended drying times, control methods for
overspray, masking and protection of equipment and the
environment; surface temperature control of items prior to
and during the painting process; scaffolding; mixing
procedures and quantities; any proposed deviations from
the manufacturer's recommendations which shall be
explained in detail.
c)
Safety procedures, including storage methods, ventilation of

areas during painting, waste material disposal, personnel
protection, equipment cleaning methods and fire prevention
methods and procedures.
d)
Equipment
specifications
and
recommendations for the use thereof.
e)
Testing procedures
Specification.
f)
Inspection procedures.
to
show
manufacturer's
conformance
to
the
Application of paint coats shall not be carried out prior to receipt of

this submission by the Purchaser.

331. 680
The Purchaser shall be notified when:

a)
The surface preparation for each room or area as agreed

10/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
with the Purchaser is started.
331. 690
b)
The painting of sample areas is to be carried out.
c)
Surface preparation of areas which will become inaccessible

has been started.
Control records shall be retained by the Contractor for each location:
Time of preparation of surfaces.
Time of application of protective finishes.
Measurements of paint film thickness or D.F.T.
Moisture level readings of substrates.
11/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 245
BS 1336
BS 4800
BS 5493
BS 6150
BS 6900
Specification for mineral solvents (white spirit and related

hydrocarbon solvents) for paints and other purposes.
Specification for knotting.
Specification for paint colours for building purposes.
Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures
against corrosion.
Code of Practice for painting of buildings.
Specification for raw, refined and boiled linseed oils for paints and
varnishes.
12/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
331.670
Overall method statement.
331.680
Notification of preparation of
surfaces/sample areas/inaccessible
areas.
COMMENT
331.690
Control records.
13/13
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 400 : ANCILLARIES (CIVIL WORKS)
SECTION NO: 401
TITLE: WATERPROOFING AND WATERSTOPS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
WORKMANSHIP
Membranes
Waterstops
QUALITY CONTROL
1/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
401. 010
installation of liquid applied and sheet waterproofing membranes and
waterstops to concrete structures.
MATERIALS
401. 020
Proprietary waterproofing systems incorporated in the Works shall have a

current British Agrment Board Roads and Bridges Certificate and of a type
agreed by the Purchaser.
401. 030
Liquid applied waterproofing shall be a water based bituminous latex

emulsion of a type to be agreed by the Purchaser or cut back bitumen
complying with BS 3690 : Part 1 of viscosity grade 50 seconds plus suitable
primer of such viscosity that it penetrates the concrete without forming a
skin.
401. 040
Powder or slurry form waterproofing shall be a cementitious multipart

waterproofing system of a type to be agreed by the Purchaser.
401. 050
Sheet waterproofing membranes shall be one of the following:

(i)
Cold-applied self adhesive bituminous or rubber bitumen sheeting

of 1.5mm minimum thickness of bituminous compound with
removable backing paper.
(ii)
Waterproof building paper to BS 1521 of class B1F.
(iii)
Impermeable plastic sheeting to BS 1763 with a minimum thickness

of 125 microns.
401. 060
Waterstops shall be purpose-made and manufactured from PVC or rubber

and supplied by a manufacturer agreed by the Purchaser.
401. 070
The Contractor shall submit drawings detailing the waterbar layout for the
structure indicating the joint positions and giving details of the jointing
method.
2/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORKMANSHIP
Membranes
401. 080
All membranes shall be packaged, stored, handled, applied, protected and

cured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
401. 090
Before application, surfaces shall be checked as being sound, free from

dirt and contamination, of smooth texture, dry (apart from powder or slurry
membranes) and free from frost.
401. 100
Bituminous latex emulsion membranes shall be applied by brush or airless

spray using the number of coats specified by the specialist manufacturer
and allowing an appropriate drying time between coats.
401. 110
Concrete surfaces to receive bitumen waterproofing shall be thoroughly

sealed with an evenly applied primer. The cut back bitumen shall be hot
applied at a rate of spread per coat of 0.6 litre/m2. The first coat shall be
allowed to dry before the second coat is applied.
401. 120
Commencement of application of waterproofing and subsequent coats shall

not occur without the Purchasers Agreement.
401. 130
Sheet membranes shall be suitably protected on external surfaces prior to

the commencement of backfilling.
Waterstops
401. 140
Waterstops shall be provided in continuous lengths. Where site jointing is

unavoidable it shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions using heat, sleeved or adhesive joints by suitably trained
personnel.
401. 150
Waterstops shall be securely held in position using agreed securing

methods to avoid any damage to or distortion of the waterstops during
concreting.
401. 160
The general requirements for inspection of waterstops prior to concreting

and the surface preparation of adjacent concrete after concreting are
specified in Section 201.
401. 170
The caulking and sealing of movement joints which incorporate waterstops

is specified in Section 402.
3/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
QUALITY CONTROL
401. 180
The Contractor shall obtain manufacturer's material and test certificates as

appropriate for all waterproofing and waterstop materials.
401. 190
Only suitably trained personnel shall be allowed to apply waterproofing

membranes and make on site joints of waterstops.
4/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 1521
BS 1763
Specification for waterproof building papers.

Specification for thin PVC sheeting (calendered, flexible,
unsupported).
5/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
401.070
Waterbar layout drawing.
401.110
Notification of surface preparation.
401.120
Notification of waterproofing.
401.130
Notification of protection against backfill.
401.180
Material/test certificates.
6/6
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION NO: 402
TITLE: CAULKING AND SEALANTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Primer
Back-Up Filler
Sealants and Caulking Compounds
WORKMANSHIP
Joint Preparation
Priming of Joints
Mixing of Sealants/Caulking Compounds
Application of Sealants
QUALITY CONTROL
1/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
402. 010
general use of sealants with respect to concrete construction, masonry,
door and window frames.
It does not cover applications for waterproofing, damp-proofing, glazing
work, sealants between cladding sheets, sealants for mechanical/electrical
works, pressure retaining assemblies.
MATERIALS
General
402. 030
Materials shall be stored in a clean, dry, well ventilated area, raised above
ground level and protected from temperature extremes. Inflammable
materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Primer
402. 040
The type of primer selected shall be compatible with the sealant and shall
be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. It shall be quick drying
and non-staining; it shall be delivered in unopened containers bearing the
manufacturer's name, the product name and expiry date and any necessary
warnings about flammability or health hazards.
Back-Up Filler
402. 050
Filler material shall not adhere to the caulking compound or sealant used
and shall be provided with a bond breaker as recommended by the
manufacturer if the material used has no releasing property. Bond breakers
shall be of aluminium foil, polyethylene or other agreed material.
402. 060
The joint filler shall be of the type specified below.

In all circumstances it shall be appropriate to the design function required
and the environmental conditions to which it will be exposed.
402. 070
Type F1: Compressible non-extruding bitumen impregnated fibreboard

expansion joint fillers suitable for forming joints in in-situ concrete structures
and between pre-cast concrete components. This filler shall not be used for
expansion joints in fired clay brickwork (BS 5628 Part 3 refers).
402. 080
Type F2: Non absorbent closed cell semi-rigid polyethylene joint fillers.
2/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
402. 090
Type F3: Non absorbent closed cell readily compressible polyethylene joint
filler and back up strips.
402. 100
Type F4: Bitumen-free bonded granular cork expansion joint fillers.
402. 110
Type F5: Expanding polyurethane foam gap filler.
402. 120
Type F6: Filling for caulking movement joints in fire barrier walls or slabs
shall be with an agreed proprietary fire blanket. It shall be non-alkaline,
shall be chemically stable and contain no corrosion promoting agents.
Sealants and Caulking Compounds
402. 130
All sealants and caulking compounds shall be waterproof and adherent to

the surface onto which they are to be applied. The materials shall be of a
type suitable for the conditions of exposure in which they are to be placed.
The sealants shall not slump or flow after application is complete during
seasonal contraction and expansion of the joint up to +12.5% of the joint
width (except where a lesser movement is specified). They shall not stain
or discolour the adjacent surfaces and shall be formulated so that any toxic
materials incorporated or generated during curing will not migrate to the
surface where they could be extracted when the sealant has cured.
402. 140
Sealants and caulking compounds shall be of a type specified below.
402. 150
Type A: Hot-applied rubber/bitumen sealing compound which complies with

Type A1 (High extension) of BS 2499. It will be used for sealing the upper
edges of vertical joints, e.g. those in floor and roof slabs where the sealed
face will be horizontal or only slightly inclined.
402. 160
Type B: Hot-applied rubber/bitumen sealing compound which will

accommodate seasonal contraction and expansion of up to + 6% of the joint
width and which complies with type A2 (Low extension) of BS 2499 shall be
used for sealing the upper edges of vertical joints which are subject to little
movement, and where the sealed face will be horizontal or only slightly
inclined e.g. those in floor and roof slabs.
402. 170
Type C: Bituminous putty which will accommodate seasonal contraction

and expansion of up to +5% of the joint width it shall be used for sealing the
exposed edges of vertical, horizontal, or inclined joints, e.g. those in walls
and soffits of slabs.
402. 180
Type D: Cold-applied polysulphide based compound to BS 5212 shall be

used in positions as for type A but where resistance to dilute acids and
3/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
alkalis, oils and petrol is required.

402. 190
Type E: One-part polysulphide sealant to BS 5215 shall be used for window

and door frame surrounds, external walling and cladding.
402. 200
Type F: Two-part polysulphide based compound to BS 4254 shall be used

in positions as for type C but where resistance to dilute acids and alkalis,
oils and petrol is required.
402. 210
Type G: Two-part component elastomeric sealant for use in type A

conditions but where maximum resistance to impact and abrasion is
required.
402. 220
Type H: Multi-part, high performance, sealants with better characteristics for

high movement joints.
402. 230
Type I: Cold applied two part elastomeric cement mortar for use in damp
application conditions.
WORKMANSHIP
402. 240
Work shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel. The Purchaser may
require the Contractor to provide evidence in this respect.
Joint Preparation
402. 250
Joint surfaces shall be completely dry (apart from type I), clean and frost
free. Remove all dirt, dust laitance, friable and loose material by rigorous
brushing. Any oil or grease must be removed by an agreed joint cleaner.
402. 260
Non-porous joint surfaces shall be cleaned mechanically or chemically,

achieving grease-free surface, suitable for adhesion of sealant.
4/8
Onyx South Downs
402. 270
EFW Contract
Porous joint surfaces such as brickwork, concrete or stonework shall be

cleaned by grinding, sand/water blast cleaning, mechanical abrading or
combination of these methods to provide a sound base-surface (when dry)
for sealant adhesion. In addition specifically:
(a)
remove laitance by grinding or mechanical abrading;
(b)
remove form oils by sand-water blast cleaning;
(c)
remove loose particles already present or resulting from the

above treatment with oil-free compressed air.
Priming of Joints
402. 280
Substrate surfaces of joints shall be primed where necessary to ensure

sealant adhesion. Primers shall be applied strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Other surfaces shall be masked to prevent
adhesion if the situation so requires.
Mixing of Sealants/Caulking Compounds
402. 290
All sealants and caulking compounds shall be mixed strictly in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Application of Sealants
402. 300
Joints in concrete shall not be sealed until the concrete is at least 28 days
old.
402. 310
Sealants/caulking compounds shall not be applied to surfaces

contaminated by ice, frost and water. Any artificial means of heating to
remove frost and ice shall not be used. The application temperatures
required by manufacturers shall be observed.
402. 320
Joints shall be filled completely with sealant/caulking compound to exclude

all air and ensure firm adhesion of the material to the required joint
surfaces. The sealant/caulking compound face shall be tooled to a slightly
concave surface recessed behind adjacent structural surfaces except in the
case of poured sealants.
402. 330
Width to depth ratio of caulks or seals shall be in accordance with
5/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
manufacturers instructions. Generally the depth of joints filled with caulking

compound shall be half the joint width, with a minimum depth of 12mm.
402. 340
Joints of 18mm or less shall be provided with a bond breaker at the back or
bottom surface of the joint to allow the caulking or sealant to move freely
under stress.
402. 350
Two-component or multi-component compound shall only be applied within

the permitted period recommended by the manufacturer.
402. 360
The Contractor shall notify the Purchaser when cavities of joints have been
prepared for filling and when the joints have been primed and the back up
filler is in place.
402. 370
All sealed joints shall be protected until they reach their full performance
condition by:
(a)
covering floor joints with boards;
(b)
keeping traffic over slabs to a minimum;
(c)
allowing sealants intended to resist hydraulic pressure or

chemical attack to cure fully before being subject to
operating conditions.
QUALITY CONTROL
402. 380
The Contractor shall submit all manufacturers' technical literature, including

application instructions, storage requirements, current test results on the
materials supplied to confirm compliance with BS 3712, Health and Safety
warnings, shelf life of materials.
402. 390
Sealants for use in contact with Potable Water shall not have any
deleterious effect on the water and shall have been tested and agreed to
this effect by the Water Research Centre.
402. 400
Sample joint lengths shall be carried out to demonstrate to the Purchasers

satisfaction that the proposed method of working complies with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Work should not proceed without the
6/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 1-BSI STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCES
BS 2499
BS 3712
Part 1:
Part 2:
Part 3:
BS 4254
BS 5212
BS 5215
BS 5628
Part 3:
Specification for hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements.

Building and Construction Sealants.
Method of test for homogeneity, relative density, extrudability,
penetration and slump.
Method of test for seepage staining, shrinkage, shelf life and
paintability.
Method of test for application life, skinning properties and tack-free
time.
Specification for two-part polysulphide based sealants.
Specification for cold-poured joint sealants for concrete pavements.
Specification for one-part gun grade polysulphide based sealants.
Code of Practice for Masonry.
Materials and components design and workmanship.
7/8
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
402.240
Evidence of training of personnel.
402.380
Manufacturer's technical details of

materials to be used.
8/8
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SECTION NO: 403
TITLE : PROPRIETARY ANCHOR SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
MATERIALS
WORKMANSHIP
QUALITY CONTROL
TEMPORARY ANCHORS
1/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
403. 010
This Section defines proprietary anchor systems used to fix items to

concrete, blockwork and brickwork.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
403. 030
The Contractor shall design proprietary anchor systems, and shall submit to
the Purchaser calculations and drawings of his proposals.
403. 040
Anchor system design shall comply with the manufacturers

recommendations unless otherwise stated in this Specification.
403. 050
Loadings shall be as stated by the Purchaser where applicable.

MATERIALS
403. 060
Proprietary anchor systems include expansion bolts, reserve anchors and

similar devices, which shall be used in full compliance with manufacturers
recommendations.
WORKMANSHIP
403. 090
Anchors shall be installed by suitably trained personnel. The Purchaser

may require the Contractor to provide evidence to his satisfaction in this
respect.
403. 100
Installation of anchors shall be in accordance with the manufacturers

instructions.
403. 110
Drilling of holes to receive anchors shall only commence with the

403. 120
Holes shall be located to avoid reinforcement.

QUALITY CONTROL
403. 130
The manufacturers marking indicating the length of an anchor shall be

clearly visible after it has been installed.
403. 140
The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements to test installed

anchors when instructed by the Purchaser.
TEMPORARY ANCHORS
2/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
403. 150
The Contractor may, if he so requires and consequent upon the agreement

of details by the Purchaser, use anchors to provide temporary support off
permanent structures.
403. 160
All holes shall be made good to the requirements of Section 201 on removal
of the temporary anchors.
3/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
None.
4/5
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
403.030
Calculations and drawings.
403.080
Proprietary anchor details.
403.090
Evidence of training.
403.150
Temporary anchor details.
5/5
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 410 : ANCILLARIES (BUILDING WORKS)
SECTION NO: 411
TITLE: COPINGS AND FLASHINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Storage
Lead
Aluminium
WORKMANSHIP
General
Lead
Aluminium
QUALITY CONTROL
General
Inspection
1/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
411. 010
This Section describes the requirements for the installation of metalwork

coverings and flashings.
MATERIALS
General
411. 030
The Contractor shall submit samples of materials for use in the Permanent
Works to the Purchaser.
411. 040
The gauge thickness, type and relevant mechanical properties of materials

shall be compatible with the cladding system.
Storage
411. 050
Materials shall be stored in unbroken packaging clear of the ground in a

dry place. The surface and edges shall be protected against distortion and
damage.
411. 060
Aluminium sheet and strip shall be prevented from contact with dissimilar
metals to prevent electrolytic action and corrosion.
Lead
411. 070
Milled lead sheet or strip for copings, rainwater outlets and gutters,
expansion joint covers, flashings and weatherings shall be to BS 1178.
Aluminium
411. 090
Aluminium sheet and strip for copings, cap flashings and expansion joint
covers, flashings and weatherings shall be to BS 1470.
WORKMANSHIP
General
411. 110
All work shall be carried out by skilled operatives using methods of

accepted practice.
411. 120
All base surfaces shall be clean, dry, smooth and free from projections
2/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
before the start of laying and fixing the covering materials.

411. 130
All preparatory work such as the formation of chases shall be carried out
prior to the fixing of the materials.
411. 140
Direct contact with dissimilar metals shall be avoided by the use of a heavy
coating of bituminous paint, isolating tape or felt as appropriate. Isolation
shall be provided from copper lightning conductors.
Lead
411. 150
Flashings shall be fixed into accurately prepared chases in concrete or

masonry walls with lead wedges of a size and quantity adequate
(maximum centres at 500mm) to securely hold the upper part of the metal.
The groove shall then be pointed with 1:3 cement sand mortar.
411. 160
Lead flashing shall be finished 50mm clear of flat roof coverings with a
150mm minimum depth of flashing. Maximum end laps shall be 100mm,
lap upstands shall be not less than 75mm.
411. 170
Continuous stepped flashings shall be formed at junctions between pitched

roofs and brickwork. The flashing shall be turned 25mm into chases,
wedged at each step and pointed in mortar. The lap upstand shall be
100mm and the bottom edge tacked at 600mm centres.
411. 180
Wide sheets of lead fixed to concrete or masonry in areas of high wind

loading shall be dressed into dished hollows 75mm diameter x 37mm
deep. The lead shall be screwed to plugs in the concrete using brass or
stainless steel screws with suitably protected washers approx 37mm
diameter. The hollow shall be filled with a lead solder using a suitable flux
to ensure adhesion to the lead.
411. 190
Where lead burning is required, edges and faces of lead to be joined shall
be shaved clean and shall not be handled thereafter. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the weld penetrates fully but does not burn through. The
thickness of the lead burned seam shall be approximately one third thicker
than the lead sheet being welded.
411. 200
Lead retaining clips and tacks shall be 50mm wide and cut from lead sheet
to match flashing.
411. 210
Copper clips shall be used in conditions of severe exposure and shall be

50mm wide and cut from 0.6mm thick sheet copper to BS 2870. Clips shall
3/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
be hot-dip coated with a high lead content solder in visible locations.

Aluminium
411. 220
Fixing of aluminium coverings shall comply with CP 143 Part 15.
411. 230
Aluminium coverings shall be cut cold, formed and bent to the specified
profiles in workshop conditions.
411. 240
Waterproof washers shall be used where fasteners penetrate flashings.

QUALITY CONTROL
General
411. 250
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all fabricated items showing
details and locations of joints, supports, fastenings etc with allowances for
thermal expansion and contraction and structural movement.
Inspection
411. 260
411. 270
Metalwork shall be examined to ensure that:
it has been fabricated in accordance with the shop drawings
there is no evidence of overstress of the sheet metal, breaks,

wrinkles or distortions
all joints will enable weathertight construction
Prior to the installation of any metalwork the base surfaces shall be

examined to ensure that all surfaces are smooth, clean, dry and free from
foreign matter and all provisions made to enable fixings to be made.
4/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 1178
BS 1470
BS 2870
CP 143
Part 15:
Specification for milled lead sheet for building purposes.

general engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip.
Specification for rolled copper and copper alloys: sheet, strip and
foil.
Codes of practice for sheet roof and wall coverings.
Aluminium Metric units.
5/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
411.030
Samples of materials for use.
411.250
Shop Drawings for fabricated items.
6/6
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 410 : ANCILLARIES (BUILDING WORKS)
SECTION NO: 412
TITLE: LOUVRES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
MATERIALS
General
Louvre Type
Sheet Metal Louvre Accessories
Supporting Metalwork
Filler Blocks
Sealants
Insulating Tape
Insulation
Fixings
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
General
Design Life
Responsibility for Design
Wind Loading
Tolerances
Weatherproofing
Colour
Surface Finish
Climatic Variations
Dissimilar Metals
1/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WORKMANSHIP
Installation Works
QUALITY CONTROL
Tests on Louvres
Fastener Tests
2/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
412. 010
This Section defines the requirements for the Louvres including all
necessary matching accessories, fixings and other items required to
provide a complete, durable and weathertight installation.
MATERIALS
General
412. 030
All materials specified shall comply with the relevant British Standards listed
in Appendix 1.
412. 040
All materials shall be resistant to fungal attack, infestation, vermin and other
forms of biological attack. All materials shall be free of asbestos and other
substances carrying a health risk.
Louvre Type
412. 050
Louvres are to be compatible with the wall cladding.

Sheet Metal Louvre Accessories
412. 060
Sheet metal louvre accessories shall be formed from the same material as
the louvres and shall be colour matched. The material thickness shall be
appropriate to the particular application, but shall not be less than 0.9mm
for aluminium sheets.
Support Metalwork
412. 070
Supporting metalwork for louvres shall be steel, fabricated, galvanised and

painted in accordance with the relevant sections of the Specification.
Filler Blocks
412. 080
Filler Blocks shall be manufactured from EPDM and shall be of closed cell
construction to ensure a weathertight seal.
3/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Sealants
412. 090
Lap sealants shall be EPDM or elastomeric compound tape type sealants.

The sealants shall be soft enough not to interfere with the fit of the sheets
and resilient enough to accommodate any variations in fit and thermal
movements that may occur. Sealants shall not harden with age and shall
be compatible with filler block materials.
Insulating Tape
412. 100
Tape for insulating dissimilar metals shall be self adhesive PVC. The
thickness shall not be less than 0.25mm.
Insulation
412. 110
Insulation material shall be mineral wool of 60kg/m3 density unless

otherwise specified.
Fixings
412. 120
Primary fixings shall be grade 316 stainless steel self tapping screws with
stainless steel/EPDM sealing washers. The particular type of fastener for a
given application shall be selected in accordance with the fastener
manufacturers recommendations, noting that hot rolled and cold formed
steel substrates require different fastener designs.
412. 130
Secondary fixings shall be blind rivets with integral load spreading washers
and EPDM sealing washers.
412. 140
All fixings shall have integral or snap-on caps colour matched to the
material being fixed.
4/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
General
412. 150
Contractor designs shall comply with the relevant British Standards listed in
Appendix 1. Particular reference shall be made to BS 5427.
412. 160
All louvres shall have bird screens which shall comprise 6mm - 10mm
square opening mesh made of non-corrodible metal or plastic.
412. 170
The ventilation performance of finished louvres assemblies shall be equal to

or better than the requirements demanded by the ventilation system design.
412. 180
Positive provision shall be made within the construction of each louvre

assembly for draining louvres and louvre banks to the outside of buildings
by means as such collection troughs or channels with outlet pipes.
Design Life
412. 190
The whole of the louvring and supports shall be designed to withstand

coastal environment conditions and local effects of cement and oil etc., and
the flashings, closers, fascia fixings and all accessories shall be noncorrodible materials and be suitably protected against electrolytic action
where appropriate and be generally in accordance with the specification for
wall and roof cladding (Section No. 241).
Responsibility for Design
412. 200
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the cladding system,
which shall meet the requirements for design life listed in Section No. 241.
412. 210
The Contractor shall verify that the materials, profiles and finishes will
satisfy the performance requirements of the Specification. Should the
Contractor wish to propose alternative materials then these shall be notified
at the time of tender.
412. 220
The Contractor shall be responsible for developing the working details, but
shall not vary the intended architectural treatment without the agreement of
the Purchaser.
412. 240
Louvring including framing, support steelwork and fixings within the
5/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
structural openings shall be designed to withstand the design loads.

412. 250
The Contractor shall prepare all necessary detailed design, general

arrangement and detailed drawings to enable fabrication and installation of
the louvres to be carried out.
412. 260
The drawings shall show details and sizes for all louvres and accessories
and shall specify the type and location of all fasteners.
412. 270
The Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings to the

Purchaser for agreement. The calculations shall include stress and
deflection checks for the louvre support structures and designs for all
fasteners.
Wind Loading
412. 280
The louvres shall be designed to withstand the wind loadings derived from
the appropriate British Standards and Codes of Practice. Fixings shall be
designed for a minimum wind suction loading of 5kN/m2 with a factor of
safety of 2 against failure.
Tolerances
412. 290
The out of tolerance of the louvres and accessories shall not exceed 1/250
of the distance between fixings or width of flat surface.
Weatherproofing
412. 300
The louvre system shall be designed to be completely watertight.

Colour
412. 310
The same requirements shall apply to the louvres as for the decorative life
of the cladding system (Refer to Section 241).
Surface Finish
412. 320
The louvre coating is to have a smooth, flat finish to minimise retention of

dust, dirt etc. on the surface.
Climatic Variations
6/11
Onyx South Downs
412. 330
EFW Contract
Louvres shall be designed and detailed to take account of variations in

dimensions and shape due to changes in temperature and humidity without
deterioration in performance. Coatings shall not suffer mechanical or
chemical breakdown under extremes of temperature and humidity.
412. 340
All louvres in external walls are to be aluminium and compatible with

cladding system with the inner leaf fully closeable to control heat loss during
shutdown periods.
Cold bridges, pattern staining, inside surface
condensation and interstitial condensation shall be prevented in the design.
Dissimilar Metals
412. 360
The component parts of all joints and fastenings shall be selected to

prevent bi-metallic corrosion.
WORKMANSHIP
412. 370
The Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for

packaging, handling, storage and protection of materials. Cladding sheets,
linings and accessories shall be supplied in marked, fully enclosed cases
with paper interleaves between sheets. Prior to erection, all materials shall
be stored in their packages, off the ground and under cover.
412. 380
All materials shall be protected against mechanical or other damage and

contamination by dirt, oil or other contaminating matter. During erection
and until handover measures shall be taken to avoid damage or soiling of
materials. In particular, scaffolding shall be independent of the louvre with
plastic buffers at the ends of the poles adjacent to the surface. During
handling operations nylon slings or ropes shall be used. The use of clamps
shall not be permitted.
412. 390
Damaged components shall not be used or repaired. Touching up with paint

will not be permitted.
Installation Works
7/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
412. 400
Prior to commencing installation, the Contractor shall inspect the framing to

which the louvre is to be fixed to ensure that it has been erected correctly
and within the tolerances specified. Any defects shall be corrected prior to
the commencement of installation of the louvres.
412. 410
The installation work shall be carried out by experienced operatives with

due care, in an orderly manner and following the rules of good
workmanship.
412. 420
The installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the shop
drawings and in accordance with a method statement to be provided by the
Contractor for review by the Purchaser prior to commencement of the work.
412. 430
Holes for fasteners shall be drilled to the size recommended by the fastener
manufacturer. The use of punches for forming holes will not be permitted.
412. 440
All extraneous material, such as drilling swarf, metal off-cuts, insulation,

paper, sealants etc, shall be removed as the work progresses. All dirt and
grease shall be removed from the surfaces of the cladding prior to handover.
QUALITY CONTROL
Tests on Louvres
412. 450
Tests to confirm the louvre performance under rain and wind shall be
carried out on a sample of each type of louvre to be incorporated in the
Works. Tests shall be carried out in wind tunnel at appropriate air velocities
and rainfall intensities; these are rain penetration tests and ventilation
performance tests. Tests shall also be carried out to verify attenuation
properties.
The Contractor shall provide verified results of all tests.
Fastener Tests
412. 460
The Contractor shall provide evidence of the strength of the proposed

fasteners. Particular attention shall be paid to the "fixing pull-through"
mode of failure on thinner gauge materials. A minimum of six test results
shall be provided for each application.
8/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 729
BS 1091
BS 1449
BS 1470
BS 1494
Part 1:
BS 2989
BS 4174
BS 4255
Part 1:
BS 4800
BS 4868
BS 4904
BS 5427

steel articles
Specification for pressed steel gutters, rainwater pipes, fittings and
accessories.
Steel plate, sheet and strip
general engineering purposes: plate sheet and strip.
Specification for fixing accessories for building purposes.
Fixings for sheet, roof and wall coverings.
coated steel: wide strip sheet/plate and slit wide strip.
Specification for self tapping screws and metallic drive screws.
Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from
buildings
Specification for non-cellular gaskets.
BS 6213
BS 6367
BS 6399
Part 1:
Part 3:
CP 3
Specification for paint colours for building purposes

Specification for profiled aluminium sheet for building.
Specification for external cladding colours for building purposes.
Code of practice for performance and loading criteria for profiled
sheeting in buildings.
Guide to selection of constructional sealants.
Code of practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas
Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads
Code of Practice for imposed roof loads.
Code of basic data for the design of buildings.
Chapter V
Part 2:
Loading
Wind Loads
9/11
Onyx South Downs
CP 118
CP 143
Part 15:
EFW Contract
The structural use of aluminium

Code of practice for sheet roof and wall coverings
Aluminium: Metric units.
10/11
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
412.230
Additional framing and trimming

steelwork.
412.270
Calculations and shop Drawings.
412.420
Method statement.
412.450
Louvre test results.
412.460
Fastener test results.
11/11
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP : 400: ANCILLARIES (CIVIL WORKS)
SECTION NO: 413
TITLE: PILING (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
GENERAL
RELATED STANDARDS
MATERIALS
WORKMANSHIP
QUALITY CONTROL
APPENDIX 1 BRITISH STANDARDS AND OTHER REFERENCES
APPENDIX 2 ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
APPENDIX 3 NOTIFICATION AND HOLD POINTS
1/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
413. 010
This Section defines the general requirements for materials, workmanship,

contractor design and quality control to be applied to the provision of all
types of piles.
GENERAL
413. 021
The Contractor shall submit all relevant piling details to the Purchaser for
agreement at last two weeks prior to the commencement of piling
operations. Such details shall include:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
413. 022
Pile type
Pile design calculations
Working loads
Setting out drawing
Proposed plant
Proposals for pile tests.
A copy of the Ground Investigation Report provided to the Contractor is for

information only. The Contractor shall carry out any further investigations
and testing which he deems necessary to facilitate the design of the piling.
The results of any such investigations shall be submitted to the Purchaser
with the pile design calculations.
RELATED STANDARDS
413. 030
The BSI Standards together with other references specified in this Section
are listed in Appendix 1.
413. 031
All piling work shall be in accordance with 'Specification for Piling' produced
by The Institution of Civil Engineers.
413. 032
All references to British Standards are deemed to include equivalent

standards.
2/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
MATERIALS
413. 040
All materials shall comply with the 'Specification for Piling' by I.C.E..
413. 041
The following shall apply:

(a)
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying with BS 12.
(b)
Aggregates shall also comply with BS 882.
(c)
Reinforcement shall comply with one of the following:

Hot rolled steel bars Cold worked steel bars
(d)
BS 4449
BS 4461
Concrete mix shall contain not less than 325kg of cement per cubic
metre and shall have a characteristic strength of not less than 40
N/mm2 at 28 days in accordance with BS 8110.
413. 050
Concrete mixes shall be designed mixes and shall comply with the
'Specification for Piling' by I.C.E.
413. 060
Any materials which have been rejected by the Purchaser for whatever
reason shall be removed promptly from the Site.
WORKMANSHIP
413. 070
All workmanship shall comply with the 'Specification for Piling', 1988 by
I.C.E..
413. 071
Setting out shall be carried out from control stations identified on the
drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of all pile
positions and maintaining temporary stations and offsets.
413. 072
The maximum permitted deviation of the pile centre from the centre point
shown on the agreed setting out drawing shall be 75mm in any direction at
cut off level.
3/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
413. 073
Disposal of excavated material shall be carried out as necessary to facilitate

the works. Arisings, surplus concrete and steel including debris from
trimming heads of working piles, anchor piles and caps shall be removed
off-site by the Contractor.
413. 080
Safety precautions throughout the piling operations shall comply with the
Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 or any subsequent re-enactment
thereof,
413. 081
The Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of BS 5228 : Part 4

for noise and vibration control of piling and associated operations unless
otherwise authorised by the Purchaser.
QUALITY CONTROL
413. 090
The minimum requirement for the retention of records shall be to Table 1.1
of the 'Specification for Piling' by I.C.E..
413. 100
All quality control for material procurement, testing of materials, pile testing,
on site and off site inspections etc. shall be in accordance with the
'Specification for Piling' by I.C.E..
413. 110
Pile testing shall be undertaken to validate the pile design and construction
methods proposed. At least one working compression pile and one working
tension pile for each structure, at the discretion of the Purchaser, shall be
subjected to a sustained load pile test in accordance with the ICE
'Specification for piling'. Results shall be presented in accordance with
Clause 10.15 of the ICE 'Specification for Piling'.
4/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
between the requirements of these Standards and this Specification.
'Specification for Piling' by The Institution of Civil Engineers (including all relevant
standards referred to therein).
Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.
BS 12
BS 882
Specification for Portland cements.

-
Specification for aggregates from natural sources.
BS 1881
Testing Concrete
BS 2789
Specification for spheroidal graphite or nodular graphite cast

iron
BS 3100
Specification for steel casting for general engineering

purposes
BS 3148
Methods of test for water for making concrete
BS 4360
Specification for weldable structural steels

(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS 7613: 1994, BS 7668: 1994,
BS EN 10029: 1991, Parts 1 to 3 of BS EN 10113: 1993, BS
EN 10155: 1993 and BS EN 10210-1:1994.
BS 4449
Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of

concrete
BS 5228: Part 4
Code of practise for noise and vibration control applicable to

piling operations.
BS 8004
Code of practice for foundations.
BS 8110
Structural use of concrete
5/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
413. 021
Design details
413. 090
Records.
413. 110
Pile testing to validate pile design and

construction methods proposed.
6/7
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
APPENDIX 3 - NOTIFICATION AND HOLD POINTS
CLAUSE REFERENCE
NOTIFICATION POINTS
HOLD POINTS
413.100
As required by I.C.E.
Specification for Piling'.
As required by I.C.E.
Specification for Piling'.
7/7
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORK GROUP: 050 : DRAINAGE
SECTION NO: 052
TITLE: BUILDING DRAINAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
MATERIALS
Pipes and Joints
Pipe Supports
Gutters and Fittings
Miscellaneous
WORKMANSHIP
Jointing
General
Pipe Supports and Fixings
Gutters
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing and Inspection
General
Testing
Air Tests
Water Tests
Performance Tests
Discharge Tests
1/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

2/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
SCOPE
052. 010
This Section defines pipework installations above ground, internally and

externally for the conveyance of rainwater and waste water away from a
building to a buried drainage system.
It does not include specific "plumbing trade" items which are part of a
separate Section of this Specification.
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
052. 030
The design of installations shall be to BS 5572 and BS 6367.
052.035
The location, size and materials of any building drainage that will be left
exposed in the finished works shall be identified for agreement by the
Purchaser.
MATERIALS
Pipes and Joints
052. 040
Steel prefabricated drainage stack units shall be to BS 3868. Galvanising

shall be to BS 729 and carried out after fabrication.
052. 050
Unplasticized PVC pipes and fittings for soil waste and rainwater shall be to
BS 4514 and shall have solvent welded or ring seal pushfit joints.
052. 060
Copper pipes shall be to BS 2871 : Part 1, Table X, and shall have capillary
soldered brazed or compression joints to BS 864.
052. 070
Cast iron pipes and fittings shall be sand cast or spun to BS 416 and have
"Timesaver" type joints to BS 6087 (two part cast iron clasp with rubber
gasket and stainless steel nuts and bolts).
052. 080
Ductile iron pipes fittings and joints shall be to BS 4772 and shall have
either flanged joints or flexible spigot and socket joints. Where flanged
pipes and fittings are required the flanges shall be PN16.
052. 090
UPVC rainwater systems shall be to BS 4576 Part 1.
Pipe Supports
3/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
052. 100
Support to pipes shall be made using purpose made nylon, plastic, copper,
brass, iron or steel, brackets, clips, or hangers, of an appropriate diameter
and of a type agreed by the Purchaser and secured to the base material
(brick, concrete etc.) with expanding bolts, steel anchors or plastic plugs
and screw fixings as appropriate.
052. 110
Adjustable pipe hangers shall be to BS 3974.
052. 120
Fixings to structural steelwork shall be by means of malleable iron girder

clamps of a standard heavy duty design.
052. 130
Ferrous pipe supports and fixings shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS 729.

Any associated exposed cut threads or other minor exposed ferrous metal
surfaces shall be coated with a zinc-rich primer.
052. 140
Insulating inserts shall be provided where necessary between the supports

and pipes of dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action. They shall be of
elastomeric or cork composition and shaped to ensure retention within the
pipe clip, which shall be of sufficient diameter to accommodate the extra
thickness.
Gutters and Fittings
052. 150
Cast iron gutters, fittings and accessories shall be to BS 460.
052. 160
Pressed steel gutters, fixings and accessories shall be to BS 1091.
052. 170
UPVC gutters, fittings and accessories shall be to BS 4576.
052. 180
Brackets for gutters shall be of a type recommended by the manufacturer of

the gutter.
052. 190
Nuts and bolts shall be galvanized mild steel to BS 916.
052. 200
Metal washers shall be galvanized mild steel to BS 4320.

Miscellaneous
052. 210
Cast iron roof outlets and domical cages shall be to BS 416.
4/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
WORKMANSHIP
Jointing
052. 220
All joints in pipework shall be made in accordance with the pipework

052. 230
Pipes which are required to be cut on site shall be checked for any ovality
and shall be cut clean and square using equipment appropriate to the
material. Burrs shall be removed and any chamfers necessary for correct
jointing shall be formed. The use of make-up pieces shorter than the pipe
diameter is not permitted.
General
052. 240
All materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
052. 250
Pipework shall be stored as follows:

(a)
Under cover, clear of the ground.
(b)
Pipe stacks shall be on level ground.
(c)
Pipes shall not rest on their sockets.
(d)
Pipe stacks shall be securely staked to prevent collapse.
052. 260
Elastomeric jointing rings shall be stored in protective containers or bags

until required for use. They shall not be exposed to sunlight
052. 270
All soil, drainage waste and rainwater pipes and gutters shall be laid to
adequate falls to ensure self cleansing velocities. The minimum gradient
shall be 1 in 60.
052. 280
Pipes bridging building movement joints shall be installed with provision to

accommodate the maximum movement anticipated.
052. 290
Pipes passing through fire barriers, walls, slabs and beams shall be
installed in a manner which prevents the passage of smoke and flame
across the fire barrier and which allows thermal movement of the pipes.
052. 300
Rodding access shall be provided at bends or branches and at the base of

all down pipes. Access doors shall be fitted as near as practicable to the top
5/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
of the pipe or fitting and never on the invert.

052. 310
Ventilation pipes passing through roofs shall be waterproofed and

terminated with a copper or plastic balloon grating.
052. 320
The junction between above ground pipes below ground pipes shall be by
means of a flexible joint.
052. 330
When mild steel pipework is specially fabricated the Contractor shall submit
a procedure detailing the jointing, installation and supports for the
052. 340
All bends shall be to the largest practicable radius and branches shall be
swept in the direction of flow. Elbows shall not be used for drainage
purposes.
052. 350
Pipes with integral sockets shall be fixed with the socket at the upper end
for vertical and inclined runs.
Pipe Supports and Fixings
052. 360
All pipe fixings shall be set straight and true. Suspension rods shall be
plumb.
052. 370
Guide brackets shall be used for intermediate supports between fixed

brackets for all vertical pipework. Pipe hangers may be used as
intermediate supports for inclined runs of pipework.
052. 380
Pipe runs having integral sockets and mechanical ring seal joints to
accommodate expansion shall have fixed brackets to secure the pipe
socket collars. Intermediate support to the pipe barrel shall be provided by
means of guide brackets.
052. 390
Plain barrel pipes with double mechanical ring seal joint socket connectors
shall have brackets fixed on the pipe barrel at the highest point of each
pipe. They shall be located 150mm from the socket, and intermediate
support of the pipe barrel shall be by means of guide brackets.
052. 400
The positions of fixed brackets as anchor points and telescopic expansion

joints or other means of allowing thermal movement of pipework jointed with
solvent cement joints shall be shown on the Drawings. Intermediate support
of pipe work shall be by means of guide brackets.
Gutters
6/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
052. 410
Pressed steel gutters shall be jointed with agreed jointing compound and
bolted together.
052. 420
UPVC gutters shall be jointed in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions ensuring that the correct allowance is made for thermal
movement.
QUALITY CONTROL
Testing and Inspection
General
052. 430
All gravity drain and ventilation pipes shall be subjected to both a visual
examination and test to ensure the soundness of the system and to verify
its correct performance.
052. 440
The Contractor shall submit a statement to the Purchaser detailing his test
procedures.
052. 450
Soundness and performance tests shall be witnessed and the Contractor

shall notify the Purchaser of the times and places at which tests are to be
carried out.
052. 460
Inspection and tests shall be made during the installation of the discharge
system as the work proceeds, to ensure that the pipework is properly
secured and clear of obstructing debris and superfluous matter and that all
work which is to be concealed is free from defects before it is finally
enclosed.
Prefabricated units shall be tested at the works or place of fabrication, and
inspected on delivery at the site.
052. 470
On completion, the discharge system shall be visually examined to ensure

that no cement droppings, rubble or other objects are left in the pipes and
that no jointing material projects into the pipe bore. When this has been
done, tests for soundness of the pipework and for performance shall be
made.
Testing
7/12
Onyx South Downs
052. 480
EFW Contract
All tests shall be fully recorded in a manner agreed with the Purchaser and
copies of these records supplied.
Air Tests
052. 490
This test, to detect if all pipes and fittings are airtight shall normally be
completed in one operation. For large systems however the Contractor
may, with the Purchaser's prior written agreement, test the systems in
sections.
052. 500
The water seals of all sanitary appliances shall be fully charged and test
plugs or bags inserted into the open ends of the pipework to be tested. To
ensure that there is a satisfactory air seal at the base of the stack, or at the
lowest plug or bag in the stack, a small quantity of water sufficient to cover
the plug or bag can be allowed to enter the system. One of the remaining
testing plugs shall be fitted with a tee piece, and cocks on each branch, one
branch being connected by means of a flexible tube to a manometer.
Alternatively, a flexible tube from a tee piece fitted with cocks on its other
two branches, can be passed through the water seal of a sanitary
appliance. Any water trapped in this tube shall be removed and then a
manometer can be connected to one of the branches as described above.
052. 510
Air shall be pumped into the system through the other branch of the tee
piece until a pressure equal to 38mm water gauge is obtained. The air inlet
cock shall then be closed and pressure in the system shall remain constant
for a period of not less than three minutes.
Water Tests
052. 520
The part of the system below the lowest sanitary appliance shall be tested
by inserting a test plug in the lower end of the pipe and filling the pipe with
water up to the flood level of the lowest sanitary appliance, provided that
the static head does not exceed 6 m.
052. 530
Long runs of above-ground pipework in the horizontal plane shall be

subjected to the water test. This shall be applied by inserting a test plug
downstream of the section to be tested and filling the pipe with water up to
the flood level of the lowest sanitary appliance upstream of the section
under tests, provided that the static head does not exceed 6 m.
052. 540
Clean water shall be used and promptly removed upon completion of the
test.
Performance Tests
8/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
052. 550
Every trap shall retain not less than 25mm of seal when subjected to the
appropriate discharge tests given below. Each test shall be repeated three
times; the trap being recharged before each test and the maximum loss of
seal in any one test, measured by a dip stick, shall be taken as the
significant result.
052. 560
To test for the effect of self-siphonage the waste appliance shall be filled to
overflowing level and discharged in the normal way. WC pans shall be
flushed. The seal remaining in the trap shall be measured when the
discharge has finished.
052. 570
For ranges of appliances, appropriate combinations of appliances shall be

discharged, all traps shall be fully charged, waste appliances being filled to
overflow level, and the seal remaining in each trap in the range measured
when the discharge has ended. The worst conditions are likely to occur
when the appliances at the top of the branch are discharged.
052. 580
To test the stability of trap seals when water flows down the stack, the
appropriate combinations of appliances shall be discharged simultaneously,
with all traps fully charged. The seal remaining in the traps shall be
measured when the discharge has ended.
9/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Discharge Tests
Type of use
Number of
appliances of
each kind on
the stack
Number of appliances to be discharged

simultaneously
9 litres WC Wash Basin
Domestic
1 to 9
10 to 24
25 to 35
36 to 50
51 to 65
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
Commercial
or Public
1 to 9
10 to 18
19 to 26
27 to 52
52 to 78
79 to 100
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
2
3
4
5
10/12
Kitchen Sink
1
2
3
3
3
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract

BS 416
BS 460
BS 729
BS 864
BS 916
BS 1091
BS 2871
Part 1:
BS 3868
BS 3974
Part 1:
Part 2:
BS 4320
BS 4514
BS 4576
BS 4772
BS 5572
BS 6087
BS 6367
Specification for cast iron spigot and socket soil waste and
ventilating pipes (sand cast and spun) and fittings.
Specification for cast iron rainwater goods.
steel articles.
Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper
alloy.
Specification for black bolts, screws, and nuts hexagon and
square with BSW threads and partly machined bolts screws and
nuts hexagon and square with BSW or BSF threads.
Specification for pressed steel gutters rainwater pipes fittings and
accessories.
Specification for copper and copper alloy tubes.
Copper tubes for water gas and sanitation.
Specification for prefabricated drainage stack units: galvanized
steel.
Specification for pipe supports.
Pipe hangers and roller type supports.
Pipe clamps cages cantilevers and attachment to beams.
Metric series.
Specification for unplasticized PVC soil and ventilating, pipes,
fittings and accessories.
Specification for unplasticized PVC rainwater goods.
Specification for ductile iron pipes and fittings.
(Withdrawn) Replaced by BS EN 545: 1995, BS EN 598: 1995 and
BS EN 969: 1996.
Code of Practice for sanitary pipework.
Specification for flexible joints for grey or ductile cast iron drainpipes
and fittings and for discharge and ventilating.
Code of Practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas.
11/12
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
CLAUSE REFERENCE
052.330
Pipe support details.
052.440
Details of test procedures.
052.480
Records of tests.
12/12
COMMENT
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
STANDARDS
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
CWSpec-SECTIO1E-Rev4.doc
1/2
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
1.1
SCOPE
This Specification covers the general requirements for design, performance,
materials, workmanship, installation, testing and commissioning and packing and
delivery for mechanical and electrical works for the Mechanical Handling Plant
and Lifts.
The specifications for mechanical and electrical service systems in this Section
are intended to indicate the minimum acceptable standards of materials and
workmanship.
Notwithstanding the requirements set out herein, it shall be entirely the
Contractor's responsibility to provide systems which, when completed, provide a
comprehensive technically viable, safe and durable construction entirely in
accordance with the requirements of the Scope of Works and the Specification.
1.2
STANDARDS
This Specification details the minimum outline requirements for the Lifts systems.
1.3
The requirements given to Section D, Clause 1.4 to Clause 1.13 inclusive, shall
equally apply to this Section E.
CWSpec-SECTIO1E-Rev4.doc
2/2
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIFTS
General
Silence of Operation
Hydraulic Lift Pumps
Pump Motors
Cylinders/Rams
Valves
Pipes, Hoses
Suspension
Pulleys
Guides and Fixings
Guide Shoes
Buffers
Creepage
Lift Car
Car and Landing Entrances
Architraves
Door Operators
Locks
Fascia Plate
Controllers
Controls
Control Device Indicators
Selectors
Final Limits
Car Top Control Station
Car Safety Gear
Data Plates
Pit Light, Stop Push and Socket Outlet
Shaft Lighting
CWSpec-SECTIO2G-Rev4.doc
1/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Motor Room Safety
Labels
Telephone/Intercom Unit
Emergency Car Light and Alarm Bell
Electromagnetic & Radio Interference Suppression
Servicing
Tools
2/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
2.1
LIFTS
2.1.1
General
The lift equipment shall comply with the requirements of the General and
Particular sections of the Specification.
2.1.2
Silence of Operation
The systems as installed shall be quiet in operation under the conditions in which
they will be called upon to operate, and shall be such that no noise or vibration is
discernible outside plant rooms or similar place in which the equipment is housed.
Noise levels in the machine rooms shall comply with the noise at Work
Regulations 1989.
Noise shall not exceed NR40 within the building (excluding plant rooms)
measured at 1.5m from wall/slabs of the lift shafts or plant or equipment rooms.
Anti-vibration mounts to be utilised where appropriate, based on technical advice
from the manufacturers of the components.
2.1.3
Hydraulic Lift Pumps

The pump unit shall include the necessary motors, valves, oil tank, etc. and shall
be self-contained in a structural steel frame suitably isolated from the building
structure.
The total pump unit shall be accurately assembled and lined up so that correct
alignment is available and maintained under all normal operating conditions.
The necessary oil filters will be provided on the inlet side of the pumps with
suitable valves so that the filter can be cleaned or changed with a minimum loss
of oil.
Suitable manual lowering devices shall be provided on the pump unit for
emergency use, which shall be sealed in an agreed manner so that only
authorised personnel can use it. It shall also include for a suitable hand pump to
enable the lift to be raised in the event of power or other failure.
3/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The hydraulic equipment shall be suitably bunded to contain spillage of oil.

2.1.4
Pump Motors
The pump motor shall be of the squirrel cage or slip ring type, as described in the
General Specification, suitable for a minimum of 100 starts per hour and run with
the minimum of noise and vibration, adequately protected by thermal overloads or
other agreed means.
2.1.5
Cylinders/Rams
The cylinders and rams on a side ram installation shall be made of steel,
accurately machined and assembled to ensure smooth and silent running.
Suitable guiding is to be incorporated to ensure adequate fixing to the structure of
the lift shaft and the ram head guided to carry the rope sheave, if provided.
A slack cable device must be incorporated which will close the lowering valve in
the event of a descending lift car being obstructed in its movement.
2.1.6
Valves
All valves and other items of the hydraulic system shall be designed and
arranged to give smooth starting, ride and stopping to ensure a completely
satisfactory and safe installation. Oil flow valves shall be provided as necessary
so that the oil may be cut off between the pump and the cylinder.
2.1.7
Pipes, Hoses
Hydraulic pipework shall be in Ai-Ni-Si-Brass alloy material to BS 2871 Part 2
CZ127 with compatible fittings and shall be isolated by rubber mountings or other
suitable means from the building structure.
Flexible hoses shall be used where necessary and shall be of the armoured type
to BS 4586 and installed in accordance with BS 5244.
2.1.8
Suspension
Suspension ropes shall not be less than 11mm dia and a minimum of four ropes
each independent of the other shall be fitted.
4/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
All steel ropes will comply as necessary and be in accordance with BS 302
requirements. Details of the ropes fitted to the lift shall be shown on a brass
plate, suitably inscribed and mounted on the crosshead of the car.
2.1.9
Pulleys
Pulleys and blocks shall comply with the requirements of BS 408.
All detector pulleys where applicable and as necessary to achieve the proper lead
of the ropes from ram head and car are to be provided. Pulleys shall be of cast
iron accurately machined and grooved for diameter of ropes used.
2.1.10
Guides and Fixings

The Contractor is to include for necessary steel guides for car and counterweight
of "Tee" section, accurately machined with tongued and grooved joints and
suitable fish plates, the guides and fish plates being machined where necessary
to provide a smooth and even joint.
The Contractor shall also provide wrought iron or fabricated brackets for fixing to
walls, concrete or steel beams, or steel separator beams with suitable full height
screen where applicable and will provide for drilling separator beams for fixing the
brackets where these are used, all in accordance with the required programme of
works. Details of all fixing requirements to be submitted (sketch) with tender.
If, for reasons of design or building limitations, guide backing is require, the
Contractor is to include for this as necessary.
Guides are to be mounted on base plates and adequately and firmly secured at
the top and bottom.
5/14
Onyx South Downs
2.1.11
EFW Contract
Guide Shoes
Guide shoes of agreed design shall be provided and fixed to the top and bottom
of the car frames.
The guide shoes shall have guide lubricators unless they incorporate liners of a
type which do not require lubrication and the car guide shoes shall have
adjustable spring loading.
2.1.12
Buffers
Buffers under the car shall also include all necessary supports and mountings
including steel stools or columns to support the buffers at the correct height
above the pit floor.
Spring buffers shall be of the helical coil type with a constant spring rate.
Timber buffers will not be acceptable.
2.1.13
Creepage
The necessary provision shall be made to automatically return the car at a slow
speed to the correct floor level in the event of the lift car moving downwards when
not in use due to oil leakage or other reasons. This automatic relevelling shall be
carried out whenever the car has moved 25mm.
2.1.14
Lift Car
Each lift car shall be contained in a suitable steel frame constructed of structural
steel members, rigidly assembled, with all necessary gussets and cleats.
The platform shall be rigidly constructed of fabricated structural steel sections,
carrying an inner or floating frame, to which the car enclosure will be incorporated
and will include means of isolation by sound-reducing and anti-vibration material
between the main frame and sub-frame. It shall be so constructed that no
suspension load of any description shall be transferred to the car enclosure.
The platform, car frame, doors, tracks, hangers, control equipment, indicators,
load plates and wiring shall be included as necessary with suitable means of
powered ventilation incorporated.
2.1.15
6/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Fire resistance of all landing entrances shall comply with the fire rating of the
building structure.
Sliding doors shall be of sheet steel construction, with suitable channel frames
reinforced where necessary, of flush type construction, finished as called for in
the specification. The bottom guides or gibs shall be continuous for fire rated
entrance doors.
They shall be constructed to comply with the fire rating as called for and shall
include necessary top and bottom tracks, the bottom tracks shall be machined
from aluminium alloy cill plates and provided with stainless steel channel inserts,
the sill plates arranged for final fixing by the builder.
2.1.16
Architraves
Architraves shall be manufactured of sheet steel or stainless steel as specified
elsewhere, finished where necessary to suit the entrance sizes and be free from
blemishes.
They shall be subject to the same fire rating as the landing doors.
2.1.17
Door Operators
The door operator shall be designed so that the movement of the doors shall be
free from vibration, smooth in operation and with minimum noise.
The doors shall be provided with suitable electronic safety devices and the force
exerted by the doors on an obstruction shall not exceed the force necessary to
operate the safety device. It shall be possible to adjust the equipment so that
minimum force is required, in accordance with the requirements of BS 5655, to
re-open the doors.
Sequential door closing will be required with a reduced door closing period time
following operation.
The door motor is to be provided with a suitable overload protection device.
7/14
Onyx South Downs
2.1.18
EFW Contract
Locks
The landing doors shall be provided with electrical and mechanical locks,
operated by a retiring cam or similar device and the car door shall be electrically
interlocked so that a lift cannot be moved unless all doors are closed and the
landing doors locked.
It shall not be possible to open a landing door unless the lift is stopped (stopping)
at that particular floor and in the case of centre opening doors, both panels shall
be arranged to directly operate an electric interlock so that the lift is inoperative
unless both doors are closed.
Suitable provision must be made at landings to release the lock and open the
door irrespective of the position of the car. Preferred release in soffit or
architrave.
This must be arranged by a special key of such a type and description so that
only authorised personnel can operate the device. Necessary steps must be
taken to ensure the release of the locks cannot be possible by use of wire, rod,
screwdriver or other common tool or implement. Suitable covering must be
provided to the release device.
2.1.19
Fascia Plate
Sheet fascia plates will be provided at each entrance between the underside of
each track or cill and the top of the door frame below and suitable levelling
aprons will be provide both on the car and below the lowest entrance.
2.1.20
Controllers
The controller panel, of non-hygroscopic material shall be rigidly fixed to a steel
frame, mounted inside an adequately ventilated sheet steel case, arranged for
floor or wall mounting. The case shall include doors at the front of rigid
construction and removal panels at the rear and shall be fitted with efficient locks
where necessary.
All the control equipment shall be enclosed in one or more cabinets and suitable
rubber mats provided on the floor in front of the controllers where access is
required.
Controllers will be of adjustable microprocessor or solid state type with suitable
interlocking provided on contactors so that it is not possible for up/down
contactors to operate simultaneously.
8/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Any contactors shall be easily accessible and renewable with long break contacts
incorporating self-cleaning action with arc shields.
Parts shall be easily accessible, marked and wired in accordance with the
diagram provided and designed specifically for long life and ease of maintenance.
All spare parts must be easily obtainable and stocked in the UK. The control
system shall operate from a rectified supply of 110 volts d.c. Static switching
equipment will be considered as suitable, providing the system has been used in
similar circumstances for a period of two years and is fully operational and proven
that full details are designed and submitted with the Tender.
The controller shall be designed to give the required operation as hereinafter
specified and shall incorporate suitable switching arrangements so that the motor
is shut off after the time involved in a complete round trip plus a suitable time
margin.
The controller shall automatically limit the current to that necessary for the
specified requirements and shall prevent damage to the electrical equipment from
overload or excess current.
Protection shall be provided against phase failure and phase reversal.
The controller shall also be arranged to cut off the power supply, and bring the
car to rest upon failure or operation of any of the electrical safety devices.
2.1.21
Controls
The car and landing push buttons shall be tactile and illuminated type to indicate
registration of car calls. Landing buttons shall operate as DOOR OPEN buttons
on lift equipped with power operated doors when the car is standing at the
respective floor.
Audio status information shall be provided in addition to normal visual
information.
After a pre-determined period, the car will automatically return to the designated
floor when no calls registered in system.
Fireman's control shall be provided.
9/14
Onyx South Downs
2.1.22
EFW Contract
Control Device Indicators

All control devices, indicators and other similar items shall be contained in
suitable boxes and all face plates shall be of satin stainless steel.
Push buttons in the car and on the landing shall not be mounted at a height in
excess of 900mm above finished floor level and be inscribed with the appropriate
international symbol.
Suitable indication shall be arranged so that when the Fireman's control is
operated, the passengers in the car are made aware of the fact that the lift is
under Fireman's control.
If emergency power control is in operation similar indication to passengers shall
be provided to inform passengers of the fact that the lift is under emergency
power control.
Indicators shall be provided and fitted and shall be arranged so that the voltage
rating of the lamps is at least 10% above the supply connected to the lamp.
2.1.23
Selectors
Selectors, where provided, will be controller mounted uni-selector, actuated by
proximity switches, magnetic tape head or steel tape/multi-strand wire directly
attached to the lift car and enclosed in a sheet metal, ventilated case and
designed for long life and ease of maintenance.
2.1.24
Final Limits
Suitable automatic devices, arranged to bring the car to rest at terminal levels
independently of the operating devices in the car shall be provided.
Final limit switches, in the lift shaft or motor room are to be provided, so arranged
that they will positively stop the car and prevent normal operation should the car
travel beyond the terminal stopping devices, without damage to the equipment or
occupants.
2.1.25
Car Top Control Station

The car top control station shall be provided, to include an up and down push
button and a constant pressure start button, all suitably shrouded to prevent
accidental operation.
10/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
These buttons shall move the car at test speed not exceeding 0.5m/sec and all
safety devices must be operative.
Additional limits to be provided, if necessary, to stop the car when approximately
two metres from any fouling point or danger area at the top of the shaft,
irrespective of any action on the part of the operator on top of the car.
There shall also be a switch on the top of the car, which will remove the car
buttons and the landing buttons from the circuit so that the car top control station
has sole control of the lift and its movement.
In addition, there shall be DOOR OPEN AND DOOR CLOSE buttons which shall
operate within the standard door open and close zones, a 15 amp switch plug,
suitable for hand tools operating on a 110V supply and a lamp operated by a
switch on the car roof.
Emergency light with alarm push to be incorporated within car top control station.
2.1.26
Car Safety Gear

A suitable safety gear to comply with the specification requirements shall be
incorporated in the bottom members of the car frame, operated by means of an
over-speed rope operated governor.
It shall incorporate a switch to cut off supply to the motor and apply the brake, at
a pre-determined increase in speed above the rated speed of the lift. In the
event of over-speeding continuing, the safety gear shall be tripped at a
pre-determined speed and apply the safety gear.
The safety gear shall be released by raising the lift car and there shall be no
damage to the lift car or car frame or passengers and no distortion by the
application of the safety gear.
2.1.27
Data Plates
In a conspicuous position in each lift car the duty load in kilograms and no. of
passengers will be engraved, final details of engraving and positioning to be
agreed with the Purchaser.
Date of manufacture and reference number to be suitably engraved on brass
plate and securely attached to the car sling crosshead members and not in the lift
car.
11/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
A brass plate shall be fixed to oil reservoir tanks giving details of the oil and the
amount required, together with a suitably visual oil level gauge, correctly marked
and with a suitable drain cock.
2.1.28
Pit Light, Stop Push and Socket Outlet

A suitable light fitting and stop switch shall be fitted in the lift pit, in such a
position that the light switch can be operated safely from the lowest floor
entrance. A 13 amp socket outlet with RCD protection shall be fitted in the lift pit.
Stop switches shall be operated safely from the pit and lowest floor entrance.
2.1.29
Shaft Lighting
Shaft lighting shall be provided to BS 5655 min i.e. at 3000mm maximum
intervals and at most 0.5m from the highest and lowest points.
The shaft lighting shall be switched from the Motor Room with a switch
adequately marked "shaft lighting".
2.1.30
Motor Room Safety

In the machine room, or where the main triple pole switch is concealed by other
equipment, a stop switch shall be provided adjacent to the lift machine as
protection for the maintenance engineers. The additional switch shall be
provided when the position of the lift machines, in relation to the main switch
makes it necessary to meet the requirement of "moving machinery" in BS 7671.
"Emergency Release" instructions and "Electric Shock" notice shall to be
provided in the motor room. A Danger notice shall be affixed to motor room
which will be provided with adequate locking device.
A rubber safety mat shall be provided on the floor in front of each control panel.
2.1.31
Labels
Labels shall be supplied and fixed to each cable, consisting of white background
TRAFFOLYTE rigid sheet with 6mm letters engraved and coloured to suit each
service in compliance with the relevant regulations. Labels shall be fixed by
screws or bolts (adhesive is not acceptable) and arranged to indicate type of
service i.e. Electrical, Mechanical, etc.
12/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Size and number of cores

Type of Conductor
Cable Reference No. as shown on distribution diagram
Travelling cables are shall be multi-cored vulcanised rubber insulated, with
braided fire resistant covering, specially designed for use on lifts.
2.1.32
Telephone/Intercom Unit
A suitable telephone box and wiring to a junction box in internal motor room shall
be provided. The cable shall be 6 pair to British Telecom standard.
The face plate shall be stainless steel, inscribed with international symbol and
preferably mounted below the car push box.
2.1.33
Emergency Car Light and Alarm Bell

An emergency alarm bell shall be fitted, at an agreed position, with a suitable
push in the lift car, which will indicate by light signal in the car that the bell is
operating.
It shall be battery operated, shall include the necessary battery chargers to
ensure the battery is charged automatically and when two or more lifts are in a
group, a suitable electric indicator shall also be provided and fixed in an agreed
position, to indicate which lift is operating the alarm bell.
Facilities shall be provided to enable a remote alarm bell to be installed. The
alarm shall be linked to the condition monitoring system.
An emergency light shall be included in each car. The power supply for this will
be from a battery pack and be automatically rechargeable and capable of feeding
at least one lamp for three hours in the case of interruption to normal supplies.
The lighting shall come on automatically upon failure of normal lighting.
2.1.34
Electromagnetic & Radio Interference Suppression

Interference suppression to BS 800 and BS 613 shall be incorporated.
Suppression components shall not be used in circuits where failure might cause
an unsafe condition.
13/14
Onyx South Downs
2.1.35
EFW Contract
Servicing
The Tenderer shall specify the costs for providing a 15 year fully comprehensive
maintenance contract. The Contract shall be payable annually and shall be only
adjustable in accordance with NALM published indices.
2.1.36
Tools
The Contractor shall provide and fix in the plant motor room a rack for the storage
of the following tools which shall also be provided unless integrally designed.
1.
Manual winding wheels
2.
Brake release levers
3.
Lock release keys
4.
Any other tools for use in emergency
5.
Framed and glazed wiring diagram shall also be provided and fixed.
It should be noted that the equipment will not be handed over or accepted until
the tools and wiring diagrams are fixed.
14/14
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: SCHEDULES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIFTS
General
Main Characteristics
Hoistway
Power Supply
Headroom
Internal Lift Car Arrangement
CWSpec-SECTIO3S-Rev4.doc
1/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall complete the Schedules with details of the plant and equipment. He
shall also submit full manufacturers' literature.
3.1
Lifts
a)
General
b)
Location
Quantity of Lifts
Lift Type
Product Reference
Main Characteristics
Load
Speed
Travel
Serving
Floor level designation
Drive system
Control system
Machine room location
2/4
Onyx South Downs
c)
EFW Contract
Hoistway
Clear lift well dimensions
Landing door finish
Faade type
Lift well luminaires
Lift well Illuminance
d)
Power Supply
e)
Headroom
f)
Internal Lift Car Arrangement
Internal dimensions
Car type and finishes
Car Luminaires
Car Illuminance
Car faade
Opening arrangement
Car door panels
Ceiling type
Car flooring
Additional car features
mm
3/4
Onyx South Downs
g)
EFW Contract

Clear opening
Door configuration
Door operator type
4/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRICAL SERVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
STANDARDS
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV)
General
Standards
Scope of Works
Operational Considerations
Cameras
Camera Locations
Transmission
Control Centre
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTE
General
Speaker Circuits
Inputs to System
Battery Standby
Cabling
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
General
Audibility of Fire Alarm Systems
Manual Call Points
Control
Static Fire Appliances
CWSpec-SECTIO4-Rev4.doc
1/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIERS
GENERAL POWER
General
Foul Water Pumping Station
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EMERGENCY AND ESCAPE LIGHTING
FINAL CONNECTIONS (GENERAL)
Flexible Cables
Small Single Phase Equipment Final Connections
Large Single Phase and Three Phase Equipment - Final Connections
TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS
DUCTING AND DRAWPITS
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
EARTHING
Electrical Installation Bonding
Other Service Bonding
Supplementary Bonding of Extraneous Metalwork
Protective Conductor Sizing and Termination
Main Earth Connection
Safety
Safety Electrical Warning Notices
STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS
2/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LABELLING
ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS OR SLIDING FOLDING
3/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRICAL SERVICES
4.1
SCOPE
This section sets out the particular requirements for the electrical services including
the electrical building services, exterior lighting, security, CCTV, PA Systems, fire
detection systems and telephones.
4.2
STANDARDS
This Specification details the minimum outline requirements for the Electrical
systems.
4.3
The requirements given in Section D Clause 1.4 to Clause 1.13 inclusive shall
equally apply to this.
4.4
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV)
4.4.1
General
Except as otherwise specified or agreed, all the equipment comprising the CCTV
system shall be suitable for continuous service under the onerous conditions
expected on site and shall be effectively protected against damage and the weather
conditions found on site.
Except as otherwise prescribed or agreed, all apparatus and components therefore
which are included in the system shall be of tried and proved design and
construction.
As round-the-clock surveillance is required, the equipment shall meet this
Specification from full sunlight down to the levels of artificial lighting ("Low light
system", illumination range 105 to 4 lux).
The installation shall be designed, installed and commissioned by a specialist
company experienced in CCTV systems.
4/21
Onyx South Downs
4.4.2
EFW Contract
Standards
All component parts of the installation shall comply with the latest relevant British
Standards Specifications and EC Directives and shall be manufactured to strict
systems of limits.
The system shall conform to the National Approved Council for Security Systems
Code of Practice for Planning, Installation and Maintenance of Close Circuit
Television Systems.
4.4.3
Scope of Works
The system shall comprise the provision of a complete CCTV system which shall
include, but not be limited to:
Cameras, masts and supplementary lighting
Power supplies
Communication links
Control centre(s), control console(s) and all equipment
Civil and builder's work
Brackets, fixing etc. to buildings/structures
Testing and commissioning
Provision of full operation and maintenance procedures and record

drawings
Training
The system shall be sized to allow for the addition of at least 6 further cameras and
monitors in the future.
5/21
Onyx South Downs
4.4.4
EFW Contract
Operational Considerations
Automation of the following functions will be provided:
Video switching
Selection of camera preposition
Monitoring equipment
Lighting control
These functions shall be controlled from:
Timed events
Manual intervention.
Irrespective of the degree of automation, the operator should be able to take

manual control of the system.
Automation of picture selection shall take the following into consideration:
Allocation of the monitors that display the pictures from these cameras. On
screen display of the camera identification is required, preferably in
conjunction with a mimic diagram of the installation.
Which pictures are to be recorded in real time.
The following response times shall be kept to a minimum:
Camera pre-positioning where pre-sets are used on the zoom lens control
and pan and tilt head control.
Operator's response time where intervention is required.
To minimise response times, cameras,, monitors, video recorders etc. shall be kept
powered up at all operational times.
6/21
Onyx South Downs
4.4.5
EFW Contract
Cameras
General
All cameras shall be Colour CCD cameras with a horizontal resolution of at least
400 lines and with the appropriate sensitivity to provide optimum quality pictures in
the lighting conditions for the site.
All cameras shall be capable of reading car registrations at 100m.
All cameras shall have a pan/tilt and zoom and shall operate at a voltage of 12/24
Vdc.
External cameras shall be complete with wipe facilities and heaters.
Camera Mounting
Selection of a camera housing and mast, which must be finished to the colour
advised by the Purchaser shall be suitable for the environmental conditions,
including:
Exposed maritime
Lightning protection
Vandal resistance
Internal temperature rise
Support steelwork shall be protected to Table 3 Part 9 of BS 5493.

The camera mounting arrangement shall allow for the separation of video signal
earth and housing metal work.
Brackets shall adequately provide for:
The maximum weight of the equipment with sufficient rigidity for the camera
equipment and other devices. Rigidity shall be sufficient to maintain clear
images with the narrowest field of view, i.e. full zoom and must include the
rigidity of the camera mount.
Future access and safe working.
Moving cameras having sufficient clearing space from adjacent objects.
7/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Camera Functions
The manual panning, tilting and zooming rates of cameras with zoom lenses shall
be operator controlled with maximum and minimum speeds and proportional control
suitable for the applications. The lenses must be of appropriate aperture and range
of focal lengths to suit the camera sensor, the fields of view and the range of
lighting levels. They must be fully motorised and have auto-iris functions but with
manual override provision.
The recommendations for pan and tile units shall take fully into account:
4.4.6
Environmental capabilities
Platform loading
Torque figures in relation to unbalanced platform loading and wind load
Pan and tilt unit backlash on both axes
Speed and range of movement of pan and tilt.
Camera Locations
Camera locations to be agreed with the Employer.
4.4.7
Transmission
Video transmission, together with control data shall be in real time and without
perceptible degradation using either:
a)
Fibre Optic
b)
Coaxial Cable
c)
A combination of systems.
In view of the ongoing site development, an ability to easily reroute/redirect

transmission paths will be a distinct advantage and should be feature of the
Tender.
8/21
Onyx South Downs
4.4.8
EFW Contract
Control Centre
Full control of the system shall be provided from the Control Room and Gate House
Building, together with video multi-plexing and recording in real time with camera
number, data and time generation in S-VHS format with full screen selection.
The equipment complement shall include a large-sized monitor (25" colour) with a
six-way splitter displaying the pictures of the cameras with a 14" colour spot
monitor. All pictures would be recorded at all times, recording being in time-lapse
mode or long play mode except during alerts.
Provision shall be provided for the connection of repeat monitors.
4.5
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
4.5.1
General
The Public Address System will be interfaced with the Fire Alarm to also act as a
Voice Evacuation system. When designing this system the Contractor must take
into consideration the relevant parts of BS 5839, Part 1. Regarding power supplies,
monitoring, alternate alarm communication circuits and audibility BS 7443 `Sound
Systems for Emergency Purposes' must also be considered as regards `SPEECH
INTELLIGIBILITY' rather than audibility. In other respects the system shall comply
with the requirements of BS 6259 Type 3.
The system shall be modular in construction to allow for the addition of future
facilities and shall be controlled from the Control Room by means of a PC based
system with necessary software. The PC and software shall be provided as part of
these works.
4.5.2
Speaker Circuits
The Contractor is responsible for the design and provision of a loudspeaker
distribution system to give good sound reproduction throughout the complex.
9/21
Onyx South Downs
4.5.3
EFW Contract
Inputs to System
All paging via the PA system will be done using a telephone interface from the
PABX system enabling all authorised extensions access to the Broadcast System,
or a microphone situated in the Control Room. The order of priority on the inputs
shall be as follows:1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fireman's Priority Microphone located adjacent to Fire alarm panel.

Fire Evacuate Message
Fire Alert Message
Pre-set Message 1
Pre-set Message 2
Pre-set Message 3
Pre-set Message 4
Pre-set Message 5
Pre-set Message 6
Pre-set Message 7
Pre-set Message 8
Pre-set Message 9
Pre-set Message 10
Telephone Paging
All controls for the Public Address system should be located in the Control Room.
All equipment should be modular and based round the 19 inch rack mounting
system.
All preset messages shall be capable of being recorded locally in the Control Room
and shall be capable of being re-recorded each time a message needs to be
changed without the need to be reprogrammed and taken from site.
4.5.4
Battery Standby
The Contractor is to calculate loading and size of battery units necessary to comply
with BS 5839 Part 1 requirements. Sealed standby batteries are required.
4.5.5
Cabling
All loudspeaker cables shall be Fire Resistant in accordance with BS 6207 Part 1
and should be arranged so that every alternate speaker within a particular zone is
fed via a separate supervised amplifier circuit. Care should also be taken to
arrange that the priority inputs are also suitably protected from the effects of fire.
10/21
Onyx South Downs
4.6
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
4.6.1
General
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall provide an automatic detection fire alarm system (but not be
limited to these systems) in accordance with the requirements of BS 5839, level of
protection Type L2.
The specialist Contractor shall be a LPCB certified company.
The Contractor shall provide a master fire alarm controller which is interfaced with
the Public Address system via a P.C. which shall be housed in the Control Room.
4.6.2
Audibility of Fire Alarm Systems

All fire alarm audible warnings are to be transmitted by recorded/live voice
messages over the PA system.
The warning voice message will only be broadcast in the area covered by the
system in which the fire has occurred.
4.6.3
Manual Call Points

Manual call points shall be located on all exit routes and in particular on floor
landings of staircases and at exits to the open air. In general, they should be sited
so that no person need travel more than 30m in order to activate the alarm.
4.6.4
Control
The fire alarm systems shall be linked to all mechanical services to allow control of
the systems as deemed necessary by the Fire Officer. The security and access
control system shall also be integrated to enable all electromagnetic door locks to
de-energise on a fire alarm signal.
4.6.5
Static Fire Appliances

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary static fire
appliances.
11/21
Onyx South Downs
4.7
EFW Contract
FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIERS

The Contractor shall make adequate provision for fire and smoke barriers in and
around trunking, conduits, cables etc. which pass through any floor, ceiling, wall,
partition etc. which is a fire barrier, in full accordance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations 16th Edition.
The Contractor shall ensure that this work is carried out to the requirements of the
IEE Wiring Regulations 16th Edition and that the integrity of any such fire barrier is
properly maintained where pierced by a service installed under this Contract.
4.8
GENERAL POWER
4.8.1
General
The general power requirements are as shown in the room data sheets and shall
include the following:
a)
Switched Socket outlets and fused connections - all buildings and walkways.
b)
Hand dryers, Sanitary Towel and shaver supplies.
c)
Lifts
d)
Mechanical services electrical requirements, including plant, electrically

operated doors, windows, pumps and other fixed equipment.
e)
All other ancillary electrical systems, PA, Fire Alarms and telephones.
Socket outlets, switches shall be of robust metal clad manufacture within the
building. White dado trunking shall be used.
All electrical accessories are to be of a robust type. All socket outlets in outdoor or
semi outdoor areas shall be weatherproof and RCD protected.
4.8.2
Foul Water Pumping Station

The Contractor shall provide a suitable rated supply for the foul water pumping
station designed and constructed within this Contract.
4.9
INTERIOR LIGHTING
12/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The general lighting requirements are as shown in the room data sheets and shall
include the following:a)
Metal halide pendant type luminaires with prismatic bell shaped skirt in the
high-bay areas.
b)
Surface/recessed mounted fluorescent luminaires complete with prismatic

diffusers in all general areas, including staff toilets, corridors etc.
c)
Surface/recessed mounted fluorescent luminaires complete with low

brightness diffusers in all offices.
d)
Corrosion resistant and vandal/vapour proof fluorescent luminaires in plant

rooms.
e)
Lighting to entrance canopy to be recessed compact fluorescent
downlighters.
Lighting levels shall be as detailed on the room data sheets and as the CIBSE
Guide for Interior Lighting.
In all areas where there are false ceilings or suspended lighting, the luminaires
shall be recessed with plug connectors and flexible connections to the conduit fixed
to the soffit above. The connectors shall be located no more than 300mm from the
suspended ceiling.
The installation shall be carried out as a flush conduit system wherever practicable
with surface conduit in areas such as barrel vault ceilings.
Where conduits are run surface mounted they shall be hidden wherever possible
behind structural steelwork etc.
All area lighting shall be switched from a central position in each room. Where
multiple luminaires are installed in a room, they shall be grouped to provide lighting
control e.g. luminaires near windows in offices separately switched to internal
luminaires. Full 2 way and intermediate switching shall be provided at all access
points.
All luminaires shall be of robust construction with fluorescent luminaires being as
`Thorn' or agreed similar with T8 tubes and high frequency low loss control gear.
4.10
EMERGENCY AND ESCAPE LIGHTING
13/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The emergency lighting shall be designed in accordance with BS 5266. The

emergency lighting shall generally be provided by means of self-contained nonmaintained battery-invertor packs utilising the general lighting where practicable.
The battery/invertor packs shall be contained in the fittings or in a housing next to
the appropriate fittings.
All battery/invertor packs shall have a minimum emergency duration of 3 hours.
All escape routes and exits shall be lit by means of illuminated maintained selfcontained luminaires. Exit doors shall be provided with emergency luminaires
internally and externally. External luminaires shall be IP65 rated polycarbonate
vandal/weatherproof fittings.
The emergency lighting scheme should include adequate facilities for testing and
recording the system condition. A suitable means of testing alternate emergency
luminaires shall be provided to avoid the risk of having all luminaries discharged
while the building is occupied.
For areas illuminated by low-voltage downlighters or high - bay lighting additional
emergency luminaires shall be utilised to achieve the requirements of BS 5266, as
appropriate.
4.11
FINAL CONNECTIONS (GENERAL)

This Section details the requirement for flexible cables and standard methods of
final connection to luminaires and equipment in frequent use. In some instances
variations in the construction or application of a luminaire or item of equipment will
require a non-standard method of final connection.
4.11.1 Flexible Cables

All flexible cables used for final connections to fixed or portable equipment other
than detailed below shall be 300/500 volt grade to BS 6500, PVC insulated and
white circular PVC sheathed with conductors of HC tinned copper wires.
All flexible cables used for luminaires or for final connections to any fixed or
portable equipment which:
14/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
i)
contains any form of heating element
ii)
is fixed to any pipework or appliance which is fed with, or forms part of a

distribution system for hot water or other heated fluid
iii)
forms part of any combustion appliance or chimney
shall be 300/500 volt grade, to BS 6500 silicone rubber insulated and white circular
glass braided sheathed with conductors of HC tinned copper wires.
4.11.2 Small Single Phase Equipment Final Connections
For the purpose of this Clause small single phase equipment is defined as any nonportable item operating at 240 volts or less, single phase, with a current rating not
exceeding 13 amps, but excluding fixed luminaires.
Where the item is wall mounted on a concealed wiring system and a back entry can
be made to it, then a flush mounted box shall be fitted and the item mounted to
conceal the box. Where the item contains any form of heating element or is fed
with any hot fluid, the fixed wiring shall terminate at a fixed connector block
mounted in the box and a heat resisting final connection will make a back entry to
the item. Where a heat resisting final connection is not required, the fixed wiring
shall make a back entry and terminate at the item terminal block.
Where the item is wall mounted on a concealed wiring system and a back entry
cannot be made to it then the fixed wiring shall terminate at a box which shall be
fixed immediately adjacent to the item and the final connection made in flexible
cable or flexible conduit.
Where the item is wall mounted on a surface wiring system and the item has
suitable provision for the direct entry of the wiring medium then, other than where a
heat resisting final connection is required, a direct entry shall be made. Where a
heat resisting final connection is required then the "fixed to flexible" final connection
shall be made all as described above.
Where local control is required for isolation purposes to comply with the IEE
Regulations 16th Edition an isolator unit shall be mounted adjacent to the item.
4.11.3 Large Single Phase and Three Phase Equipment - Final Connections
At all fixed single and three phase industrial equipment the circuit wiring shall
15/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
terminate in an isolator adjacent to the equipment from which the supply is to be

taken to the equipment via any starters or other control devices.
4.14
TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS

Not referred to here.
4.15
DUCTING AND DRAWPITS

The Contractor shall install three separate duct systems with drawpits. One system
shall be for power distribution and power control cables and the second for
communication systems including PA, Security, Fire Alarm, CCTV etc. ("Comms")
and the third for the external telephone system provider.
The ducting is generally to be PVC-u in accordance with BS3506 Class `O'. Size
and colours as follows:BT
100mm dia
Grey
Comms
100mm dia
Orange
Power
150mm dia
Black.
The dimensions and number of ducts and the dimensions of draw pits shall finally
be decided by the Contractor subject to the agreement of the Purchaser and in
particular the final design shall ensure that recommended minimum bending radii
for cables are taken into account.
All draw pits shall have heavy duty covers which shall be single, two, three or four
piece to facilitate removal using only a proprietary cover lifter. At least two
proprietary cover lifters shall be provided as part of this contract.
All ducts upturns into buildings shall be sealed with flexible, waterproof, fire
resistant sealant after installation of cables.
16/21
Onyx South Downs
4.16
EFW Contract
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
The lightning protection system shall comply with the requirements of the latest
edition of BS 6651 and the General Electrical Specification where this is more
onerous. Where buildings are steel framed and the frame constitutes a good
electrical conductor, the vertical steel frames may be used as down conductors
appropriately jointed to the air and earth terminations.
The resistance to earth of high mast lighting columns shall be measured. If this
measurement exceeds 10 ohms then an earth electrode termination shall be
installed for each unit according to BS 6651 to achieve a resistance not exceeding
10 ohms..
Transient overvoltage protection shall be provided on all power, communications,
and aerial connections as required by Appendix C of BS 6651 for an installation
with a consequential loss rating of 3.
4.17
EARTHING
The Contractor is to earth the whole installation in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE
Wiring Regulations 16th Edition), BS 7430 (Earthing) and also with the earthing
requirements of the General Electrical Specification.
Where lightning protection is provided for a building/structure, the lightning
protection system shall be bonded to the main earth terminal of the
building/structure along with all other services as required by BS 7671.
The LV switchgear panel earth bar shall be bonded by a suitably sized protective
conductor to the substation LV earth bar in the switchroom. All other items of
electrical equipment including the mobile diesel generator set shall be bonded to
the LV earth bar by suitably sized protective conductors.
4.17.1 Electrical Installation Bonding

All metalwork, other than current carrying conductors, which forms part of or
provides mechanical protection for the electrical installation including all appliances
and equipment, shall be bonded to the main earth terminal of the switch panel from
which it is fed by circuit protective conductors.
17/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The circuit protective conductor shall be a copper conductor or may be in a whole

or in part any metal trunking; metal conduit excluding flexible conduit; cable sheath
and/or armouring of any cable, armoured flexible cords or cables; or the integral
earth conductor of any multicore cable provided that its cross-sectional area
complies with the requirements of the IEE Regulations 16th Edition.
4.17.2 Other Service Bonding
All exposed structural steelwork, lifts, ventilation ducting, central heating and water
services systems shall be bonded by means of a main bonding conductor to the
main earth terminal.
No part of any other service, nor any bonding termination at such services shall be
used to form part of the earth fault path of any circuit protective conductor.
Before commencing earth bonding between any other service and any part of the
electrical installation, the Contractor shall ensure that the protective/bonding
conductor is properly connected to earth and the other services will not be the sole
earth fault path.
The Contractor shall prove the continuity of all existing services. The Purchaser
shall be invited to witness these tests. All areas which fail to give satisfactory test
results shall be specifically brought to the attention of the Purchaser.
4.17.3 Supplementary Bonding of Extraneous Metalwork
All extraneous metalwork as defined in the IEE Regulations 16th Edition and which
is specified to be bonded therein shall be bonded to the electrical installation circuit
protective conductor. The fixing screws of conduit saddles, cable clips, accessories
or items of equipment shall not be relied upon as the sole means of bonding to any
structural steelwork or other metal required to be bonded.
4.17.4 Protective Conductor Sizing and Termination
All protective conductors shall be sized strictly in accordance with the IEE
Regulations 16th Edition unless a conductor of lower impedance is specified
elsewhere.
Where a protective conductor takes the form of a cable it shall have a copper
conductor insulated with green/yellow PVC insulation.
18/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
All protective cable conductors shall be terminated using compression lugs where
bolted connections are required.
For the purpose of this clause, short lengths of protective conductor which are
copper tape and which are wholly fixed to the exterior of an individual switchpanel
or other item of equipment need not be insulated.
4.17.5 Main Earth Connection
The copper earth rods for the main earth shall be steel cored copper rods of not
less than 12mm diameter and 3m lengths and shall be fitted with a disposable head
for driving into the ground.
Earth rods shall be spaced apart at a distance at least equal to their length and no
rod shall be set closer than 3m to the foundations of any building. Every earth rod
shall be provided with an earthenware or concrete inspection trap with removable
cover which shall be installed flush with the finished ground level, the trap cover
shall be inscribed `ELECTRICAL EARTH'. All earth lead connections to earth rods
shall be made by means of clamps as provided for the purpose by the earth rod
manufacturer.
4.17.6 Safety
A reliable method of earth protection must be provided to any section of the
installation before that section has mains voltage applied to it.
4.17.7 Safety Electrical Warning Notices
A permanent warning notice shall be attached to or fixed adjacent to the point
where an earth conductor connects to an earth electrode or where a bonding
conductor connects to an extraneous conductive part. The label shall be durably
marked `SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE' as per the
IEE Regulations 16th Edition.
19/21
Onyx South Downs
4.18
EFW Contract
STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS

The standard mounting height of the underside of the faceplates of accessories and
other fitments above finished floor level shall be as listed below:
Light Switches
1300mm
Socket Outlets (Wall mounted)

Isolators and Starters
400mm
1300mm
Radio and TV Sockets
400mm
Wall Light Fittings
2200mm
Light Boxes
2000mm
Thermostats
1700mm
Fire Alarm Pushes
1300mm
Panic Buttons
1300mm
Wall Mounted Telephones
1350mm
Dado Trunking
1000mm
Socket outlets above benches shall be 200mm above the worktop.

4.19
LABELLING
The Contractor shall supply and fix warning labels to all removable covers on
equipment including lighting switches and other accessories, main switchgear and
distribution boards, junction boxes, control or other equipment at which a potential
greater than 250 volts exists. These labels shall bear the word "DANGER" together
with the value of the voltage present, e.g. `DANGER 415 VOLTS'.
If items of apparatus in which voltages do not exceed 240V can be reached
simultaneously by a person and the potential between them exceeds 240V, then
each must carry a warning notice stating the highest voltage that exists between
the two, e.g. 'DANGER 415 VOLTS BETWEEN APPARATUS'.
Where a control panel or other items of equipment contains secondary circuits
20/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
which are not isolated by the primary means of isolation provided for the item then
a warning label shall be fitted to that item.
The label shall give warning that a secondary circuit is not isolated by the primary
isolator. It shall also specify the circuit(s) which are not isolated (e.g. contactor coil
circuit(s)) and where such circuits can be isolated.
Every junction box, switch fuse, fuseway or other item of equipment associated
with, or controlling the supply to a fire alarm system shall be fitted with a label
bearing the words `FIRE ALARM` together with any information which may be
required.
The above labels shall be ivorine or traffolyte with the information engraved on
them in 6mm high red capital lettering on a white background. The labels shall be
fixed by screws or rivets.
Switchgear, distribution boards and other similar controls are to be labelled to
indicate function. Labels shall be ivorine or traffolyte with information engraved on
them in 6mm high red capital lettering on a white background. The labels shall be
fixed by screws or rivets. Labels fixed by adhesive are not acceptable.
Danger notices shall be fixed to the external doors of all switchrooms and to all
distribution and switch boards.
4.20
ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS OR SLIDING FOLDING

The Contractor shall provide suitably sized roller shutter or sliding folding doors as
indicated on the plans generally in accordance with IEC 730-2012.
The doors shall be operated by local up/down pushbuttons mounted in a recessed
module discretely positioned adjacent to the roller shutters. An isolator shall be
provided above the suspended ceiling for local isolation of each shutter.
The roller shutters shall be equipped with an override mechanical device to enable
the shutters to be raised and lowered on power or motor failure. The colour and
finish of doors shall be agreed with the Purchaser prior to orders being placed.
21/21
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE
STANDARDS
General Codes and Regulations
Compliance with British Standards
Design
Standards of equipment and components
DEFINITIONS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
General
Working Drawings
Current Drawings
RECORD DOCUMENTS
General
Record Drawings
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
COMMISSIONING
CWSpec-SECTION1-Rev4.doc
1/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TESTING
General
Tests and Inspection at Manufacturer's Works
On Site Testing
Earthing Tests
Test Results
TRAINING
SPARES
2/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
1.1
SCOPE
This part specifies the minimum design, performance, materials, workmanship,
testing and commissioning requirements for the heating, ventilating, water and
electrical building services and the external and internal mechanical and electrical
infrastructure and systems.
1.2
STANDARDS
1.2.1
General Codes and Regulations

All design, materials, workmanship, testing and commissioning shall be in
accordance with the appropriate standards which shall include but not necessarily
be limited to:
-
The Recommendations of the Chartered Institution of Building Services

Engineers (CIBSE Guides) & Codes.
Volume A
Design Data
Volume B
Installation and Equipment Data
Volume C
Reference Data
Volume D
Transportation Systems in Buildings
British Standard Specification and Codes of Practice
BS 7671 IEE Requirements for Electrical Installations (The IEE Wiring

Regulations 16th Edition), with Amendments
Electricity at Work Regulations
Electricity Supply Act, 1988
The Factories Act
The Building Regulations
The Health and Safety at Work Act
3/16
Onyx South Downs
1.2.2
EFW Contract
Local Authority Bye Laws
Water Authority Byelaws
Fire Officers Committee Regulations
Requirements of the local Fire Prevention Officer
The supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 1992 (S.I.1992/3073) as

amended (S.I. 1994/2063)
Gas Safety Regulations
Compliance with British Standards

Equipment and the installation shall conform with the requirements of all relevant
British and European Standards and Codes of Practice and Statutory Regulations
and including but not necessarily limited to the following:
BS 7671
Requirements for Electrical Installations (The IEE Wiring

Regulations 16th Edition)
BS 31
Steel conduit and fittings
BS 4568
Steel conduit and fittings
BS 731
Flexible steel conduit
BS 4607
Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations
BS 6004
PVC Insulated Cables
BS 6007
Rubber insulated cables
BS 6346
PVC insulated cables
BS6469
Electric cables
BS 6500
Insulated flexible cords and cables
BS 6207
Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables
BS 5486
Low voltage switchgear and control gear
BS5489
Road lighting
4/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 8206
Lighting for buildings
BS 4533
Luminaires
BS 5266
Emergency Lighting
BS 5499
Fire safety
BS 5839
Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
BS 5588: Part 3
Fire precautions in the design and construction of buildings.

Code of Practice for office buildings.
ISO 8201
Acoustics - Audible evacuation signal
ISO 8253
Acoustics - method of conducting speech audiometric tests.
BS 4737
Intruder Alarms
IEC 839
Alarm Systems
BS 6651
Lightning Protection
BS 7430
Earthing
BS 88
Cartridge Fuses
BS 5655
Lifts and service lifts
BS 5304
Code of Practice for safety of machinery
BS 302
Stranded wire ropes
BS 6977
Specification for insulated flexible cables for lifts and other

flexible connections
BS 5810
Code of Practice for access for the disabled buildings
BS 759
Valves, gauges and other safety fittings
BS 853
BS 143
Calorifiers and Storage Vessels for central heating

and hot water supply
Malleable cast iron pipe fittings
5/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
BS 864
Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper

and copper alloy
BS 1387
Steel tubes
BS 1740
Wrought steel pipe fittings
BS 3602
Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes
BS 4508
Thermally insulated underground pipelines
BS 8207
Energy efficiency in buildings
BS 727/BS 800
Radio interference suppression
Reference to British, European and other National or International Standards shall

be deemed to mean the latest edition of the standard with amendments current at
the time
1.2.3
Design
This Specification details the minimum outline requirements for electrical &
mechanical systems within the civil engineering and building works scope.
The Contractor shall be responsible for:-
1.2.4
a)
All aspects of design, application and proving of the equipment in

accordance with the requirements of the Specification and the Drawings.
b)
Liaison between suppliers to ensure complete compatibility of all equipment

at both component and system interface levels.
c)
Overall systems engineering and co-ordination to ensure that all equipment,

software, components and systems together form a consistent, rational and
fully integrated system.
d)
The supply, installation and termination and testing of all components,

cabling, cabling systems and wiring of all components which may be
necessary to achieve the correct and specified function and to provide a
safe and reliable installation, whether or not such components are
specifically called for in the Specification.
Standards of equipment and components
6/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The equipment and components shall be designed and constructed;

a)
to be suitable for the heavy duty conditions, such that with proper
maintenance and operation, a minimum working life of 15 years is expected
without replacement or reinstatement of any major assembly or a
substantial proportion of component elements;
b)
such that routine and occasional maintenance throughout its life shall be a
practical minimum, compatible with the preservation of maximum reliability;
c)
to withstand the electrical, mechanical, thermal and atmospheric stresses to

which it may be subjected under operational conditions, without
deterioration or failure with due consideration given to the environment in
which it is to be installed;
d)
to high standards of manufacture, reliability, accuracy and repeatability of

performance.
Components and equipment shall be standardised throughout the Works so that

wherever more than one item is supplied, all such items shall be identical.
The Contractor shall notify the Purchaser in writing of any proposed change in
design, manufacture, manufacturing methods or materials from those included or
implied once agreement by the Purchaser has been given. The Purchaser
recognises the importance of including the latest principles and design in the final
design of any plant, but it is necessary that he should be fully aware of the details
of construction of the plant as finally installed and of the reasons for any change
from that offered.
7/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Where there are not full details in the Specification or associated drawings
regarding the exact location or method of installation of measuring equipment,
sensors or other size mounted equipment, the Contractor shall submit details of his
proposed installation to the Purchaser for agreement before starting any installation
work.
1.2.5

Requirements for standards of materials and workmanship relevant to particular
types of work, installation or equipment are specified herein.
The specifications for mechanical and electrical service systems in this Part are
intended to indicate the minimum acceptable standards of materials and
workmanship.
Notwithstanding the requirements set out herein, it shall be entirely the Contractor's
responsibility to provide mechanical and electrical services systems which, when
completed, provide a comprehensive technically viable, safe and durable
construction entirely in accordance with the requirements laid down.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
Plant shall mean machinery, apparatus, materials, articles and things of all kinds
incorporated in the Works.
The term provide and its derivatives shall mean the complete design,
manufacture, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of the Works,
inclusive of such ancillary service as inspection and witnessed testing at the places
of manufacture, workshop and site painting, handling on site, site trials and of all
such other services as are noted in the Specification or reasonably necessary for
the safe, reliable and efficient completion of the Contract.
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
All plant shall remain operational, within specification, over the ranges
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
-20 to +35C
10% to 95% (non condensing)
Variations in the power supply to the works of:

10% of nominal voltage and
2.5% of nominal frequency
shall not effect the system operation.
8/16
Onyx South Downs
1.5
EFW Contract
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION

Apparatus, such as thyristor controls, contactor starters, contactors, luminaire
chokes, etc. shall be fitted with means for suppressing interference frequencies.
The standards of interference suppression required shall be in accordance with BS
800.
Details of the equipment and methods to be used in determining the level of radio
interference shall be as specified in BS 727.
1.6
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
All plant, apparatus, connection, wiring etc. shall be so designed and arranged to
minimise the risk of fire and any damage resulting from fire.
1.7
1.7.1
General
The Contractor shall submit Construction Information to the Purchaser for review in
accordance with the specification. Submissions of Construction Information shall
include manufacturers drawings and specifications for all major items of plant,
including electrical equipment, switch panels, control panels. The information shall
include all details of performance, electrical connections, wiring diagrams.
Submissions in respect of major manufactured plant items are to be made at least
28 days before the date when the Contractor plans to place a firm order for supply
of the item.
1.7.2
Working Drawings
The Contractor shall submit Services Schematics, Design Basis Statements,
Calculations and detailed Working Drawings in accordance with the Specification.
The drawings shall show clearly the installation and details of all concealed
sections. They shall identify all pieces of equipment and give capacities and duties.
The Drawings shall comprise in principle but not be restricted to the following:a)
General arrangement drawings of all services at a scale of 1:50 (including

pipework, conduit and trunking drawings).
b)
Sub-stations, Plant Rooms, Switchrooms, Motor Rooms at a scale of 1:20

in plan and elevation/section.
9/16
Onyx South Downs
1.7.3
EFW Contract
c)
Core areas and riser shaft co-ordinated services at a scale of 1:20 in plan
and elevation/section.
d)
Schedules of all equipment, fully referenced and cross referenced with the
drawings.
e)
Schematic drawings of all services, clearly identifying the type of

components, size and manufacturer, cross references with the drawings.
f)
Dimensioned details of pits, drawpit chambers, etc.
g)
Routes and dimensioned sections of all ducting and pipework.
h)
Exterior services including water supplies, CCTV, lighting, and security

systems etc. at a scale of 1:500.
Current Drawings
During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall keep a set of drawings kept
up to date showing any alterations which have been made to the scheme and to
the position of all services as actually installed. These drawings shall be kept,
updated daily, and be accessible to the Purchaser and Purchasers appointed
Representative.
1.8
RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.8.1
General
Copies of record documents including record drawings and operating and
maintenance instructions and manuals shall be provided to the Purchaser in
accordance with the Specification.
1.8.2
Record Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare all record drawings, necessary drawings and
diagrams of the "as-fitted" works as may be required for record and for care,
maintenance, repair, and other purposes, and these shall include:
a)
Arrangement drawings of each complete installation to a scale of not less

than 1:50.
b)
Outline dimensioned drawings of each of the principal items of plant. Each

shall carry or be accompanied by a schedule of fittings, instruments and
components which shall include the maker's names, reference numbers,
ratings and full particulars of all the component parts.
10/16
Onyx South Downs
1.8.3
EFW Contract
c)
Sectional drawings of each of the major items of plant with the parts named
and numbered to facilitate maintenance and overhaul.
d)
Detailed electrical, piping and operational schematic diagrams.
e)
Schedules, diagrams, and route sections for cable, ducts and other services
installations.
f)
Cable and pipe route plan of the site and of each of the principal
installations showing sections through the cable groups and service ducts
so that each cable etc., in a group or trench may be readily identified. This
information shall preferably be shown on a number of large scale drawings
which shall be correlated by means of a small scale master plan.
g)
Diagrams and all relevant operational particulars in respect of electrical and

hydraulic circuits and equipment.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals

The Contractor shall submit 2 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals
for all of the mechanical and electrical services for review by the Purchaser not less
than 4 weeks before final testing and commissioning.
The Contractor shall prepare comprehensive maintenance and operation manuals
and shall obtain from the manufacturers of all equipment supplied under his
contract and equipment supplied by others, all the instruction manuals necessary
for the correct maintenance and operation of that equipment. The manuals shall
include a complete diagram of all internal and external mechanical, electrical and
other services connections with a parts list identifying all components.
The Manuals shall be comprehensive and prepared in accordance with the
requirements of BS 4899 and as a minimum include the following:i)
Full description of each system.
ii)
Method of manual and automatic operation.
iii)
Procedures in case of faults
iv)
Emergency procedures
v)
Recommended maintenance requirements with details of lubricants etc.
11/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
vi)
Schedule of spares
vii)
Full technical data including drawings of plant and circuit diagrams
viii)
Test certificates
Once the manuals have been agreed the Contractor shall provide 6 bound copies
as described in the Specification.
1.9
COMMISSIONING
Prior to the commencement of any commissioning works, the Contractor shall
submit a schedule of commissioning works with a fully detailed method statement
for review by the Purchaser.
All commissioning shall be undertaken in accordance with CIBSE codes, BS 7671,
the requirements of the General and Particular Specifications and any special
requirements of the manufacturer of the systems supplied.
The Purchaser will indicate which commissioning tests he wishes to witness and
the Contractor shall agree dates for these with the Purchaser. Any commissioning
tests which fail shall be repeated until satisfactory results as determined by the
Purchaser are achieved.
When it is not possible at the particular time of commissioning and testing for full
load conditions to be obtained or simulated, the Contractor shall repeat such
operations at such future time with full load when the simulation can be achieved.
Any repeat text shall be carried out at no extra cost to the Contract. Where
portions of the work are commissioned and tested separately, the Contractor shall,
upon final completion, demonstrate to the Purchaser that all the several portions
are capable of proper simultaneous operation in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract.
In cases where the overall building programme is such that the Contractor will need
to return, for the purpose of testing, regulation, adjustment or remedial work, to
portions of the buildings, which by the time, may be in occupation by the Employer,
the Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender accordingly and shall
take all necessary precautions against damage when working in such areas.
1.10
TESTING
1.10.1 General
Upon completion of installation on site each item of plant shall be tested for
compliance with this Specification and in accordance with the relevant specification
12/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
or code issued by the British Standards Institution. In the absence of such a

specification or code these tests shall be performed in a manner subject to the
The Contractor shall give fourteen working days notice to the Purchaser when the
plant is ready for tests.
The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials, stores and apparatus necessary
for tests and inspections.
1.10.2 Tests and Inspection at Manufacturer's Works
Prior to despatch all plant mechanical and electrical shall be tested at the
manufacturer's works in the presence of the Purchaser or his appointed
representative to determine its performance characteristics and for the purpose of
determining if it complies with the specification or codes issued by the British
Standards Institution. In the absence of such a specification or code, these tests
shall be performed in a manner subject to the agreement of the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall give fourteen working days notice to the Purchaser when plant
is ready for test at the manufacturer's works.
In the event of testing and/or inspection being carried out at a sub-contractor's
works, the Contractor's representative shall accompany the Purchaser or his
appointed representative on each visit.
Electric motors shall be tested separately in accordance with BS 5000 and certified
test certificates provided in triplicate.
Pumping plant shall be subjected to witness tests in accordance with BS 5316 Part
1, 1976, Class 'C' tests.
13/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Electrical panels shall be subjected to the following witnessed tests, at the

Manufacturer's Works, prior to despatch to site:
(a)
A thorough visual inspection, with all covers both in place and removed.
(b)
Operational tests on all control and auxiliary circuits, with switches, lamps,
etc, being connected as necessary to represent equipment mounted
remotely from the switchboard.
(c)
Phase continuity tests.
(d)
Flash test (2.5 kV applied between phases and between phases and earth
for a period of 1 minute).
(e)
Insulation tests at 500V between phases and between phases and earth.
If it is necessary to provide simulated controls in order to perform a test at the

manufacturer's works, the Contractor shall provide such controls as part of the
Works. The design of the controls shall be subject to prior agreement by the
Purchaser.
1.10.3 On Site Testing
Tests required shall be carried out by the Contractor and witnessed by the
Purchaser. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the Purchaser of all tests
so that the Purchaser can make arrangements for witnessing.
Testing as called for in the IEE Wiring Regulations 16th Edition shall be completed
in the sequence stated in the Regulations as follows:
a)
Continuity of protective conductors
b)
Continuity of ring final circuit conductors
c)
Insulation resistance of phase and neutral conductors
d)
Polarity checks throughout the installation
e)
Earth fault loop impedance check
f)
Earth electrode resistance check
g)
Operation of residual current operated devises.
14/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser a Method Statement detailing his
programme for on site testing, which shall take into account that completed stages
of work may be handed over to the Employer and become operational before all
later stages of the work are ready for testing.
The Contractor shall rectify any faults or defective work revealed by the tests and
shall retest the work, as many times as are necessary, at his own expense.
Where further tests are required to be undertaken on areas of work already handed
over to the Employer, these tests shall be undertaken at times agreed with the
Purchaser and Employer before commencing any works.
The Contractor shall supply all instruments, apparatus, materials and labour for
testing. Any retesting shall not be an extra charge to the Contract.
All instruments used for testing of the installation shall be fully calibrated and have
current calibration certificates, which shall be made available for inspection by the
Purchaser on request.
1.10.4 Earthing Tests
Resistance tests shall be made between the general mass of earth and the earth
electrode(s) and/or substation earth system.
An earth loop test shall be carried out between each phase of the supply and the
installation main earth point in accordance with the IEE Regulations 16th Edition,
BS 7671.
1.10.5 Test Results
Three copies of all test certificates, log sheets, performance curves, etc, relating to
the tests at manufacturer's works shall be sent to the Purchaser at the conclusion
of each test. No item shall be despatched to site before the Purchaser has in
writing agreed such certificates, etc.
In addition to the above tests, test certificates shall be provided as required by the
Purchaser, to prove compliance of components and assemblies with the relevant
British Standards.
All necessary test equipment shall be provided. For the purpose of testing, each
switchboard/motor control centre shall be fully assembled, both electrically and
mechanically, into one composite unit. It shall not be acceptable to test the
15/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
switchboards in sections.
The Contractor shall hand to the Purchaser a copy of the results of all on-site tests,
the originals shall be included within the Maintenance Manuals.
1.11
TRAINING
The Contractor shall submit a training programme with his Tender which shall allow
for the training of the Employer's staff so that they may operate and maintain the
Plant in a competent manner in accordance with the Health and Safety at Work Act,
the Electricity at Work Act and other relevant statutory requirements.
A full training programme with details of syllabus shall be submitted for agreement
to the Purchaser and shall be implemented one month before handover of any
section of the Works. The Purchasers decision as to the adequacy of the training
shall be final.
1.12
SPARES
Spares shall be supplied in one or more compartmented boxes solidly constructed
in planed timber and having a hinged lockable lid with stay, carrying handles and a
permanent label to be agreed with the Purchaser.
16/16
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MECHANICAL (H&V) AND ELECTRICAL WORK

PLANT AND MATERIALS
General Design
Installation
Painting and Protection
1/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
2.1
MECHANICAL (H&V) AND ELECTRICAL WORKS

Materials and workmanship for building services (mechanical and electrical) and
external services shall be in accordance with the following specifications or as
otherwise detailed in the Specification.
Standard Specification (M&E) No.1 -
Electrical Installations
Standard Specification (M&E) No.3 -
Mechanical Installations
Standard Specification (M&E) No.100
Ventilation Installations
The above specifications are prepared by Department of the Environment,

Transport and Regions, Directorate of M&E Engineering Services and distributed
by the HMSO.
Where the term SO is used in the above specifications, this shall mean the
Purchaser.
Where there is any conflict between the requirements of this Specification and the,
general specifications for materials and workmanship referenced above, the
requirements of this Specification shall apply.
The above specification of mechanical and electrical service systems are intended
to indicate the minimum acceptable standards of materials and workmanship and
shall not override the specification given in the Particular Specification which
follows.
Any Local Authority requirements shall supersede the requirements of the above
specifications unless otherwise directed by the Purchaser.
2.2
PLANT AND MATERIALS
2.2.1
General Design
All component parts of the Plant shall be manufactured to allow complete
interchangeability of similar parts.
The general design of the Plant and particularly that of contacts and other wearing
parts shall be governed by the need for long periods of operational service without
frequent maintenance and attention being necessary.
2/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
All equipment and plant shall be suitably arranged to enable safe access for
operation and maintenance.
Except as otherwise prescribed or agreed, all apparatus and components thereof
which comprise the Works shall be of tried and proved design and construction.
Holding-down bolts and fixings for securing the plant to structural steelwork or the
like shall be of the clamp pattern such as do not require the steelwork to be drilled.
Small fixing screws and other small parts shall be of non-ferrous metal and shall
engage in white-metal, plastic or equal agreed non-corrodible plugs.
All details, except as otherwise specifically agreed, shall be hot dipped galvanised.
The Mechanical & Electrical equipment and all components thereof shall be rated
for continuous service at the specified duties under the prevailing atmospheric and
operational conditions on site.
The Mechanical & Electrical Equipment shall be of such material or shall have such
surface protection, painting and finish as will afford satisfactory protection against
atmospheric corrosion under the prevailing conditions and under those transient
conditions which may occur from time to time, without frequent maintenance
painting or other treatment being necessary.
The electrical installation shall comply with the requirements of the General
Electrical Specification.
Anti-vibration mounts to be utilised where appropriate, based on technical advice
from the
manufacturers of the components.
2.2.2
2.2.3
Installation
i)
The Mechanical and Electrical Components shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.
ii)
Before starting to install the equipment, the Contractor shall satisfy himself
that all constructional details provided for the accommodation or fixing of
the equipment are correct according to the Drawings.
iii)
The equipment shall be set true and level on the as-constructed surface.
Painting and Protection
3/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
With the exception of bright machined surfaces, the Contractor shall apply to all
steelwork and machinery two coats of paint of agreed quality and colour at Works
and touch up on site all damage to the paint finish.
Prior to despatch from Works, all bright surfaces and decorative finishes shall be
adequately protected against subsequent deterioration or damage.
The Contractor shall ensure adequate protection for all materials against
deterioration or damage on site and removal of this protection will not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities for protection.
4/4
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL SERVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL
EXTERNAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR HEATING AND
VENTILATION SYSTEMS
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Internal Design Temperatures
Heating
Mechanical Ventilation
Domestic Water Services
Automatic Controls
SITE WATER MAIN
FIRE HYDRANTS
FIRE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS
General
Scope
1/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
TITLE: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MECHANICAL SERVICES
3.1
GENERAL
The particular requirements for the mechanical building services which include but
are not limited to central heating, mechanical ventilation, domestic hot and cold
water, connection to site water mains, fuel oil storage and distribution, fire fighting
and fire prevention are considered below and should be read in conjunction with
the General Specification and Drawings
3.2
EXTERNAL DESIGN PARAMETERS FOR HEATING AND VENTILATION

SYSTEMS
For all buildings, the winter external conditions for the design of heating and
ventilation systems shall be taken as - 4C DB 100% RH.
3.3
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The design considerations provided herein for the various buildings are to be taken
as a guide only as the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the complete design,
installation and commissioning of all of the mechanical building services. The
requirements shall be read in conjunction with Mechanical and Electrical Room
Data Sheets appended to the Scope of Works.
3.3.1
Internal Design Temperatures

The winter minimum and summer maximum internal design temperatures are given
in the Room Data Sheets.
3.3.2
Heating
Steel panel radiators shall be installed in all rooms, corridors, stairways, etc. to be
heated and which are naturally ventilated.
Steel panel radiators sized to offset the fabric losses only, shall be installed in all
rooms, corridors, etc. which are plenum ventilated by air at a constant discharge
temperature but which does not also offset the fabric losses.
Low level, floor supported convector style radiators shall be installed below full
height perimeter glazing.
2/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
All radiator circuits shall be designed for a weather compensated LPHW system
with a 3 port mixing valve.
3.3.3
Mechanical Ventilation
All ventilation plant and equipment must be suitable for a marine environment with
adequate protection against corrosion.
Plenum supply and/or extract ventilation systems shall be provided as specified on
the Room Data Sheets. This shall generally include the following areas:Toilets
Lift motor rooms and lift shafts
Internal rooms and corridors
Stores, cleaners and lobbies
Entrance Hall
Communications
The toilet areas shall be provided with minimum 10 air changes per hour extract
using twin fan units with autochangeover upon duty fan failure plus plenum supply
air at 80% maximum of the extract rate.
Internal stores shall be provided with mechanical extract ventilation equivalent to 2
air changes per hour and Cleaners rooms equivalent to 4 air changes per hour. To
provide make up air to these rooms, the doors shall be undercut by a minimum of
20mm from finished floor (with an allowance for any carpets in adjacent areas).
Internal offices, etc, shall be provided with mechanical supply and extract
ventilation equivalent to 10 litre/sec per person subject to a minimum air change
rate of 4 per hour.
Rooms, corridors, etc, with external opening windows shall be designed for natural
ventilation unless the opening window area is insufficient for natural ventilation,
when mechanical ventilation shall be provided.
Other than in toilet areas, for economy of operation, all ducted supply and extract
ventilation systems shall be arranged for a modulated fresh air/recirculation air mix
with motorised dampers.
The control of the fresh air/recirculation air mix shall be by temperature detectors in
the supply and extract ducts to vary the fresh air quantity to obtain free 'cooling' or
'heating' subject to the minimum fresh air requirement due to the occupancy.
The winter design shall be based on a fresh air supply equivalent to 10 litre/sec per
person for the maximum occupancy. However, the design supply air volume with
3/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
recirculation into the individual spaces must be sufficient to provide good air
distribution and space temperature over the whole of the area served and may be
in excess of the design fresh air volume.
The Contractor shall allow for gloss painting the exposed ventilation ductwork and
supplying the grilles and diffusers factory-finished to an agreed colour. All exposed
ductwork shall be agreed with the Purchaser.
Air handling units shall include a blank section for the possible future addition of a
DX cooling coil with eliminator plates.
Lift and escalator motor rooms shall be provided with mechanical ventilation to the
manufacturer's requirements.
Lift shaft ventilation shall be provided in accordance with BS 5655 Part 6, ducted to
outside the building.
3.3.4
Domestic Water Services

The BS 2871 Part 1 Table X copper domestic water services shall be designed in
accordance with BS 6700 to serve all draw-offs in the building. Isolation valves and
drain cocks shall be provided at all water entry points to the building and servicing
ball type valves are to be fitted to the hot and cold water connections to each
sanitary fitting.
Domestic hot water shall be supplied at 65C maximum from copper storage
calorifiers with a pumped secondary circulation.
The hot water supply to the hand basins shall be reduced in temperature from the
65C storage temperature to 43C max. via local or group blending valves.
Mains cold water is to be run to supply all water storage cisterns, drinking water
points, vending machines, kitchens, mess sinks, wash down hose points, etc.
Automatic flushing cisterns shall be fitted with an automatic economy valve to shut
off the cisterns during periods when the toilets are not being used.
The domestic water installation shall comply with the relevant clauses of the current
Model Water Byelaws.
In addition to branch isolating valves on stopcocks, servicing valves shall be

installed on the water connections local to each sanitary fitting.
3.3.5
Automatic Controls
4/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
Wall or floor mounted control panels are to be provided in the plant room to contain
all selector switches, motor starters, relays, automatic temperature controls, etc. to
suit the plant being controlled. The panel shall be fitted with a Caradon-Trend (or
equal) BMS controller complete with front of panel display unit.
Each panel is to incorporate a panel alarm integrator to send a volt free signal hard
wired to the Control Room to give indication that a fault is present on the particular
panel.
3.4
SITE WATER MAIN

The Contractor shall arrange to provide the water supply for the site including a
new water meter with valved bypass for Fire Brigade use.
The new MDPE main shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturers
recommendations, the National Joint Utilities Group publication 'Recommended
Positioning of Utilities' Mains and Plant for New Works', and any particular
requirements of the Water Company.
The Contractor shall undertake all trenching, back filling, resurfacing and the
formation of any valve boxes associated with the new water main.
In addition to the isolating stopcock and draincock located at the water main entry
within the buildings, a stopcock in a valve box shall be installed external to the
buildings.
3.5
FIRE HYDRANTS
The Contractor shall supply and install new fire hydrants each connected to a
100mm bore branch pipe off the site new water main.
The Contractor shall form hydrant access chambers with heavy duty grade covers
to meet the requirements of the Fire Service.
3.6
FIRE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS
3.6.1
General
This section describes the requirements for the design and installation of Fire
Engineering Systems. The Contractor shall ensure the integration of the fire
5/6
Onyx South Downs
EFW Contract
engineering systems with other building services such as fire/smoke detection

systems, HVAC systems and condition monitoring systems. The Contractor shall
ensure that fire engineering systems comply with the requirements of the local Fire
Prevention Officer.
The design and installation of all Fire Engineering Systems shall be undertaken by
a specialist company qualified to undertake this class of work.
3.6.2
Scope
The Contractor shall supply and install all Fire Engineering Systems specifically
required by the Local Fire Prevention Officer, these may include such systems as:-
Smoke control/clearance within the occupied areas including roof located

powered ventilators, low level controlled air inlets, high level fire zone
separation screening, etc.
Smoke control/clearance within the Entrance Hall and to include
mechanical smoke extract low level air inlet louvres and zone control, etc.
Smoke control using powered roof ventilators at the head of internal Fire
Escape/Exit Routes.
Static fire appliances, extinguishers, fire blankets, etc. as may be necessary

in Plant Rooms, Electrical Rooms, Kitchens and other designated areas.
Firemans control panel with isolation/control over air handling and heating
plant etc., and interfacing with the fire alarm system.
-
Fire only or motorised smoke/fire dampers (with damper control panel) in

air distribution ducts where passing through fire zone walls or floors.
Status monitoring of fire systems using volt free contacts in control panels
and interfacing with the condition monitoring system.
6/6

Construction Competition Specification

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Construction Competition Specification

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CONFORMED COPY

OF THE PRINCIPAL CONTRACT DATED 31ST MARCH 2003

Performance and Operation Requirements

Specification Civil Engineering and Building Specification

ELECTRICITY and HEAT RECOVERY FACILITY

EAST SUSSEX AND BRIGHTON & HOVE CITY COUNCIL

Detailed Technical Requirements

Architectural Concept and Drawings

Design and Construction

Appendix A Weighbridge SpecificationAppendix B

Newhaven, North Quay 1 x 28 tonnes per hour

The Plant will form part of an integrated waste management scheme.

Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations

SCOPE OF WORK AND SERVICES SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

derived prior to Takeover.

rubble and materials rejected from rubble sorting

waste liquids or bulk liquids from industrial processes or commercial premises

The Plant shall meet the following design conditions:

Newhaven North Quay

Export/Import connection and voltage

33kV connection provided by Purchaser.

Air Condenser at 10C reference temperature

-boiler water feed and condensate pumps

DETAILED TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The Purchaser includes Architectural Concept Drawings prepared by Purchasers Consultant

ACCESS, TIPPING AND WASTE HANDLING FACILITIES

The following vehicular access shall be provided to the Plant:

Tipping hall for waste deliveries

Bottom Ash and FGT Residue collection vehicles

Vehicle access for maintenance purposes

Vehicle access for reagent and consumables deliveries

Vehicle access to staff parking areas

Allocated parking spaces for 2 Articulated Trailers

Weighbridge and weighing software

Travelling Crane and Grab

connected to the DCS.

COMBUSTION PROCESS, BOILER AND HP STEAM PIPEWORK

Heat recovery shall be achieved by means of an integral water tube boiler.

Steam and Feedwater Pipework

STEAM TURBINE, GENERATOR AND ASSOCIATED STEAM SYSTEMS

Associated Steam Systems

Condensers and associated pipework

Water Treatment and Makeup Facilities

Boiler water treatment plant

Boiler feedwater dosing package

FLUE GAS TREATMENT EQUIPMENT, ASH AND METAL SEPARATION

FLUE GAS TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

a gas scrubber (as an option)

NOx reduction system

second preparation tank.

Bottom Ash, FGT Residue and Metals Separation Handling

Bottom Ash and Metal Separation

FGT residue Silo and Bagging System

Induced Draught Fan

disconnectors are capable of switching the capacitive current of associated connections

The ID fans shall be controlled by variable speed drives.

Form 4 type 3 or Form 3b Type 2 construction

fault conditions to be within CCITT requirements.

accordance with the IEE Regulations.

The Contractor shall supply electrical cables as follows:

- All other cables shall be PVC insulated armoured cables to BS 5467

2.6.11 415V AC System

2.6.12 Welding and Small Power

25 V 1 phase 50 Hz 110 V 1 phase 50 Hz 230 V 1 phase 50 Hz 415 V 1 phase 50 Hz -